DDS CAD Manual

Introduction
Foreword
Strategies for handling projects

Dear reader,
Thank you for taking the decision to use DDS-CAD in your business. We
have created this online manual to help you get started. It is an important
part of what we provide to you and we are therefore constantly developing
it (just like our software).
If you have any questions about the topics addressed in the manual, please
refer to our "History/changes" documentation via the "Help" menu in DDS-
CAD or contact our support people.
If you have a software maintenance agreement with us, you will receive our
regular online updates. This automatically includes an updated version of
the manual. As a user without a software maintenance agreement, you can
Basic functions
download the manual from our website
(www.dds-cad.com).
Yours sincerely,
Jens Ackermann
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions, configuration
configuration
DDS-CAD
1
Introduction
Foreword
DDS-CAD is more than drawing,

DDS-CAD is modelling
"Model ... image of an object or object region, in which the properties con-
sidered important are highlighted and aspects regarded as circumstantial are
disregarded. In this sense, a model is therefore a simplified illustration of re-
ality. It serves as a tool for describing reality and for forming characterising
ideas and forms the basis for predicting future behaviour of the region de-
picted." (Brockhaus encyclopaedia, multimedial premium, 2008)
Being up-to-date is the most important requirement for the documentation of techni-
cal building services. The complexity of a system creates particular challenges and
the respective section in the life cycle of the facility demands the use of a document
in its own way: In the planning phase it is necessary to develop alternative solutions,
Basic functions
and to compare these to each other. Realisation is not without alterations and man-
agement may also result in additions, inspections and repairs. Documentation is al-
ways the source of information, the medium of communication and the basis for ac-
tions.
The use of virtual models therefore appears to make sense: a model evolves dy-
namically with the project. It accompanies the system even after its construction,
makes it possible to simulate subsequent changes and disturbing influences and
Adjustments, extensions, configuration
simplifies troubleshooting. The individual document is always a derivation from the

model.
Data Design System has been committed to the model way of thinking for more than
25 years. During this time, our product, DDS-CAD has evolved into a high-
performance product with complex structures and interfaces for the widest variety of
industry standard software systems.
This manual is designed to help you integrate DDS-CAD in your day-to-day work. We
1
continuously update it with our online updates . It is freely available from our website
(www.dds-cad.com).
Data Design System

Ascheberg, September 2012
1
You will receive these automatically if you have signed a software maintenance agreement with us.
Index
2
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Foreword
Notes on the structure of this manual

This manual is intended for users with no practical experience with DDS-CAD. It is
divided into roughly four subject areas:
Part I introduces you to the DDS-CAD product philosophy. This section explains the
structure of the user interface and project management.
Part II explains the strategies for handling projects with DDS-CAD. It begins with edit-
ing the floor plan, the building model, the building services model and their calcula-
tion and evaluation.
Part III contains a description of the DDS basic functions, such as working with geo-
metric shapes, text, auxiliary and editing functions, etc.
Part IV describes ways to configure, expand and adjust the system.
The descriptions use symbols to denote the input controls:
Input elements
Basic functions
Key (keyboard)
Left mouse button
Middle mouse button (scroll wheel)
Right mouse button
Controls in dialogue boxes

OK Button
Selection (drop-down, list box)
configuration
Input Input field for values and text
configuration
Display Display field for values and text
Radio button
Checkbox
Procedures are described as instructions with a description of the effect, e.g.:

extensions,
 Click OK . The function is stopped.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
3
Introduction
Contents
PART I – INTRODUCTION 13
1 THE MODEL – THE CORE OF THE DDS PHILOSOPHY 15
2 AN INTRODUCTION TO DDS-CAD 18
2.1 Starting the program 18
2.2 Creating and managing projects 18
2.2.1 Project setup and the structure of the drawings list 18
2.2.2 Using the list of drawings in project management 21
2.2.3 Notes on the root directory for projects 23
2.2.4 Backup and Archiving 24
2.2.5 Import models from external projects 27
2.3 At the drawing level 28
2.3.1 The user interface 28
2.3.2 The internal structure of a DDS drawing 29
PART II – STRATEGIES FOR HANDLING PROJECTS 31
3 IMPORTING EXTERNAL DATA 35

Basic functions
3.1 Notes on file formats 36

3.1.1 DWG and DXF 36
3.1.2 Portable Document Format (*.PDF) 36
3.1.3 Raster image (*.BMP; *.GIF; *.JPG; *.PNG; *.TIF; *.WMF) 36
3.2 The general import process 37
3.2.1 Copying files to the project 37
3.2.2 Importing 38
3.3 Notes on working with floor plans 38
3.3.1 Requirements for imported floor plans 38
3.3.2 Checking and correcting the scale ratio 41

3.3.3 Accurate placement of the storeys 44
3.3.4 Notes on importing altered plans 46
3.4 Imported files when exporting the model 48
4 BUILDING MODEL 51
4.1 Components and structural design 52
4.2 Requirements for the building model 53
4.2.1 Levels of detail according to the task at hand 53
4.2.2 Requirements due to the heat load calculation 54
4.2.3 Division into zones for separate calculations 54
4.3 Building model through graphical entry 55
4.3.1 General procedure 55
4.3.2 Capturing a region 56
4.3.3 Entering rooms 58
4.3.4 Doors and windows 62
4.3.5 Suspended ceiling 64
4.3.6 Room text/room stamp 65
4.3.7 Roof areas and dormers 66
4.3.8 Skylights and roof sections 71
4.3.9 Gutters 72
Index
4
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Contents
4.3.10 Downpipe 72
4.3.11 Roof structures 74

4.3.12 Recesses, openings 74
4.4 Edit building model 76
4.4.1 Structural units settings 76
4.4.2 Create usage units from multiple rooms (zones) 81
4.4.3 Editing the floor plan and room geometry 82
4.5 Compiling the building model 85
5 VENTILATION SYSTEMS 86
5.1 Entering and calculating the volume flows 87
5.1.1 Checking and correcting building data 87
5.1.2 Check and correct room data 88
5.1.3 controlled ventilation of residential buildings 88
5.2 Controlled ventilation 91
5.2.1 Notes on the building model 91
5.2.2 Create zones, define usage units 92
5.2.3 Select ventilation system 92
5.2.4 Optimize and balance air flows 93
5.2.5 Insert air terminals according to air flow requirements 95
Basic functions
5.2.6 Verify and balance air terminal capacity 96
5.2.7 Print results 97
5.3 Ventilation system components 97
5.3.1 Air handling unit 97
5.3.2 Air terminals 98
5.3.3 Load object for simulating sub-networks/consumers 99
6 HEAT LOAD CALCULATION 101

6.1 General principles 101
6.1.1 Heat load calculation according to DIN EN 12831 101
configuration
6.1.2 Processing effort according to the data available 102
configuration
6.2 Checking and correcting building data 103
6.2.1 Geographical and meteorological data 103
6.2.2 Configuring the heat load calculation 104
6.3 Checking and correcting room data 106
6.3.1 General settings 106
extensions,
6.3.2 Notes on the ventilation heat loss ΦV 107

extensions,
6.3.3 Notes on unheated rooms – the factor bu 111

6.3.4 Notes on rooms spanning several storeys 112
6.3.5 Note on heigh ceilings – the correction factor fH,i 113
6.3.6 Global settings for all rooms 113
6.4 Checking and correcting components 115
Adjustments,
6.4.1 Terms and connections 115

Adjustments,
6.4.2 The heat transfer coefficient (U-value) 118

6.4.3 Notes on the position code (reverse of the component) 124
6.4.4 Thermal bridges 129
6.5 Performing calculations and printing results 130
7 HEATING AND SANITARY FACILITIES 132

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
5
Introduction
Contents
7.1 Heating and sanitation objects 132

7.1.1 General overview 132
7.1.2 Load objects for simulating sub-networks/consumers 133

7.2 Dividing the heat load into heating facilities 135
7.2.1 Specifying the building standard and adjusting a storey 136
7.2.2 Adjusting a single room 137
7.3 Designing underfloor heating 137
7.3.1 Introduction 137
7.3.2 Managing the heating regions and distributor 139
7.3.3 Selecting the manufacturer and system 141
7.3.4 Select and insert the manifold 142
7.3.5 Heating regions 143
7.3.6 Calculate and optimize the system 151
7.3.7 Print results 157
7.3.8 Labelling heating regions 158
7.4 Designing radiators 159
7.4.2 Radiators 160
7.4.3 Managing the radiators in the Building Information dialogue 161
7.4.4 Install and dimension radiator automatically 164
7.4.5 Calculated results of the radiator calculation 167
Basic functions
8 PIPES AND VENTILATION DUCTS 168

8.1.1 Introduction and terms 168
8.1.2 Settings in the starting point 168
8.1.3 Display options 173
8.2 Strategies and concepts for designing the network 175
8.2.1 General notes 175
8.2.2 Notes on potable water systems (loops) 177
8.2.3 Notes on ventilation systems 177
8.3 Drawing a pipeline manually 179

8.3.1 Starting point and direction of the first segment 180
8.3.2 Drawing the pipeline route 189
8.3.3 The last segment, position and type of the endpoint 193
8.4 Help functions for constructing a network 195
8.4.1 Creating parallel pipes 195
8.4.2 The copy function for sub-sections 196
8.4.3 Incorporating free sub-sections into the overall network 200
8.4.4 Connecting objects automatically 201
8.5 Fixtures and fittings in pipes 211
8.5.1 Features common to all pipeline objects 211
8.5.2 Notes on the various pipeline objects 213
8.5.3 Manual installation of pipeline objects 214
8.6 Moulded parts and devices in the ventilation duct 216
8.6.1 Moulded parts in the ventilation duct 216
8.6.2 Devices in the ventilation duct 217
8.7 Segments in the pipeline route 218
8.7.1 Changing the material or colour in the pipeline route 218
8.7.2 Changing insulation status and linetype 219
Index
6
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Contents
8.8 Editing pipes and ventilation ducts 221

8.8.1 Selection functions for lines and sub-sections 221

8.8.2 Changing the pipeline route 222
8.8.3 Editing moulded parts and fixtures 227
9 NETWORK CALCULATIONS 228

9.1 Introduction and general procedure 228
9.2 Labelling calculation points 228
9.3 Pipe network calculation in the heating pipe network 231
9.3.2 Configuring the calculation 232
9.3.3 Enabling the calculation and analysing the network 233
9.3.4 Working with the pipe network table 234
9.3.5 Calculated results 237
9.4 Potable water system calculation 238
9.4.2 Tab „Options“ - Configuring the calculation 239
9.4.3 Working with the pipe network table 242
9.4.4 Calculation results 245
Basic functions
9.5 Pressure loss calculation in the ventilation system 246
9.5.2 The "Pressure loss calculation" dialogue box 246
10 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHBOARDS 251

10.1 Purpose and functions of the distribution board 251
10.2 The distribution board as an object 253
10.3 The distribution board as a database – the circuit table 254
10.3.1 Content and functions 254
10.3.2 Customising circuit table layout 258
configuration
10.3.3 Working with the circuit table 259
configuration
10.3.4 Reorganising a distribution board 261
10.4 Notes on the high-voltage distribution board 270
10.4.2 Configure sub distributor 270
10.4.3 Configure main distributor 274
10.4.4 Connect sub distributor to the main distributor 274
extensions,
10.4.5 Retrieving the energy balance from sub distributors 275

extensions,
10.4.6 The relationship of energy balance (graphically) 276

10.4.7 Sizing the cable dimension (final circuits) 277
10.5 Notes on data distribution boards 278
10.6 Notes on other low-voltage current distribution boards 280
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
11 INSTALLATION SYSTEMS 282

11.1.1 Introduction and terms 282
11.1.2 Settings in the starting point 283
11.1.3 Display options 285
11.2 Drawing a pipeline manually 287
11.2.1 Starting point and direction of the first segment 288
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
7
Introduction
Contents
11.2.2 Drawing the ladder route 296

11.2.3 Concluding an installation system 299
11.3 Auxiliary functions for constructing a network 301

11.3.1 The copy function for sub-sections 301
11.3.2 Incorporating free sub-sections into the overall network 305
11.4 Components in the installation system 306
11.4.1 Notes on the various pipeline objects 306
11.4.2 Manual installation of pipeline objects 308
11.5 Segments in the pipeline route 309
11.5.1 Changing the material or colour in the pipeline route 309
11.5.2 Changing the linetype 310
11.6 Editing installation systems 312
11.6.1 Selection functions for lines and sub-sections 312
11.6.2 Changing the pipeline route 313
11.6.3 Editing moulded parts 318
12 GENERAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 319

12.1 Introduction 319
12.2 Lighting systems 320
Basic functions
12.2.1 Fluorescent and incandescent lamps 321

12.2.2 Support systems and light rails 322
12.2.3 Installation in a suspended ceiling (single object) 323
12.2.4 Lighting calculation using the efficiency method 324
12.2.5 Lighting calculation with DIALux or Relux 329
12.3 Building management systems 332
12.3.1 Data exchange between DDS-CAD and ETS (KNX) 332
12.3.2 Data exchange between DDS-CAD and ELVIS 336
12.4 Telecommunications and information technology systems 340
12.4.1 Special features of data equipment 341
12.4.2 Special features of fire alarm systems 343

12.4.3 Numbering fire alarms 344
12.5 Cables, wires, circuit labels 345
12.5.2 Methods of 346
12.5.3 Labelling by connecting lines (correct) 349
12.5.4 Drawing the cable harnesses 350
12.5.5 Drawing a cable 352
12.5.6 Installation spanning several storeys 354
13 DISTRIBUTION BOARD DOCUMENTATION 359

13.1 Creating a drawing and enabling a distribution board 359
13.2 Managing sheetsand navigating between them 360
13.2.1 The sheet list 360
13.2.2 Navigating between sheets 361
13.2.3 Adding a sheet 361
13.3 Drawing circuits automatically 362
13.3.1 Organising sheet divisions 362
13.3.2 Specifying the start position before drawing 363
13.4 Drawing manually 364
Index
8
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Contents
13.4.1 Draw components 364

13.4.2 Drawing terminals 365

13.5 Navigating between the circuit and the sheet 366
13.5.1 From the drawn circuit to the circuit table 366
13.5.2 From the circuit table to the drawn circuit 367
14 EMERGENCY AND EVACUATION ROUTES 368
15 ANALYSING – PRINTING – EXPORTING 369

15.1 Working with part drawings (details) 370
15.1.1 Dividing sheet with subframes 370
15.1.2 Defining part drawings 371
15.1.3 Copying a part drawing definition 372
15.1.4 Managing part drawings 372
15.2 Working with sections (wall views) 373
15.2.1 Defining and editing a section 373
15.2.2 Managing sections 376
15.3 Working with print layouts 376
15.3.1 Creating a new print layout 376
15.3.2 The user interface in the print layout 377
Basic functions
15.3.3 Inserting a model/part drawing/section 378
15.3.4 Inserting sheets, title fields and legends 378
15.3.5 Filling out the title field 379
15.4 Printing a drawing and producing a pdf file 381
15.4.1 Calling the functions 381
15.5 Part list 382
15.5.1 Creating the part list 382
15.5.2 Output as configured report 383
15.5.3 Absolute quantity vs. comparing two part lists 389
configuration
PART III – REFERENCE TO THE DDS BASIC FUNCTIONS 390
configuration
16 GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND TOOLS 391
16.1 Coordinate system 391
16.2 Grid 392
extensions,
16.2.1 Snapping the grid at a point 393
extensions,
16.2.2 Defining distances between the grid points 394

16.2.3 Rotating the grid and coordinate plane 395
16.3 Snap options in the toolbox 397
16.3.1 Snap grid 397
16.3.2 Surface mode 398
Adjustments,
16.3.3 Automatic rotation while holding the Ctrl key 400

Adjustments,
16.3.4 Snap points 400

16.3.5 Snap object 401
16.4 Views and perspectives 402
16.4.1 Enabling/disabling views 402
16.4.2 Navigation in plan view, front/side view, isometric 403
16.4.3 Navigation in the "camera" view 404
16.5 Working with layers 405
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
9
Introduction
Contents
17 OBJECTS – BUILDING BLOCKS OF THE MODEL 408

17.1 General properties 408

17.1.1 Origin of symbolic representation of objects (ELP) 408
17.1.2 Origin of symbolic representation of objects (plumbing and heating) 410
17.1.3 The position of the object in the DDS model 411
17.1.4 Colour, layer and pen assignment of an object 412
17.1.5 Links to external information 413
17.2 Working with objects (dynamic symbol) 414
17.2.1 Preliminary remarks 414
17.2.2 Symbol at the cursor 416
17.2.3 Calibrating from cursor position 419
17.2.4 Calibrate from last point 424
17.2.5 Adjust installation height 428
17.3 Working with object groups 430
17.3.2 Inserting objects on a surface 431
17.3.3 Multiple objects on one line 439
17.3.4 Editing an object group 443
18 DRAWING AND LABELLING 444

Basic functions
18.1 Polylines and asymmetric polygons 445

18.1.1 Common features of the functions 445
18.1.2 Overview of the functions 446
18.1.3 Defining the starting point of the polyline 448
18.1.4 Draw polyline freely 452
18.1.5 Construct polyline horizontally 456
18.1.6 Changes in height in the polyline 461
18.1.7 End polyline, close contour 470
18.1.8 Edit polyline 472
18.2 Symmetrical shapes 475
18.2.1 Circle 476

18.2.2 Arc 477
18.2.3 Cylinder 478
18.2.4 Cone (cone/truncated cone) 479
18.2.5 Rectangle 480
18.2.6 Cuboid 481
18.2.7 Regular polygon 482
18.2.8 Pyramid 483
18.2.9 Prism 484
18.2.10 Truncated pyramid (polyhedron) 486
18.2.11 Ball 488
18.2.12 Ellipse 489
18.2.13 Elliptic arc 490
18.2.14 Network 491
18.3 Working with auxiliary geometries 492
18.3.1 Auxiliary geometry on an active point 492
18.3.2 Help geometry on active circle/arc 496
18.3.3 Help geometry on active line 497
18.3.4 Delete help geometry 500
18.4 Working with text and labels 501
18.4.1 Symbol text on objects, pipelines and in rooms 501
18.4.2 Position marker (on objects) 507
Index
10
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Contents
18.4.3 Free text 510

18.4.4 Move text and labels 511

18.5 Working with the dimension type 512
18.5.1 Terms and general connections 512
18.5.2 General application 514
18.5.3 Oblique dimension type 515
18.5.4 The properties of the dimension type 517
19 GENERAL EDITING FUNCTIONS 518

19.1 Copy, delete, move and edit objects 518
19.1.2 Select objects for editing 519
19.1.3 Remove selections 520
19.1.4 Editing functions for selected objects 521
19.2 Undo/restore operation 523
19.3 The "Find and Edit Objects” function 524
19.3.1 Introduction and application 524
19.3.2 Filter by template of a reference object 525
19.3.3 Manually define properties of the search filter 526
Basic functions
19.4 The "Move Area” (Move region) function 526
20 WORKING IN THE DWG/DXF EDITOR 529

20.1 The "DWG/DXF Editor" action area 529
20.1.1 On editing the floor plan: Starting from the DDS model 529
20.1.2 To transfer a symbol: Starting from the program level 530
20.2 Strategies for editing DWG/DXF files 531
20.2.1 Isolate detail of interest 531
20.2.2 Adjust layer structures to the DDS model 533
20.2.3 Edit file properties 534
configuration
20.2.4 Define the insertion point (Origo) – Shift zero point 535
configuration
20.3 Transfer DWG/DXF objects to the DDS model 536
20.3.2 Create link to individual item 537
20.3.3 Link with a central management function 539
20.3.4 Save object mapping and transfer to the DDS model 540
20.3.5 Correcting the position of the objects in the DDS model 541
extensions,
20.3.6 Hide original 541

extensions,
20.3.7 Notes on the parts list 543

20.4 Apply changes – Save 544
PART IV – ADJUSTMENTS 545

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
21 WORKING WITH THE PRODUCT DATABASE 546

21.1 Basic relationships 546
21.1.1 The relationship between item and symbol 546
21.1.2 Data types and hierarchy of the data storage 547
21.1.3 Application of the hierarchy, search mechanisms 548
21.2 The product database in action 549
21.2.1 Accessing the product database 549
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
11
Introduction
Contents
21.2.2 Item search 550

21.2.3 Expand product database – Create new item 551
21.2.4 Working with the manufacturer database (electrical) 556

21.2.5 Working with manufacturer databases (heating) 557
22 SYMBOL CREATION 558

22.1 Develop DDS symbols 558
22.1.2 Notes on the title field 561
22.1.3 Functions and commands for editing symbols 566
22.1.4 Notes on installation and labelling symbols 574
22.2 Drawing a DDS symbol (HCS) 576
22.2.1 Naming convention for DDS symbols, create symbol (E) 577
22.2.2 Naming convention for DDS symbols, create symbol (E) 579
22.2.3 Find and load master copy in the symbol catalogue (E) 581
22.2.4 General functions of symbol editing 583
22.3 Transferring a symbol from a DWG/DXF file 588
22.3.1 Export symbol to CFI 588
22.3.2 Apply CFI file as a symbol 589
22.4 Apply 3DS file as a symbol 589
Basic functions
22.5 Creating a logo 590

22.5.1 Logo in drawings 590
22.5.2 Logo in reports, lists and logs 593
22.6 Creating a legend 594
22.7 Creating an automatic title field 597
22.7.1 Creating a title field from a template 597
22.7.2 ((Manually designing and editing a title field)) Error! Bookmark not defined.
22.7.3 The title field in the product database 601
23 CUSTOM CIRCUIT LAYOUTS 602

23.1 Relationships and terms 603

23.1.1 Access to customised circuit layouts 603
23.1.2 System layout 604
23.1.3 Custom layout 604
23.1.4 Variant 604
23.1.5 Types (of a variant) 605
23.2 Start editing mode 607
23.3 The layout manager 608
23.4 The user interface in editing mode 608
23.5 Configuring a circuit 610
23.6 Drawing in editing mode 611
23.6.1 Symbols for the equipment 611
23.6.2 Wiring lines and wiring points 611
23.6.3 Space requirement – start position of the next circuit 614
23.7 Exiting the editing mode 615
23.8 Apply variants to several circuits 616
Index
12
DDS-CAD
DDS-CAD
13
Part I – Introduction
Introduction
Index
Index Adjustments,
Adjustments,extensions, configuration
extensions, configuration Basic functions Strategies for handling projects Introduction
Introduction
Erro The model – the core of the DDS philosophy

r!
Product database Item: Lamp

Part number Symbol number El. output
Description Dimensions Bulb

Lamps,
Lamps, outlets,
distribution boards,
cables, fuses, ... Position
X co-ordinate Z co-ordinate
Y co-ordinate Rotation
Drawing operation
Construct
Object: Lamp
Position, location
Item
Basic functions
Distribution board
Text configuration
Object Colour, line
Database
Part list, project "Example"

Item no. Item name Quantity UV01.1 UV01.1
1x36W 1x36W
Distributions
050502 AP Distribution board 24 TE 1 pc. UV01

UV01.1 UV01.1
Cables and lines 1x36W 1x36W
010112 PVC sheathed cable NYM 3x1.5 18.39m UV01.2
UV01.2 UV01.1
Switching and connection devices
026102 EB Ecoline series switch 1 pc.
040131 UP Schuko outlet, single 2 pc. Installation plan
Fluorescent lamps
081006 LS lamp, free beaming 1x36W 4 pc.
F1 F2
Calculations
K1
Q1
Feed Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Circuit diagram
Index
14
DDS-CAD
Introduction
The model – the core of the DDS philosophy Erro
r!
1 The model – the core of the DDS philosophy

"Model … the building blocks of models are objects that are created by only
slight abstraction processes. In the user-friendly ideal case, objects are
matched to the originals so that (ideally) they are perceived, recognised and
processed by the human consciousness."
(Brockhaus encyclopaedia, multimedial premium, 2008)
In the foreword the development of three-dimensional virtual models was described

as the core concept of the DDS philosophy. But what does this mean, and how does
the model concept affect your day-to-day life?
Models consist of objects. When working with DDS-CAD, the use of virtual objects
that adhere to both graphical representational and reality-based properties is typical.
In other words, a virtual object is represented in the model by a symbol, but at the
same time refers to an actual object (e.g. a lamp). This is recorded and described in
the product database.
The item is a data record. It includes the item number, a description and the address-
ing for a symbol for its graphical representation. In addition, the article contains the
Basic functions
relevant technical parameters of the real object. These include – for example, for a
fluorescent lamp – the electric output, the number of bulbs and the physical dimen-
sions. DDS-CAD uses these parameters in its calculation routines and for properly
setting the symbol sizes.
The three-dimensional building model creates the environment for installing the ob-
jects. For example, the room geometry is used in the lighting calculation for the selec-
tion and design of the lamps. The objects are introduced into the model by automatic
and manual drawing operations, where the object is given position information (con-
sisting of coordinates). The building model also has an effect here. So for example,
the installation height of the lamps is affected by the ceiling height or by a suspended
configuration
ceiling.
configuration
The structures for supply and operation are also modelled: a distribution system is
defined and the symbol of its housing is placed in the model. At the same time, the
distribution board is a database in which the final circuits are developed. You select
the type of circuit and determine the connection values and DDS-CAD suggests
equipment with suitable rated values. DDS-CAD automatically calculates the power
extensions,
requirements of the distribution system, which are also referred to when constructing
extensions,
the main distribution board. You connect the objects to the supplying distribution
board via cables. As a result, the circuit information flows to the connected object and
appears as text information (circuit label). Step by step, the model of the system
emerges, from which all documents and reports can be derived when needed:
•
Adjustments,
Representations of the electrical installation

•
Adjustments,
Distribution board documentation

• Part lists
• Calculation logs
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
15
Introduction
Erro The model – the core of the DDS philosophy

r!
Product database Item: Radiator
Part number Symbol number Dimensions
Description Manufacturer Capacity

Radiator
Pipes Position
Valves X co-ordinate Z co-ordinate
...
Y co-ordinate Rotation
Drawing operation
Object: Radiator
DDS-CAD building model Position, location
Item
Label
Attributes
Basic functions
Drawing

Item no. Item name Quantity
Heating – Technical equipment

GF978A Gas boiler burner 15kW 1 pc.
Heating – Piping
SS0912 Copper pipes, rods 5m 18x1 12.50m
Calculations SS0913 Copper pipes, rods 5m 22x1 23.85m
Heating – Piping formed parts

BE1808 CU Elbow fitting 90° 18x1 10 pc.
BE1809 CU Elbow fitting 90° 22x1 18 pc
Radiators and accessories

HKV D10 Radiator valve DN10 4 pc.
HKV D10 Lock shield valve DN10 4 pc.
PK01512 Plan compact type 11 2 pc.
Index
16
DDS-CAD
Introduction
The model – the core of the DDS philosophy Erro
r!
The model – the core of the DDS philosophy

(plumbing and heating)
"Model … the building blocks of models are objects that are created by only
slight abstraction processes. In the user-friendly ideal case, objects are
matched to the originals so that (ideally) they are perceived, recognised and
processed by the human consciousness."
(Brockhaus encyclopaedia, multimedial premium, 2008)
In the foreword the development of three-dimensional virtual models was described

as the core concept of the DDS philosophy. But what does this mean, and how does
the model concept affect your day-to-day life?
Models consist of objects. When working with DDS-CAD, the use of virtual objects
that adhere to both graphical representational and reality-based properties is typical.
In other words, a virtual object is represented in the model by a symbol, but at the
same time refers to an actual object (e.g. a radiator). This is recorded and described
as an item in the product database.
Basic functions
The item is a data record. It includes the item number, a description and the address-
ing for a symbol for its graphical representation. In addition, the article contains the
relevant technical parameters of the real object. These include – for example, for a
radiator – the output and the dimensions. DDS-CAD uses these parameters in its
calculation routines and for properly setting the symbol sizes.
The three-dimensional building model creates the environment for installing the ob-
jects. You can use it to simulate the conditions of the real building and to model the
building services system. The objects are introduced into the model by automatic and
manual drawing operations, where the object is given position information (consisting
of coordinates). All input and calculated data are used continuously and processed
configuration
further internally. This principle can be explained using the heating system as an ex-
configuration
ample:
The structures of the building model are divided so that you can enter all data for the
heat load calculation according to DIN EN 12831. You enter the geographic location
and meteorological conditions for the building. You assign usage requirements for
the individual rooms and the physical properties for the components. DDS-CAD cal-
extensions,
culates the standard heat load of the individual rooms and the building. The results
extensions,
are used to calculate the underfloor heating and radiators. DDS-CAD designs the
heating surfaces according to the room-specific requirements and determines the
flow rates and pressure losses. These are used as input data by the pipe network
calculation.
Adjustments,
All results of this process are derived from the model:

Adjustments,
• Drawings on paper or in PDF or DWG/DXF format

• Part lists
• Printouts of the calculations in standardised forms
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
17
Introduction
Erro An introduction to DDS-CAD

r!
2 An introduction to DDS-CAD
2.1 Starting the program

Start DDS-CAD by double clicking on the DDS-CAD icon on your desktop. This will
take you to the project level. The list of drawings of the most recently edited project
will appear on the screen:
Basic functions
The first time the program is launched, it automatically opens the "Start" project. You
can use this project to try out and test the software. However, it is not suitable for ed-
iting your own projects. You will need to create and manage your own projects for
this purpose.
2.2 Creating and managing projects

2.2.1 Project setup and the structure of the drawings list
In terms of content, a project in DDS-CAD can be compared to a building. From a
technical point of view, it is a folder that stores all relevant data. These data include
the floor plans and facilities of the various storeys, schematics, detailed drawings,
parts lists and calculation logs. All data produced by DDS-CAD automatically end up
in the project folder. External data (such as floor plans that are sent to you) have to
be saved in the project folder manually (see 3.2.1, page 37).
A project is divided into several levels and is managed through the list of drawings.
Index
18
DDS-CAD
Introduction
An introduction to DDS-CAD Erro
r!

Project Menu...
(1)
(5)
(2) (3) (4)

2
The dialogue box is divided according to application types (1) . For each application
Basic functions
type, the drawings are listed along with the following information:
(2) Indicator that a drawing file exists

The entries marked by "+" denote that there is a drawing file available. If this symbol
is missing, it means the information has been created in the project, but a drawing file
has not yet been created.
(3) Name of the drawing file

The names of the drawing files are formed automati-
ppppGnnn.bim cally and consist of three components. The first four
characters are taken from the project name. The fifth
configuration
Projec Drawing number
character is a code digit that identifies the application
configuration
Application type:
1.... Architecture type. The last three characters form the drawing num-
6.... Electrical ber.
engineering
7.... Air
conditioning/ventilation
The drawing number helps you to organise the internal
8 structure of the project (see below). extensions,
(4) Drawing specific details

extensions,
For each drawing, you can enter text that is also used in the title field. Clicking Info
takes you to the input dialogue box. To manage the global project details, click Info
(5).
The internal structure of the project is organised (with the individual application types
Adjustments,
in mind) by assigning a three-digit drawing number (from 000 to 999). Several num-
Adjustments,
ber ranges are reserved within this spectrum for various purposes. DDS-CAD there-
fore uses the respective number to assign the drawing to one of the following scopes
of functions and provides the necessary functions in the user interface.
Meaning of the drawing numbers in DDS-CAD
2
The availability of the application types is controlled by the licence.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
19
Introduction

r!
000 … 099 For modelling the storeys in the respective application type. The user inter-
face includes the functions of the building model and the technical building
services for the respective application type. You can therefore develop a
building with a maximum of 100 storeys.
100 … 498 For the construction of other detailed and auxiliary drawings. You can only
use the technical building services functions of the respective application
type.
499 For the compilation of all storeys into a building.
500 … 899 This range of numbers is only relevant to the electrical engineering applica-
tion type and serves as the distribution board documentation. In each draw-
ing, you can show the internal structure of a distribution board. The user
interface includes functions for managing and building up the different
sheets.
900 … 999 For the construction of all kinds of schematics (e.g. cabling diagram, sys-
tem schematic, etc.) You can call up schematic symbols from all applica-
tion types in one uniform user interface and combine them with each other.
In the project structure, you must ensure the logical arrangement of the storeys. Each
storey should be considered individually and the sequence of numbers must corre-
spond to the actual arrangement of the storeys from bottom to top. In this case a sto-
rey is classed as the parts of the building where the floor essentially forms a common
Basic functions
plane. In the illustrations you can see two possible examples of a building structure,
each of which represent a functional project structure:
Whereas on the
left all storeys
003 005
have the same
geometry and
are located di-
DZ DZ4 003
002 004 rectly above one
DZ3
another, those
DZ DZ2 001 on the right are
001 002 DZ1
offset against
DZ0 DZ0 each other.
000 000
The sequence in the list of drawings must conform to the floors consecutive in height
(DZ). The difference in height from the floor of the current storey to the floor of the
next storey (DZ) can be adjusted (see 4.4.1.2, page 77).
Index
20
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
2.2.2 Using the list of drawings in project management

2.2.2.1 Creating a new project
You can create new projects without
(1) having to close any drawings that you
(2)
may have open:
 Enter the project name (1). Create
(2) is enabled.
 Click Create (2). A query box asks
you if you want to save the current
project. A new project folder is cre-
ated in the root directory. (The il-
lustration shows part of Windows
Explorer).
2.2.2.2 Switching between projects

You can switch between projects without
having to close any drawings that you
may have open. To do this, select the
Basic functions
project in "Project". DDS-CAD
displays a query box to verify that the
current data should be saved.
2.2.2.3 Creating a new drawing in the project

You have to create a new drawing for example, if the prepared list of drawings con-
tains too few storeys. For the following example, it is assumed that six levels in pro-
ject 1 are not sufficient. One more level needs to be created.
(1)
configuration
configuration
(4)
(2) (3)
Adjustments,
Adjustments, extensions,
extensions,
 Select the application type (1).

 Enter the new drawing number (2) (cf. 2.2.1, page 18).
 Click Add (3). The "Information for model: ..." dialogue box appears.
 Enter a description for the new drawing (4), and click OK . A new row has
been added to the list of drawings.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
21
Introduction

r!
2.2.2.4 Deleting a drawing from the project
An existing drawing
can be removed from
the current project.
(1)
Files with the *.BIM extension contain the plan of

the storey up to now and/or the distribution and (2)
all subordinated presentations and views (cf. (3)
3.3.2, page 29).
(4)
Files with the *.RDB extension contain the
building model of the storey. (cf. chapter 5, from
page 51).
Basic functions
 Highlight the entry of the drawing you wish to delete and click Delete (1). The
"Delete files..." dialogue box appears. It contains a list of the files that are asso-
ciated with the drawing to be deleted.
 Select the desired function (2) or (3). The entry or entries are removed from the
list. However, you can undo the operation by clicking Cancel .
 If you want to remove the entry from the list of drawings, check "Delete only
the description" (4)
 Click OK to perform the operation.
Note
If you only check "Delete only the description" (4) without highlighting the asso-
ciated file with the *.BIM extension, this only removes the entry from the list of
drawings. The drawing file is not physically deleted but only "hidden" in the list of
drawings.
Index
22
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
2.2.3 Notes on the root directory for projects

All projects are created in an active root directory. You enter the path to this directory
during the installation routine. However, you can structure your project filing more
accurately by creating additional root directories and switching between them. In this
3
way, you can allocate your projects according to your own filing structure . To do this,
use the "Set Current Project Directory" function.
Basic functions
Calling the "Set Current Project Directory" function.
 Close all drawings and dialogue boxes.
 Also close the list of drawings by clicking End . You will get to the project level
and will receive access to the "Set Current Project Directory" function.
configuration
configuration
Creating a new root directory
 Click New . The "Edit project/user directory" dialogue box appears.
 Enter a description for the new root directory.
 Set the desired path.
extensions,
 Click OK . The root directory has been added to the list. You can enable the
extensions,
root directory and create projects in it.
Enabling another root directory

 Select the desired root directory by double clicking . The dialogue box is
Adjustments,
closed, the selected root directory is enabled. You get access to the projects
Adjustments,
within this directory via the list of drawings.
3
Create the directory structure according to your own needs, for example by the year the project started, the name of your client
or other criteria.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
23
Introduction

r!
2.2.4 Backup and Archiving
DDS-CAD has a multi level back-up routine. It automatically saves every five minutes
the currently opened data into a subdirectory. When restarting DDS-CAD after a
crash, the software automatically loads this data.
A configurable back-up and restore

function operates on the principle of a ver-
sioning tool i.e. it only saves the changes at
a given time. You can use the intermediate
results of your project at any time by ar-
chiving, commenting and restoring it. When
configured correctly, you are protected
against data loss that may occur due to
hardware failure (such as a corrupt disk).
 Select in the menu
„Tools“„Backup/Archive“.
2.2.4.1 Archive functions

Basic functions
Automatic archiving
For each automatic archiving DDS-CAD
(1) checkst he amount of time that since the
last archive (automatic and manual). If the
time difference is more than an hour the
store function creates a new archive at the
same time.
 Activate „Automatically when saving
(recommended)“ (1).
 Click Close . The dialog is closed.
DDS-CAD automatically performs the

routine in the background. Automati-
cally archived states are included in
the restore list with the name “Auto
Backup”.
Index
24
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Manual archiving

Perform a manual archiving to save the
intermediate results of the project at an in-
dividually chosen time. You can assign a
(2) specific name to the archive and add a
comment. Use the function before certain
actions, such as:
• Import updated floor plan.
(3) • Submission/production of documenta-
tion.
• Major changes to hedge against ad-
verse effects.
 Click Store (2). The dialog „Backup“ appears.
 Enter a name and add a comment (3) and click on OK .
 Click Close . The stored archive is included in the restore list (4).
Restore previous version

You can restore a previous version for further project processing. Here, the most
current status is automaticallly archived.
Basic functions
 Click Restore (5). The „Select backup
to restore“ dialog appears.
(5) (6)
 Select the desired backup and
click OK . All open models are
closed. After a few seconds the mes-
sage „project succesfully recovered“
appears.
 Click OK .

configuration
Click Close . The project is restored to
configuration
ist earlier date. In the background the
lastest version from which has been
(7)
restored is saved as a “Restore” ar-
chive (7). You can continue working.
extensions,
Restore archive as separate project

extensions,
The function Restore into (6) stores the selected state in the
subfolder “Archive” in the project folder. Use this function to
pass or to compare the different processing versions as
needed.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
2.2.4.2 The backup functions
The backup functions are designed to protect against loss of data that may be
caused by hardware failure (such as a failed disk). Use this option if you manage
your projects, for example on a local hard drive of the workstation and not perform
regular backups.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
25
Introduction

r!
Note:
When managing your projects in an environment with automatic data backup, you
can work without the backup function in DDS-CAD.
Configure automatic backup (1)

 Select the backup directory (for exam-
ple a server drive or external hard
(1) disk).
 Activate „Automatically store in ex-
ternal location when a backup is
stored“. The archived results are
(2) (3) automatically stored and copied to the
backup directory as well. In the event
of a hardware failure at the workplace,
this data can be restored at any time.
(4)
Create manual backup (2)
(5)  Make sure the backup directory is se-
(6) lected.
Basic functions
(7)
 Click Store (2). Die The project files
are save das a backup.
Restore backup
The resotration of a backup is always necessary when there was a total loss of data.
In this case, you can restore the exported archives onto a spare computer and re-
sume your work. On the replacement computer DDS-CAD must be installed and
should have access to the backup directory.
 Start DDS-CAD on the replacement computer and open any project.
 Start the function „Backup/Archive“. The dialog appears.

 Click Resotre (3). The dialog „Restore from duplicate“ appears.
 Deactivate „Restore current project“ (4). The access to Input
„Source direc-
tory“ and Input „Target directory“ is unlocked.
 Select the source directory (5; = backup directory).
 Select the target directory (6; llocation where the project should be restored).
 Click Resotre (7). The project will be restored from the backup. You can
continue working.
Index
26
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
2.2.5 Import models from external projects

You can import data from previous projects and process them in the current project.
This possibility is particularly appropriate for electrical schematics. You can for ex-
ample integrate a suitable distributor from a previously designed project into the cur-
rent one and adjust it as required.
(2)
(1)
(4) (3)
Basic functions
 Close all model in the current project. The project menu appears.
 In the project menu click Close . You have access to the menu at the project
level.
 Select in the menu „Tools“„Import BIM from external project“. The dialog „In-
sert BIM“ appears.
 Select the project folder (1) and the specific file (2) in which the required distribu-
tor is included.
configuration
 Click Open . The dialog „Save <File name> as“ appears. The proposed file
configuration
name (4) goes with the naming convention of the current project (see 2.2.1,
page 18).
 Click Save . The model is included in the current project. The copied distributor
is now accessible in the project. Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
27
Introduction

r!
2.3 At the drawing level

2.3.1 The user interface

The user interface of an open drawing consists of several elements:
Menu bar
Execute command The message line pro- The toolbar contains general
vides information on the functions and access to the work-
Command input field ing modes (see below).
One function can be
launched per command.
The application is infre-
t
The docking window

contains several functions
(see below).
The toolbox contains the

specific functions of the
Basic functions
active working mode (see

toolbar below).
The status bar contains various information,
such as the coordinates of the cursor posi-
tions, the current layer, the object used, etc.
2.3.1.1 Toolbar and working modes

The toolbar gives you access to the most important common functions and allows
you to switch between the available working modes:
Project menu (page 18) Import and drawing manager (page 85)
Save Building model List of part drawings
Print (page 381) Measure List of sections
Undo Views (page 402) Part list (page 382)
Preparing for print

(page 376)
Working modes
The working mode is the working Text, labels
environment for a specific range of tasks. (page 501)
Switching to a different working mode
changes the content of the toolbox and
enables access to the respective
functions.
Index
28
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
2.3.1.2 Docking window

The DDS Explorer lists all open
drawings and shows the internal
structures. You can quickly switch
between drawings, models, presentations
and views (see below).
When opening the Help (for the current

function) the tab is automatically
activated.
The Room list is created when creating

the building model (see chapter 5,
page 51). You receive access to the
selected room.
The QuickEditor contains the command

list, which is written continuously while
the model is being constructed. The
command list makes internal connections
clear, which is why it is referred to where
Basic functions
The Change list stores all operations
since the last time the file was opened or
saved. The change list can be used to
undo multiple operations in one step (see
20.2, page 523).
2.3.2 The internal structure of a DDS drawing

4
In 2.2.1 we stated that there are various functional areas in a DDS project . In addi-
configuration
tion, a DDS drawing is characterized internally by a multi-layered structure. Use the
configuration
DDS Explorer to navigate in the project and/or to switch between structure levels (by
double clicking ):
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Opened drawings Models Presentations Views Adjustments,
extensions,
2.3.2.1 Level 1 – Open drawings

The top level lists all open drawings with the icon and description of the application
type, the drawing number and the first line of the drawing information.
4
The drawing number is used to decide whether the current drawing is suitable, for example, for modelling a storey or for the
construction of a circuit schematic.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
29
Introduction

r!
2.3.2.2 Level 2 – Models
Each drawing is divided into just one working model and any number of plot layouts:
The working model is the area of engineering activity and source of all derived docu-
ments. Here you can visualise the initial situation (the floor plan), carry out necessary
5
demand assessments and model the building services according to your require-
ments. The usual strategy here – the gradual development, assessment and selec-
tion of different solutions – is implemented in the working model.
In the plot layout you can prepare a drawing sheet for formalised transmission. To do
6
this, you combine the drawing representations derived from the working model with
7 8 9
layout elements and explanations . However, the actual drawing output is not con-
nected to the use of the "plot layout" work area. If the formal layout design is dispen-
10
sable, you can display each presentation of the working model directly . To build a
plot layout, refer to chapter 15.3, from page 376.
2.3.2.3 Level 3 – Presentations
A model can be presented in multiple ways. The main application of this structure
11
level is in the working model . Editing is possible everywhere, changes in one pres-
Basic functions
entation are automatically transferred to all other presentations. There are essentially
four types:
The "2D" presentation contains the plan view of the entire working model and uses
graphical symbols to represent the objects. On the other hand, the various views of
the 3D presentation show all objects as solid bodies.
12
A part drawing shows a defined region of the working model in plan view, using
13
graphical symbols. A section shows a defined region of the working model as a
view and represents the objects as solid bodies.
2.3.2.4 Level 4 – Views
Several views can be produced from the 3D presentations of the working model.
They are created automatically when the perspective is changed and remain saved.
To learn more about using the various perspectives and their possibilities, read chap-
ter 16.4, page 402.
5
e.g. heat load calculation or lighting calculation
6
Summary views, part drawings (see 16.1, page 366), sections (see 16.2, page 369)
7
Sheets of different formats, title fields (see 16.3.4, page 374)
8
Legends (see 16.3.4, page 374), text (see 19.4.3, page 509)
9
on paper, as PDF or DWG/DXF file
10
see 16.4, page 377 and 16.5, page 378
11
Plot layouts can only be presented in 2D and in plan view (other representations would not make sense).
12
see 16.1, page 366
13
see 16.2, page 369
Index
30
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Part II – Strategies for handling projects

General electrical design
The following graphic illustrates possible ways of modelling of an electro-technical

system in DDS-CAD:
Possible courses of action in the general electrical equipment
Chapter 3.2
Page 18 Create project Chapter 5
Page 51
Chapter 4
Page 35
Apply Construct
floor plan (DWG) building model
Basic functions
Distribution board Plan installation equipment Plan
distribution board installation system
Individual objects
Chapter 12
Create Object groups Chapter 18.2 Page 282
distribution plans Page 414
Objects from DWG Chapter 18.3

Chapter 11 Page 430
configuration
Page 251 Lighting, lighting Chapter 21.3
configuration
calculation Page 536
Chapter 13.2
Chapter 14 Page 320
Page 359
Draw cables and lines Chapter 13.5
Page 345
extensions,
extensions,
Working in the floor plan
Chapter 16.5 Chapter 16.3

Design and
Page 382 Create part list Page 376
print layout
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
31
Introduction
The first step required is the creation of a project. You can then decide whether to
start editing the floor plan (grey area) or whether you simply want to develop a distri-
bution system with the associated distribution board plans. Both options are possible.
The first steps in the floor plan depend on the requirements of the project. If you have
received DWG/DXF files of the floor plans, you can import these into the DDS model.
If you are working on the basis of a sketch or a printout, you can construct the floor
plan using the functions of the building model.
Once you have the finished floor plan you can get on with planning the installation
systems or installation equipment. To do this it may be necessary – even if a floor
plan is available as a DWG/DXF file – to define some or all rooms with the functions
of the building model. In the case of the lighting design in particular, a defined space
is required for the application of different functions.
You need to connect cables for a component label of the installation equipment (cir-
cuit, distribution board), which requires that a distribution system is available. You
can create a part list at any time. DDS-CAD counts all visible objects and calculates
the drawn lengths. Similarly, you can derive a layout (sheet, with stamp, legends,
etc.) from the model at any time.
Basic functions
Planning work (lightning protection)
Load product database

Index
32
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Designing PV systems

After you have created your project, you can start building it. The process for editing
a photovoltaic system (PV) essentially follows the steps below:
• Plot available area
• Design system
• Installation planning
The available area can be an open area of ground or a roof area. The description
below is based on a roof-top system. The geometric and geographic parameters of
the building must be known. Possible starting material is a building floor plan on pa-
per or in DWG format, which you have created on site. Basically, you can define a
roof area freely without taking into account the supporting building. However, to get a
realistic representation of the planned system, it is advantageous to model the entire
outer shell of the building.
Designing the system (as

described here) includes
Chapter 3.2
all operations of selecting
Page 18
Create project and arranging the PV
Basic functions
modules and their calcu-
Chapter 4 lation and documenta-
Import Page 35 tion.
DWG file
Installation planning is
Chapter 5.3.2 used to prepare the
Measure outdoor Page 56
floor plan structural implementation
of the system. You select
Chapter 5.3.7 the required assembly
Roofs and materials and design the
roof structures Page 66
support systems for the
configuration
PV modules. You mark
configuration
Design Presentation out the dimensions, place
system (Rendering) the circuitry of the PV
modules, and output the
drawing representations.
Installation Chapter Hiba!
planning A hivatkozási
extensions,
forrás nem
extensions,
Chapter Hiba! Chapter Hiba!

A hivatkozási A hivatkozási
forrás nem forrás nem
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
33
Introduction
Heating/plumbing/ventilation
Create project
Chapter 3.2
Page 18 Chapter 4
Page 35
Apply
accept
Chapter 7
Page 101 Develop building model,
Roof
Building data Walls
Heat load Ceilings
Rooms Components
Transmission Floors
heat loss Geometry Geometry
Doors/windo
Ventilation Properties Properties
heat loss
Chapter 5
Natural ventilation Page 51
Basic functions
Mechanical ventilation
Volume flows Divide heating load Sanitary objects
Switchboard Underfloor heating
Air passages Radiator

Duct system
Build pipe networks
Calculate heating Calculate potable

Pressure loss calculation pipe network water pipe network
"Air conditioning/ventilation" module "Plumbing/heating" module
Design and print layout Part list
Chapter 6 Chapter 16.3 Chapter 16.5 Chapter 8

Page 86 Page 376 Page 382 Page 132
Index
34
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Import external data Erro
r!
3 Importing external data

When preparing a project and during the course of a project, you receive drawings
information and data to assist you in you work: floor plans, detailed plans, schematics
These include drawings
This chapter deals with
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions, configuration
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD
35
Introduction
Erro Import external data

r!
3.1 Notes on file formats

3.1.1 DWG and DXF

DWG and DXF files are standard formats for exchanging drawings between different
CAD systems. Due to their historic development, these files are also the most flexible
and most suitable medium for working with DDS-CAD. You can import these draw-
ings into the model and in most cases use them directly for your own work. If
changes to the content are required, you can first open these files with an integrated
DWG/DXF editor and edit them (see chapter 1, from page 529).
3.1.2 Portable Document Format (*.PDF)

PDF was developed for the platform-independent distribution of electronic docu-
ments. The recipient can view and print the document true to the original and, if nec-
essary, add comments but not change the content. PDF files are also used to trans-
fer drawings. However, because of that limitation they are less suited for use in CAD
systems. If no DWG/DXF files are available, then the PDF file is still the next best
solution. Please note the following points and recommendations for use:
Basic functions
For multi-page documents, only the first page is imported.

If you need other pages, you have to save them separately. To do this, create indi-
vidual PDF files with the required pages.
The import process internally creates a graphic file (*.PNG).

Due to this fact, there is a relatively high load on computing capacity. The image
structure and reactions from DDS-CAD can be slowed down as a result. We there-
fore recommend that you use the PDF file as a template to reconstruct the necessary
drawing content with DDS-CAD. For floor plans, use the functions of the building
model (see chapter 4, page 51) and for other content use the general geometric func-
tions (see chapter 1, page 444). DDS-CAD detects lines and points in the PDF file
and you can use the snap functions. Finally, remove the PDF file from the model and
continue to work with the original DDS objects.
3.1.3 Raster image (*.BMP; *.GIF; *.JPG; *.PNG; *.TIF;

*.WMF)
These pixel formats are mainly included for three reasons:
• To receive a scanned floor plan
• To allow the use of aerial photography for planning photovoltaic systems
• To allow the inclusion of photographs (e.g. lamps, sanitary objects) into the
plot layout
In the first two cases, proceed as with PDF files: Trace the structures required with
DDS functions and then remove the image from the model. Raster images do not
contain any useful geometric information about points or lines. The snap functions
therefore do not have any effect.
Index
36
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
3.2 The general import process

3.2.1 Copying files to the project
To ensure consistent data management, external
drawing files must also be copied into the project
folder (cf.2.2.1, page 18). If you skip this step you
will likely experience problems when managing
14
DWG/DXF the project .
Copying with Windows Explorer

The use of Windows Explorer allows for a structured data storage.
You can clearly and easily manage incoming and outgoing data. We
recommend this option, especially for projects with a large number of
different files or planning states.
Note
Basic functions
The path of the active project is displayed in the title bar (1) of the program win-
dow.
(1)
Copy function in DDS-CAD

By using the internal copy function, you do not have to exit DDS-CAD and do not
have to use any other software. Packed data (*.ZIP) are automatically extracted. If
you receive altered files with the same, the originals will not be overwritten. The date
and time are added to the file name of the original.
configuration
configuration
 Copy the file attachment from an email to any directory.
 From the menu, select "Insert"  "File" 
"Copy DWG/DXF/IFC files into Projectdir". The "DWG, DXF, IFC, ZIP, PDF-File"
dialogue box appears.
 Open the path and select the file by double-clicking . The file has been copied
extensions,
into the project (and extracted at the same time where required). A message
extensions,
provides confirmation.
 Click OK . You can perform the import.
Note
Adjustments,
If you have replaced an existing DWG/DXF file in the project folder, the new plan-
Adjustments,
ning state is not yet visible in the working model. You have to activate the new file
(see 3.3.4.3, page 48).
14
For example, if you were to transfer the project folder to another computer and open the project there, the floor plans would
be missing. Instead you would see the message "Folgende Datei wurde nicht gefunden…" (The following file was not found...)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
37
Introduction

r!
3.2.2 Importing
If you have copied the data into the project folder, you can perform the import:
Import- and Model Admin
(2)
Basic functions
(1) (3)
 Select the "Import- and Model Admin" function. The "Inserted file administrator"
 Click New (1).
 Select the file (2). The "Locate File” dialogue box appears.
 Click OK (3). The drawing appears on the screen.
Note:
Up to this point, the procedure described above applies to any import process.
The purpose of the operation (e.g. importing a floor plan or photo for the plot lay-
out) has so far been irrelevant. In the case of a floor plan (that you intend to use
for planning) further checks and adjustments may be necessary. For more
information, please refer to the following chapter 3.3.
3.3 Notes on working with floor plans

3.3.1 Requirements for imported floor plans
The previous chapter 3.2 described the general import process as it applies to any
type of drawing file. When working with floor plans further checks and adjustments
may be necessary in order to make use of all DDS-CAD options. Based on the as-
Index
38
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
sumption that you are going to be modelling the building installation of a multi-storey
building, the following rules apply:

• The size of the floor plan must conform to the scale of 1:1
• Each storey requires a separate drawing
• All storeys are precisely positioned on top of one another
• Remove any unnecessary information
3.3.1.1 The size of the floor plan must conform to the scale of 1:1
While modelling in DDS-CAD you work at the 1:1 scale. That means a measure in
the DDS model always matches the corresponding measure in the real world. The
default sizes of all components and objects are coordinated in this form and all inter-
nal calculations work on this basis.
The size of the imported floor plan must therefore be checked and where necessary
corrected by a scaling factor. The operation required to do this matches all importable
file types (see 3.3.2, page 41).
3.3.1.2 Each storey requires a separate drawing
Basic functions
Chapter 2.2.1 referred to the internal structure and the logical arrangement of the sto-
reys in the project. Accordingly, each project represents a building and each drawing
one storey. When transferring floor plans there are three possible options in terms of
the arrangement and distribution of the storeys.
• Each storey is supplied in a separate file
• One file contains several storeys
• One storey has been divided into several files
Each storey in a separate file

This option requires the least amount of effort:
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
39
Introduction

r!
One file contains several storeys
If you receive floor plans of all storeys in a single document, it is necessary to split
them up. When working with a DWG/DXF file, you can perform this operation entirely
in DDS-CAD:
First import the original file into
each storey. From this, use the
Ba- Gro Upp
Ba- Gro DWG/DXF editor to isolate the
Base- Ground_flo Upper_floo desired storey and save the
result with a different file name
Upp
(see chapter 1, from page 529)
Building
Building.dwg
One storey has been divided into several files

DWG/DXF files Model in DDS-CAD It may be that one storey has
Split floor plan Complete floor plan been divided up and is sent in
several files. You may need to
merge all parts through several
import operations. In the
Basic functions
graphic you can see the split

floor plan of a ground floor. To
edit with DDS-CAD two import
Ground floor part 1
processes are necessary. The
partial floor plans must be
combined precisely and in the
correct position (cf. 3.3.3,
page 44).
Ground floor part 2

3.3.1.3 All storeys are precisely positioned on top of one another
When building the network structure in a multi-storey building, vertical pipes (e.g.
pipes, cable trays, ventilation ducts) must pass from one storey to the next and open-
ings have to be planned. Therefore the correct position of the floor plan in the model
is absolutely crucial.
Position accuracy is the state in which

floor plans of all storeys are oriented
around a common reference point. The
Ba Gr Up graphic shows an example with three
storeys, where the position accuracy is
given.
The procedure for producing position

accuracy for imported DWG/DXF files
is found in 3.3.3, page 44.
3.3.1.4 Removing unnecessary information

Index
40
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
CAD data contain a variety of information. In addition to the actual floor plan with
walls, doors, windows, and roofs there are also dimensions, text, layout elements (ti-

tle fields, legends), crop marks and much more. Many of these elements are not
needed during planning. In well-organised drawings they can simply be hidden:
Switch layer by clicking
 Select "Find layers of lines in drawing and turn them off” function. The cursor
turns into a crosshair.
 Point to an element in the drawing whose layer you would like to hide. Number
and name of the layer are displayed as information.
 Click . The layer is hidden.
 Click . The context menu appears and lists all hidden layers. In this way you
Basic functions
can re-activate each layer.
This method works for DWG/DXF files with differentiated and consistent layer struc-
ture. In these cases, cleaning up the drawings is possible without editing in the
DWG/DXF editor. If on the other hand, there are many different object classes on a
layer or the layer structure has not been observed consistently, hiding a layer will re-
sult in the loss of necessary information. In this situation, you should consider editing
the source file in the DWG/DXF editor (see chapter 20, page 529).
3.3.2 Checking and correcting the scale ratio
configuration
configuration
To model a system, the size of an imported floor plan must be adjusted to the actual
15
dimensions . That means an object dimensioned in the drawing must correspond
exactly to the size labelled during the review by the DDS "Measure between Two
Points” function. During the operation, first check the situation using a known refer-
ence distance. Dimension lines or doors for example are suitable as reference dis-
tances. If the measurement result differs from the known length, it is necessary to
extensions,
determine a factor and use this to scale the floor plan. To do this, follow the steps
extensions,
below:
• Measure reference distance
• Evaluate measurement result. Determine scaling factor
• Scale floor plan
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
15
The default sizes of all components and objects are coordinated and all internal calculations work on this basis.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
41
Introduction

r!
3.3.2.1 Measuring the reference distance
Measure
(1)
(2)
(3) The reference section is dimensioned in the

drawing at 2m. However, the measurement
results of this section show the value of 200m.
 Select the "Measure between Two Points” function. The cursor turns into a
Basic functions
crosshair. The message line shows the "Locate the first point to be measured”
prompt.
 Click the first end of the reference distance (1). The cursor shows the end of a
dynamic line (2).
 Click the second end of the reference distance. The "Measure between Two
Points” dialogue box appears. You can evaluate the measurement result
3.3.2.2 Evaluating the measurement result and determining the scaling factor
If the measurement result is

different to the labelled
(1)
length, you have to deter-
mine the scaling factor. In
the example, it is clear that
the floor plan is too large by
(2)
a factor of 100. The scaling
factor is then 0.01. Other
situations (for example, af-
ter importing a PDF file)
(3) may result in irregular val-
ues. In this case use the
scaling calculator.
 Start the scaling calculator.
 Enter the measurement result, the actual length of the reference distance and
the current scaling factor (1). DDS-CAD calculates the scaling as a scale ratio
and factor (2). You can also note down the calculated value or copy it to the
Windows clipboard.
 Calculated results in the Windows clipboard: Click on the (blue) text in the de-
scription field (3).
Index
42
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

3.3.2.3 Scaling the floor plan
Essentially, there are two ways to carry out the size adjustment. In this case, adjust-
ing in the DDS model (1) is the easiest, fastest and most common option. You alter
the size of the floor plan by using the previously determined scaling factor (see be-
low). In some problem cases it may be necessary to edit the source file (2), if the
scaling in the DDS model is not sufficient.
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
Adjustment in the DDS model
 Open the properties of the import
(3) object (1) and switch to the "
configuration
Rot./Pos./Scale” tab (3).
configuration
 Manually enter the factor (4) or
retrieve it (after having used the
(4) scaling calculator) from the Win-
dows clipboard (5). All values
change automatically.
extensions,
(5) 
extensions,
Click OK The drawing is scaled

by the factor entered.
 Check that the operation was
successful. Measure the refer-
ence distance again.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Editing the source file

This operation is a backup method if the scaling factor is too large or too small. In this
case you open the DWG/DXF file in the editor and change the definition of the units
of length (see 20.2.3, page 534).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
43
Introduction

r!
3.3.3 Accurate placement of the storeys
Position accuracy is the state in which

floor plans of all storeys are oriented
around a common reference point. The
Ba Gr Up graphic shows an example with three
storeys, where the position accuracy is
given. When designing ceiling openings
and the handover of risers, the position
accuracy must be checked and cor-
rected if necessary.
A typical situation arises when in the

original DWG/DXF file, all storeys are
tiled on a single sheet. This means that
Ba- Grou each storey has a different relationship
seme nd
to the zero point of the original drawing.
The description of the following opera-
Uppe
tions uses the terms below:
r floor
Building
Basic functions
Reference storey
The reference storey is used to check and create the position accuracy of all other
storeys. Its position is assumed to be correct.
Reference point
The reference point is a defined position, which is ideally located in the floor plans of
all storeys. For example, corners of chimneys, elevator shafts or stairwells are suit-
able for this purpose. You choose the reference point yourself in terms of suitability
for purpose.
3.3.3.1 Checking position accuracy
When checking the position accuracy, you compare the positions of the floor plans in
the current storey to the reference storey. To do this, overlay the reference storey
over the model of the current storey. In the following example, the DWG/DXF import
has been completed for all storeys. The basement will serve as the reference. The
drawing of the ground floor is open and is to be checked.
Index
44
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Show DDS drawing
(1)
Gro
Ba-
(2) Ground floor in the correct posi-

tion, hide reference floor.
(3)
(4)
Gro
Ba-
Basic functions
Ground floor not in the correct
position, correct position.
 Select the "Import- and Model Admin" function.

The "Inserted file administrator” dialogue box appears. It lists all existing draw-
ings belonging to the current application type (1) of the project under the tab
“Complpete List of All Models in the Project”. The "On" column (2) contains an
indicator that displays the current status. Storeys with the symbol are invisi-
ble. Storeys with the symbol are visible.
 Click once on the symbol of the reference storey. The symbol changes to
configuration
and further settings are enabled.
configuration
It is useful to use different colours to distinguish between the storeys:
 Check "Default” (3). The colour selection (4) is enabled.

 Select a colour and click OK . The reference storey will be shown in the se-
lected colour. You can evaluate the position accuracy.
extensions,
extensions,
3.3.3.2 Producing position accuracy
Two operations are used to produce the correct positioning, which are useful in dif-
ferent situations. You can either redefine the insertion point in the source file or move
Adjustments,
the imported floor plan in the DDS model.

Adjustments,
Defining the reference point in the source file

In this process the source file (DWG/DXF file) is opened, edited and saved again. In
the course of editing, you redefine the insertion point (origo) at the selected reference
point. The method allows you to clearly define and label its position. This is neces-
sary when distributing your own design as a DWG/DXF file to a third party; the recipi-
ent can easily integrate your file into his own design. The disadvantage is the fact
that new (changed) DWG/DXF files must be edited in the same way.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
45
Introduction

r!
Conclusion:
Use this method if you need a defined origo. This is necessary if you will be send-
ing your design to a third party for further processing.
Description: See 20.2.4, page 535.
Moving an imported floor plan in the DDS model

In this method, it is not especially necessary to adjust the DWG/DXF file. In the case
of changes occurring subsequently, it is highly probable that the position will still be
correct, even after the file is replaced. It is also easier to maintain changed files.
When transferring the design to a third party, no clear insertion point is present.
Therefore it could be more difficult for the recipient to integrate your design.
Conclusion:
Use this method if you do not need to integrate into the design of other project par-
ticipants, or if you are not permitted to move the insertion point (origo).
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)
 Select the moved floor plan (in this case the ground floor) by clicking . The en-
tire floor plan is shown as a selected object.
 Click . The context menu appears.
 Select "Move Object(s) with Free Reference Point”. The message line shows the
"Choose Reference Point for Move” prompt.
 Click on the reference point of the moved floor plan (for example, the corner of
a chimney). The entire floor plan becomes the moveable symbol.
 Move the floor plan to the reference point of the reference storey (2). The point
captures the cursor and holds it tight.
 Click . The position of the previously moved floor plan is corrected. The refer-
ence points of the two floor plans are congruent (3).
 Hide the reference storey.
3.3.4 Notes on importing altered plans

Adopting a modified floor plan into the current project is a frequently recurring action.
Choose one of the following three operations:
Index
46
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
• Change external reference in the import object (see 3.3.4.1, page 47)
• Overlay floor plans (see 3.3.4.2, page 47)

• Overwrite old DWG/DXF file with new file (see 3.3.4.3, page 48)
3.3.4.1 Changing an external reference in the import object
At the start of the project you have imported the first version of the floor plan as a
DWG/DXF file. The DDS model thus contains an import object, which you can edit at
any time. If a visual comparison between the old and new design state is not neces-
sary, we recommend that you change the reference as a practical solution.
Application
Basic functions configuration

configuration
 Copy the new files into the project (see 3.2.1, page 37).
 Select the "Import- and Model Admin" function. The dialogue box appears.
 Click on the entry of the floor plan to be replaced. The context menu appears.
 Select the "Edit Properties” function. The "Locate File" dialogue box appears.
extensions,

extensions,
Click ... . The file selection dialogue box appears.

 Select the new DWG/DXF file.
 Click OK . The new floor plan appears on the screen.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
3.3.4.2 Overlaying floor plans – importing an additional file
Overlaying the new floor plan over the existing floor plan
makes it possible to compare two design states. The graphic
shows a suggested example. The original floor plan (grey) is
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
47
Introduction

r!
overlaid with the newly imported floor plan (black). The different colours visualize the
differences between the two design states.
Application
 Copy the new file into the project
and process the import (see 3.2,
page 37). The new floor plan ap-
pears on the screen and is placed
over the previously drawn objects.
 Rearrange the sequence of the floor
plans in the model. To do this, select
the entry in the list and check
"Bring to back” or "Bring to front”.
3.3.4.3 Overwriting an old DWG/DXF

file with a new file
Overwriting an existing DWG/DXF file with a new file with the same name (for exam-
ple, by a copy operation in Windows Explorer) is not recommended for reasons of
data management and verification. Nevertheless, this procedure is possible. How-
Basic functions
ever, the design stage cannot be seen immediately after the copying process. The
new file must also be enabled in the import object:

 Open the properties of the import object.

 Click Open in new window . The new DWG/DXF file is opened in the editor.
 In the DWG/DXF editor: Save and close the file. The new design state is visible.
3.4 Imported files when exporting the model

During a project you may need to send your work to other people as a DWG or DXF
file. If you have imported DWG/DXF files into your DDS model, you can configure
how they behave during the export process. The settings are made either in the "In-
sert File” dialogue box or in the imported files management:
Index
48
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Don’t export
The imported drawing is NOT included in the export of the model. The resulting
DWG/DXF file contains only DDS objects. Select this option if the designed systems
should only be printed/exported but not the imported file.
Basic functions
Export and include this file (in original colours)
The imported drawing is included in the export of the model as a block. This contains
only the required objects with their original properties (colour, layer, etc.). A possible
selected pen (for mono representation of the floor plan in the model) is ignored; lay-
ers not in use, blocks etc. are omitted.
Attention!
This option is not suitable when:
DDS object mapping has been applied
configuration
The export results in this case would include the original DWG/DXF object AND
configuration
the mapped DDS objects.. Use Export exploded in DDS colours (file can be-
come very large!) or replace, after successfully mapping the objects to DDS ob-
jects, the imported original drawing (with the complete plan) with another drawing
that includes for example only the floor plan..
Sections have been inserted in the plot layout
extensions,
The export results will ignore the section's boundaries and include all content of
extensions,
the imported drawing. Use Export exploded in DDS colours (file can become
very large!).
Export as Xref (in original colours)

The imported drawing is not an integral part of the exported results. It contains only
Adjustments,
the DDS objects and an external reference (Xref) that refers to the imported drawing
Adjustments,
The file size of the export is very low. The receiver, however, requires in addition to
the exported results also the drawing file to which is referred. Only then when you
open the export results a complete plan appears.
Export exploded in DDS colours (file can become very large!)

The imported drawing is selected as a block and transferred with the in DDS-CAD
select pen settings (e.g. the mono representation of the floor plan in the model) to the
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
49
Introduction

r!
export results. DWG objects that have been assigned a DDS object via the object
mapping function are excluded from the export.
During export, the original DWG/DXF structures are resolved into individual lines and
each object is a colour carrier. The file size of the exported results can therefore grow
disproportionately compared to the original design file
Basic functions
Index
50
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
4 Building model

The building model is a core element of the
DDS philosophy. It has drawing-related and
display functions and is also the basis for
most integrated calculations. Its importance
for successful project management de-
pends on the task at hand. You can create
the building model in several ways.
Building model
Chapter 5.1 Chapter 5.2 Chapter 5.3
Page 52 Page 53 Page 55
Components and
structural design
Enter building model
Basic functions
Requirements
graphically
Building model Areas

through graphical (outer contour)
t
Building model by IFC Chapter Hiba!
import A hivatkozási Rooms
forrás nem (inner contour)
Compile
building Chapter 5.5
Page 85 Doors/windows
configuration
Room text/
configuration
Roofs and roof structures room stamp
Automatic Suspended ceiling,

Skylights grid ceiling
roofs
Draw roof surfaces Gutters

extensions,
manually and rainwater

extensions,
i Chapter 5.3.7
Dormers Roof structures Page 66
Chapter 5.4
Adjustments,
Edit building model

Page 76
Adjustments,
Configure
structural units Ground plan and
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
51
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.1 Components and structural design
The graphic shows an overview of the structural design of the building model. Ac-
cordingly, the building (=project) is divided into storeys (=drawing). One storey can
contain several regions and each region can in turn contain several rooms. The room
is composed of the components surrounding it.
Building The building is closely

connected to the current
DDS project. One pro-
ject can cover just one
building model.
A storey refers to the

parts of buildings that
form a common level.
Each storey corre-
sponds to a drawing in
the DDS project
Storey (see 2.2.1).
Basic functions
A region is the outer

framework for multiple
rooms. It specifies the
height of the rooms, the
exterior walls as well as
the floor and ceiling. A
region can comprise the
entire storey or only a
Region
part of it.
The room is the most

important structural unit

in the building model.
DDS-CAD uses the in-
formation of a room for
calculations, displays
and data exchange for-
Room mats.
Ceiling Door
The term component
combines the surfaces
that make up a room:
Walls, floors, ceilings,
Component doors, windows and
roofs. Their properties
mainly affect the results
of the heat load calcula-
tion.
Windows Floor Wall
Index
52
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
4.2 Requirements for the building model

4.2.1 Levels of detail according to the task at hand
In case there is no suitable IFC model available, a graphical capture of the floor plan
is necessary. You can adjust the complexity to the situation. This chapter describes
the various levels of detail from bottom to top:
Single region
A single region is sufficient if you only have to develop the outdoor installation of a
building. The graphical capture remains restricted to the outer building contour and
the roof. A typical example is the design of a PV system on the roof.
Individual rooms
The definition of individual rooms includes the graphical representation of room con-
tours, while considering the ceiling height and room designation. The method pre-
supposes the existence of a DWG/DXF file of the floor plan. The definition of the re-
gion, the doors, windows and roof are omitted. This building model is sufficient for:
• Determining the building structure
• Determining room areas
Basic functions
• Inserting dynamic room texts/room stamps
• Sorting the parts list to rooms
• Transferring a room to the DIALux or Relux lighting calculation
• Installation of suspended ceilings
Complete floor plan ignoring the material properties

A completely captured floor plan also allows:
• A high degree of representational quality: You create the basis for three-
dimensional views, rendered displays and wall views.
configuration
• The complete building structure: If the results of a heat load calculation from an
configuration
external source are available, you can apply the standard heat load of the rooms
as information in the building model. You can take this as the basis for develop-
ing the heating system.
In this case, you enter the complete building structure with regions, rooms, doors,
windows and roofs. The thermotechnical behaviour of the components is irrelevant,
extensions,
since a heat load calculation is not required. If you have to construct the floor plan
extensions,
manually (due to a lack of DWG/DXF file), remember to take note of the wall thick-
ness. In this way you ensure that the floor plan conforms to the dimensions of the
original. If you can get your hands on the floor plan of an imported DWG/DXF file,
you don't have to bear the wall thickness in mind. DDS-CAD automatically makes an
adjustment.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Complete floor plan including consideration of the material properties

The material properties of the components (U-value) are required for the heating de-
sign.
Note:
The descriptions are based on the need to capture the floor plan in full including
consideration of the material properties.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
53
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.2.2 Requirements due to the heat load calculation
A complete building model with all material information is a necessary prerequisite for
a proper heat load calculation. During capture, when using doors and windows and
when drawing roofs, DDS-CAD always demands the assignment of an item from the
product database. By selecting an item you determine its physical properties and
thus the results of the heat load calculation. We can deduce a number of principles
from this fact:
• The same materials require the same item.

Different materials require different items.
If for example, there are two walls of equal thickness but different physical
properties (material, U-value) in the project, you will require two separate items.
If the required item (e.g. a special type of wall) is not available, you have to cre-
ate this item from scratch. The procedure is described in chapter 21.2.3, from
page 551.
• The different assignment of the item should already have taken place
when the room was defined.
In order to make the work easier and eliminate sources of error, you should
bear in mind the differentiation of the components when defining the room. As-
Basic functions
sign the components with the same physical properties to the same items. Sub-
sequent correction of the item assignment is possible, but it means extra work
and is a source of error.
• The U-values can be corrected at any time.

If you have paid attention to the first two principles, you can correct the U-
valuesat any time: when defining the room (individually for each component
type) or in a subsequent systematic operation. Both procedures are described
in section 6.4.2, on page 118.
4.2.3 Division into zones for separate calculations

A building model can be devided
into multiple zones for calculation
purposes. This could e.g. be re-
quired for a high rise building with
multiple appartments for which
the airflow must be calculated per
living unit. In this case the re-
quired rooms form a single zone.
Index
54
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
4.3 Building model through graphical entry

4.3.1 General procedure
In the graphical entry of the floor plan, the contours of the regions and rooms are en-
tered. This task is made simpler by the previous import of a DWG/DXF file. However,
if you only have a drawing on paper, you then have to construct the floor plan accord-
ing to the original. In both cases the basic procedure is the same:
You start in each

Areas storey by defining
Chapter 5.3.2 Roofs
(outer contour) the regions. In this
Page 56
way you have cre-
ated the prerequi-
Rooms Chapter 5.3.7 site for construct-
Chapter 5.3.3 (inner contour) Page 66
Page 58 ing the roof. After
defining the room,
you can add room
Room text/ Doors and Suspended ceiling, text, doors, win-
room stamp grid ceiling dows and sus-
windows
Basic functions
pended ceilings.
Chapter 5.3.6 Chapter 5.3.4 Chapter 5.3.5
Page 65 Page 62 Page 64
You can access

the functions when you open a drawing in the "Building" (1) application type or acti-
vate the "Use Building" working mode in other application types (2):
configuration
configuration
(1) (2) Use Building
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
55
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.3.2 Capturing a region
A region is the outer framework for multiple rooms. It speci-

fies the exterior walls as well as the floor and ceiling. You
draw the contour of the region as a polyline. The result is a
closed polygon which is provided with a height. The following
diagram describes the general procedure for capturing a sin-
gle region. There follows information on special cases that
require multiple regions in a single storey.
4.3.2.1 Procedure
Notes on "Define starting point"

Capturing a region Define region (floor/ceiling) Define the starting point at an outer corner
of the floor plan. If you are working on the
Start function basis of an imported DWG/DXF file, click
on a building corner. If you have to con-
Define struct the floor plan yourself, choose the
starting point zero point of the coordinate system as the
starting point. It is symbolised by the "+"
Basic functions
sign and snaps in the cursor if snap points

Wall type is enabled:
Draw contour
Close contour Notes on "Select New Side Type" with [W]

Selecting the wall type straight away is useful if you want to
avoid subsequent changes. As you continue, you can make a
Check new selection at any vertex. Press [W] again. If the re-
settings quired wall type is not available, create a new item (see
21.2.3, page 551).

End
Notes on "Draw contour"

If the area has a polygonal character (left) out-
line the contour. Select the counter-clockwise
drawing direction. For a rectangular floor plan
(right), you only need to define the diagonal
vertices of the area by clicking and end the
function with [Enter].
For tips on working with polylines, please read

page 452 onwards. You can also use auxiliary geometries to help you in constructing
a floor plan (see 18.3, page 492).
Index
56
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
Notes on "Close contour" and "Check settings"

Once you have finished defining the area, the context
menu (click ) will offer several functions (also see
18.1.7, page 470).
If the contour is closed, DDS-CAD first asks for an item for the floor and ceiling of the
area. Once selected, the defined region is visible in the drawing with the drawn con-
tour (solid line) and a dashed helper line. The "Room Information" dialogue box ap-
pears:
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
Drawn contour Helper
The dialogue box lists each

component with a number. The
component selected in the list
appears in the drawing as a se-
lected object. Double clicking
takes you into editing mode,
from where you can correct the
wall type.
configuration
configuration
The settings apply by default for all rooms that are subsequently drawn in the region.
Therefore it is particularly important that the room height (1) is corrected. You can
use the description (2) to enter a name for the region. This name is used in the vari-
ous reports. The function ends when you confirm the settings with OK .
4.3.2.2 Notes on buildings with a courtyard

extensions,
extensions,
In the case of a ring-shaped

1st region (outer) building (with a courtyard) follow
the region capture procedure in
2nd region (cut-out)
two stages. First, define the
outer floor plan of the building
Adjustments,
and then the cutout for the

Adjustments,
courtyard.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
57
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.3.2.3 Notes on buildings with different heights on one storey
Multi-part buildings must be divided into different regions if the height of the building
parts are different:
The example shows a two-storey building. A

portion of the ground floor (region 1) is going
Up to be the staff rooms. Area 2 is a production
hall, whose height extends over almost two
Gr floors. In this situation, the ground floor has
Region 1 to be divided into two areas.
Region 2
When capturing the areas, make

(1) sure that they do not overlap.
Both areas must be separated
by a gap (1).
Basic functions
4.3.3 Entering rooms

When defining the room you enter the inner contours of a
room. Depending on the requirements, the following options
are available to you:
• Creating the room from DWG/DXF structures
• Manual graphical entry

• Automatic detection of residual areas
All three options should be considered equivalent. Select the option according to its
suitability to your needs.
4.3.3.1 Creating the room from DWG/DXF structures
You can transfer contours of rectangular rooms with doors, windows and room data
from an imported DWG DXF file. The rooms may be rectangular or trapezoidal. In
most cases, polygonal rooms must be defined manually. But even in these rooms,
you can then automatically transfer doors, windows and room data from the DWG
file.
The state of the starting material determines the effort required. In the best case, you
can capture the room contour, the doors and room data with a single click. However,
this possibility relies on the various elements being favourably positioned. It is possi-
ble that you will need another click to transfer the room data, or you may have to rely
on a manual correction.
Index
58
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!

Preparation
The method requires the following conditions:
• The outer contour must be manually defined as a region (see 4.3.2, page 56).
• To retain an overview, the room database layers should be enabled.
• The floor plan must have been cleaned up. Inside the rooms, lines (e.g. dimen-
sion lines, ceiling grids, helper lines, etc.) are not allowed in front of the walls.
Inside the room, the cursor must have a "clear view" to the wall lines. If possi-
ble, only wall lines, doors, windows and room texts should remain visible:
Basic functions
Starting the function
 Start the “Define Rooms” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Select "Recognize DDS room object from selected DWG objects”. You can apply
the function or configure it.
Use function
(1)
configuration
Room definition
configuration
Configure function
extensions,
extensions,
(2)
Configuring the function

Adjustments,
In the default configuration, all options for capturing DWG/DXF structures are
Adjustments,
checked. In some cases, it may be necessary to exclude certain elements from being
captured after the function is started. For example, if the room data are no longer cur-
rent, or if doors are going to be replaced, the old objects do not have to be trans-
ferred.
 Click again. The context menu lists all object classes that can be captured.
You can select each object class individually.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
59
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
 Change the status of the desired object class. The context menu is closed. You
can repeat this process for other object classes.
Using the function – capturing rooms

After the function is started, you move the cursor in the room to be captured. You
may need to find a suitable position because the cursor requires a "clear view" of the
room boundaries. DDS-CAD checks the status of the area surrounding the cursor. If
this area is bounded by four intersecting lines, the space in between is completely
filled in grey. DDS-CAD thus indicates that the area has been identified as a room.
The lines detected as the boundary are denoted by arrows (1).
 Click . The selected area is defined as a room. Depending on the configuration
and position of the cursor, the active object classes are captured. The function
remains active. You can add more rooms or capture object classes within the ac-
tive room that have not yet been detected.
Notes on doors
The function detects a door when capturing the room ("Interior Walls” object class) if
it is represented by a circular arc and opens into the captured room. The detected arc
is highlighted (2) during the operation. Other symbols are not recognised. You have
to define these doors manually (see 4.3.4, page 62).
Basic functions
Notes on windows
Windows are not captured together with the inner walls. They have to be transferred
individually after to room has been detected:
 Activate the room capture from DWG/DXF structures (see above).

 Point to the window symbol in the DWG/DXF. DDS-CAD recognises the window
width and highlights the detected object.
 Click . A window for the building model has been defined at the position indi-
cated.
Notes on room number, room name and other room data

If their position allows it, room number and room name may be read while capturing
the room (inner walls) and transferred into the "Room Information” dialogue box.
However, you must be aware that the arrangement must match the texts. For infor-
mation on correcting the room data, please see 4.4.1.3, page 78.
Warning
Once you have completed the operation, check the settings of all automatically de-
tected objects (sill height of windows, items, etc.)
Index
60
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
4.3.3.2 Manual graphical room capture

Entering a room
In manual graphical capture, you draw
the contour of the room as a polyline.
Start function The result is a closed polygon which is
Room definition provided with a height.
Define
starting point
Wall type
Draw contour Notes on "Define starting points"

When defining areas and rooms, helper lines are auto-
matically created. These represent the wall thickness.
Close contour They are visible in the model as a dashed line. Use the
intersections for your work:
Check
settings
Basic functions
Finished?
[ESC]
Notes on selecting "Wall type”

It becomes much easier to assign wall types as work pro-
configuration
gresses. DDS-CAD automatically transfers the wall types of
configuration
the outer wall and of adjacent rooms. Therefore when moving
along a "known" wall (1) during room definition, it is not nec-
(2) essary to select the wall type. This may only be required
again when leaving the known wall (2).
(1) extensions,
extensions,
Notes on "Draw contour" and "Close contour"
Follow the same pattern as for defining areas (see 4.3.2.1,

page 56) and select the counter-clockwise drawing direction.
The line defined first is given the wall with the number "1". It
Adjustments,
is the reference wall of the room and is used by various

Adjustments,
functions for orientation and alignment (cf. 4.4.3.5, page 84).

The room becomes visible when the contour is closed. The
1
room area is shaded and the "Room Information” dialogue
box appears.
Check the settings (see 4.4.1.3, page 78) and click OK . You can define the next
room or end the function with [ESC].
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
61
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.3.3.3 Capture residual area as a room
If an area (1) is completely bounded by adjacent rooms (2) and/or an area (3), then it
can be automatically converted into a room. Use this option to define particularly long
or complex rooms.
 Start the room definition function. The
cursor turns into a crosshair.
(2
 Move the cursor into the undefined area
(1).
 Press [A]. The residual area is con-
(3
verted to the room. The "Room Informa-
(1 tion” dialogue box appears.
4.3.3.4 Copy room
You can copy any room and paste it into the model as many times
as you wish. Use this option in floor plans with uniform sized rooms:
Basic functions
Copy room
 Select a wall component of the room to be copied.
 Select the "Copy Room Object..”. The cursor moves the copied
room as a dynamic symbol. You can paste the room into the
model as often as you like, but you cannot rotate it.
4.3.3.5 Note on rooms spanning several storeys

Rooms that extend over several storeys must

be entered separately on each storey.
2nd
1st
Groun
4.3.4 Doors and windows

In the best case, doors and windows can be captured from
the imported DWG/DXF file (see 4.3.3.1, page 58). After-
wards you have to check and correct the settings. If an auto-
matic detection is not possible, define these objects manu-
ally. Adjust the height and sill height and/or the height of the
threshold. You can either input the width numerically or de-
fine it graphically.
Index
62
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!

Doors
Window (1)
(2) (3)
Inserting a door/window
 Select the desired function. The product database is displayed.
 Select the required item. The object dialogue for the door/window is displayed.
 Adjust the height and sill height (2).
Fixed-width symbol
 Uncheck "Get width from model” (3). Input "Width” (1) is enabled.
Basic functions
 Define the width (1) and click OK . The cursor moves the object within the
walls. You can fix it at the desired position by clicking .
Retrieve width from drawing
 Check "Get width from model” (3). Input ”Width” is disabled.


configuration
Click . The cursor moves the door or window as a movable symbol with
OK
configuration
low preset width.
 Move the DDS object to the corner of a symbol of the DWG/DXF file. The point
captures the cursor and holds it tight.
 Click . The first corner is fixed. You can set the width dynamically.
 Specify the second corner by clicking . The window or door is completed. The
extensions,
function remains active.

extensions,
Additional notes on handling symbols

In addition to the general symbol handling (see 17.2, from page 414) you can:
Change the hinge (of the door):
Adjustments,
 Press [Shift]+[Tab]. The symbol switches

Adjustments,
between right-hand hinge and left-hand hinge.

Change the reference point in the symbol
 Press [Tab]. The moves the symbol at the
right, left or centre reference point.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
63
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.3.5 Suspended ceiling
The suspended ceiling is a tool for positioning objects. You

can control the mounting height of these objects. Snap points
in the grid make it easier to accurately place the object.
Insert suspended ceiling

 Select the “Suspended Ceiling” function. The dialogue box appears.
Grid ceiling
(1)
Basic functions
 Adjust the mounting height (1) and click OK . The message line shows the
"Select a room".
 Click once in the room. The suspended ceiling is oriented parallel to the refer-
ence wall. The function remains active.
Correcting the position of the suspended ceiling

 Select the suspended ceiling by clicking . The suspended ceiling is displayed
as a selected object. Four handles are displayed, with which you can grasp the
object.
 Click on a handle. You can move the grid with the cursor and fix it again by
clicking .
Index
64
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
4.3.6 Room text/room stamp

Room texts are inserted into rooms as symbols. They can be
002 configured however you like, and display for example room
001 Bath numbers, labels, content of areas or the values of the heat
Corri
load calculation. This section describes on overview of their
003
use. For a detailed description on the significance of the set-
Offi- tings and on building your own text configurations, please
refer to chapter 18.4.1, from page 501.
Inserting room text or a room stamp

 Either select the function “Room Text...” or “Text all rooms”. The “Part text” dia-
logue box is displayed.
(1)
Text all rooms...
(2)
Room text...
Basic functions
 Select a text configuration (1). Set the design (2).

configuration
Click OK . Depending on the selected function, room texts will automatically
configuration
appear in the centre of each room, or the cursor will move the text as a dynamic
symbol.
Editing the content of the room text
The content of a room text is controlled by the data of the room. Therefore, you have
to edit the room to update the text.

extensions,
Select the "Room Information” function:

extensions,
 Click in the desired room. The "Room Information” dialogue box appears.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Correct the room data (see 4.4.1.3, page 78) and click OK . The text is up-
dated.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
65
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.3.7 Roof areas and dormers
With DDS-CAD you can automatically create simple roof structures and – in the case
of complex roof structures – design individual roof areas. An automatic roof is possi-
ble if the planned roof has a rectangular area with symmetric apex position (left pic-
ture). Both conditions must be met, otherwise it is necessary to design separate roof
areas manually (right picture):
Conditions for automatic roof met: Conditions for automatic roof not
met. All roof surfaces have to be
designed individually:
A
A
B B
A=B
A≠B
4.3.7.1 Automatic roof

Basic functions
The function draws a roof with a rectangular floor plan and symmetrical apex posi-
tion.
 Select the "RoofSymbol” function. The "RoofSymbol” dialogue box is displayed:
(1)
RoofSy
(2)
(3)
 Select the desired roof shape (2). The dialogue box displays the parameters
relevant to the roof shape. For more information click Help .
 Adjust all parameters. The next step depends on whether the floor plan com-
pletely is going to be fully covered with this roof, or only partially covered.
Index
66
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
Complete roof covering

 Click OK . The roof covers the entire floor plan. The
function ends. If necessary, the orientation of the apex
must be corrected (see below).
Partial roof covering

 Click Define input positions (3). The dialogue box is closed. The
message line shows the "Choose first reference point for
roof" prompt.
 Define the diagonal of the planned roof area with two
clicks .
 Press [Enter]. The dialogue box reappears.
 Check the parameter settings and click OK . The roof
is finished. If necessary, the orientation of the apex must
be corrected (see below).
Basic functions
Correcting the apex position
To correct the apex position, change the rotation of the object around the Z axis by
90°:
configuration
(1
configuration
extensions,
extensions,

Adjustments,
Open the object dialogue of the roof by double clicking on it and open the
Adjustments,
"Rot./Pos.” tab.
 Change the value in Input ”Around Z-axis” (1) by 90° and click OK . The dia-
logue box is closed. The apex location has been changed.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
67
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.3.7.2 Drawing roof areas manually
If an automatic roof is not possible, use the "Free Roof” function. Here, you draw the
outline of each separate area as a polygon. The example shows a gable roof with the
areas (1) and (2). The apex is not centred and area (2) is not rectangular:
(1)
Free roof
(2)
Basic functions
The use of the function depends partly on the particular conditions of the project (see
below), but at the same time on two specific rules, whose consequence lies in the
correct definition of the starting point. The graphic shows the location of the starting
point and the drawing direction for both roof surfaces as a black line ( ).
Rule 1: The line drawn first is always the apex.

The apex line is the reference for setting the gable height. From that point, the roof
slopes down. The height of all other vertices of a roof area is calculated automatically
according to the pitch of the roof.
Rule 2: The drawing direction for an area must be counter-clockwise.

The drawing direction (counter-clockwise) corresponds to the mathematically positive
direction of rotation in the coordinate system (see 16.1, page 391). DDS-CAD needs
this direction for internal calculations.
The conditions of the project determine how the function is used. The procedures are
described separately for:
• Manual construction based on a sketch: This situation arises for example, when
designing rooftop PV systems for an existing building. The building, especially
the geometric parameters of the roof, have bee determined on site and must be
manually transferred into the DDS model.
• Copying on the basis of a 3D DWG/DXF file: You receive a DWG/DXF file, in
which the building (especially the roof) can be seen in the 3D view.
• Copying on the basis of a 2D DWG/DXF file: You receive a DWG/DXF file, in
which the roof is only shown in the plan view as an outline.
Index
68
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
Manual construction based on a sketch

(2) (1)
[ ]
[]
[Ente
]
(3)
(4)
Basic functions
 Select the "Free Roof” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Click on the starting point of the apex line (1). The cursor moves a polyline.
 Press the arrow key to specify the direction of the apex line (here []). The
"Collect Points” dialogue box (2) appears.
 Enter the apex length in metres (m) and click OK . The apex line is displayed
in the model.
 Press the arrow key to specify the direction of the first gable edge (here []).
The "Collect Points” dialogue box appears.
configuration

configuration
Enter the length of the gable edge (3) and the roof pitch (4) and click OK . The
gable edge is displayed in the model.
 Build the other roof edges.
 To close the contour, press [Enter]. The "Free Roof” dialogue box appears.
 Check all settings and correct the gable height in particular.
extensions,
extensions,
 Click OK . The roof is completed and the function ends.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
69
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
Copying on the basis of a 3D DWG/DXF file
(1)
(2)
[En-
 Import the DWG/DXF file (see chapter 3, page 35).

 Activate the 3D view and select a suitable perspective (see 16.4, page 402).
 Select the "Free Roof" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Click on the corners of the roof area one after the other (2).
Basic functions
 Check all settings and click OK . The roof is completed and the function ends.
Copying on the basis of a 2D DWG/DXF file
[En-
 Import the DWG/DXF file (see chapter 3, page 35).

 Select the "Free Roof” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Click on the corners of the roof area one after the other (2).
 Enter the pitch and the gable height.
 Check all other settings and click OK . The roof is completed and the function
ends.
4.3.7.3 Dormers
Index
70
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!

(4)
a)
(1) b)
Dormers c)
(2)
(3)
 Select the “Dormer” function. The “Dormer” dialogue box appears.

 Define the reference for the placement of the dormer (1):
a) for free entry of wall and gable height (4)
b) e.g. for converted attics without pitched roof area
Basic functions
c) e.g. if pitched roof area is present.
 Select the desired shape of the dormer (3). The dialogue box displays the pa-
rameters (2) relevant to the selected dormer.
 Set all parameters (2) and click OK . The dormer is moved at its outer side
(the wall) at the cursor.
configuration
configuration
 Move the dormer to the desired position and click . The dormer is fixed in place
and the function ends.
4.3.8 Skylights and roof sections

Adjustments,
extensions,
Skylights
(1)
 Select the "RoofWindow” function. The product database is displayed.

 Select the required item by double clicking . The dialogue box appears.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
71
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
 For a fixed sill height (1), enter the value and check "Lock sill height".
 Click OK . The cursor moves the window as a dynamic symbol.
4.3.9 Gutters
You can draw gutters without an existing roof. However, it is better if the roof is pre-
sent because the corners feature a snap function to the side of the eaves:
Roof corners
Dist: 1,039, 1,089, 2,054
Roof corners
Dist: 1,039, 1,089, 2,054
 Select the "Gutter” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

Basic functions
 Point to the first corner of the roof. The underside of the roof is detected.
 Click . The "Gutter” dialogue box appears.
(2)
Gutter
(1)
 Select the material for the gutter (1).

 In the "Alignment” tab (2) select the position of the reference line. You can spec-
ify whether you are drawing the left or right side or the centre line of the gutter.
 Click OK . The cursor moves a polyline.
 Draw the gutter. Each click fixes a corner.
 At the end, press [ESC]. The gutter is located underneath the edge of the roof.
4.3.10 Downpipe
Index
72
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
Downpipes use the polyline drawing
functions (see chapter 18.1, from

page 445). The following example has
been chosen for this section:
In a multi-storey building, a downpipe is
to begin from the gutter, go vertically
downwards by 20 cm and then bend at
an angle of 60° to the wall. Then it is to
lead along the wall, going vertically to the
ground.
Basic functions
(1)
Downpip (2)
(3)
configuration
 Open the attic storey.
configuration
 Compile the building model (see 4.5, page 85).
 Select the "Downpipes” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message
line shows the "Specify first point" prompt.
 Point to the gutter. The suspended ceiling is displayed as a selected object.
extensions,
 Click on the position for the branch off. The downpipe begins at the gutter (1).
extensions,
The cursor moves a polyline.

 Press  [PgDn]. The "Collect Points” dialogue box appears.
 In Input "Delta down” enter the value for the height difference (20 cm) and click
OK . The position of the bend (2) has been defined.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Move the cursor to just in front of the wall.

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
73
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
 Press  [Shift]+[PgDn]. The "Collect Points” dialogue box appears.
 In Input“Angle (draw dir.)” enter the angle for the direction change. All other
values are re-calculated automatically.
 Click OK . The position of the bend (3) has been defined. The inclined portion
of the downpipe is visible in the drawing.
 Press  [PgDn]. The "Collect Points” dia-
logue box appears.
 In Input “Absolute Z-pos.” enter the target
height for the end of the downpipe.
 Click OK . The bottom end of the downpipe
has been set.
Basic functions
Warning!
When editing a multi-storey building, the ground is at a negative height from the
perspective of the attic storey. The height 0 always refers to the floor of the current
storey.
4.3.11 Roof structures

If the heating, plumbing and ventilation systems for the current project are also cre-
ated with DDS-CAD, you can simulate a part of the roof structures directly. To do
this, integrate the application type in the model of the attic storey (see 4.5, page 85).
If you only receive the roof

structure and the plans of the
other application types as a
DWG file, you can simulate
these systems. The "Furniture
and Fittings” function in the "Use
Building” working mode includes
Snap areas chimney stacks. You can use
the geometric features to create
your own three-dimensional ob-
jects.
You should enable snap areas

Fixtures/stairs... for work on the roof. This en-
sures that the mounting height
of the object is adjusted to the
position on the roof.
4.3.12 Recesses,
Index
74
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
openings

Start the function in
the “Use Building”
toolbox or from the
16
"Insert” menu . The
special feature is the
information that ap-
pears as text.
Builderwork...
(1) (3)
(2)
WD/E/ 10x11x20
OK=12.00cm FF
Basic functions
The content in Input ”Line 1” (1) can be entered freely. The text indicates the type of
recess and the application type where necessary.
The height data (2) is formed from the mounting height and the selected reference for
its label. To do this, you may choose the finished floor level (FF), the unfinished floor
(UF) or the lower edge of the ceiling (LEC), with or without prefix. Selecting the blank
line suppresses the height data at the symbol.
The dimensions (3) are taken from the item, if

stipulated there. If the item does not have val-
ues for the size, you can enter these directly in
configuration
Y
the dialogue box. Please note that the meaning
configuration
Z depends on the viewing direction to the open-
(4)
X
ing. In the case of a wall opening (4), the size of
the opening is specified by the values X and
17
X Y Z . The value Y defines the wall thickness. In
the case of a floor opening, it is X and Y that
Z
specify the opening. The value Z defines the
extensions,
18
(5) floor thickness .
extensions,
Use "Length" / "Width”/ "Depth" to specify

whether the respective dimension is displayed
with the symbol.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
16
Or in electrical engineering, in the "Verlegesysteme" (Installation systems) working mode
17
The observer is standing in front of the opening looking at the wall.
18
The observer is looking at the opening from above.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
75
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.4 Edit building model

4.4.1 Structural units settings

4.4.1.1 Building
You confirm the basic settings in the

Building Information dialogue box. You
enter a name, define the purpose of the
building, its geographical location and ori-
entation (compass direction). The settings
affect the calculation of
• Heat load (DIN EN 128318)
• Potable water (DIN 1988)
• Photovoltaic systems (PV)
Basic functions
Building
(2) (1)
(3)
The type of use (1) affects the potable water pipe network calculation according to
DIN 1988. The peak flow is calculated according to the type of use. By selecting the
location (2) from the product database, DDS-CAD applies the standard outdoor tem-
perature Θe and the ground level above sea level.
The direction of north (3) is required to calculate yields for PV systems. The Polysun
Inside calculation module uses this setting to determine the orientation of the module
faces toward the Sun.
Index
76
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
4.4.1.2 Storey – Room overview

You can modify the settings for the current storey in the "Room List” dialogue box.
This gives you an overview of the areas and rooms and you can access their data.
The dialogue box plays an important role in the compilation of the building model.
Use Input "Storey height (from origo to origo)” (1) to define the height DZ of the re-
spective subsequent storey:
Floor - Room overview
(1)
005
004
DZ4
003
Basic functions
DZ3
DZ2 001
002 DZ1
DZ0
000
configuration
configuration
Example
The figure shows a broken building structure. Different height levels in the building
force a project structure in which the levels 001 to 004 are offset against each other.
The height difference between the levels 002 and 003 (DZ2) should be 1.3 m.
Procedure
extensions,
 Open the room overview for level 002.

extensions,
 Enter the value for DZ (in this case 1.3m) in Input "Storey height (from origo to
origo)” (1).
 Click OK . You will be asked whether the
height should apply to all rooms.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Click No . In the compilation of the two lev-

els there is a height difference between the
floors of 1.3 m.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
77
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.4.1.3 Room
The room properties affect calculation re-

sults and displays.
 Select "Room Information”.
The following prompt is displayed:
"Point to the room you want to edit”.
 Click in the room. The dialogue box
is displayed. The room is shaded.
Room data
(1) (2)
(3)
Basic functions
(4)
The room number (1) is generated automatically, but can be adjusted as required
(maximum length: 16 characters). DDS-CAD prevents a room number from being
used more than once. The room description (2) is initially filled from the product data-
base when you select a room type with … . It can also be changed as required.
Warning
For the heat load calculation, it is not enough to just change the text in the descrip-
tion. Therefore select the room type from the product database (this stipulates
room temperature and air exchange rate). Click … and adjust the text as re-
quired.
The room height (3) is taken from the region settings. However, you can apply sepa-
rate properties for any room. The value corresponds to the distance between the up-
per edge of the finished floor and the ceiling. It affects the mounting height of lamps,
air terminals and the room volume.
The table (4) numbers the components surrounding the room. The component se-
lected in the list appears in the drawing as a selected object. Double clicking takes
you into editing mode, from where you can correct the wall type.
Index
78
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
4.4.1.4 Component

Walls, floors, ceilings, doors,
Ceiling Door windows and roof areas are
brought together under the gen-
eral term "Components".
Components can be edited indi-
vidually or in groups using the
"Find and Edit Objects” function.
Window Floor Wall
Editing a single component

The properties are managed in the component dialogue box. You get to this either
via the "Room Information” dialogue box (1) or by double clicking on the compo-
nent in the model (2):
Basic functions
(2)
(1)
extensions,
configuration
Editing components in groups

It is useful to be able to edit several components at the same time if lots of compo-
Adjustments,
nents have the same properties. This situation arises for example, through capture of
Adjustments,
a room on the basis of a DWG/DXF file (see 4.3.3.1, page 58).
In this case, DDS-CAD automatically creates components that use a general item (1).
However, to prepare for a heat load calculation, all components must use an item
that allows an accurate description of its thermotechnical performance. Therefore, it
is advisable to use a function that allows you to visually check the position of the
components and that provides total access to the properties.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
79
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
Building
(2)
(1) (3) (4)

Basic functions
 Open the “Building Information” dialogue box and select the "U-value" tab.
 Select a component type from the list (1). All components of this type are shown
in the model as selected objects (2).
 Click OK (3) to close the Building Information dialogue box. The components
remain selected.

Select the “Edit Properties” function. The object dialogue of the component type
is displayed. You can allocate the items required.
Index
80
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
4.4.2 Create usage units from multiple rooms (zones)

Define zones when a technical
19
calculation for multiple rooms
belonging to a usage unit (e.g. an
appartment) is required.
(1)
Basic functions
List of zones
(3)
(4)
configuration
(5) (6) (7)
configuration
(2)
extensions,
extensions,
Zone erzeugen/bearbeiten
 Select the “list all zones” in the tool box. The dialog will display all zones of the
project and its main properties..
 Click New or Edit (1). The dialog "Zone" appears. It lists all rooms that are
Adjustments,
part of the zone (2).

Adjustments,
 Enter the name of the zone as text (3) and define the type of zone (4). This as-
signs specific properties to the rooms in the zone for the calculation.
19
Luftmengenabgleich für die kontrollierte Wohnraumlüftung; Berechnung des Trinkwassernetzes
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
81
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
Assign rooms to a zone by clicking
 To assign a room to the zone click Room (5). The dialog closes, the cursor
appears as a crosshair.
 Click in the room. The room receives the hatching of the zone. You can select
the next room or go back with [ESC] to the dialog “Zones”.
Assign rooms to a zone from a list

 Select the tab „Pick rooms“. On the left side (6) all rooms are listed that do not
belong to a zone.
 Click >> (7). The room is moved to the right side and is assigned to the spe-
cific zone.
4.4.3 Editing the floor plan and room geometry

4.4.3.1 Enabling polygon functions
The geometry of the rooms and areas can be changed using the edit functions of the
polygon and/or polyline (see 18.1.8, page 472). This editing mode is turned off by
Basic functions
default and must be enabled.
Move node
Insert node
 Select a wall by clicking .

 In the "Advanced” sub-menu select the "Display contour as Polygon” option. The
outline of the room is displayed as a polygon with nodes and segments. For
more information on the various options, please see chapter 18.1.8, from
page 472.
Note
The option remains active and is valid for all other selected rooms and/or areas. If
at a later date this editing mode is no longer needed, you should disable it again
as a precaution. This will prevent accidental changes to the room geometry.
Index
82
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
4.4.3.2 Dividing a room

You can use the “Split Room” func-
tion to separate a room. Following
the operation there will be two
rooms.
Procedure
 Select the “Split Room” function. The cursor turns into a cross-
hair. The message line shows the following prompt: "Choose
start point on a wall in the room you want to split”.
Dividing a
 Move the cursor to the wall where you want to start the divi-
sion. The wall is displayed as a selected object.
 Click on the division point in the first wall. The cursor moves
a polyline. The message line shows the following prompt: "Set
path for splitting room. End by selecting a point on a wall in the
Basic functions
room”.
 Click on the connection point in the second wall. The room
has been divided. The function is stopped.
configuration
configuration
4.4.3.3 Dividing a wall
Dividing a wall may be neces-

sary, for example, if the wall type
at a location is changed or the
extensions,
temperature on the reverse of a

extensions,
Dividing a portion of this wall must be con-

figured differently.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Select the wall to be divided (click ).

 Select the "Split Wall” function. The cursor assumes a division symbol.
 Point to the division point and click . The wall has been separated into two in-
dependent components. You can configure each one separately.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
83
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
4.4.3.4 Joining divided walls
Joining two wall components may be necessary if a door or a window is to be placed

over the dividing point.
 Select both wall components to be joined.
Join divided walls
 Select the "Merge Walls” function. The two components

have been merged.
4.4.3.5 Redefining the room's reference wall

Basic functions
All of a room's walls are numbered consecutively. The wall with the number "1" is the
reference wall of the room, to which the various other functions are oriented. Thus for
example, a suspended ceiling (see 4.3.5, page 64) is aligned parallel to the reference
wall. You can modify this situation by redefining the reference wall of the room.
Application
 Select the desired wall (in this case wall 4) by clicking .
 Select the "Set Side as first in Room”. The selected wall is given the number 1.
Index
84
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
4.5 Compiling the building model

You can compile all storeys of the building into a common model, or show individual
models of other application types and storeys. The main applications of this function
are varied. It can be used for example:
• To create parts lists over all storeys (see 15.5, page 382)
• For inter-floor installation
Import- and Model Admi
• For designing rising points

• To display adjacent floor plans as
(1) an aid planning work
• To display the planning of other
application types that affect your
(2) own work
• To check the congruence of sto-
Basic functions
reys
(3) • To compile the rendering model
configuration
configuration
To display a different model, start the "Import- and Model Admin” in the toolbar and
then select the "Complete List of All Models in the Project” tab. This lists all the mod-
els (storeys) of the active application type (1). Models with the symbol are invisi-
ble. Storeys with the symbol are visible.
extensions,
To switch a drawing between visible and invisible, click once on the or

extensions,
symbol. The change is visible on the screen immediately. Selection an application

type (1) filters the display in the list (2) to this application type.
For a better distinction between the models shown, each of them can be assigned a
unique colour (3).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Double clicking on a model shown

displays the "Insert file adminitrator" dia-
logue box. It includes the same functions
as the "Import- and Model Admin" men-
tioned above, but also allows changes
(4) directly in the selected model. To do this,
click Open (4).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
85
Introduction
Erro Ventilation systems

r!
5 Ventilation systems
Use the functions in

the “Duct Work”
application type to de-
sign a ventilation sys-
tem.
The description here

assumes that the
building model has
been constructed and
the required air volume
flows of the rooms are
known.
In the first step you configure the ventilation system in the building model and specify
the volume flows as room data. In this way, you are preparing the layout for a con-
Basic functions
trolled ventilation of a residential building and the heat load calculation (see 6.3.2.2,
page 109). Then you develop the ventilation system: You place the air handling unit
and the air terminals and construct the ductwork.
Index
86
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Ventilation systems Erro
r!
5.1 Entering and calculating the volume flows

5.1.1 Checking and correcting building data
You configure the general parameters of the system and for the entire building in the
building data.
Building
(1)
(2)
(3)

configuration
 Open the “Building Information” dialogue box and switch to the "Air Flow Re-
quirements" tab.
 Select the ventilation system (1).
 Enter the temperature of the supply air (2) and the building-related minimum air
extensions,
exchange (3).
extensions,
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. You can configure the rooms.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
87
Introduction

r!
5.1.2 Check and correct room data
You define the air-conditioning behaviour of an individual room in the room data. You
select the type (1) and set the volume flow (2) as the air exchange rate per hour or in
cubic meters per hour. By entering the maximum air exchange rate (3) you are speci-
fying a limit for the air quantity adjustment for the controlled ventilation of a residential
building.
Room In-
(1)
Basic functions
(2)
(3)
 Select the "Room Information” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The
message line shows the “Point to the room you want to edit” prompt.
 Click in the room whose ventilation data you want to adjust. The "Room Infor-
mation” dialogue box is displayed.
 Switch to the “Air Flow Requirements” tab.
 Set the room type (1) in terms of ventilation.
 Check the minimum and maximum air exchange (2/3).
5.1.3 controlled ventilation of residential buildings

To ensure a minimum air exchange in well-sealed buildings, controlled ventilation of
a residential space is used. The additional heat recovery is a measure to save en-
ergy. Here, the warm air is exhausted from exhaust air rooms, fed through a heat ex-
changer and used to preheat the fresh air supplied. This is blown into the fresh air
rooms as supply air.
Index
88
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
To avoid excess or under pressure in the building, the sum of the volume flows for
supply and exhaust air must be the same in each case. To do this in DDS-CAD you

first balance the air volumes. In this way, the volume flows of the rooms are equal-
ised with each other within a given tolerance.
You can have the calculated volume flows displayed in the room label in the model.
Afterwards, select the air terminals and place them in the rooms. Finally, check the
capacity of the air terminals by carrying out a new calculation.
5.1.3.1 Balancing air volume in the building
Building
To balance the air volumes,

open the building information
dialogue under the “Air Flow
(2) Requirements” tab and click
Calculate (1). The calculation algo-
rithm proceeds in several steps.

(1)
configuration
Step 1
DDS-CAD calculates the volume flow of a room based on the minimum air exchange
and calculates the sum of the volume flows for supply and exhaust air.
extensions,
Step 2
extensions,
DDS-CAD increases the lower volume flow to the higher value. The difference (e.g.
the additional supply air) is divided among the other fresh air rooms. In doing so, the
program checks whether the maximum values of the individual rooms are reached.
Step 3
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
DDS-CAD checks whether the total air exchange in the building is achieved and
whether in doing so the maximum values for air exchange in the individual rooms are
reached.
The verification of the maximum values and the total air exchange in the building may
result in information that DDS-CAD displays in an information list, where necessary.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
89
Introduction

r!
Message in the information list Cause and possible remedy
"Balance between supply and exhaust Balancing is not possible if a volume flow has to be
air not possible...” raised to the extent that the maximum air exchange
rates of the rooms are exceeded. The message in-
dicates which volume flow (supply air/exhaust air)
cannot be increased. Check the ventilation settings
in the room data.
"Required building air exchange too The building air exchange ("minimum building") was
high...” determined to be too low. The balance between
rooms leads to significant exceedance. Check the
ventilation settings in the room data and/or correct
the minimum air exchange of the building.
Note:
In the worst cases, the air volumes can only be balanced with difficulty. For
smaller systems (in detached and semi-detached houses) you can check "Bal-
ance between storeys). In this case, it is easier to achieve a balance of the volume
flows between fresh air and exhaust air rooms.
The next step is to place the air terminals. Then carry out a new calculation to check
Basic functions
their capacity.
5.1.3.2 Checking the capacity of the air outlets
Open the building information

dialogue under the “Air Flow Re-
quirements” tab and click Calculate
(1). The steps of the air volume
(1) balancing are repeated. In addi-
tion, the air volume of each room
is distributed to the installed air
terminals.
The information
list reports all
rooms where the
(1) capacity of the
(2) air terminals is
insufficient. You
can use the
message to
correct the room:
 Select a line from the information list (1).
 Click Zoom object (2). The room is displayed magnified in the centre of the screen.
You can place additional air terminals.
Index
90
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
5.2 Controlled ventilation

To ensure a minimum air
Chapter 5 exchange rate in well-
page 51
sealed buildings con-
Create building Assign zones trolled ventilation is ap-
model (for usage unit)
Chapter 6.3.2 plied. The warm air is
page Error! sucked through a heat
Bookmark not exxchanger and used for
Ventilation systems for buildings:
preheating the supplied
Controlled ventilation Chapter 6.3.3 fresh air. This is injected
page Error!
into the rooms as supply
Bookmark not
Optimize and balance air flow re- air. With DDS-CAD you
quirements in usage unit Chapter 6.3.4 can design and calculate
page Error! controlled ventilation for
Bookmark not buildings.
Insert air terminals
chapter 6.3.5
page Error!
Bookmark not
Verify capacity air terminals
Basic functions
Chapter 6.3.6
page Error!
Print results Bookmark not
Chapter 6.3.7
page Error!
Bookmark not
5.2.1 Notes on the building model
configuration
configuration
The design of a controlled ventilation system requires a building model as described
in chapter 4 (from page 51). The room geometries and ceiling heights must be cor-
rect in order to calculate volume and air flow requirements correctly. In addition, the
following settings for the building and room information have to be checked:
extensions,
extensions,
Building
Room data
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
(2)
(1)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
91
Introduction

r!
For the building the infiltration through the building envelop must be correct. Open
the building information dialog and select the tab ”Heat Load”. For the air exchange
rate (n50) select the category „Ia: EnEV building with ventilation“ and enter the air ex-
change rate (1). Select the room type from the article database (2). This way the
20 21
type of ventilation and the factor allocated to the supply air flow .
5.2.2 Create zones, define usage units

DIN 1946-6 defines the planning requirements for air terminal assisted ventilation
systems in relation to building physics, ventilation technology, hygiene and energy
aspects. The central concept used in this case - the usage unit – ressembles an ap-
partment, house or a group of rooms covering multiple storeys. In accordance to DIN
1946-6 a usage unit is always composed out of multiple rooms. The following
workflow applies in DDS-CAD:
• In case the complete building belongs to a single usage unit (e.g. a single house),
no further action is required.
• If the building is divided into multiple uage units (in the sense of controlled ventila-
tion), you define each usage unit as a single zone. Afterwards the rooms need to
be assigned to the zone.
Basic functions
5.2.3 Select ventilation system

 Open the Building Information dialog and select the tab Air Flow Requirements.
 Select the ventilation system "Controlled ventilation" (1). In the dialog, all usage
units are listed.
 Select the usage unit to be calculated and click Calculate (2). The dialog "Con-
trolled ventilation" appears. You can set the properties of the usage unit and in-
sert the required amount for air balance.
Buidling
(1)
(2)
20
Supply room, extract room, etc.
21
DIN 1946-6 recommends the allocation of supply air according to the use of the room. The division is in accordance with
equation 22 using the factor fr in the calculation. The factors in table 14 are included in the article database.
Index
92
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

5.2.4 Optimize and balance air flows
To avoid over or under pressure in the building, the sum of the volume flow for the
supply and extract air must be the same. To do so, you first adjust and balance the
airflow between the rooms in a usage unit in DDS-CAD.
(4) First, check the properties

of the usage unit. Selec
tthe ventilation system (1),
(1) define the supply air tem-
perature (2) the number of
persons and the exchange
(2) (3) rate per person (3).
Next, switch to the tab

”Calculate” (4). In the upper part of the dialog you can see all the parameters that de-
termin the fresh air flow rate according to DIN 1946-6. The table lists all the rooms of
the usage unit. Follow these steps:
Basic functions
5.2.4.1 Calculate fresh air flow rate
According to DIN 1946-6, the outside air flow for a usage unit is determined by com-
paring three values, based on the following criteria:
• Number of persons, multiplied by the volume flow per person (1)
• Area of the usage unit, calculation according to table 5 (nominal ventilation) (2)
• Sum of the room values, calculation according to 7 (nominal ventilation) (3)
To execute the calculation, select Calculate (4).
(1) configuration
configuration
(2)
extensions,
(3)
Adjustments,
(4)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
93
Introduction

r!
The largest of these three values are
taken over (5) to reduce the flow,

which flows from the outside through
22
the building envelope . The result of
this calculation (7) is transferred as
proposal to Input „Selected“. The to-
tal supply air flow rate (9) is deter-
mined, while also addressing the total
extract air volume is known. All flow
rates are proportionally equivalent to
the supply air and extract air rooms.
The calculated values are shown in
the columns qv.ber and qv.gew (10). Both values (calculated and selected flow rate
in each room) match.
5.2.4.2 Correct calculated fresh air flow rate
The calculated outside air flow is a reference value resulting from the conditions of
the usage unit. You can modify, for example, the parameters of the proposed ventila-
tion system.

Basic functions
Enter the value at Input „se-

lected“.
[Enter]  Press [Enter]. DDS-CAD ac-
cepts the entered values as the
new supply air, thereby determin-
ing also the new extract air flow.
Simultaneously, a new appor-
tionment of the room follows. The
values int he columns qv.ber and
qv.gew are different now.
5.2.4.3 Change room properties
In case you like to further adjust the air distribution, you can change the air flow of
individual rooms manually. In this case you will be responsible to ensure that the bal-
ance between supply and exhaust air flow is maintained. DDS-CAD indicates when
both values differ.
 Click on the value qv.gew. The
context menu appears.
 Select Edit. You can enter a nu-
meric value, which can be based
on the values in the
"Min/Max" columns (1).
(1)
 Press [ESC]. The changed
value is highlighted in bold. A new
calculation of the outside air flow
rate is no longer possible. With
“Reset” you can reset the values
22
The infiltration through the building envelope is activated in the buiulding information dialog under the tab ”Heat Load” (see
6.3.1, page 93). Set the air exchange rate (n50) to the category Ia: EnEV with ventilation.
Index
94
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
and unlock it..

5.2.4.4 Apply calculation results
Basic functions
 Click OK. . The dialog is closed. The information dialog lists all rooms for which
air flow values are missing.
 Confirm the information overview with OK. . You return to the Building Informa-
tion dialog.
 Confirm the Building Information dialog with OK. . The dialog is closed. The
information in the room text is not updated yet.
 Perform a refresh screen. The room text is updated and shows the calculated
flow rates.
configuration
5.2.5 Insert air terminals according to air flow requirements
configuration
Insert the required number of air terminals. You can base the number of required air
terminals on the information in the room text. For a better overview for the next step
you should activate the Symbol Text. In the model, the air terminals can be used with
the default values from the article database.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
95
Introduction

r!
5.2.6 Verify and balance air terminal capacity
When invoking the calculation again and confirming it after you have inserted air ter-
minals, DDS-CAD can check whether there sufficient capacity is assigned. In addi-
tion, the calculated volume flows are transferred to the individual air terminals.
 Open the calculation dialog "controlled ventilation" in the usage unit..
 Click OK. .
If the capacity is too low, the information list will show you this. You will receive a
notice in which room the problem is located:
Basic functions
If the capacity is sufficient, the dialog will be closed. The volume flow of the room
was transferred to the air terminals therein.

Index
96
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
5.2.7 Print results

(1)
(2) (3)
Basic functions
 Confirm the calculation results with OK. . The dialog "controlled ventilation" is
closed, you return to the building information dialog.
 Click Print . You can select a report template for printing.
5.3 Ventilation system components

5.3.1 Air handling unit
To call an air handling unit, select the “Air Handeling Unit (AHU)”
configuration
function. DDS-CAD accesses the product database. You can also
configuration
load data records from various manufacturers (see 21.2.5,
page 557).
Equip-
You can also expand the product database and create your own
items (see 21.2.3, page 551). In terms of symbols used, you can
refer to external data in the DWG/DXF (see 22.3, page 588) and
extensions,
3DS formats (see 22.4, page 589).

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
97
Introduction

r!
5.3.2 Air terminals
This chapter describes

the use of air terminals
as a single object,
Air passage
which is first placed as
a symbol and later con-
nected to the ventilation
duct. In another
method, an air terminal
can be applied when
constructing the duct
network as the end of a
pipe section (see 8.3.3,
page 193).
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
Application
 Select the “Air Terminal” function. The “Air Terminal” dialogue box appears.
 Select an item (1).
 Adjust the mounting height and mount type (2).
 Click OK . The cursor moves the symbol.
Note – air terminals with side connection

When using air terminals with side connection, make sure the rotation is correct. If
a passage is to be automatically integrated into the duct system later on (see
8.4.4.4, page 206), the connection point must be directed towards the duct.
The position of the connection

point is displayed in different
ways, depending on the object.
The graphic shows three exam-
ples. The connection point indi-
cator (1) has been highlighted for
(1) clarity.
Changing material (3/4)

You can force a material change for the course of the connection after exiting the
main duct (3) and after the first bend (4). Enable the function and select the desired
material (5)
Index
98
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

(3)
(4)
(5)
5.3.3 Load object for simulating sub-networks/consumers

5.3.3.1 Introduction
The load object for ventilation consumers is used to simulate individual consumers
and sub-networks. By using this method you can simulate parts of the ventilation sys-
tem without fully constructing the system in DDS-CAD. For example, you can collect
the volume flows of part of a building in an object in order to allow a short-term calcu-
Basic functions
lation of the main pipe sections.
5.3.3.2 Selection and use
Use as a dynamic symbol

Call the "Free duct load in the "Insert” menu.
configuration
configuration
Use as the end object of a
ventilation duct
When building the ventilation
network, you can end the duct
extensions,
with the load object.

Adjustments,
5.3.3.3 Configuring the load object

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
99
Introduction

r!
(3) (2) (1)
 Determine the medium by selecting the item (1).


Basic functions
Define the connection values by inputting them manually (2).

 Enter the length (3) of the symbol in millimetres (mm).
Index
100
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Heat load calculation Erro
r!
6 Heat load calculation

6.1 General principles
6.1.1 Heat load calculation according to DIN EN 12831
The heat load calculation determines the heat supply required for a building as well
as the rooms within the building. The calculation is designed to assist the dimension-
ing of the heating surfaces in the individual rooms as well as of the heat generator.
The algorithms used in DDS-CAD are based on DIN EN 12831:2003 and the Sup-
plement 1 of 2008.
A heat load calculation with DDS-CAD requires the building model (see chapter 4)
and – in the case of a planned ventilation system – the rooms' volume flows entered
and balanced in the DDS ventilation module (see chapter 6.1.3.1, page 84). The fol-
lowing graphic shows the general procedure prescribed by the DIN standard on the
left and, on the right, the necessary operations in DDS-CAD:
Basic functions
Heat load calculation according to Operations in DDS-CAD
DIN EN 12831
Determine meteorological data Design ventilation system
Define status of each room Configure building data
Define properties of the components Configure room data
Calculate transmission heat loss Check components
configuration
configuration
Calculate ventilation heat loss Perform calculation
Calculate total heat loss Print results extensions,
Calculate heat-up load

extensions,
Chapter 7
Calculate total heat load Page 101
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
The effort for a calculation is always determined by the current starting position and
the available data. Therefore the following chapter describes some conceivable situa-
tions. The various strategies for processing the project with DDS-CAD are derived
from this. Afterwards there are notes on the important settings for achieving an accu-
rate calculation result.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
101
Introduction
Erro Heat load calculation

r!
6.1.2 Processing effort according to the data available
Different situations can arise considering the available starting data and the data to
be found. Please note that there may be some overlapping in the project:
Standard case: Special case:

Chapter 7.2 Standard heat load is known
Standard heat load is not known Page 103
Check and correct building data Building data...
Check and correct room data Enter heat load
Chapter 7.3
Check and correct components Page 106 Perform calculation
Component position (to external

air, heated/unheated space, soil) Chapter 7.4
Page 115
Basic functions
U-values
Yes Chapter 7.4.3
U-value Page 124
Enter
known?
No Chapter 8
Calculate Chapter 7.4.2.3 Page 132
Page 121
Perform calculation
Place heating surfaces
Underfloor heating
Print results
Chapter 7.5
Page 130 Radiator
In most cases, there are no reliable data about the standard heat load of the rooms.
These data therefore have to be calculated. A decisive parameter is the heat transfer
coefficient of the components (U-value). Known U-values can be entered directly.
Unknown U-values have to be calculated. Here, the composition of a component is
structured in tabular form and the U-value is updated at the same time. In rare cases,
you can refer to a documented heat load calculation and transfer the data into the
building model manually.
Note on underfloor heating

If underfloor heating is planned, the U-value for the floor has to be calculated in
each case, and the location of the heat pipe has to be defined! (See 6.4.2.3, page
121)
Index
102
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
6.2 Checking and correcting building data

6.2.1 Geographical and meteorological data
In the building data you can define basic settings for location, name and use of the
building (1). You get access to the U-values of all materials used in the project (2)
and you can configure the heat load calculation algorithm (3).
Building
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5)
(6)
Basic functions
(7)
(8)
You assign meteorological data

to the building by way of the lo-
cation (4) . DDS-CAD transfers
the standard outside tempera-
ture Θe (5), the mean annual
temperature Θm,e (6) and the
configuration
height above sea level (7) from
configuration
the product database. You can
change these values manually if
necessary.
Height above
To start with, the value for
ΔZ Input "Base height” (8) is trans-
extensions,
Base height ferred from Input "Height

extensions,
NN = 0
above sea level” (7). If the two
values match, this corresponds
to a building with a floor slab on
the ground. If the building is partially recessed into the ground, reduce the value in
Input " Base height” (8). The difference between the two values corresponds to the
Adjustments,
depth ΔZ that the building is sunk into the ground.

Adjustments,
DDS-CAD automatically defines the component position of the outer walls in the
basement storeys ("against outside air" or "against soil"). If the exterior walls are
more than 2/3 in the ground according to ΔZ, all exterior walls of the basements are
calculated "against soil". On the other hand, if the proportion in the soil is low, the
calculation is made "against outside air".
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
103
Introduction

r!
Warning
When automatically detecting the component position, DDS-CAD assumes the

ground is level. A slope of the building (where only some exterior walls are in the
ground) is not recognised. In this case, you need to correct the component posi-
tion of the exterior wall manually (see 6.4.3, page 124).
6.2.2 Configuring the heat load calculation
(1)
(2) (8)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(9)
Basic functions
(6)
(7)
(1) The values for the temperature Θe and the mean annual temperature Θm,e (1) are
transferred from the general settings as meteorological data.
(2) You must always check the groundwater depth and adjust to the prevailing local
conditions.
Note
If the distance between the floor slab and the water table is less than 3m, the cal-
culation of the transmission heat requirement will consider all components in con-
tact with the soil with the correction factor GW of 1.15 (see DIN EN 12831 Supp. 1;
section 3.4.3).
(3) The building location e (shielding coefficient) affects the ventilation heat loss. The
value depends on the shielding class and the number of exterior walls exposed to the
wind. You can configure the shielding class. DDS-CAD determines the number of
exterior walls "against outside air" and selects the required value.
(4) The air tightness of the building shell n50 is the parameter for determining the
natural infiltration. Wind flow and temperature differences cause a pressure differ-
Index
104
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
ence between the interior and the exterior of the building. This results in an exchange
of air, which takes place thanks to gaps (e.g. windows) in the building shell.

There are five levels of air tightness, where an air exchange rate (per hour) is speci-
fied for each level at a pressure difference of 50 Pa pressure differential between in-
side and outside. If you select a setting in "Air exchange rate n50", then the as-
sociated numerical value is displayed in Display "Air exchange rate”. It is transferred to
each heated room and included in the calculation of the ventilation heat loss (see
6.3.2, page 107).
(5) The building mass affects the heat storage capacity Ceff and thus the calculated
result of the reheating energy ΦRH (with intermittent heating mode). The DIN standard
refers to two levels for light and medium duty and/or heavy duty construction.
(6) Thermal bridges such as window lintels, window sills etc. affect the U-value of a
component and thus the transmission heat loss through the component. Their influ-
ence therefore needs to be considered in the heat load calculation. In "Con-
sider thermal bridges ΔUWB" select how this should be considered:
Setting Meaning
Without on-site DDS-CAD applies a flat-rate factor of 0.1 to the building. It is as-
Basic functions
consideration sumed that the structural design of thermal bridges has been
carried out without special thermal protection measures.
With on-site DDS-CAD applies a flat-rate factor of 0.05 to the entire building.
consideration It is assumed that the structural design of thermal bridges has
been carried out to DIN 4108 Supplement 2.
Detailed evidence The heat load calculation is carried out in detail, taking into ac-
count each individual thermal bridge in the building. This setting
requires that all thermal bridges have been introduced in the
building model (see 6.4.4, page 129).
(7) Options opens a dialogue box for default settings. You can select the international
configuration
version of DIN EN 12831 (8) and modify the temperature of the reverse of internal
configuration
walls globally if no room has been defined there (9). This situation arises during the
graphical room capture along chimneys and shafts.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
105
Introduction

r!
6.3 Checking and correcting room data

6.3.1 General settings

Check the room height in the
“Room Data” tab (1). This affects
the volume of the room and thus
the heat load.
(1) (2) Selecting a room type from the

product database (2) define the
default values for the required
internal temperature of the room
as well as the hygienically nec-
essary minimum air exchange.
Check these settings in the
"Heat Load” tab and make any
necessary corrections.
If a reheating factor for the room

Basic functions
is to be included, check "Add

reheating heat load” and select
the value (3).
(3) "Manual” (4) allows you to enter

the transmission and ventilation
heat losses manually. Use this
method
a) if these values are known (to
save time)
b) for rooms that extend over
several storeys (see 6.3.4,
page 112).
Index
106
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
6.3.2 Notes on the ventilation heat loss ΦV

The ventilation heat loss is the amount of heat that escapes out of the building as a
result of ventilation processes (e.g. leaking through windows or doors, through chim-
ney flues and air-conditioning systems). The colder air that is flowing in has to be
heated. The critical values are the volume flow (which results from the air exchange)
and the temperature of the air that is flowing in.
With regard to the calculation, DIN EN 12831 distinguishes between

• natural ventilation (no air-conditioning systems, e.g. through windows)
• mechanical ventilation (with air-conditioning systems)
The calculation algorithms are therefore fundamentally different from each other.
Note:
To accurately determine the ventilation heat loss in buildings with mechanical ven-
tilation, you need the DDS ventilation module, including the "Kontrollierte
Wohnraumlüftung" (Controlled ventilation of residential buildings) module. If these
modules are not contained in your licence, DDS-CAD always assumes that the
ventilation is natural ventilation.
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD
107
Introduction

r!
6.3.2.1 Natural ventilation
A natural ventilation (through cracks in the building shell, e.g. windows) is automati-
cally applied by DDS-CAD if the DDS ventilation module and the "Ventilation of resi-
dential buildings” module are not included in your license.
On the other hand, if both mod-

ules are included, select the
ventilation system in the Building
(1)
Information dialogue under the
“Air Flow Requirements” tab (1).
In this way, all rooms are
classed as naturally ventilated.
The calculation with natural ventilation compares the influences of natural infiltration
and the hygienic minimum air volume flow:
Formula Meaning and reference

Basic functions
symbol
inf,ie Natural infiltration (=air tightness of the building shell n50)
Wind flow and temperature differences cause pressure from outside on the
building. This cold outside air enters through permeable joints (e.g. windows)
and must be heated up. To calculate the natural infiltration:
 Define the air-tightness of the building shell (n50), see 6.2.2, page 104.
nmin Hygienic minimum air volume flow

For hygiene reasons, a minimum air exchange is required for each room. The
minimum exchange of room air nmin is accepted as a suggestion from the product
database when you select the room type.
 If required, correct Input "nmin" in the "Room Information” dialogue win-

dow (1)
The resulting losses of heat due to

both causes are first calculated
separately and presented (3).
Whichever value is highest is con-
sidered to be the ventilation heat
loss that applies for this room (4).
(3)
(1)
For natural ventilation, it is as-
sumed that the air flowing in has
(4) thermal properties of the outside
(2) air. Due to this assumption, the
temperature of the air flowing in (2)
cannot be entered. The value that
is displayed is not taken into consideration for the calculation.
Index
108
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
6.3.2.2 Mechanical ventilation

The consideration of mechanical ventilation requires the DDS ventilation module, in-
cluding the "Controlled ventilation of residential buildings” module. In the Building In-
formation dialogue, select the ventilation system (1) and define the supply air tem-
perature (2). The room type (3) decides which ventilation parameters (4) are enabled.
Building Room Infor
(1)
(2)
(3)
Basic functions
(5)
(4)
configuration
configuration
Warning!
After changing the ventilation parameters in the building or room dialogue AL-
WAYS calculate the volume flows. Only then do the changed settings take effect
in the heat load calculation. To do this, click Calculate in the Building Information dia-
extensions,
logue (5).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
109
Introduction

r!
If the building has a ventilation
system, the hygienic minimum air

exchange rate (1) has no effect.
The DIN EN 12831 standard as-
sumes that this value is provided
by the system and the compari-
(1)
(2) son with the natural infiltration is
(3) skipped.
(4)
(5)
Instead, the following effects need to be considered:
Formula Meaning and reference

symbol
inf,ie Natural infiltration (=air tightness of the building shell n50)
Wind flow and temperature differences cause pressure from outside on the
Basic functions
building. This cold outside air enters through permeable joints (e.g. windows)
and must be heated up. The heat loss through natural infiltration is known as
ΦV,inf,i (1). To calculate the natural infiltration:
 Define the air-tightness of the building shell (n50), see 6.2.2, page 104.
SU,i Supply air volume flow

The supply air volume flow is the air added to the room directly via valves. The
difference between the temperature of the supplied air and the required room
temperature must be compensated by the heating system. A thermally relevant
volume flow only arises if the temperature of the injected air is less than the
standard internal temperature of the room. The heat loss of the supply air flow
is called ΦV,SU,i (2).
 Adjust the volume flow and the temperature of the supply air in the DDS
ventilation module. See above.
mech,inf,ie Outside air flow due to mechanical infiltration (4)

If the ventilation system in the room under consideration creates low pressure,
cold outside air is drawn in through permeable joints (e.g. windows) and has to
be heated up. For exhaust air rooms of a toilet ventilation system, enter the
value manually. In other ventilation systems, this value is calculated. If the ex-
haust air flow of the building is greater than its supply air flow, this results in a
loss of heat.
mech,inf,ij Overflowing air from adjacent areas due to mechanical infiltration
Air flows in from adjacent rooms if the room under consideration is an exhaust
air room or is connected to an exhaust air room via an opening.
 Set the value manually and define the temperature of the inflowing air (5).
Index
110
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

6.3.3 Notes on unheated rooms – the factor bu
DIN EN 12831 stipulates that, to calculate the heat that is lost to unheated adjacent
rooms, the temperature reduction factor bu is to be used. This factor takes into con-
sideration the difference between the temperature of the unheated room and the
standard outside temperature Θe. In DDS-CAD, a room is considered to be unheated
if "Heated” (1) has not been selected. The dialogue window also displays "bu"
(3). You can determine the factor bu in two variants – depending on the values that
are known:
Calculating temperature reduction factor bu

 Select "Room temp. Θint" (2)
 Enter the temperature of the unheated room. The
(1)
(2) temperature reduction factor bu is calculated in
DDS-CAD.
Entering the temperature reduction factor bu
Basic functions
 Select "bu" (3). An input field for bu is displayed
(4).
 Enter the numerical factor or click … (4) to se-
lect a standard value.
(3)
(4)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
111
Introduction

r!
6.3.4 Notes on rooms spanning several storeys
If – as in the image to the left – a room

spans several storeys, we recommend the
following strategy in terms of the heat load
2nd calculation:
The rooms are detected and calculated

1st separately according to the storey. Then
note down the heat losses in the upper floor
and use "Manual" to set these to "0".
Gro Check "Manual" in the ground floor too
and add the upper floor values.
Building model structure
Measure rooms
separately
Basic functions
Heat load calculation
Calculate rooms
separately
1st floor
Note down ΦV,i and ΦT,i

ΦV,i and ΦT,i

Set "manual" = 0
Ground floor
ΦV,i and ΦT,i

check "manual"
ΦV,i and ΦT,i

Add values from 1st
fl
Index
112
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
6.3.5 Note on heigh ceilings – the correction factor fH,i

According to EN 12831 the fol-
lowing applies for rooms for
which the designed heat load is
below 60W/m2 and are large
and/or high rooms (5m up to
15m) a correction factor has to
be applied.
DDS-CAD automatically detects

the ceiling height and checks
whether the application is eligi-
ble and activates in the dialog
(1) „Room data“ „Room
height correction factor” (1).
Select the heating method and
arrangement of heating
surfaces.
Strahlung: Warmer Fußboden
Strahlung: Warme Decke (Temperaturniveau < 40 °C)
Strahlung: abwärts gerichtete Strahlung mittlerer und hoher Temperatur aus großer Höhe
Basic functions
Konvektion: Natürliche Warmluftkonvektion
Konvektion: Querstrom aus niedriger Höhe
Konvektion: abwärts gerichtet aus großer Höhe
Konvektion: Querstrom mittlerer und hoher Temperatur aus mittlerer Höhe
6.3.6 Global settings for all rooms

You can define global settings for every room when calculating the ventilation heat
loss and the reheating load.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
113
Introduction

r!
Building
Basic functions
(1)
 Open the Building Information dialogue box and switch to the "Heat Load” tab.
 Click Set all . The "Set all” dialogue box appears.
 Click the option for the desired processing step.

 Configure the associated parameters.
 Click OK . The configuration is applied to all rooms in the building model.
Index
114
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
6.4 Checking and correcting components

6.4.1 Terms and connections
A component may be a wall, a floor, a door and so on. Therefore walls, floors, ceil-
ings, etc. can be summarised under the term "component groups". The sum of all
relevant component properties determines the transmission heat loss. Relevant
properties of a component are its dimensions, its type and its position.
Components - component groups
Wall Floor Door Window
Ceiling Roof Thermal bridge
U-value from... Drawing operation
Item of the component type
Basic functions
Component type Component properties
manual input
U-value
Dimensions
Calculation
Component type
Assignment from Item
Component location
product database
Component location to...
Outside air
configuration
configuration
Assignment by... heated room
Automatic detection unheated room
Manual adjustment Soil

extensions,
extensions,
Transmission heat loss
The dimensions of a component are defined when constructing the building model as
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
described in chapter 4 (from page 51) by corresponding drawing operations. It is an

individual property of each individual component in the building. Component type and
position code are discussed in the following sections.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
115
Introduction

r!
6.4.1.1 Component type
The component type is the classification of the component in a group of other com-
ponents with the same thermotechnical behaviour. This classification is also first de-
fined when constructing the building model, by selecting an item (1). The graphic
shows an example of a wall, to which the item "AW54" has been allocated.
(1) (2)
A component's U-value (2) is always directly linked to the item (1). To start with, it is
taken from the item (e.g. AW54) when constructing the building model, but must be
Basic functions
corrected by manual input or calculation before the heat load calculation takes place
(see 6.4.2, page 118). You can see an overview of all component types in the build-
ing model in the Building Information dialogue, under the "U-Value” tab:
Building
The term "component type" can be differentiated by the various component groups
(wall, floor, ceiling, etc.). In this case we talk about wall types, floor types, ceiling
types, etc.
Index
116
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
6.4.1.2 Position code

The position code is an individual property of the separate component and describes
the situation on its reverse. According to DIN EN 12831, a component can be di-
rected against outside air, heated and unheated rooms and against soil. The calcula-
tion algorithm for heat loss depends on that accordingly.
The position code is initially determined automati-

4 3 cally when constructing the building model. DDS-
3 4 2 CAD recognises whether there is a heated or un-
heated room at the reverse, for example. In addi-
1
5 tion, DDS-CAD automatically divides a continuous
3
wall if two rooms adjoin its reverse. The position
2 4 2 code is calculated automatically in this case too. If
necessary, you may need to divide a wall manually
1 1 (see 4.4.3.3, page 83) and correct the position
code manually (see 6.4.3, page 124).
The status – calculated automatically (3) or selected manually (4) is shown under the
"Heat Load” tab of the component dialogue. The example (below) shows that the po-
sition code of this exterior wall is set to "Calculated”. In addition, the calculated re-
Basic functions
sults of the component (5) are displayed.
(3)
configuration
configuration
(4)
(5) Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
117
Introduction

r!
6.4.2 The heat transfer coefficient (U-value)
6.4.2.1 Preliminary remarks, calling the "U-value" function
The U-value describes the heat loss of a component type based on its material com-
position and the temperature difference between front and back in watts per square
meter and Kelvin (W/m²⋅K).
If the U-values used in the project are known, a calculation is no longer necessary
and you can enter the values manually. If the components' U-values are not know,
then they must be calculated. The composition of a component (the layering) is struc-
tured in tabular form. There are two ways to adjust the U-values:
• Overview of the U-values in the Building Information dialogue
• "U-value" tab in the dialogue of a specific component
Overview of the U-values in the Building Information dialogue

The Building Information dialogue contains a list of component types used in the pro-
ject. These are differentiated only by their items. This method is suitable for checking
and globally correcting several component types:
Basic functions
Building
If the U-value = 0, this component type is not included in the heat load calculation.
This may be a default or an error. To edit the U-value of a component type:
 Select the entry by clicking . The context menu appears.
 Select "Edit Properties”. The "U-Value Calculation” dialogue box appears.
Index
118
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
The text colour of the entries and the various indicators show the current status of a

component type (see below).
Layering Pipe Meaning

Heat load The U-value has been transferred from the prod-
calculation uct database but not yet adjusted.
Manual The U-value has been entered manually
The U-value has been calculated according to the
layering.
Underfloor The underfloor heating cannot be calculated. To
heating do this, you have to construct the layering and
calculation define the position of the heat pipe.
The layering of this floor type has been con-
structed, but the position of the heat pipe has not
yet been defined. The underfloor heating cannot
be calculated yet.
The layering of this floor type and the position of
the heat pipe have been defined. The underfloor
heating can be calculated.
Basic functions
Calling the "U-Value” tab for a specific component
You can open the room data for any component by double clicking in the model or
from the list of components. Select the "U-Value” tab. Changes are applied to all
components that use the same item.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
119
Introduction

r!
6.4.2.2 Assigning known U-value manually
If the U-value of the component is known, you can assign it to the component di-
rectly. This method saves time compared to constructing a layering arrangement.
Warning!
This method is not possible for floors with underfloor heating. For these floors, a
layering arrangement has to be built up and the position of the heat pipe defined
(see below).
(1) (2)
Basic functions
(3)
Application
 Click Manual (1). The "Manual U-Value” dialogue box appears.

 Enter the U-value and density.
 Click OK . The list (2) displays information on a manually entered U-value. The
new values are displayed (3)
Index
120
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
6.4.2.3 Calculating the U-value through layer structure

If the U-value of a component is not known, you must determine this by calculation.
To do this, construct the component in layers from inside to outside. Using the mate-
rial properties of each individual layer, DDS-CAD calculates the resulting U-value, the
density and the dew point on the surface of the component.
At the same, the software has to differentiate between composite and non-composite
components:
Non-composite components consist of only one

area segment, i.e. 100% of the area is formed by one
and the same layering. Typical examples are solid
100% brick walls.
The layering is formed once for 100% of the area.
Basic functions
Composite components consist of more than one
area segments with different layers (e.g. walls in
timber frame construction, roof areas). In this case,
70%
each area segment needs to be built up separately.
30%
The layers are built up proportionally in succession.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
121
Introduction

r!
Application – constructing the layering:
 Start the "U-Value” function according to one of the methods described above.
The "U-Value” dialogue box appears. The table displaying component layering is
empty.
 Click Add (1). The product database enables the materials selection.
 Choose the material of the first (inner) layer by double clicking . The product
database is closed. The first layer has been inserted into the table.
 Adjust the area segment (2) and the thickness of the layer (3) in millimetres
(mm). To do this, click in the corresponding field. The current U-value is calcu-
lated and displayed straight away (4).
(5)
(2) (3)
Basic functions
(1)
(4)
 Repeat the procedure until the layering of the area segment is complete.
 For a composite component, build any other area segments in the same way
until the sum of the area segments is 100%.
 Check the settings of the interior and exterior heat transfer resistances Rsi/Rse
(5) and click OK . The calculated U-value now applies to all components of the
project that are associated with this item.
Index
122
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Modifying the layer structure

You can edit the layering of a component later. This means you can move their posi-
tion in the table (6), use the context menu (7) to modify their properties or delete the
layer.
(7)
(6)
(7)
Basic functions
Underfloor heating: defining the position of the heat pipe
 Select the layer containing the pipe by clicking . The context menu appears.
 Select "UFH pipe layer”. The "UFH Pipe Layer” dialogue box appears.
 Enter the height of the pipe (centre line) above the lower edge of the layer and
click OK . The value is transferred to the table. It can be corrected by clicking
.
configuration
configuration
Note
When you select an item for the floor, you can use the "component" filter to see
the layerings prepared according to DIN EN 1264 Part 4.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
123
Introduction

r!
6.4.3 Notes on the position code (reverse of the component)
6.4.3.1 Preliminary remarks
In order to calculate the heat load of a room correctly, the situation at the reverse of
the component must be determined. During the graphical capture of the areas and
rooms, DDS-CAD: already detects for example, whether there is a heated or un-
heated room at the reverse of a wall and which temperatures prevail there. Some-
times it may be necessary to bypass the automated results and define the position
code manually:
Example 1 – Townhouse with adjoining buildings

You are editing a townhouse, which is directly adjacent
to other heated buildings (1). By default, DDS-CAD as-
sumes that the reverse of all exterior walls is directed
(2
against outside air. In this case, correct the position
(1 (1
code setting for the partition walls to the other buildings
(2).
Basic functions
Example 2 – Single storey

You are editing a single storey in a large building. The
adjacent floors (1) are not part of your remit. In this
case it is sufficient to only capture the relevant storey in
(1) the building model. However, you have to check and
correct the position code of the ceiling and the floor (2).
(2)
(1)
Example 3 – Components in contact with the soil on slopes

You are editing a building on a hillside. Here, one exte-
rior wall (1) of the ground floor is to be calculated
against the soil, while the other exterior walls border the
(1) outside air. In this case too, you have to check the posi-
tion code of the exterior walls and divide them where
necessary (see 4.4.3.3, page 83).
For more information on components in contact with the soil, please refer 6.4.3.4,
page 127.
Index
124
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
6.4.3.2 Correcting the position code manually

To correct the position code:
 Select "Manual” (1). You can select the position code.
 Select the position code. DDS-CAD expects specific data, depending on the set-
ting.
Basic functions
(1)
outdoor against soil (2)

DDS-CAD refers to the building settings and auto-
matically determines the factors for
• the fluctuation of the average temperature (fG1)
configuration
• the difference between standard outside tem-
configuration
perature and the mean annual outdoor tempera-
ture (fG2)
• the influence of groundwater (GW)
(See also chapter 6.2, page 103).
(2)
extensions,
extensions,
Outdoor against air

The temperature at the reverse of the component is transferred from the building set-
tings (see 6.2, page 103).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Indoor against unheated room

You can set the temperature at the reverse of the component manually or use the
temperature reduction factor for unheated adjacent rooms (bu). You can take default
values from the product database. To do this, click … .
Indoor against heated room

Enter the temperature at the reverse of the component.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
125
Introduction

r!
6.4.3.3 Resetting manual changes to the position code
You can reset manually changed position codes for the whole model back to the
status "calculated":
Building
Basic functions
(1)
 Open the building information dialogue box and switch to the "Heat Load” tab.
 Click Set all . The "Sett all” dialogue box appears.
 Select "from manual to calculated position code”.

 Click OK . The position code has been set to "calculated" for all components in
the model.
Index
126
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
6.4.3.4 Notes on components in contact with soil

The position code is shown in
the list of components in the
"Room Information” dialogue
box. The example shows a room
in the basement. The exterior
walls (1 and 2) and the floor are
directed against the soil.
Basic functions
DDS-CAD automatically sets the floor of the lowest storey "against soil". The same
applies to the exterior walls if the building is sunken into the ground. This setting is
configured in the Building Information dialogue (see 6.2.1, page 103).
In general, the transmission heat loss of a component is determined by its thermal

transfer coefficient (U-value). In the case of components in contact with soil, the heat
transfer is also affected by the soil. The U-value calculated from the material proper-
configuration
ties of a floor panel must be corrected for this. The resulting value (Uequiv) is ulti-
configuration
mately used to calculate the transmission heat loss of components in contact with
soil. DDS-CAD determines Uequiv according to DIN EN 12831, from tables 4 to 7. The
following example shows an excerpt from table 4:
B'-value Uequiv,bf (for z=0) [W/²mK] Uequiv therefore de-

[m] pends on two pa-
extensions,
No Usoil = Usoil = Usoil = Usoil = rameters:

extensions,
insulation 2.0 1.0 0.5 0.25

W/m²K W/m²K W/m²K W/m²K • the U-value
2 1.3 0.77 0.55 0.33 0.17 • the value B'
4 0.88 0.59 0.45 0.30 0.17

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
6 0.68 0.48 0.38 0.27 0.17

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
127
Introduction

r!
The component dialogue of a floor in contact with soil displays all relevant data.
(2) (1)
(4)
(2) (5)
Basic functions
The U-value of the component (1) can be entered manually or calculated precisely by
constructing the layering (see 6.4.2, page 118). The value B' (2) results from the ratio
between the observed area of the floor panel (3) and half of its circumference (4).
The value of B' can only be calculated precisely for a single room if it is directly con-
nected to the exterior wall. For interior rooms (without exterior wall) B' is calculated
for the entire building and transferred to the room.
The corrected U-value Uequiv (5) is interpolated with values and intermediate values
from the DIN standard tables.
Index
128
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
6.4.4 Thermal bridges

If thermal bridges (e.g.window lintels, window sills, etc.) considered in detail, first
check the configuration of the heat load calculation in the Building Information dia-
logue (see 6.2.2, page 104). Next, you have to add the relevant components – in the
case of a window. To do this, use the list of components in the "Room Information”
dialogue:
Room Inform

configuration
(1) (2) (3)
(4) extensions,
extensions,
 Select the component to which you want to assign the thermal bridge (1).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Select the "thermal bridge" component type in the drop-down list (2).
 Click Add (3). The product database is displayed.
 Select the desired item. The "Thermal bridge” dialogue box appears.
 Check the length (4) and click OK . The thermal bridge has been inserted into
the list of components and can be used in the calculation.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
129
Introduction

r!
6.5 Performing calculations and printing results

You can start the heat load calculation at any time from the Building Information dia-
logue or from the room data.
Warning!
Modified settings are only considered in the results and the printouts after perform-
ing the calculation. Therefore, you must repeat the calculation after changing a
setting.
Building Room data

Basic functions
(2)
(1) (3)
Starting the calculation

 Click Calculate (1). The results (2) are updated.
Index
130
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Printing the calculation results

 Click Print (3). A selection of different reports is displayed.
 Select the desired report. The report is created. The taskbar at the bottom of the
screen shows the button with the symbol:
 Click . The print preview is displayed: You can print the document.
The following reports are available:
Report filename Contents

HRE_Part_Heating_Loss.rpt You get a list of all components used on the
building exterior surfaces with U-value, wrap
area and heat loss.
HRE_Part_Heating_Loss_Graph.rpt The heat losses of the exterior surfaces are
displayed in a table. Their share of total heat
loss is illustrated by a diagram.
HRE_EN12831_Project.rpt You get a precise breakdown of the heat load
calculation for the entire project.
HRE_U-Value calculation.rpt You get a list of all component types whose
Basic functions
U-value has been assigned and/or calculated
when constructing the layering.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
131
Introduction
Erro Heating and sanitary facilities

r!
7 Heating and sanitary facilities
7.1 Heating and sanitation objects

7.1.1 General overview
To access the heating and sanitation functions, open a drawing of this application
type (cf. 2.2.1, page 18) and select the "Use Application Default Tools" working
23
mode. You call appropriated objects in the upper part of the toolbox (1). This in-
cludes items for direct use (e.g. sanitary facilities), but also units for operating a facil-
ity (e.g. heat generator, hot water tank). The common feature of these objects is their
use as a dynamic symbol.
After starting one of these functions (e.g. the basin) the product database is dis-
played. You select the required object as an item from here. Then you are taken to
the object dialogue, where you can make other settings. After confirming with OK
the cursor moves the symbol of the object. You can place this in the model as many
times as you need.
Basic functions
Default
Washbasins, sinks, bidets

(1)
(2)
Valve
All objects have insert points for media lines. Their technical parameters (e.g. flow
pressure, flow rate, etc.) are stored in the item and are evaluated by the calculation
after connection to the pipe network. The functions of the lower area (2) are always
related to the structure of a pipe network and are linked to this.
23
Substitute objects for the simulation of consumers and sub-networks are excluded (see 8.1.2, page 123)
Index
132
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Heating and sanitary facilities Erro
r!
7.1.2 Load objects for simulating

sub-networks/consumers
Load objects are used to simulate individual consumers and sub-networks.

The benefits can be illustrated by two examples:
As insert points for objects in DWG files

It is possible that you may receive a final design of the sanitation facilities as a DWG
file. The sanitary objects contained in the file do not have the necessary insert points
24
and information required to calculate the potable water network . However, you can
use the design indirectly, by using the load objects. You define the connection values
in this object's dialogue box.
For simulating sub-networks – properly creating load conditions

Supposing that you are designing a central heating system to supply several build-
ings and/or parts of buildings. In this case, you do not need to plan the entire system,
but rather you can access data of the remote sub-networks. You can map each sub-
network with the load object and perform the pipe network calculation with the correct
load conditions.
Basic functions
7.1.2.2 Selection and use
Use as dynamic symbol

Call the "Sanitary Load” or
the "Heat/Cool Load” in the
"Insert” menu.
configuration
configuration
Use as the end object of a pipeline (potable water only)
When designing the pota-
extensions,
ble water network, you can

extensions,
end the pipeline with the

load object. In this way, you
can connect DWG objects
(1) directly, without having
to place DDS objects be-
Adjustments,
forehand.
Adjustments,
24
Technical details for individual objects are generally not included in DWG files (cf. 4.1.1, page 34)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
133
Introduction

r!
7.1.2.3 Configuring a load object for potable water consumers
(3) (2) (1)
 Determine the medium by selecting the item (1).

 Define the connection values by inputting them manually (2).
Basic functions
 Enter the length (3) of the symbol in millimetres (mm).
7.1.2.4 Configuring a load object for heating consumers
The load object for heating consumers is

always equipped with the "flow" and "re-
(1) (2) turn" media.
 Configure the symbol (1). You can set
the flow and return arrangement in
order to move the insert points for the
pipelines into the right position. The

result of the settings appears in a pre-
view.
 Observe the system data settings (2).
Index
134
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.2 Dividing the heat load into heating facilities

With DDS-CAD you can design radiators and underfloor heating. It may be that the
heat load of a room is not going to be provided by a single heating facility (radiator
OR underfloor heating), but is to be provided by a combination of several heating
systems. In this case, you can distribute a room's heat load to multiple facilities and
optimise their dimensioning. In addition to underfloor heating and radiators, further
heating facilities can be taken into account, but not be dimensioned by an internal
calculation.
Heating facilities Dimensioning

Underfloor heating Internal calculation in DDS-CAD (see 7.3,
page 137)
Radiator Internal calculation in DDS-CAD (see 7.4,
page 159)
Electrical heating Manual
Ventilation system Manual
Direct heating Manual
Basic functions
Furthermore, an additional heat gain (e.g. by sunlight or permanently running electri-
cal appliances) can be considered.
Divide heat load on heating facilities
Set building standard Chapter 8.2.1

Page 136
Adjustments in the storey
configuration
Chapter 8.2.2
configuration
Adjustments to individual rooms
Page 137
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
135
Introduction

r!
7.2.1 Specifying the building standard and adjusting a storey
The distribution of the heat load to various heating facilities should first be defined
globally for the entire building:
Building
(3)
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
 Select the "Building Information” function. The "Building Information” dialogue

box appears.
 Switch to the "Heating Facilities” tab.
 Define the proportion (2) of the heat load (1) that can be apportioned to the heat-
ing facilities.
 Click Set The settings are transferred to all rooms in the building. Subse-
quently, you can adjust each storey and each separate room.
If the heating facilities of an entire floor differ from the building standard, adjust the
storey settings:
 Open the storey.

 Select the "Building Information” functions and switch to the "Heating Facilities”
tab.
 Click Set curr. . The settings are transferred to all rooms of the current storey.
Subsequently, you can adjust each separate room.
Index
136
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.2.2 Adjusting a single room

If the heating facilities of individual rooms differ from the building standard, adjust the
settings of these rooms:
Room data
 Select the "Room Informa-

tion” function. The message
line shows the “Point to the
room you want to edit”
prompt.
 Click in the room whose
heating facilities you want
to adjust. The "Room In-
formation” dialogue box is
Basic functions
displayed.
 Switch to the "Heating Fa-
cilities” tab.
 Adjust the settings of the
heating facilities. Define the
proportion of the heat load
(1) that can be apportioned
to the heating facilities, ei-
ther as a percentage (2) or
(1) (2) (3) (4) in absolute terms (3).
configuration
configuration
 Enter any heat gain for the
room from other heat sources (e.g. electrical equipment) (4).
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The function remains active. You can
select another room by clicking or end the function with [ESC]. extensions,
7.3 Designing underfloor heating

extensions,
7.3.1 Introduction
With DDS-CAD you can design underfloor heating systems in full, or only draw the
Adjustments,
heating regions as required. In this regard, we refer to the detailed and the simplified
Adjustments,
method.
The detailed method allows the calculation and documentation of the system (accord-
ing to DIN EN 1264). It provides technical building requirements, which must be con-
sidered when constructing the building model and when calculating the heat load.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
137
Introduction

r!
The simplified method is the quick way to graphic representation. The graphic shows
the process at a glance. If you choose the simplified method, you can jump directly to
chapter 7.3.5, on page 143:
Detailed method:
Requirements
Design underfloor heating Chapter
Flooring construction 7.4.2.3
Building technical Position of the heating tube Page 121
requirements
Chapter 7
Heat load calculation Page 101
Select manufacturer
and system Adjust heating Chapter 8.2
facilities Page 135
Select and place

heating circuit distributor
Chapter 8.3.3
Chapter 8.3.4 Page 141
Page 142
Define underfloor heating
regions
Define underfloor heating regions
Basic functions
Calculate and Check basic settings

optimise system Chapter 8.3.5 for drawing
Page 143
Calculated results Define and edit heating

regions
Chapter 8.3.6
Underfloor heating labels Page 151
Part list and log Simplified method:

Chapter 8.3.7 Draw underfloor heating

Page 157
Define underfloor heating

regions
At the beginning of the detailed method, select the manufacturer of the system com-
ponents and a product. Then define the heating region distributor and draw the heat-
ing regions. Use the calculation to size and optimise the system and prepare the out-
put of the calculation results.
Note on the part list

The general part list includes distributor and heat pipe, but no system plates or in-
sulating materials. Use the underfloor heating print function to enter these (see
7.3.7, page 157).
Index
138
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.3.2 Managing the heating regions and distributor

Heating region distributor and heating regions are managed in the Building Informa-
tion dialogue under the "Underfloor Heating” tab. The upper table contains the heat-
ing region distributor. The lower table lists all heating regions in the project – each
with their technical parameters. Clicking on a row in the table opens a context
menu with functions for editing.
Building
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6) (7) (8)
configuration
configuration
The upper area is where you define the manufacturer (1). The underfloor heating sys-
tem must be developed with actual system components (see 7.3.3, page 141).
New (2) creates a new heating region distributor (see 7.3.4, page 142). Heating re-
gion distributors are a prerequisite for the subsequent calculation, but not for building
the heating regions. You can change the configuration of the system as desired (see
extensions,
7.3.4, page 142).

extensions,
Find by pointing (3) is a navigational aid to quickly get to the calculation results of an
object you are interested in. After being opened, the dialogue box is invisible and you
can select the heating region distributor and/or the heating in the model by clicking
. The management dialogue box reappears when the corresponding row is selected.
Use the scroll bars or the zoom function (4) to view the table.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Draw Cut out Split into (5) are used to construct the heating regions (see 7.3.5,
page 143).
Options (6) configures the basic settings for drawing and calculating the heating re-
gions. In this way, you choose between the detailed or simplified method.
Calculate (7) starts the calculation routine.
Print (8) starts the output of the calculation results (see 7.4.5, page 167).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
139
Introduction

r!
Information in the heating region table
Entry in the table Contents Colour highlighting (text colour)

Type Unheated area Green
Normal temperature (heated normally) Blue
Higher temperature (higher surface Orange
temperature)
Room no. Position of the heating region (storey,
region and room number)
Room text Name of the room in which the heat-
ing region is located.
Manif. ID/Reg. ID Distributor number and heating region Red No connection to distributor
number
Pipe dist, mm Laying distance, pipe-to-pipe distance Blue Manually fixed
Area, m² Area of the heating region in square Blue Manually fixed, no division
metres
Pipe length, m Length of the heating cable Red Max. pipe length exceeded
Adjust value For hydraulic balancing of the pipe
network in l /min or as kvs-value (de-
pending on distributor).
Basic functions
Flow, l/h Volume flow in the heating region

Pr. drop, Pa Pressure loss of the heating region Red Maximum pressure loss
exceeded
Spec output, W/m² Specific power Red No power in the heating system
(see 7.2.2, page 137)
Output, W Output Red Actual output<target output or no
output specified in the system
Calc. Surf. temp., °C Calculated surface temperature Red Maximum surface temperature
exceeded
Supply temp., °C Flow temperature Red Flow temperature > 100°C

Return temp., °C Return temperature
Pipe pr. drop, Pa Pressure loss across the heat pipe
Kv, m³/h Kv value
Max. pipe length, m Maximum pipe length
Max. Pr. drop, Pa. Maximum pressure loss
Specific targ. output, Specific target output Yellow Worst room
W/m²
Green Target output lowered to ac-
tual output
Red No power in the heating sys-
tem (see 7.2.2, page 137)
Diameter, mm Pipe diameter
Vel., m/s Flow speed
Max. Surf. temp., °C Maximum surface temperature
Manufacturer Name of the manufacturer Brown Different manufacturer
Index
140
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.3.3 Selecting the manufacturer and system

The underfloor heating must be developed using actual system components. To do
this, you need to load the manufacturer's data record and activate a system:
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
Basic functions
 Click (1). The “Select Manufacturer Database(s)” dialogue box appears. This
lists the data records of all available manufacturers.
configuration
 Enable the manufacturer required by Activate (2) or double clicking . The "X"
configuration
character is displayed in front of the row. Activate is blocked. The data record is
used in the project and cannot be turned back off.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed.
 Click … (3). The product database shows the selected manufacturers along
with their systems.
extensions,
extensions,
 Select the manufacturer and the system of the underfloor heating. The product
database disappears. You will be asked whether the system should be used for
all rooms.
 Click Yes . The system appears in Display " Manufacturer” (4).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Note:
The prompt "Use the selected manufacturer/type in all rooms?" is only relevant for
subsequently exchanging a system of an existing facility.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
141
Introduction

r!
7.3.4 Select and insert the manifold
The manifold(s) is/are a prerequisite for the subsequent calculation, but not for build-
ing the heating regions. You can change the configuration of the system as required,
by changing, adding or removing the manifold, or correct the assignment of the heat-
ing regions.
(3)
Basic functions
(1) (2)
 Click New (1). The product database is displayed and lists the heating region
distributors of the previously selected manufacturer.
 Select the required item. The product database disappears. The "Distributor” dia-
logue box appears.
 Check the installation height (2) and click OK . The cursor moves the heating
region distributor as a movable symbol.
 Fix a distributor at the desired position. The function remains active. You can
place additional distributors.
 End the function with [ESC]. The dialogue box lists all used distributors (3).
Note:
You can view and edit each entry via a context menu (see 7.3.2, page 139). Simi-
larly, you can also delete, move or modify the distributors directly in the model.
Index
142
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.3.5 Heating regions

All heating regions are listed in the Building Information dialogue in a table and are
25
represented in the model by shaded polygons . The shape of a heating region can
automatically be adjusted to the room or be drawn manually. In this way, you can edit
several rooms in one step. DDS-CAD automatically splits the heating regions at the
room boundaries. The colour of the polygon shows
the status of the heating region (3):
• Not heated: Green
• Normal temperature: Blue
• Higher temperature: Red
Move node
Basic functions
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
configuration
(5)
configuration
(6)
The status (3), the assignment to

the distributor (4) and other tech-
nical parameters are defined in the
extensions,
"Underfloor Heating region” dia- (7)

extensions,
logue box. You get to this dialogue

box either via the entry of the
heating region in the building
dialogue or directly by double
clicking on the region marked in the model.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
The position in the building (1) is indicated along with the numbers of the storey, the
region and the room as well as the room name. Furthermore, each heating region
contains a consecutive distributor-related number (2).
From the heating region you can access the properties of the floor (5), in which the
heat pipe is embedded. Please note that a change will affect all floors of the same
25
Unheated areas (2) are not shown in the table.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
143
Introduction

r!
floor type (see 6.4.1, page 115). The item (6) used and the calculated results (7) of
the region are displayed in the lower part of the dialogue box.
7.3.5.2 Basic settings
You have to check two basic settings for the definition of heating regions. Click Options
(1). In the "Options” dialogue box, specify the distance to the wall (2) and adjust the
consideration of the heat load (3):
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)
Input "Distance to walls” (2)

A room automatically restricts the expansion of the heating region. In doing so, the
distance (2) set between the heating region and the walls is maintained.
"Allow rooms without underfloor heat load or pipe” (3)

By default, heating regions are defined to dimen-
sion underfloor heating. DDS-CAD automatically
checks compliance with the building's technical
requirements. If these are not met, DDS-CAD
stops executing the function.
For a purely graphic representation of the heating

regions (without subsequent calculation) suppress the check by selecting " Allow
rooms without underfloor heat load or pipe” (3).
Index
144
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.3.5.3 Drawing and editing heating regions

The definition and editing of heating regions are also started from the Building Infor-
mation dialogue:
(4)
(1) (2) (3)
Basic functions
Draw (1)
The function creates new heating regions and edits existing ones. After calling the
function, you can choose from the context menu whether existing heating regions are
drawn over, connected to each other, or whether the remaining area of the room
should be filled with new heating regions. The drawing application is equal to working
with the polygon (see 18.1, page 445). You can also use specific auxiliary functions
(see below). A new heating region is always assigned to the active distributor (4).
configuration
You can change this assignment later (see 7.3.5.1, page 143).
configuration
Cut out (2)
The function is only used to reduce existing heating regions. In this way you can, for
example, consider storage spaces, pillars and stair openings. The drawing applica-
tion is again equal to working with the polygon (see 18.1, page 445).
extensions,
Split into (3)

extensions,
You can manually split existing heating regions into equal-sized sub-areas (see
page 150).
The following pages contain an overview of the various operations and descriptions
of their respective procedures.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
145
Introduction

r!
Overview: Draw heating regions

Operation Example Referen
ce
Draw heating regions manually page 14

The operation produces heating regions on a rectangular 7
or any polygonal surface, whose contour has to be de-
termined manually. When doing so, you can comply with
room limits or exceed them as required.
If the area completely or partially extends over several
rooms, each room receives its own heating region (top
and middle pictures). DDS-CAD divides the area at the
room boundaries and ignored regions outside of defined
rooms.
You can make additional divisions later either manually or
by calculation.
Basic functions
Automatic heating region in a room page 14

A single room is to be completely covered by a heating 8
region.
Fill residual area of a room with a heating region page 14

Parts of a room have been covered with one or more 8
heating regions. The remaining area is to be filled auto-
matically by additional heating regions.
Draw over heating region page 14

When drawing a heating region, there may 9
be overlap with existing ones. The areas
covered are cut from the existing region.
Join heating regions page 14

Two adjacent heating regions are merged 9
with each other.
Split heating region page 15

The heating region A0 is too big. It is to be 0
divided into a certain number of heating
regions with the same size. A0 A1 A2 A3
Cut-out in a heating region page 15

A sub-area (e.g. for storage space) is to be 0
cut out of an existing heating region.
Index
146
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Draw heating region manually
Example
The operation produces heating regions on a

rectangular or any polygonal surface, whose con-
tour has to be determined manually. When doing
so, you can comply with room limits or exceed
them as required.
If the area completely or partially extends over
several rooms, each room receives its own heat-
ing region (top and middle pictures). DDS-CAD
divides the area at the room boundaries and ig-
nores regions outside of defined rooms.
You can make additional divisions later either
manually or by calculation.
Basic functions
Procedure
 Click Draw . The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Click on the starting point. The cursor moves a dynamic line.
 Specify the area that is to be covered by heating regions. You can draw a rectangular or
any polygonal area (see below).
 Press [Enter]. The area definition is stopped. DDS-CAD divides the area at the room
boundaries. All areas outside of defined rooms are ignored. The "Underfloor Heating
Region” dialogue box appears.
configuration
 Check the settings and click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The function remains
configuration
active.
Rectangle:
(2)
[Enter]
extensions,
extensions,
(1)
 Define the diagonal of the rectangle with two clicks .

Polygon
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
[Enter]
 Define the contour of the area counter-clockwise in each case by clicking .

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
147
Introduction

r!
Automatic heating region: Fill single room

Example
A single room is to be completely covered by a

heating region. If a division is necessary later on,
it is implemented manually or by calculation.
Procedure
[Enter]

 Point to the room that is to be covered by the region.
Basic functions

 Select the "Overwrite” function. The context menu is closed.
 Press [Enter]. The room gets a heating region. The "Underfloor Heating Region”
 Check the settings and click OK . The function remains active.
Fill residual area of a room with a heating region

Example
Parts of a room have been covered with one or

more heating regions. The remaining area is to
be filled automatically by additional heating re-
gions.
Procedure
[Enter]

 Point to the room that is to be covered by the region.
 Select the "Fill the remaining space” function. The context menu is closed.
 Press [Enter]. The residual area is filled. The "Underfloor Heating Region” dialogue
box appears.
Index
148
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Check the settings and click OK . The function remains active.

Draw over heating region
Example
When drawing a heating region, there may be overlap

with existing ones. The areas covered are cut out from
the existing heating region and added to the new one.
Procedure
[En-

Basic functions
 Draw the area of the new heating region over the existing one. The overlapping area
has been cut out of the existing region. The "Underfloor Heating Region” dialogue box
appears.
 Check the settings and click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The function remains
active.
Join heating regions
configuration
Example
configuration
Several heating regions are merged with each other.
extensions,
Procedure
extensions,
[En-
Adjustments,
Adjustments,

 Click in the first heating region. The cursor moves a dynamic line.
 Click in the furthest heating region. The touching heating regions are merged into a
common area. The function remains active.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
149
Introduction

r!
Split heating regions
Example
The heating region A0 is too big. It is to be divided into a

certain number of heating regions with the same size.
A0 A1 A2 A3
Note
The division (horizontal/vertical) is directed parallel to
the reference wall 1. You may need to correct this be-
fore the operation (see 4.4.3.5, page 84).
Procedure
A0 A1 A2 A3
Basic functions
 Enter the desired number of sub-areas.

 Click Split into . The dialogue box is closed. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Click on the heating region to be divided. The heating region is separated into the
specified number of sub-areas. All sub-areas are the same size. The function remains
active.
Cut-out in a heating region

Example
A sub-area (e.g. for storage space) is to be cut out of an

existing heating region.
Procedure
 Click Cut out . The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Define the contour of the cut-out. In graphic terms, proceed as with a heating region
(see page 147). The area has been cut out of the existing heating region. The function
remains active.
Index
150
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.3.6 Calculate and optimize the system

The calculation function dimensions the heating regions defined in the building ac-
cording to DIN EN 1264. The calculated results of the heating regions and heating
region distributors are shown in dialogues, and output in calculation logs. The pres-
sure losses of the heating region distributors are transferred to the heating pipe net-
work calculation, where the hydraulic balancing of the distribution valves takes place
(see 9, page 228).
DDS-CAD proceeds room by room during the calculation, whereby first the least fa-
vourable room with the highest specific heat loss (W/m²) is considered. For the heat-
ing regions, the ideal distances of the heat pipes are determined. Pressure loss and
pipe length are monitored. Exceeding these parameters will automatically divide the
regions. You can configure the division.
If the room has separate heating regions for higher and normal temperatures, the
higher temperature regions will be examined first. Their surface temperature must be
higher than that of the normal temperature region (cf. 7.3.5.1, page 143). Therefore
you can apply more output to the room, without exceeding the limit and unloading the
normal temperature region. Based on this assumption, the aim for the higher tem-
Basic functions
perature regions is the smallest possible pipe-to-pipe distance that does not exceed
the maximum surface temperature. When dimensioning normal temperature regions
on the other hand, the aim is to achieve the largest possible pipe-to-pipe distance,
which is necessary to cover the calculated heat load.
Set calculation parameters Global parameters

Chapter 8.3.6.1
Flow temperature Page 152
Global parameters
and spread
Room-specific parameters Criterion for automatic
configuration
division of the heating
configuration
i
Calculate
Room-specific parameters
Start calculation Chapter 8.3.6.2
Automatic division of the Page 153
heating regions
Check results
extensions,
Keep or change
extensions,
manufacturer/system?
No
OK?
Calculate or force
Y pipe to pipe distance?
Display results Ratio of target output to

Adjustments,
actual output
Adjustments,
Label heating regions
Part list Chapter 8.3.6.3

Page 155 Chapter 8.3.7; 8.3.8
from page 157
Calculation log
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
151
Introduction

r!
7.3.6.1 Setting global calculation parameters
To start with, you have to

define global calculation
(2) parameters. By doing so,
you define the system
(3)
temperatures and set the
criteria for the automatic
(4) distribution of the heating
(5)
(6) regions. To do this, open
(7) the Building Information
dialogue and click Options
(8) (1).
Basic functions
(1)
Setting the system temperatures

The return temperature is generally calculated from the flow temperature (2) and the
temperature difference (3). You can calculate the flow temperature in accordance
with DIN EN 1264 or define it manually. To do this, check "Calculate the optimal
flow temperature”.
Automatically split heating regions

The calculation monitors the pipe length of the individual heating regions and the re-
spective pressure loss. After you have defined the settings, DDS-CAD automatically
separates a heating region:
• (4) if the max. pipe pressure drop is exceeded
• (5) if the pressure loss or the pipe length are exceeded
• (6) if the max. pipe length is exceeded
• (7) if exceeded values are ignored, heating regions are not split.
Taking floor coverings into account (8)

In the calculation, you can choose between two options in terms of floor coverings:
Option A: The thermal resistance of the floor covering (R_Lamda_B) is assumed to
be at least 0.1m²K/W. DDS-CAD checks the settings of the floor structure, and com-
pares the resulting value to the defined lower limit. The calculation always assumes
the higher value.
Option B: The floor structure settings always apply. In other words, the thermal resis-
tance of the floor covering can also be less than 0.1m²K/W. Due to the lower thermal
resistance, it is possible to achieve smaller heating regions and thus a more eco-
nomical design.
Index
152
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.3.6.2 Setting room-specific calculation parameters

Setting the room-specific
calculation parameters is
primarily a tool for subse-
quent optimisation.
If the calculation process
(1) gives unfavourable results,
you can optimise various
parameters for a room and
(2) repeat the calculation.
(3)
(4)
Basic functions
Division of the room areas (1)
The division of the room areas is determined by the global calculation parameters.
If you would like to make a different rule for the room, check "Overwrite the global
split settings: Split regions according” and set the division criteria (see 7.3.6.1,
page 152).
configuration
configuration
Manufacturer/System (2)
The system components are determined globally in the Building Information dialogue
and transferred to the individual rooms (see 7.3.3, page 141). If you want to make a
different rule for individual rooms, check "Overwrite the global manufacturer” and
select the desired product.
extensions,
Pipe-to-pipe distance (3)

extensions,
By default, the pipe-to-pipe distance is calculated by DDS-CAD. As such, different

objectives apply to normal temperature zones and higher temperature zones. In each
case, the largest and/or smallest possible pipe-to-pipe distances are determined (see
7.3.1, page 143). This may result in over-dimensioning in a room. As part of the opti-
misation process, you can alter the pipe-to-pipe distance and then repeat the calcula-
Adjustments,
tion:
Adjustments,
The pipe-to-pipe distance is calculated by DDS-CAD.

The pipe-to-pipe distance is fixed.
The maximum pipe-to-pipe distance is given. The calcula-
tion can set a smaller distance.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
153
Introduction

r!
The smaller the pipe-to-pipe distance, the greater the power output and the sur-
face temperature in the respective room zone.
Ratio of target output to actual output (4)

In small rooms with a large heat load, underfloor heating is often unable to supply the
required amount of heat without significantly exceeding the surface temperature. In
these cases, the target output of the underfloor heating has to be reduced and the
remaining amount of heat applied through another heating facility (e.g. radiators).
The image shows an example:
(5) The calculation for the room's

underfloor heating gives a target
output of 2350 W (5). However,
(6) in compliance with the maximum
surface temperature, the under-
floor heating can emit 893 W to
(8) the room (6). This value corre-
(4) sponds to only 38% of the re-
quired output.
Basic functions
For optimisation, you can set this

maximum possible actual output
as the new target output for the
underfloor heating (4).
The new setting is automatically

transferred to the heating facili-
ties configuration (7). Here it is
clear that the underfloor heating
can only provide part of the stan-
(9) dard heat load. Compensate for
the missing portion with another

heating facility.
In the example, you will also see

a difference between the stan-
(7) dard heat load Qn (8) under the
"Underfloor Heating” tab, and the
adjusted heat load under the
"Heating Facilities” tab (9). This
difference arises from subtracting
the heat loss across the floor
from the transmission heat load
of the room (only if underfloor
heating is present).
Index
154
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.3.6.3 Calculating the system and checking messages and results

You can start the calculation process from the Building Information dialogue or from
the "Room Information” dialogue. In both cases, the entire building is calculated.

configuration
 Click Calculate . The algorithm starts. The calculated results appear in the tables of
extensions,
the Building Information dialogue and the room data. If necessary, an information
extensions,
list is also displayed. This lists errors and provides warnings and information.
 If necessary, optimise the system and repeat the calculation. In doing so, please
refer to the notes of the information list (see below).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
155
Introduction

r!
Working with the information list
Each line of the information list represents a room and/or a heating region. Proceed
step by step, as follows:
 Select an entry from the list. The room and/or the heating region are displayed
as a selected object.
 Click Zoom object . The room and/or the heating region are displayed zoomed in the
centre of the screen.
 Click OK . The information list is closed.
 Rectify the problem and run the calculation again.
Possible messages, their meanings and options for remedying the cause
Message in the information list Notes and references

"This room has heating regions, but no tar- Calculating the heat load  Page 130
get output for the underfloor heating. Calcu- Setting the heating facility  Page 137
late the heat load or set the output in the
heating facility."
"Warning: This heating region cannot be Inserting distributors  Page 142
Basic functions
divided into more than n parts. Insert more Splitting heating region manually 
distributors or split manually." Page 150
"Warning: This zone cannot be calculated Setting the pipe-to-pipe distance 
because the required heat load is already Page 153
covered by the higher temperature zone.
Manually set higher temperature zone to a
larger pipe-to-pipe distance."
"The floor in this room has no underfloor Position of the heat pipe  Page 123
heating pipe. Define the position of the pipe
in the U-value calculation."
"The actual output x W of this room is
smaller than the target output y W. Install

radiators."
"The surface temperature of x°C of this heat- Flow/return temperature  Page 152
ing region is greater than the permitted Room temperature  Page 106
maximum of y°C. Correct flow, return, or Pipe-to-pipe distance  Page 153
room temperature or set larger pipe-to-pipe
distance."
"Warning: The pipe length including connec- Automatic division  Page 152
tion lengths of x m of this heating region is
greater than the permitted maximum of y m.
Move the distributor closer to the heating
region or enable automatic division."
"Note: The target output (QHF) x W has
been reduced to the actual output
(QHFCalc) y W. Install radiators."
Index
156
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.3.7 Print results

You can print out the calculation log to evaluate the underfloor heating. Start the print
function in the Building Information dialogue or in the "Room Information” dialogue:
Basic functions
 Click Print . The reports selection is displayed.
 Select the report by double clicking. The report is created and displayed as a
new window.
 Open the window in your Windows taskbar.
Report Contents
HU_Underfloorheating_report_EN_1264.rpt You receive a report on the underfloor
heating calculation according to
configuration
EN 1264. It contains
configuration
• Cover page
• Overview of the heat balance
• Room list with list of the heating re-
gions
• List of the heating regions by mani-
fold (sorted by pressure loss)
extensions,
HU_Underfloorheating_material_list.rpt You receive a list of all materials used

extensions,
that are required to construct the un-

derfloor heating in the building.
Warning!
The general part list includes distribu-
Adjustments,
tors and heat pipes, but no system

Adjustments,
plates or insulating materials. Use

this report for a complete part list for
the underfloor heating.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
157
Introduction

r!
7.3.8 Labelling heating regions
Use the “Part Text” function to identify the

heating regions.
The following description illustrates a sim-
ple example. For a detailed description of
the function, please refer to chapter 18.4.2,
page 507.
Part Text
(2)
Basic functions
(1)
 Select a heating region by clicking .

 Select the “Part Text” function. The "Part text” dialogue box is displayed. The
"Underfloor Heating” object (1) has been detected.
 Adjust the layout of the text symbol (2).
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The cursor moves a text symbol.
 Move the text symbol to the heating region. The symbol recognises the heating
region and displays the name and the technical parameters in the text.
 Fix the text symbol at the desired position by clicking . The function remains
active. You can label further heating regions.
Index
158
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.4 Designing radiators

7.4.1 Introduction
With DDS-CAD you can design new heating facilities and simulate existing facilities.
In both cases, you have to rely on the use of actual product data. Dimensions and
output are the relevant design parameters. Output, water quantity and pressure loss
are required for the pipe network calculation.
Use the "Hersteller Datenbank laden" (Load manufacturers database) function to call
the product data (see 21.2.5, page 557). You can then insert and dimension radiators
in the model through an automatic selection. Any necessary corrections to the posi-
tions and/or the properties of individual radiators are carried out manually.
This chapter first describes the properties of a single radiator and then the manage-
ment function for radiators in the Building Information dialogue. Using this function,
you can design radiators according to the following diagram:
Plan radiator
Basic functions
Requirements
Building technical Chapter 7
requirements Heat load calculation Page 101
Adjust heating Chapter 8.2

Select manufacturer facilities Page 135
Install and dimension radiator Chapter 22.2.5

automatically Page 557
configuration
Configure options for
configuration
installation and calculation Manual corrections to radiators
Replace
existing
Button [Calculation] Lock radiator
Install
additional
extensions,
extensions,
No
OK? Change
Y position
Print
calculation results Chapter 8.4.4 Chapter 8.4.3.3
Adjustments,
Page 164 Page 163

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
159
Introduction

r!
7.4.2 Radiators
In most cases, radiators are installed and calculated automatically. In some cases,
manual adjustments or additional radiators are required.
(2)
Heating/Coo
(1)
(3)
(4)
Load
manufacturers
d b
Basic functions
Application
 Select the "Heating/Cooling Equipment” function. The product database shows
the preloaded product data of the radiator manufacturer.
 Select the item. The "Heating/Cooling Equipment” dialogue box shows the di-
mensions (1). To start with, standard items are chosen for the radiator valve and
the lock shield valve (2). You can also use real product data.
 Enter the desired installation height (3). The lower edge of the radiator is used as
the reference.
 For wall mounting with the symbol function [Ctrl]+[D] (see page 418) define
the distance to the wall (4).
 Click OK . The cursor moves the radiator symbol.
Index
160
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.4.3 Managing the radiators in the Building Information dia-

logue
7.4.3.1 General overview
Building
The radiator list (1) of the Build-

ing Information dialogue con-
(1) tains all the radiators that are
currently in the building. You
(2) can control the display with a
filter (2). Choose a single room,
the current storey or the entire
building. Each row represents
one radiator. It contains infor-
mation, settings and calculated
results (see 7.4.3.2, page 162).
Basic functions
Use the dialogue box's scroll
bars or zoom function (3) to
view the table. Clicking
opens a context menu with
(3) various functions (see 7.4.3.3,
page 163).
(4) (5) (6) (7)
configuration
configuration
Find by pointing (4) is a navigational aid to quickly get to the calculation results of an
object you are interested in. After opening the function, the dialogue box is invisible
and you can select the object in the model by clicking . This will take you back into
the calculation dialogue, where the corresponding row is highlighted.
extensions,
extensions,
Options (5) configures the calculation. You specify the parameters for automatic instal-
lation and the radiator design.
Calculate (6) starts the automatic installation and radiator design.

Adjustments,
(7) allows the output of the calculation results in various reports (see 7.4.5,
Print
Adjustments,
page 167).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
161
Introduction

r!
7.4.3.2 Information in the radiator list
Details in the radiator list

Reference Contents
Room Position of the radiator in the model, given as storeys, region and room
number.
Room text Name of the room in which the radiator is located.
Locked The radiator may be changed by the calculation.
The radiator is locked against changes.
Clicking the symbol changes the status.
Length, mm Dimensions in millimetres (mm): Overall length, height, depth
Height, mm
Width, mm
Target W Target output of the radiator. If several radiators are located in one
room, the room's standard heat load is divided across the radiators.
Afterwards, the target output corresponds to the portion of the room's
standard heat load allotted to that radiator.
Qh_max. W Actual output of the radiator.
Basic functions
% Ratio between actual and target output as a percentage (%).

Dimensioned The radiator has not been calculated or is no longer up-to-date.
The radiator has been calculated. The text colour indicates the
status of the parameter, i.e. the success of the design (see be-
low).
Manufacturer Name of the radiator manufacturer.
Type
Return temp. °C Calculated return temperature under the set conditions.
ID
Phi_HL,Ausl,b,i W Designed heat load of the heated room in watts (W):

Sum of transmission and ventilation heat losses and the heat-up load
of the room (to compensate for the effects of intermittent heating).
Room target Standard heat load of the heated room in watts (W):
output, W Sum of transmission and ventilation heat losses
Room actual Output of the installed radiator actually provided
output, W
Meaning of the text colours in the radiator list

Colour Meaning
Black The parameter is within the set tolerances.
Orange The parameter is outside the set tolerances (see 7.4.4.3, page 165).
Blue The radiator cannot be changed by the calculation. It has been manually fixed or
does not originate from a manufacturers database.
Index
162
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.4.3.3 Functions in the context menu

Add new
The function inserts a new radiator into the list. After calling the function, the " Room
selection” dialogue box is displayed:
 Select the room where the new radiator is to be
placed. The product database is displayed.
 Select the desired item. The new radiator is
displayed in the list. When confirmed, it is
placed in the centre of the room.
Change
The function replaces the item of the selected radiator.
Change all
The function replaces all items of all radiators and as-
signs an item of the same model series from the se-
lected manufacturer. DDS-CAD uses the structural
dimensions of the existing radiators as the basis for
Basic functions
the selection.
Delete
The function deletes the selected radiator.
Delete all
The function deletes all radiators from the list and the model.
configuration
configuration
Lock/lock all
If a radiator is not to be changed by the calculation, you can disable it. Use this op-
tion for example, for simulating existing facilities. The radiator calculation transfers
the output of this radiator to the pipe network calculation.
Zoom
extensions,
The selected radiator is displayed magnified in the centre of the screen.

extensions,
Zoom all
The entire drawing is visible on the screen.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
163
Introduction

r!
7.4.4 Install and dimension radiator automatically
The radiator calculation by DDS-CAD can accomplish several tasks, depending on its
configuration. Depending on the variety of tasks, carry out one or more calculation
processes, each with the following actions:
 Define the scope of the tasks (1). The display is adapted.
 Configure the calculation with Options (2)
 Click (3). The radiators are selected or modified and applied to the model.
Calculate
The calculation results can be printed.
(6) (7)(11
(1)
(4)
(10
Basic functions
(12
(13
(8)
(9)
(3)
(2)
(5)
The decisive factor here is the configuration of the calculation. Here, you can first de-
cide whether the radiator is to be dimensioned – and thus changed (4) or whether
only their output for a given spread is to be re-calculated (5). To do this, please read
the following sections.
7.4.4.2 Options for automatically installing new radiators
If the calculation is to install new radiators, check " Install radiators” (6). DDS-CAD
first checks a room for any windows present and their sizes. Afterwards, radiators
suitable for the selected type (7) are installed below the window according to the in-
stallation parameters (8). Window width and installation height define a frame for the
Index
164
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
overall dimensions (see 7.4.4.3, page 165). You can filter the window to be consid-
ered according to their sill heights (9). You also have to make the following decisions:

How should DDS-CAD process windowless rooms?
"Set radiators in windowless rooms” (10)

DDS-CAD considers windowless rooms. New radiators are inserted in the centre of
the room. You define the dimensions according to 7.4.4.3, page 165
Windowless rooms are not given new radiators.
How should DDS-CAD process rooms which already contain radiators?
"Consider only rooms without radiators” (11)

If there is already a radiator in a room, this room is not given any more. DDS-CAD
only optimises the existing radiators.
If the radiators in the room are not sufficient, the calculation may install more radia-
tors. The limit values Input "Don’t install in rooms with less than” and Input
"Max radiator output” apply as boundary conditions (see below).
What are the minimum and maximum outputs of a radiator?
Basic functions
The limit values Input "Don’t install in rooms with less than” (12) and Input "Max.
radiator output” (13) control the number of radiators in the room. For the explanation,
it is necessary to make a distinction between whether the room already contains ra-
diators at the time of the calculation process, or whether it is empty:
Input "Don’t install in rooms...”

Radiator present? Meaning
No If the standard heat load falls below the input value, this room is
not given a radiator.
configuration
Yes If the unfulfilled heat load falls below the input value, it is distrib-
uted to the radiators present.
configuration
Input "Max radiator output”
Radiator present? Meaning
No The room is given as many radiators as required so that the
extensions,
heat load is met. However, no radiator exceeds the input value.

extensions,
Yes If the unfulfilled heat load exceeds the input value, it is distrib-
uted to several additional radiators.
7.4.4.3 Options for the radiator calculation

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
The calculation is used to optimise the radiators: The effective heating area must be
large enough to provide the required output under the current system tempera-
tures (1). At the same time, they must not be designed too large for economical rea-
sons.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
165
Introduction

r!
During the opera-
(1) (2) (3) (6)
tion, DDS-CAD
searches for radia-

tors with appropri-
ate structural di-
mensions (2),
which may vary
(4) within defined tol-
(5) erances (3).
For rooms with windows, you can have length and height calculated as a function of
the window dimensions. It is also possible to use fixed settings. To do this, set the
respective flag accordingly. The graphic shows an example: The optimal length (4) is
to be calculated from the window width minus the adjusted value (in this case
120 mm). For the height (5) on the other hand, a fixed value has been set. DDS-CAD
uses the manufacturer's product data for this purpose. For rooms without windows,
the fixed values always apply.
Basic functions
The three dimensions and the output are always subject to

priority (6). If for example, two radiators are within all toler-
ances, then the priority decides which is used. By default, the
(7) output is given the highest priority, followed by the height, the
(8) length and finally the depth. You can change the priority se-
quence by clicking on the priority (7) and moving it with the
arrows (8).
Index
166
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
7.4.5 Calculated results of the radiator calculation

You can print out the calculated results in reports. Start the print function in the Build-
ing Information dialogue:
Basic functions
 Click Print . The reports selection is displayed.
 Select the report by double clicking. The report is created and displayed as a
new window.
 Open the window in your Windows taskbar.
configuration
The following reports are available:
configuration
Report Contents
HH_Heater_placement.rpt All radiators are listed individually along with
room number and technical parameters.
HH_Heizkörperliste Fabrikate.rpt The radiators are differentiated by make and
model. Same items are added.
extensions,
extensions,
HH_Heaterlist room.rpt The radiators are listed according to their posi-

tion in the rooms. Same items are added.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
167
Introduction
Erro Pipes and ventilation ducts

r!
8 Pipes and ventilation ducts

8.1.1 Introduction and terms
Pipes and ventilation ducts are related functions in DDS-CAD that are very similar in
character, behaviour, and hence their application. For this description, they are there-
fore combined under the term "Pipelines" or "Pipeline functions", with specific differ-
ences being taken into account by corresponding notes and sections.
A pipeline is a construction of continuously gen-

22 27
erated objects installed in a row. Each pipeline
has a start and an end point. In between are
25
segments, which are connected by suitable
23 24 26 28 components (e.g. pipe bends). These structures
are created automatically when you are drawing
26
and can be used in the command list . The ex-
27
ample shows a pipe drawn from left to right .
The numbers illustrate the relationship between
Basic functions
the visible object in the model and the corre-

sponding entry in the command list.
28
The starting point (22) defines the medium as a fundamental property of the pipe-
29
line and the nature and presentation of the first segment . The pipeline route (23 to
27) in the example only consists of pipe sections and bends. In addition, fittings,
valves and other fixtures are used. You can also define special pipeline sections
where, for example, a different material, a section-based insulation or a different view
should be used (see 8.7, page 218). The command list uses specific entries to de-
scribe all fixtures and section breaks. In the endpoint (28) the type of ending with
which the pipe has been terminated is described.
8.1.2 Settings in the starting point

The starting point is where you define the medium of a pipeline as well as the nature
and presentation of the first segment – the initial properties of the pipeline. The re-
spective start dialogue is used to manage these properties. Depending on the situa-
30
tion, it is displayed at the start of a new pipeline or when editing an existing one .
26
cf. 3.3.1.2, page 27
27
The direction is indicated by the arrows (see 9.1.3, page 163)
28
The medium applies to the entire pipeline route.
29
Material, size, insulation and presentation may be changed further along the pipeline route.
30
For example, if you start a pipe at a free point, DDS-CAD does not receive any instructions and you have to define all the
parameters yourself. However, if you begin at the connection point of an object (such as the cold water connection of a wash
basin), it will draw information about the medium and the starting height of the line from said object.
Index
168
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Pipes and ventilation ducts Erro
r!
8.1.2.1 General settings and specific settings for piping

Start (1)
A pipeline can be started by various op-
erations. A manual setting in this area is
only required when starting at a free point
(1) (3) (4) (5)
(see 8.3.1.1, page 181).
Starting height (2)

The starting height describes the distance
(2) between the centre axis of the
pipe/ventilation duct and the top edge of
the finished floor. Their definition is only
important when starting in a free point. If
the pipeline begins at an object, DDS-
CAD automatically detects the starting
(8) (7) (6)
height and applies it.
Apply from connection (3)

Using this area's settings, you define the behaviour of a pipeline
(A), which branches off via a tee (B) from a main pipeline (C).
Basic functions
(A (B (C
"Medium"
Default setting: The medium of the branching pipeline (A) is determined by the
main pipeline (C). Any possible change of medium is transferred automatically.
The medium of the branching pipeline can be changed manually. This setting must
be made manually as required (e.g. connection between hot water pipe and circu-
lation pipe).
configuration
configuration
"Material and colour"
Default setting: The material and colour of the branching pipeline (A) is determined
by the main pipeline (C). Any possible change is transferred automatically.
The material can be determined by selecting an item. The colour is independent of
the medium and can be selected in the "Farbe/Layer/Stift" (Colour/Layer/Pen) tab.
extensions,
extensions,
"Insulation"
Default setting: The insulation material of the branching pipeline (A) is determined
The insulation material of the branching pipeline (A) is independent of the main
pipeline and can be defined in the "Insulation” tab (see 8.1.2.3, page 170).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
169
Introduction

r!
Using insulation (4)

"Use insulation"
The material defined in the "Insulation” tab is used from the starting segment to the
end and/or to the section change.
The pipeline remains uninsulated from the starting segment to the end and/or to
the section change.
Section by section insulation: see 8.7.2, page 219
Medium (5)
The medium is the determining fundamental property of the pipeline and cannot be
changed in the course of the pipeline. Changing the medium always affects the entire
pipeline. For a better overview, all available media have been organised into groups.
"Material" (6), "Dimension" (7), item (8)

The settings (6) and (7) together form a search filter for the item (8):
 Select the "Material" (6) group. The available sizes are made available in
"Dimension" (7).
 In "Dimension" (7) select the required size. DDS-CAD automatically acti-
Basic functions
vates the appropriate item (8). You can also select the items manually. To do
this, click … .
8.1.2.2 Specific settings for ventilation ducts
The general settings for ventilation ducts

see 9.1.2.1 see 9.1.2.6 are largely similar to the general pipe set-
tings. Specific features consist in the use
of speed levels and in the selection of the
material.
Here, you first determine the shape of the

duct cross-section (1). The importance of
the other parameters is based on this
shape. For information on the significance
of the levels, please see 8.1.2.6,
page 173.
(1)
8.1.2.3 Insulation
This tab contains the initial properties of the insulation. You select the material and
the presentation of the insulation, from the starting segment to the end of the pipeline
and/or section change, in accordance with 8.7.2, page 219. Insulation must always
be taken into account when working with DDS-CAD. It has a visual impact and af-
fects calculations:
Index
170
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
In the pipe network calculation (potable water)

Hot water pipes and circulation pipes must be fully insulated! In its calculations,
DDS-CAD checks the temperature of the hot water pipe and the prevailing ambi-
ent temperature in the room. The insulation used determines the resulting tem-
perature loss and hence affects the size of the circulation pump. It follows: the bet-
ter the insulation, the smaller the circulation pump.
In the part list
The insulating materials used are included in the part list.
In the representation
The insulating materials used are displayed in the model according to their thick-
ness. In this way, you can visualise the whole space required by a pipe.
(1) (2) (3)

(5)
(4)
Basic functions
In the case of ventilation ducts you define the insulation thickness (1) manually and
select the desired material (2) from the product database. In the case of pipes DDS-
CAD automatically searches for the first insulating material with sufficient inner di-
ameter (4) on the basis of the outer diameter of the pipe (3). With … you can
manually select the insulation material from the product database, and DDS-CAD in
turn automatically checks whether the selected material fits the pipe. Display "Pipe
dimension” (3) is coloured red if the inner diameter of the insulating material is too
configuration
small.
configuration
For the colour representation in the model, first the "No active pen" (5) pen is sug-
gested. As a result, the insulation adopts the pen of the pipe or of the ventilation duct.
You can effect a colour distinction by selecting a pen.
8.1.2.4 Representation (by linetype)

extensions,
extensions,
Pipes and ventilation ducts can be af-

fected individually in their representation.
This tab is where you can define the
linetype for the representation in the
model, from the starting segment to the
Adjustments,
end of the pipeline or to the section

Adjustments,
change accordingly.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
171
Introduction

r!
Type of representation (1)
Normal The pipeline is represented by solid lines. Colour and shading are deter-
mined by the chosen medium and displayed according to the selected
view (see 8.1.3, page 173).
Dashed The pipeline is represented by dashed lines and no shading. You can
define the shape of the dashed line by setting the length for at most three
different line segments as well as the gaps between the segments. For
unneeded segments, enter the value "0".
Not visible The pipeline is not visible, but is included in the part list and the network
calculations.
Representation changed in sections: see 8.7, page 218
8.1.2.5 Connection type (pipes only)
Under the "Connection type” tab you can

define production lengths for a pipe as
(2) well as the required connecting ele-
31
(1) ments . DDS-CAD monitors the drawn
length and places the connecting element
automatically. You can make the setting
Basic functions
both before drawing a new pipe or for an

32
existing pipe .
 Check "Automatically use” (1).
(3)  Define the production lengths (2), the
longest (top) and the shortest (bot-
tom).
 Select the item (3).
When drawing the pipe,

Length DDS-CAD automatically
sets the connections ac-
cording to the space avail-
Length able and only uses the ac-
tive lengths. The connect-
ing elements are included
Length in the part list along with
their numbers. The pipe is
displayed with the total
Length Length length in metres.
Note:
If necessary, you can place the connecting elements manually (see 8.5.2.1,
page 213). You define the integration of valves and fittings in the object dialogue
of the respective component (see 8.5.1.2, page 212)
31
e.g. flange, bushing, screw
32
In this second case, refresh the view after configuring the setting. The changed setting will only then become active.
Index
172
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.1.2.6 Pressure loss (ventilation ducts only)

You can customise how the ventilation
duct behaves in the pressure loss calcula-
tion (see 9.5, page 246). To do this, check
or uncheck " Lock dimension” (1).
(1) (2) (3)
"Lock dimension” (1)

The dimension of the ventilation duct is not changed by the pressure loss calcula-
tion in this segment.
The pressure loss calculation can change the dimension of the ventilation duct in
this segment.
In addition, the different segments of a ventilation network can be allocated to a ve-

locity level. For each level, in the pressure loss calculation you can set the boundary
conditions that must be met during a calculation-based sizing. Each level is repre-
Basic functions
sented by a specific colour. Optionally, you can display the ventilation network in the
colours of the velocity level or the medium (see 174).
"Associate level” (2)

The velocity level of the current pipeline segment is taken from the previous con-
nection (e.g. in the case of a branch from the tee).
You can determine the velocity level freely (3).
8.1.3 Display options
configuration
configuration
The representation of pipes and
ventilation ducts is controlled via
the View menu and should be
adapted to the situation. The
For pipes... For ventilation ducts... graphic shows the different op-
tions for pipes (left) and ventilation
extensions,
ducts (right). In all cases, there
extensions,
are flags that can be either active

or inactive.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
In terms of content, the representation options distinguish between pipes and ventila-
tion ducts in just two functions.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
173
Introduction

r!
2D simple/expanded representation (pipes only)
On: Diameters and insulation thicknesses are visualised accord-

ing to the selected materials, so that this view reflects the actual
space required by the pipes.
Off: The pipes are represented in a line, regardless of their size.
View segments in colours

On: The entire area of pipes and/or ventilation ducts is filled by
the colour of their medium and/or their individually chosen colour.
Off: Pipes and/or ventilation ducts are displayed as lines.
Show drawing direction (arrows)

On: The flow direction of the pipes and/or ventilation ducts is
visualised by arrows.
Basic functions
Off: The flow direction is not shown.
Show connections from the storey above/below

Pipes and ventilation ducts are passed from one storey to an-
other through drawing operations (see 8.3.3.1, page 193). This
results in transfer points, which are set as visible in the storey
being shown and are used to continue the pipeline (see 8.3.1.7,
page 188). The example shows the transition points of various ventilation ducts. You
can see the cross-section and dimension.
Level representation (ventilation only)

Ventilation ducts (including transitions/reducers) can be divided into different velocity
levels for sizing by the pressure loss calculation (see 8.1.2.6, page 173). These lev-
els are visualised by different colours when level representation (left) is enabled. If
level representation is disabled, the ventilation ducts are coloured the same (right).
Level 1 Level 2
Level 4 Level 3
Index
174
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.2 Strategies and concepts for designing the

network
8.2.1 General notes
When building a pipe or duct system, you can be flexible and act according to the
overall design status. DDS-CAD offers all possibilities for a practical and step-by-step
approach.
Generally speaking, you will begin with defining the main pipeline and riser points,
coordinate these with colleagues from other professional disciplines and correct as
appropriate. As the design status progresses and information becomes more and
more detailed, you can also advance the network design in stages. In DDS-CAD you
can size the network in each processing stage based on the information available to
you. In this process, you start working with estimated or roughly calculated require-
ment values, which you can incorporate into the respective network via load ob-
33
jects .
Basic functions
1 2
configuration
configuration
You can use this methodology in further planning, refine the network and also per-
form calculations:
extensions,
extensions,
1.1 1.2 1.3
2
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
1.4 1.5 1.5
33
Substitute objects for ventilation (see 6.2.3, page 90); Substitute objects for potable water and heating facilities (see 8.1.2,
page 123)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
175
Introduction

r!
If the positions of the real objects are fixed, remove the load objects and connect the
real objects to the pipe network. We recommend using a step-by-step approach in
this regard. This is illustrated by the following example of a sanitary system.
We have already explained the role of the main

pipes. If the pipes carry several media in parallel,
you first draw a reference line manually (see 8.3,
page 179). You can then have DDS-CAD gener-
ate the parallel pipes (see 8.4.1, page 195).
Step 1
The main lines are
drawn manually
(see 9.3,
page 179).
Step 2
The distribution line
Basic functions
of a medium is pre-
pared manually
(see 9.3,
page 179).
Step 3
The prepared dis-
tribution line of the
first medium is du-
plicated (see 9.4.2,
page 196).
Step 4
The objects are
automatically con-
nected (see 9.4.4,
page 201).
Index
176
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.2.2 Notes on potable water systems (loops)

Potable water systems in DDS-CAD are calculated according to the DIN 1988-300,
which also takes loop systems into account. To create a loop system in DDS-CAD,
you always use a small distributor as start and end point of a ring. The tapping points
are, when using the automatic connection function, connected with a double walled
valve to the system..
Basic functions
8.2.3 Notes on ventilation systems
When designing the ventilation network, please note the following:
Each medium must be considered separately.

Supply air, extract air, outgoing air and intake air are each individual lines. The
configuration
systems of the various media must be drawn and dimensioned separately.
configuration
Using the example started above, we also provide you with two possible approaches
for working in the rooms. The aim is to construct a ventilation system whose main line
has been prepared: Adjustments,
extensions,
Working concept I – Place air terminals and connect to duct

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
177
Introduction

r!
In this method, the air terminals have
already been placed as objects. You
now need to connect the previously free

objects to the duct system. Basically
you have three options.
• branch off from the existing duct and connect at the air terminal.
• start at the air terminal and connect at the duct.
• automatically connect the air terminal at the nearest duct (see 8.4.4.4, page 206).
Working concept II – End ducts with an air outlet

Working concept II assumes that the air terminals are inserted into the model directly
when constructing the duct system:
Basic functions
 Start the sub-section at an existing duct (page 184/185).

 Draw the duct and end it with an air terminal (page 193).
 For more branches, convert a bend into a tee (page 186).
Copying a branch
Buildings with a regular room distribution allow the preparation of a finished branch
with connected air outlets as a template. The sub-section can then be inserted into
the appropriate rooms and subsequently edited (see 8.4.2, page 196).
Index
178
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.3 Drawing a pipeline manually

Manually drawing pipes and ventilation ducts is indispensable when designing the
network. You can develop a complete network manually without using auxiliary func-
34
tions , but you cannot use any auxiliary function without having done manual prepa-
ration beforehand. The procedure (using the example of a pipe) always corresponds
to the order shown. The ventilation ducts behave in a similar way:
Options for inter-floor

installation At free point
Show connec- At the end of the pipe

tions from the Start "Pipeline"
lower/
upper floor
On the object
Define starting point and (e.g. washbasin, boiler)
draw direction
As branch from a pipeline
(T-piece)
Pipeline Draw subsequent path At a bend (convert bend
Basic functions
to T-piece)
At interconnection point
Define endpoint
(End pipe) from adjacent floor
Draw horizontal Open at the last point

Chapter 9.3.1
Page 180
With object at the last
Draw vertical point
configuration
configuration
Avoid clashes As interconnection point
(over/under bending) to adjacent floor Chapter 9.3.3
Page 193
Insert mouldings and As connection to the
insulation during the process object (washbasin)
As connection to
extensions,
pipeline
extensions,
Chapter 9.3.2
Page 189
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
34
e.g. copy sub-networks (9.4.2, page 187) or automatically use connection functions (9.4.4, page 192)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
179
Introduction

r!
8.3.1 Starting point and direction of the first segment
Description Options Reference
Starting at a free point page 181

h
h
Starting at the pipe page 183

end (continue pipe)
Branch from a hori- page 184

zontal pipe
Basic functions
Branch from a vertical page 185

pipe
h
Starting at an object page 187

(e.g. boiler)
Starting at a bend page 186

(convert bend to tee)
Starting at the transi- page 188

tion point from adja- h
cent storey
h
Index
180
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.3.1.1 Starting at a free point

You can define the pipeline's starting point by clicking at any X/Y position.
The start dialogue is displayed and you are given full access to all parameters.
Note
Use this option, for example, to prepare individual pipeline sections and sub-
networks. You can incorporate these later on in your work and complete the net-
work in stages.
General use
(5) (6)
(4)
Smart start
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
(3)
configuration
 Start the pipeline function.
configuration
 Click on the starting position. The start dialogue is displayed.
 Select a starting option (1; see below), the medium (2) and the material (3). In
the case of a wastewater pipe, you can make specifications for the slope (4) (see
below). For notes on the other settings, please refer to chapter 8.1.2, page 168.

extensions,
Click OK . The pipeline starts at the specified position. The selected starting
extensions,
option (1) and any specifications relating to the drawing direction (4) determine
how the function behaves.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
181
Introduction

r!
Notes on the starting options
The starting option defines the height of the starting point (A). In the course of the
first segment (B) DDS-CAD assumes default settings, which in turn are specific for
each starting option:
Free
You enter the height of the starting point (A) in figures in
(B the pipeline's starting dialogue. With the default settings
for the drawing direction, the first segment (B) runs hori-
zontally without incline or slope. You can determine the
course of the first segment (B) by moving the cursor.
(A
On the ceiling
The starting point (A) is set at the room height. With the
(A (B default settings for the drawing direction, the first seg-
ment (B) runs vertically downwards. DDS-CAD queries
the values for the change in height (see 8.3.2.4,
page 191). The starting point is also a transition point to
the storey above. There you can resume the pipe and
Basic functions
continue it (see 8.3.1.7, page 188).
In the floor
The starting point (A) is at the bottom edge of the floor.
With the default settings for the drawing direction, the first
segment (B) runs vertically upwards. DDS-CAD queries
the storey below. There you can resume the pipeline and
(B continue it (see 8.3.1.7, page 188).
(A
Notes on the slope (wastewater pipe only)

When working with wastewater pipes, you
can set a slope. This is maintained over
the course of the pipe, as long as no
changes are made. Enable the slope in
the "Direction & Pos” tab and define the
desired value.
A negative value lets the pipe fall, while a
positive value lets it rise.
Index
182
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.3.1.2 Starting at the pipeline end (continue pipeline)

The open ends of a pipeline can
be resumed and continued. In
this way, you can complete the
network and integrate prepared
pipeline sections. Properties and
drawing direction are taken from
the existing pipeline.
Application
Horizontal pipeline
Basic functions
Smart start
Vertical pipeline
configuration
configuration
 Point to the end of the pipeline that you want to continue. The pipeline is high-
lighted. A menu is displayed, listing several connection points.
extensions,
 Select "Starting point...” or "End point...”.

extensions,
In the case of a horizontal pipeline the cursor moves the movable pipeline in the
specified direction. You can draw the further course using the mouse.
In the case of a vertical pipeline DDS-CAD queries the desired continuation in a
dialogue as a relative jump in height (in relation to the height of the connection
point) or as an absolute target height (in relation to the floor) (see also 8.3.2.4,
Adjustments,
page 191).
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
183
Introduction

r!
8.3.1.3 Branch from horizontal pipeline
When branching from a horizontal pipeline DDS-CAD automatically inserts a tee. You
determine installation location, dimension of the branch and drawing direction:
Application
(2) (3)
Define position:
On ongoing section
(5)
(1)
Smart start At the start of line section
(4)
At the end of line section

Basic functions
 Start the pipeline function (1).

 Point to the position of the branch. If the position of the cursor is clear, the pa-
rameters of the pipe are displayed in an information box (2). if the position is not
clear, a menu lists the possible connections (3).
 Select the desired connection option by clicking . The "General Tee with re-
ducer” dialogue box is displayed (pipes: see 8.5.2.3, page 213).
 If necessary, adjust the size of the branch and check the item (4).
For a horizontal branch

 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. You can
draw the pipeline.
For a vertical branch

 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed.
 Press  [PgDn] or  [PgUp]. DDS-CAD que-
[PgUp] [PgUp]
ries the height (see 8.3.2.4, page 191).
For an inclined branch (circular cross-sections
only)
 Enter the direction in degrees (5).
 Click OK . DDS-CAD queries the height
(5) (see 8.3.2.4, page 191).
Index
184
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.3.1.4 Branch from vertical pipeline

When branching from a vertical pipeline, the installation
position of the tee is defined by entering the height (h) in
figures. You determine the dimension of the branch in the
tee dialogue box. You set the direction dynamically by
moving the cursor or you can define it as the angle to the
h X-axis (6).
Application
(1)
(6)
Basic functions
Pipeline
(5)
(3)(2) (4) (7)
configuration
configuration
 Point to the vertical pipeline (1). A menu lists the possible connections.
Note:
To install the tee, the entry which states only medium, size and the Z height is
critical. The displayed height is equal to half the distance between the upper and
extensions,
lower ends of the vertical (here the end point and bend).
extensions,
 Select the entry for the installation of the tee (here, "PWC Cold-
water” Ø250 Z=1.273). The "New height" dialogue box appears.
 Define the installation height as an absolute value (2, in relation to the floor) or a
Adjustments,
relative jump (3, to the height of the calculated centre point).

Adjustments,
 Click OK (4). The "General Tee with reducer” dialogue box is displayed.
 If necessary, adjust the size of the branch and check the item (5). If you want to
set the direction of the branch in numbers, enter the angle between the X-axis
and the desired draw direction (6)
 Click OK (7). You can draw the pipe.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
185
Introduction

r!
8.3.1.5 Starting at a bend (convert bend to tee)
You can start the pipeline at a bend (1). DDS-CAD con-

(1) verts it into a tee.
Application
(1)
Basic functions
Smart start

 Point to the bend. It is highlighted.
 Click . The "General Tee with reducer” dialogue box is displayed.
 Set the draw direction (1) and click OK . The cursor moves the pipeline in the
specified direction.
Index
186
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.3.1.6 Starting at an object (e.g. boiler)

You can start a pipeline at the connection point to an ob-
ject (e.g. a boiler). DDS-CAD detects the position of the
connection point, the media and suggests a size. You se-
lect the material of the pipeline from the product database.
You can then specify the draw direction freely.
Application
(1)(2)
Basic functions
Pipeline
(3)
(4)
configuration
configuration
 Point to the object. The object is highlighted. If the position of the cursor at a
specific connection point is definite, the name of the object and medium, size
and height of the connection point are displayed in an information box (1). if the
position is not clear, a menu lists the possible connections (2).
 Select the desired connection option by clicking . The product database is dis-
played. The display is limited to the proposed size of the connection point (3)
extensions,
and only the corresponding materials are shown.

extensions,
 Choose the material. You can draw the pipeline (4).

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
187
Introduction

r!
8.3.1.7 Starting at the transition point from an adjacent storey
A pipeline whose start or end point has been defined as

"on the ceiling" or "in the floor" generates a transition point
(1) in the adjacent storey. From there you can start the
pipeline and transfer to the next storey as a riser (2) or
(1)
use it for the installation in the current storey (3).
h
(3)
The transition point sets all the technical properties and
(2) the drawing direction. You only define the transfer (2) or
the jump in height (h).
h
(1)
Application
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)

Show connections
from the lower floor/
upper floor
Smart start
 Enable the "Show connections from below” and/or "Show connections from
above” option. The transition points (1) are visible.
 Start the pipeline function and point to the transition point. The symbol is high-
lighted. An information box shows the starting option (floor or ceiling), starting
height Z and the medium.
 Click . The "New Z-height” dialogue box queries the height.
 For the direct transfer to the following storey (2) click UKD/FFB . The riser pipe has
been passed to the following storey, the function remains active.
 For the application in the current storey (3) enter the jump in height (h) as a rela-
tive jump (in relation to the current height of the starting point) or as an absolute
amount (in relation to the floor) and click OK . You can continue drawing the
pipeline at the new height.
Index
188
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.3.2 Drawing the pipeline route

Pipes and ventilation ducts behave in a similar way to

general polylines. In the simplest case – the horizontal
installation without change in height – you define the
route using the cursor. Each click defines a fixed
point (1), which is initially interpreted by DDS-CAD as a
bend.
(1)
As long as no other fixed point has been set, the bend
15° behaves dynamically. The cursor position determines
the direction and angle. An automatic Ortho mode en-
35
sures that commercially standard bends are used as
the cursor moves.
30°
The direction and length of the bend (1) and the seg-
ment following it (3) are fixed with the following fixed
point (2). You can continue the work.
Basic functions
45° When drawing a pipe the last stage is always to define
(2) the position of the fixed point (2) in the desired manner.
This creates a variety of individual situations, which can
usually be resolved through direct drawing operations
(3) (keyboard shortcuts).
In other cases, you have to configure the geometry of the fitting or fixture by manual
entries in the object dialogue. This happens, for example:
configuration
• With inclined changes in direction in pipes and circular ventilation ducts
configuration
• If the required component changes the geometry of the subsequent pipeline (e.g.
reducing bends, transitions for ventilation ducts)
In this situation, open the

context menu (click ) and
extensions,
select the required function.

extensions,
For pipes... For ventilation ducts...

In this way you get to the
object dialogue, where you
can configure the compo-
nent.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
For more information on the use of bends, tees and transitions for pipelines see
chapter 8.5, from page 211. The similar functions for ventilation ducts are described
in chapter 8.6, from page 216. For notes on step-by-step insulation and on dashed
line representation, see chapter 8.7, from page 218.
35
The example shows the angles of 15°, 30° and 45°.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
189
Introduction

r!
The following sections contain descriptions for the direct drawing operations (key-
board shortcuts). Specifically, these apply to the following options:
• Horizontal installation – positioning the fixed point by entering a measurement

• Horizontal installation – positioning the fixed point at a distance from a refer-
ence
• Height change in the pipeline route or transition to another storey
• Undo last drawing step
• Collision detection and collision avoidance
8.3.2.2 Horizontal – positioning the fixed point by entering a measurement
Example: Segment (1) is to lead to the new fixed point (2) in a certain direction by a
certain length via a 90° bend:
(2)
(1)
[]
Basic functions
 Press []/[]/[]/[]. The key determines the direction. The "Collect Points”
dialogue is displayed.
 Enter the value in metres (m). A helper line indicates the position of the new
fixed point with the current setting.
 Click OK . The operation is finished. You can continue your work.
8.3.2.3 Horizontal – positioning the fixed point at a distance from a reference

(a) Example: The position of the fixed point (2) is to be de-

(2) fined at a certain distance (a) to an obstacle (e.g. a
wall). The length of the segment (3) results from the
(3) operation.
[Shift] + []
 Press [Shift] and move the cursor to the border of the obstacle. DDS-CAD de-
tects the intersection. This is the reference for defining the fixed point (2).
 Press the arrow keys to specify the direction for the location of the new fixed
point (here [Shift]. The "Relative from snap point” dialogue box appears.
 Enter the distance from the reference point to fixed point in metres (m).
Index
190
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.3.2.4 Height change in the pipeline route or transition to another storey

The operation achieves two objec-
Z
tives:
DZ Height change in the pipeline route

Z Y with a gradient angle α. You define
a
the new working height as a target
height Z (absolute value, relative to
the floor) or as the difference ΔZ (rela-
X tive to the current working height). The
pipeline is continued in the current sto-
rey.
Transition to an adjacent storey in the

gradient angle α. The pipeline runs to
the ceiling or to the floor and stops.
The result is a transition point in the
Transition to an adjacent storey adjacent storey, where you can re-
sume the pipeline and continue it. The
gradient angle remains active.
Basic functions
 Press [PgUp] (move upwards) or [PgDn] (move downwards). The height
query dialogue box appears.
 Enter the gradient angle α.
Transition to an adjacent storey

 Click Go to Floor . The pipeline has been transferred. The pipeline function remains
active and you can define a new starting point.
configuration
Height change in the pipeline route
configuration
 To define a new installation height Z: Input"Absolute height"
To define a height difference ΔZ: Input "Up" or "Down".
 Click OK . The pipeline is located at the new height. You can continue the
work. Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
191
Introduction

r!
8.3.2.5 Undo last drawing step
If you have made a mistake in the route, DO NOT end the

pipeline function with [ESC]! You can revert the pipeline
route drawn up to now to an earlier position:
[Step back] [Step back]
 Press [backspace] or select the function with the same name in the context
menu. The last fixed point is undone. The function remains active.
8.3.2.6 Collision detection and collision avoidance
While working with a pipeline function, DDS-CAD checks whether the pipeline col-
lides with other pipelines. The check is performed over all DDS pipeline functions.
You can show the ventilation ducts predefined in electrical engineering, for example,
Basic functions
and develop the pipeline system of the cable ladders without any collisions. The
building's structural elements are also checked in an IFC model with suitable quality.
The check is performed dynamically while you are drawing. If the cursor approaches
an obstacle at the same height, DDS-CAD detects a collision. A menu (1) is dis-
played at the cursor, offering three options. Select an option by clicking :
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(2) Manual configuration for collision avoidance

After calling the function, the "Avoid clashes” dialogue box is displayed. You can set
collision avoidance as over- or under-crossing. You can also define the angle of the
bend (5) and the distance to the obstacle. Clicking OK negotiates the obstacle ac-
cording to the settings. The next click fixes the working height and you can con-
tinue with your work.
Index
192
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
(3) automatic over-crossing / (4) automatic under-crossing
Options (3) and (4) apply the current settings of the "Avoid clashes” dialogue box to

the current situation. The next click fixes the working height and you can continue
with your work.
8.3.3 The last segment, position and type of the endpoint

The ending functions for a pipeline can be divided to two groups:
• A function in the context menu or a keyboard shortcut converts the current fixed
point to the pipeline's endpoint.
• The connection to an object or to a different pipeline defines the endpoint.
8.3.3.1 Ending functions in the context menu
For pipelines... For ventilation ducts...
Basic functions
Function/Key Note
End function The pipeline is ended at the current fixed point. The pipeline
[ESC] function is ended.
Close and start new The pipeline is ended at the current fixed point. The pipeline
configuration
[Enter] function remains active and you can define the next starting
configuration
point.
End in the storey below A bend is placed at the position of the fixed point. This bend
[Ctrl]+[End] leads the pipeline vertically downwards or upwards. The
pipeline ends as a riser section in the floor/in the ceiling, and
End in the storey above may be continued in the adjacent storey (as per 8.3.1.7,
[Ctrl]+[Home] page 188).
Adjustments,
extensions,
End pipe/duct The "Rohrtrasse beenden" (End pipe) or "Kanaltrasse

[E] beenden" (End duct) dialogue box is displayed. You can
define specific settings.
End with cap These functions end the pipeline with the object specified.
The respective dialogue is displayed for configuration. The
End with air outlet
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
193
Introduction

r!
[A] pipeline function remains active.
End with cover

[S]
End with consumer You can configure a load object to simulate a consumer/sub-
network.
For ventilation ducts: see 0, page 99
For pipes (potable water only): see 7.1.2, page 133
8.3.3.2 Connection to an object
Objects have connection points at which the medium is also defined. If the active
pipeline approaches the connection point of an object, DDS-CAD performs a check. If
the media match, the object is highlighted and the connection point's information is
displayed.
Basic functions
 Click . The "Connect pipes” dialogue box appears. This offers several connec-
tion options, which are visualised in a preview.
 Select the connection type and click OK . The connection is created. The pipe-
line function remains active. You can define a new starting point.
8.3.3.3 Connection to a pipeline
You can connect a pipeline to an already existing one if their media

36
match or are suitable for a connection . The connection can be
made on the current section by a tee or at the open end.
If you approach a pipeline with the appropriate medium at the same

height, a menu is displayed containing the pipeline information and
functions for avoiding collisions (see 8.3.2.6, page 192).
36
For example, a connection between a hot and a cold water pipe is prevented by DDS-CAD. On the other hand, it is possible
to connect the circulation to a hot water pipe via a tee.
Index
194
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
To establish the connection, click on the pipeline
information. The connection is made immediately.

However, if there is a height difference, DDS-CAD
points this out. To establish the connection, click .
Select the connection type in the "Connect pipes”
dialogue box (see above).
8.4 Help functions for constructing a network

8.4.1 Creating parallel pipes
It is often the case that parallel pipeline routes of different media are desired. A cor-
responding auxiliary function generates a maximum of four parallel pipes to the se-
lected segment of a reference line (2). During the operation you specify
• the media of the new pipes in the planned order of your arrangement
•
Basic functions
the distribution of the new pipes to the right or to the left of the reference line
• the distances between the pipes
The sizes and materials of the new pipes are taken from the reference line. Of
course, they may need to be changed later. In the following example, several pipes
are to be created parallel to the sub-segment of a cold water pipe and arranged on
both sides of the reference line.
(1) (2) (3)
configuration
configuration
(4)
(6) extensions,
extensions,
(5)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Select the pipeline segment (1).

 Click . The context menu is displayed.
 Select "Draw parellel pipe chain”. The "Parallel Drawing” dialogue box is dis-
played. The medium of the reference line is stated (2). Below is a selection of dif-
ferent media for the first parallel pipe (3)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
195
Introduction

r!
 Select the medium of the first parallel pipe (3). Another menu (4) is displayed,
where you can define another parallel.
 Select all other required media in the desired arrangement.

 Use (5) to define the arrangement of the parallels in relation to the reference
line. In the example, circulation and hot water pipes (in flow direction) should ap-
pear to the left of the reference line and flow and return should appear to the
right.
 Define the distance between the pipes (6).
 Click OK . The new pipes appear parallel to the selected segment of the refer-
ence line. You can integrate them into your networks.
8.4.2 The copy function for sub-sections

By using the "Repeat branches” (pipes) or "Repeat
branches” (ventilation ducts) functions, you can du-
plicate an existing sub-section and insert it into the
model several times. Sub-sections that start in a
free point or as a branch from a main duct are ideal
templates. The copy can also be placed at a free
Basic functions
point or integrated into an existing duct via a tee.

Repeat branches
Repeat branch
(2)
(1)
 Select the starting point of the sub-section (1). In the example, the tee of the
branch has been chosen.
 Select "Extend selection and copy paste tree”. The entire subsequent sub-
section is automatically selected and the dialogue is displayed.
 Select the desired option (2).
Index
196
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Use on of the four options to configure how the copied sub-section is pasted. In doing
so, the required settings are enabled. To do this, please read the following sections.

Paste into existing section
The copied sub-section (1) is pasted into an existing
pipeline (target pipeline) with the desired number of cop-
ies (2). The set distance (4) applies from the insertion of
the first copy (3) onwards. The flow direction of the target
pipeline (5) indicates the arrangement of the copies (6).
(2)
The direction of the branching tees (right/left) is taken
(4) from the original.
In this way for example, you can transfer the installation

of one room to one or more other rooms:
Basic functions
(1)
(3)
configuration
configuration
(6)
(5)
 Select the sub-section to be copied (1) and start the copy function. The dialogue
box appears.
extensions,
extensions,
 Select "Insert in existing net same twist”.

 Enter the number of copies (2) and the distance (4).
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. DDS-CAD expects the insertion point in
the target pipeline.
Adjustments,
 Click on the insertion point (3) of the first copy. The first sub-section has been
Adjustments,
inserted at the selected position, the others follow at the set distances. If there
are multiple copies the function is ended. If you have only set one copy, the func-
tion remains active. You can define further insertion points.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
197
Introduction

r!
Rotate 180° and paste

pipeline (target pipeline) with the desired number of cop-
ies (2). The set distance (4) applies from the insertion of
the first copy (3) onwards. The flow direction of the target
pipeline (5) indicates the arrangement of the copies (6).
(2) The direction of the branching tees (right/left) is rotated
by 180° compared to the original.
(
(3)
(1)
Basic functions
(5)
(6)
box appears.
 Select "Insert in existing net opposite twist +180”.

inserted at the selected position, the others follow at the set distances. They are
rotated 180° relative to the original. If there are multiple copies the function is
ended. If you have only set one copy, the function remains active. You can
define further insertion points.
Index
198
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Paste into new Z-height (at a free point)

The copied sub-section (1) is inserted into the model at a
free point by clicking . The starting point (2) of the new
sub-section is located at the set height (3). The entire
sub-section is rotated by the set angle (4) relative to the
original.
After the operation, you can incorporate the new sub-

(3) section into the network (see 8.4.3, page 200).
(4)
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
box appears.
 Select "Insert one copy at given height".
configuration
configuration
 Enter the installation height (3) for the starting point of the new sub-section.
 Enter the rotation (4) of the sub-section relative to the original.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. DDS-CAD expect the insertion point.
 Click on the insertion point (2). The new sub-section has been inserted at the
selected position with the settings for height and rotation. The function remains
extensions,
active. You can define another insertion point.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
199
Introduction

r!
8.4.3 Incorporating free sub-sections into the overall network
You can incorporate the open end of a sub-section into the overall network in two
ways:
Option A
 Start the pipeline function at the open end of the sub-section (as per 8.3.1.2,
page 183).
 Draw the continuation of the pipeline to the main line and make the connection in
accordance with 8.3.3.3, page 194.
Option B
 Select the open segment of the pipeline
by clicking . The segment is temporarily
converted into a polyline.
 Click on the node at the open end of
the segment. You can move the open end
of the segment with the cursor.
Basic functions
 Point to the pipeline where the connection

is to be made. If the pipeline contains the
same medium, it is displayed as a se-
lected object.
 Click . The previously open end has
been connected via a tee.
Index
200
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.4.4 Connecting objects automatically

8.4.4.1 Introduction and general use
An automatic connection function for heating and sanitary objects as well as air ter-
minals provides assistance while you are building the respective network. It allows
the automatic connection of one or more objects of the same type (such as
washbasins) to the relevant media pipes in one step. Radiator connection pipes can
also be passed directly to the storey below. Any possibly existing connections are
automatically deleted and then renewed. The function assumes that the structure of
the network has been prepared.
Example (sanitary functions):

Several washbasins have been placed and the distribution pipes for hot and cold wa-
ter have been prepared. None of the objects are connected at the beginning of the
operation.

configuration
extensions,
extensions,
Calling the connection function

 Select the objects to be connected.
 Select "Connect selected object(s)”. The dialogue box appears. You can config-
Adjustments,
ure the function.

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
201
Introduction

r!
Configuring the connection function

The connection function behaves according to the options of the selected object
group. For example, with washbasins you can see several connection types for each
of wastewater (1) as well as hot and cold water (2). By checking "Connection" you
can suppress or enable the connection function for these media entirely and select a
connection option. A preview (3) shows you the results for each medium and makes
the selection easier. The settings (4) are used to define specific parameters (see
8.4.4.3, page 204).
(4)
(1)
(3)
(2)
Basic functions
Executing the connection function

To execute the function, click OK . If the object only has one connection point for a
medium, the connections are executed and the function is ended. Radiators in par-
ticular, but also WCs may contain several connection points for a medium. In this
case DDS-CAD required the position data for the connection. A message about the
medium is displayed and you are prompted to select the connection points:
 Confirm the prompt with OK . The object is magnified.

 Point to the desired connection point on the object. A message about the con-
nection point is displayed.
 Click . DDS-CAD checks the other media. If there are several connection
points, the routine is repeated. If you have defined all the connection points, the
connections of all selected objects will be executed in this form.
Index
202
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.4.4.2 Connection to pipes in the storey below

Various objects can be connected to pipes in the storey below. The example shows
radiator connections:
Basic functions
Application
Prepare the objects in the upper storey and the distribution pipe in the lower storey.
The operation is executed in the upper storey.
(1)
(2) extensions,
configuration
 Show the storey below (see 4.5, page 85). In addition to the radiators, the distri-
bution pipes in the storey below are visible.
 Select the objects to be connected and start the connection function.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Select the desired connection type (1).

 Switch to the "Settings“ tab and check "Connect to pipes in the storey below...”
(2).
 Click OK . The connections to the selected objects are executed in both sto-
reys. The operation is ended.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
203
Introduction

r!
8.4.4.3 Specific settings for sanitary objects
This section describes all settings for

sanitary objects at a glance. Please note
that the object types only query the rele-
(1) vant settings. For example, a tap does
(2) not have a connection point for waste-
(3) water pipes. These parameters are
(4) therefore not included in the dialogue.
The graphic (left) has been combined
(5) from the settings dialogues of all func-
tions.
(6)
Input "Distance to wall” / "Calculate” (1)

The settings control the installation depth for hot and cold wa-
ter pipes in the wall and/or the jump by the pipe from the object
Basic functions
to the rear. The status in "Calculate” is crucial.
"Calculate”
The value in Input "Distance to wall” is ignored. DDS-CAD checks the actual dis-
tance of the object to the wall and guides the pipe into the wall. The installation
depth is calculated from the pipe diameter. Use this setting if the pipe is to pene-
trate into the solid wall.
The pipe jumps from the object to the rear by the distance entered. The actual dis-
tance to the wall is ignored. Use this setting if the object has been mounted on a
front wall, for example.
Input "Slope” / "Calculate” (2)

The settings control the slope of the horizontal wastewater pipe from the object to the
connection with the collecting main or with the downpipe. The status in
"Calculate” is crucial
"Calculate”
The slope of the collecting main is read and transferred to the wastewater pipe
from the object up to the connection. The input slope is ignored.
The input slope of the wastewater pipe from the object up to the connection to the
collecting main or to the downpipe applies.
Index
204
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
"Avoiding collisions” (3)

When connecting the object to hot and cold water pipes installed in parallel, DDS-
CAD automatically avoids collisions. The connecting line for the distant medium is
guided over or under the closer medium and connected via a bend. The connection
can be made by either a 90° or a 45° connection:
"Bend” (4)
This setting is specifically for floor drains.
2×45° 1×90° It configures the first bend on its way from
the drain to the collecting main.
Basic functions
T-piece for vertical pipe - 45°/90° (5)
This setting configures the
wastewater connection
from washbasins, WCs,
bathtubs, shower pans and
domestic appliances to a
configuration
downpipe.
configuration
Input
"Height for bend“ / "Calculate” (6)
This setting is specifically for wastewater lifting units. It defines the height of the
backwater loop. The status in "Calculate” is crucial.
extensions,
"Calculate”
extensions,
The input height of the backwater loop is ignored. DDS-CAD calculates this value
depending on the storey height.
The input height of the backwater loop applies.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
205
Introduction

r!
8.4.4.4 Automatic connection of air terminals

DDS-CAD differentiates between air terminals that are connected from the side or
from above:
Both images show the connection to the nearest duct in the current storey. Please
note that air terminals with a lateral connection to the duct must be rotated if the con-
nection is to work.
The position of the connection point is dis-

played in different ways, depending on the
Basic functions
object. The graphic shows three examples.

The symbol (1) has been highlighted for
clarity.
(1)
In addition, you can supply the air terminals

to be connected from above via the storey above. Through a setting in the connec-
tion function (page 210) DDS-CAD creates a connection from the air terminal to the
ceiling. This creates a transition point on the next storey, where you can resume
these connections and continue them. In the two images you can see a correspond-
ing example:
(2)
(1)
(1)
Left: View from below from the room to the air terminal in the suspended ceiling (1)
Right: View in the intermediate space between the suspended ceiling and concrete
floor with the connection to the top.
Index
206
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
The function assumes that the structure of the network has been prepared. In the fol-

lowing example, several air terminals have been placed and the main line of the ven-
tilation system has been drawn. None of the objects are connected at the beginning
of the operation.
Calling the connection function
Basic functions
 Select the objects to be connected.
 Select "Connect selected object(s)”. The dialogue box appears. You can config-
ure the function.
Configuring the connection function

The connection function behaves according to the options of the selected air termi-
nals. It offers several connection types (1) and a preview (2) shows the result. Here
too, DDS-CAD recognises the two basic types of air terminals. Only the connection
options that are possible are enabled and displayed.
configuration
configuration
(4)
(2)
(1)
extensions,
extensions,
(3)
Adjustments,
Depending on the connection option chosen, settings on how the bends (3) are used
Adjustments,
may be required. The settings (4) are used to define specific parameters (see
page 210).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
207
Introduction

r!
Executing the connection function
To execute the function, click OK . If the connec-

tion function settings match the conditions in the
model, the connections are made and the function is
ended. If this is not the case, the affected air termi-
nals are ignored. An information list is displayed, in-
dicating critical situations. Use the information list as
an aid:
Basic functions
Message in the information list Cause and possible remedy

"It is not possible to connect to the duct The main duct is too short, the air outlet is
(the connection may be outside the outside the duct end. Move the air outlet or
duct). Operation cancelled." extend the duct.
"The connection is only possible if the You have selected multiple objects and one
connection point allows lateral connec- or more objects can only be connected from
tion, not above/below. Operation above/below. Connect the objects in their
cancelled." own group or individually.
"The connection is only possible if the You have selected multiple objects and one
object has connection points on the top. or more objects can only be connected from
Operation cancelled." the side. Connect the objects in their own

group or individually.
"It is not possible to connect at the cur- There is not enough space between the air
rent angle (not enough distance between outlet and the duct. Select a larger angle or
duct and object). Operation cancelled." move the air outlet.
"Only 90° bends are possible in rectan- You have chosen an incorrect angle. Use a
gular ducts. Operation cancelled." 90° bend to connect the outlet to the rectan-
gular duct.
"The distance between the air outlet and The distance from air outlet to duct is too
duct is too small for the selected connec- small for the set parameters. Select a differ-
tion. Operation cancelled." ent connection type, angle, distance, or move
the air outlet.
"Some objects of the connection are The connection is made, but some objects
overlapping (e.g. bends). Is this are overlapping (e.g. bends). Check the
intentional?" connection in 3D.
Index
208
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Checking and correcting connection conditions

Each row in the information list represents one air terminal. Using the information list,
you are taken directly to the respective air terminal:
 Select an entry. The air outlet is displayed as a selected object.
 Click Zoom object . The associated air outlet is displayed magnified in the centre of
the screen. You can check the local conditions.
Notes on connection options
Option Example Notes

From below/side Lateral connection/connection from
using 90° bend above
Other settings are not required. All
bends are executed at 90°. Where the
height of the air outlets if the same as
the main duct, the connection is created
directly without bends.
Basic functions
From above Connection from above
Select the angle of the first bend (1).
The second bend (2) is executed at 90°.
You define the length from the main
(1) (2) duct to the first bend (a) in the settings
(page 207).
From side using Lateral connection
one bend Select the angle of the bend.
configuration
two bends Select the angle of the bends. You de-
configuration
fine the length from the main duct to the
first bend (a) in the settings (page 207).

three bends Select the angle of the bends. You de-
fine the length from the main duct to the
extensions,
first bend (a) in the settings (page 207).

extensions,
Free with flexible Lateral connection/connection from

duct above
Other settings are not required.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
209
Introduction

r!
Notes on specific settings

This section describes all connection set-

tings at a glance. Please note that the
connection options query the relevant
(1)
settings.
(2)
(3/4/5)
Input "Distance (a)” (1)
The settings define the distance from the main duct to the first bend for the following
connection options:
Option a=0.5m a=1m

Basic functions
From above
(vertical)
From side using

two bends
(horizontal)
From side using

three bends
(horizontal)
"Connect to ceiling” (2)
"Calculate”
The connections of the selected air terminals lead to the ceiling (cf. page 206)
The selected air terminals are connected to the nearest duct on the current storey.
Index
210
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.5 Fixtures and fittings in pipes

In 8.1.1 (page 168) we mentioned
that fixtures and fittings are also
pipeline objects. They are listed as
part of the pipeline route in the list
of commands between the starting
point and endpoint. You can see
the correlation in the image, repre-
sented using the example of two
bends, a tee, a valve and a pump.
In addition to their specific features

and forms of application, all pipeline objects also share common features. These are
described at the beginning for all object types. Afterwards we will explain the specific
features of each separate type.
8.5.1 Features common to all pipeline objects
Basic functions
8.5.1.1 Direction, orientation, rotation on the pipe axis
All pipeline objects have options that configure their rotation and/or orientation on the
pipe centre line. Essentially we have to distinguish between two groups:
The rotation of bends and tees always affects the flow direction of the connected pipe
37
segment, which is why this parameter is set when drawing the pipe . In pipes that
flow purely horizontally and vertically, this is done automatically by a drawing opera-
tion. You only have to enter the rotation manually as an angle when there is an in-
clined jump in height or an inclined branch, or when flowing from a horizontal line.
configuration
Fixtures are generally inserted into an existing pipeline subsequently. This automati-
configuration
cally takes you to the object dialogue, where the rotation is defined as an angle.
Since fixtures do not affect the direction of the connected pipe segment, any subse-
quent change is not critical.
For both groups, there is also a distinction as to whether they are in a horizontal (ly-
ing down) or a vertical (standing) pipeline.
Adjustments,
extensions,
37
A subsequent change is possible in terms of the program, but should only be performed with extreme caution. In any case,
connected pipes are separated by rotated connecting pieces. The connection to the following network must be renewed
manually.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
211
Introduction

r!
Rotation in horizontal pipes
In a horizontal pipe, the angle of rotation is relative to the flow direction of the pipe.
From the point of view of the flow direction, the object rotates counter-clockwise:
Top=270°
Fittings Bends and T-parts
Left=180° Right=0°
Direction of Bottom=90°
t l
Rotation in vertical pipes

In vertical pipes, the angle of rotation is relative to the global co-ordinate system. Set
the direction in Input "Angle to X-axis”. All other parameters are irrelevant.
90°
Y
Basic functions
Fittings Bends and T-parts
180° 0°
(1)
270° X
8.5.1.2 Connection type

You can define the type of incorporation

into the pipe network for all pipeline ob-
jects. Under the "Flange” tab you can se-
lect the connecting element as an item (1).
In order to actually use it, check "Add
flange to object” (2). In this way the con-
necting elements are displayed in the
model and included in the part list.
(2) (1)
Index
212
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.5.2 Notes on the various pipeline objects

8.5.2.1 Pipe coupling
Pipe couplings (e.g. flanges) are installed in the pipe network

through the following options:
• Automatically by defining production lengths (see 8.1.2.5,
page 172)
• Automatically by installation points of pipeline objects (see
8.5.1.2, page 212)
• Individually, by manual insertion (see 8.5.3, page 214)
Pipe coupling
Basic functions
8.5.2.2 Bend
Bends are always installed in the pipe when drawing and configured automatically in
most cases. Each fixed point that is followed by a new segment after a direction
change is converted into a bend (see 8.3.2.1, page 189). The technical parameters
(material and size) are taken from the pipe used. The geometric parameters (angle
and direction) are determined by the drawing operation.
A manual configuration
may be required in special
configuration
cases, for example if no
see 9.5.1.1
configuration
suitable drawing operation
is available for the desired
change of direction. In this
case, call the object dia-
logue of the bend via the
context menu (click ) or
press [B] (cf. 8.3.2.1,
extensions,
extensions,
page 189).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
8.5.2.3 Tee
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
213
Introduction

r!
Tees are installed in the pipe network through the following options:
• Automatically when branching from an existing pipeline (see

8.3.1.3, page 184 and 8.3.1.4, page 8.3.1.4)
• Automatically when converting a bend to a tee (see 8.3.1.5,
page 186)
• Manually, when drawing the line (see 8.3.2.1, page 189)
Tee
see 9.5.1.1
Basic functions
8.5.2.4 Reducer
Reducers are installed in the pipe network through the following

options:
• Automatically, through the pipe network calculation
• Manually, by subsequent insertion (see 8.5.3, page 214)
Reducer
8.5.3 Manual installation of pipeline objects

All pipeline objects that do not alter the direction of the pipe can be inserted later.
The procedure is shown using a valve as an example. All other functions behave in a
similar way.
Index
214
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Insert valve (2)
(1)
Procedure:
 Select the required function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line
shows the "Locate flow segment and press left mouse button” prompt.
Basic functions
 Click at the position where the component is to be inserted. The object
dialogue of the component is displayed.
 Select the item (1), set the required parameters and click OK . The component
is part of the pipe.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
215
Introduction

r!
8.6 Moulded parts and devices in the ventilation

duct
8.6.1 Moulded parts in the ventilation duct
Moulded parts behave in a similar manner
in the ventilation duct, as fittings do in
pipes (see 8.6, page 216. They are con-
figured either automatically by a drawing
operation or by manual adjustment. How-
ever, the manual configuration is accorded
more importance.
(1)
You can enter the dimensions of a
moulded part in its object dialogue.
A diagram (1) shows the connections to
the respective setting values (2).
Basic functions
(2)
Index
216
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.6.2 Devices in the ventilation duct

Devices such as attenuators, dampers, etc. are added to an existing duct subse-
quently. You will find all the functions in the toolbox. The procedure is shown using
an attenuator as an example. All other functions behave in a similar way.
Attenuator
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
Procedure:
 Select the desired function. The cursor turns into a crosshair and moves the
symbol of the built-in device. The message line shows the following prompt: "Lo-
cate flow segment and press left mouse button”.
 Click in the duct. The object dialogue of the built-in part is displayed.
 Select the desired item (1) and correct other settings (2) where necessary.
configuration
 Click OK . The built-in device is located in the duct. The function remains ac-
configuration
tive. You can insert the same device at other locations by clicking .
Warning!
Components that depend on flow, such as flow rate regulators, are inserted in the
drawing direction of the duct.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
217
Introduction

r!
8.7 Segments in the pipeline route

The nature of the pipeline functions was described in 8.1.1 (page 168). It was said
that the initial properties of the pipeline are defined in the starting point and that these
can change over the pipeline route – with the exception of the medium. This change
in dimension is effected by corresponding components (e.g. reducers). To change
the material, various aspects of the representation and the insulation, you can divide
the pipeline into sections. If two consecutive segments have identical properties, they
can be merged back together.
8.7.1 Changing the material or colour in the pipeline route

The following operation is used to disconnect a continuous pipeline into two seg-
ments, whose colours or materials can then be changed separately from each other.
To start with, we have a continuously drawn pipe (1).
(1)
Basic functions
(2)
(3)
(4)
Split pipe
 Select the "Split a pipe” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message
line shows the following prompt: "Locate flow segment and press left mouse but-
ton”.
 Click on the position where the division is to be made (2). The "Start drawing
pipes” dialogue box is displayed.
 Uncheck "Associate material / color” (3).
 Select the properties (4) for the new pipeline segment.
 Click OK . The two pipeline segments have different properties. The operation
is ended.
Index
218
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
If two consecutive line pipeline segments have identical properties, they should be

merged together. Unnecessary divisions complicate subsequent processing.
 Select the ends of the adjacent segments.

 Select "Merge with connected chain”. If properties are the same, the merge is
carried out and the operation is ended. If the segments have different settings, a
corresponding message is displayed. In this case it is not possible to merge the
segments.
8.7.2 Changing insulation status and linetype

To change the insulation status or the line type in the pipeline, no prior split is neces-
sary. You can carry out the change through two corresponding functions, when draw-
ing the pipeline or through subsequent processing.
Basic functions
Both functions operate according to the same principle. You create an entry in the
command list, which defines the status of this position until the next change. The
graphic shows an example:
Insulation
The pipe was been
drawn from left to right.
Command (35) enables
the insulation. Com-
mand (41) disables it.
configuration
configuration
Linetype:
A ventilation duct is to
be marked as partially
obscured. Command
(45) starts the labelling.
Command (47) ends it.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
219
Introduction

r!
The use of both functions is described using the example of insulation:
Changing the state while drawing
 Fix the point for the beginning of the insulation by clicking .

 Select the "Insert insulation” function.
The "Insulation” dialogue box is displayed.
 Check "Use insulation” and click OK . The pipe uses the insulation as it con-
tinues. You can end its use in the same way.
Inserting a status change retroactively

You can insulate an existing pipe retroactively in sections and/or undo the use of in-
Basic functions
sulation.
Insulation
 Select "Insert insulation” function in the toolbox. The cursor turns into a cross-
hair. The message line shows the following prompt: "Locate flow segment and
press left mouse button”.
 Click on the position in the pipe, from which the insulation is to be enabled or
disabled. The "Insulation” dialogue box is displayed.
 Configure the insulation and click OK . The selected setting applies from the
selected position in the drawing direction of the pipe. The function remains active
and can be used further along the pipe.
Index
220
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
The procedure for
changing the linetype is

the same. In the context
menu (while drawing)
select the "Insert stippled
/ dotten Start of Pipe”
function.
To insert the label retro-
actively, call the "Dashed
Dashed pipe pipe” or "Dashed duct”
function from the toolbox.
For notes on the set-
tings, please refer to
chapter 8.1.2.4,
page 171.
8.8 Editing pipes and ventilation ducts

8.8.1 Selection functions for lines and sub-sections
Basic functions
An object must be selected before it can be
edited. In addition to the general selection
functions (see 19.1.2, page 519) there are
two other methods used for editing pipe-
lines. These mainly ensure the complete
deletion of a section with or without the
branching sub-sections.
 To call the function, select the pipeline segment where editing is to start.
configuration
 Select the desired selection function.
configuration
Select entire section
DDS-CAD selects the section from the se-
lected segment to its end point. Branching
pipelines are ignored and not included in the
editing.
extensions,
extensions,
Select section from selected piece

lected segment and all branching sub-
Adjustments,
sections up to their end points.

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
221
Introduction

r!
8.8.2 Changing the pipeline route
8.8.2.1 Move fitting or moulded part
(2) The pipeline route is fixed by the position of

bends and tees. You can move both com-
ponents along the pipeline route.
(1) The connected segments are updated
automatically.
(1)
 Select the component by clicking . Handles are displayed on the component.

 Click on a handle. The object is movable. Tees can be moved over each
other. Bends move along the axis of the previous segment.
 Click on the new position. The component is fixed and the pipeline route cor-
rected. The operation is ended.
Basic functions
Example 1 – Moving a tee:

Before After
Example 2 – Moving a bend:

Before After
Index
222
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.8.2.2 Editing the route of a segment

A segment is the connec-
tion between two pipeline
objects, e.g. from the start-
ing point to next bend (left)
or between two bends
(right). To enable a seg-
ment for editing, select it by
clicking .
Start and end points can be

edited as nodes. They are displayed as a solid square . By contrast, an open
square is displayed in the centre point of the segment . Click on the respective
symbol to open the context menu with the editing functions:
Node
Editing with polyline: move The node (in this case the starting point of the line)
can only be moved in the flow direction of the seg-
ment. The segment is thus extended or shortened. If
necessary, the direction of the next bend also
Basic functions
changes; its position remains unchanged.
The function starts when you click the symbol .
Start pipe movement The node (in this case the starting point of the line)
can be moved in any direction. This may change the
direction and position of the bend.
When approaching another pipeline with the same medium, the connection can be made
via a tee (see 8.4.3, page 200).
configuration
Segment
configuration
Editing with polyline: parallel shift The segment is shifted in parallel. The
function starts when you click the
symbol
Move pipe insert The segment is split and you can change
extensions,
the route (see below).

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
223
Introduction

r!
The function "Displace parallel polyline-like” is best described using an example. It is
assumed that the pipeline route is necessary because of a change in the floor plan.
An obstacle is to be circumvented:
Before After
Start of the editing
 Select the segment by clicking . The centre point is marked by an open square.

Basic functions
Click on the symbol . The context menu is displayed.

 Select "Displace parallel polyline-like”. The cursor moves the two movable ends
of the new sub-segments.
The colour of the movable sub-segments can be black or red. This symbolises the
status of the bends, if a fixed point is defined at the current cursor position.
Colour Meaning
Black The angle of the first bend is equivalent to a commercially available standard
size (15°, 30°, 45° or 60°).
Red The angle of at least one bend differs from the commercially standard sizes.
Defining the new pipeline route

Define the new pipeline route. Set the positions of each of the new bends by clicking
:
Index
224
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
End of the editing
The function remains active until it is terminated. After you have fixed the last bend,

press [ESC]. The pipeline will be displayed with the new route.
[ESC]
8.8.2.3 Editing the route of a pipeline segment
The operation is useful for example, to straighten the pipeline route. You can remove
bends without having to break up the pipeline and subsequently repair it.
Before After
Basic functions
However, it is critical that you first define the pipeline segment to be edited and con-
vert it into a polyline. You can then edit it. At the end of the operation, you need to
resolve the polyline back into individual segments. This procedure is also best de-
scribed using an example.
Defining a pipeline segment converting it to a polyline
(1)
Before: Individual
objects of the selected
configuration
configuration
(2)
extensions,
extensions,
After: Selected segment

as polyline object
(3)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,

 Select "Start polyline-like edit”. The separate objects (2) are compiled into a
polyline object and labelled separately in the model (3).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
225
Introduction

r!
Nodes and segments of the newly formed object can be edited using the polyline
options. Click on the respective symbol to open the context menu with the editing
functions:
(4)
To edit the example described above, use the "Delete node” function (4). In this way,
you get a visually continuous route (5). However, the remaining segment is still a
Basic functions
polyline. This polyline has to be converted back into a pipeline.
(5)
Converting a polyline into a pipeline

By re-converting into a pipeline, you incorporate the previously edited segment back
into the network and enable its calculation:
 Select the pipeline segment.

 Select "Stop polyline-like edit”. The operation is ended.
Index
226
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
8.8.3 Editing moulded parts and fixtures

8.8.3.1 Converting 90° bend into two 45° bends
You can convert a single

90° bend into two 45°
bends and vary the dis-
tance between the two
bends.
Basic functions
 Select the bend.
 Select "Replace with two bends”. The "Update bend” dialogue is displayed.
 Adjust the distance between the bends and click OK . The single bend has
been replaced by two 45° bends. The operation is ended.
8.8.3.2 Converting two 45° bends into one 90° bend
You can merge two 45°
configuration
bends into one 90° bend.
configuration
extensions,
extensions,
 Select the two bends. You cannot select any other objects.
 Select "Replace with one bend”. The bends have been replaced. The operation
is ended.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
227
Introduction
Erro Network calculations

r!
9 Network calculations
9.1 Introduction and general procedure

In DDS-CAD you can calculate heating, potable water and wastewater networks.
As preparation work, mark the relevant starting points of a network and assign them
a shared pipe network name. Then start the calculation function, define the boundary
conditions and run the calculation. The pipe network is automatically balanced during
the calculation. You can print the results of the calculation.
Complete pipe network is constructed Requirements
Consumers
Label calculation points
Pipes
Chapter 10.2
Page 228
Fittings
Basic functions
Pipe network calculation Pipe network calculation Pressure loss calculation in the
Heating pipe network Potable water network ventilation system
Introduction Introduction Introduction
Configure Configure The "Pressure loss

calculation calculation calculation" dialogue box
Enable calculation, Work with the pipe

analysis of the network network table
Work with the pipe

Calculated results Chapter 10.5
network table
Page 246
Calculated results
Chapter 10.3.5.2
Page 238
Chapter 10.3
Page 231
9.2 Labelling calculation points

To prepare for a pipe network calculation, you have to assign the pipe network name
and define the starting position for the network analysis. To do this, set one or more
calculation points (depending on the type of network). The line segment in which a
calculation point is located, is declared as the main line. All lines branching off are
therefore sub-sections.
Index
228
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Network calculations Erro
r!
At the same time, the calculation point defines the logical flow direction in the net-
work.

A calculation starting point that is defined at the end segment of a pipeline automati-
cally reverses the flow direction of the entire pipeline. The former end segment is
converted into a start segment by the operation:
before after
Notes on the heating pipe network

Heating pipe networks are calculated in sections, where each heating line requires
exactly two calculation points (for flow and return).
If all radiators are supplied by a single

Calculation points:
"Entire network"
pump, the entire pipe network can be
captured in one step.
Basic functions
Calculation points "Line 1"
On the other hand, if a large heating
facility works via distributors in several
lines with separate pumps and control
equipment, then each line has to be
38
calculated individually . In this exam-
configuration
ple therefore, the calculation points for
configuration
Calculation points flow and return have to be defined for
"Line 2"
both line 1 and line 2.
Notes on the potable water network

Potable water networks can be calculated together or separately.
extensions,
extensions,
In the continuous system the cold water

Calculation points "Potable
water" pipe is led into the building. It supplies
HW the taps and the hot water tank. The tank
Circ
is where the hot water and circulation
pipes start. In this case, set a calculation
Adjustments,
point for all three media and assign them

Adjustments,
a shared common pipe network name.

CW
38
It is not possible to calculate the entire system in one step.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
229
Introduction

r!
If the network structure is appropriate, you can consider both the cold water line and
39
the hot water line separately and assign different pipe network names. However, it
is not possible to calculate hot water and circulation lines separately.
Notes on the ventilation network

In the pressure loss calculation, supply air, extract air, outgoing air and intake air are
each individual lines. The systems of the various media must be sized separately.
Therefore, define a pipe network name for each medium.
First medium and new pipe network name
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
Basic functions
Set
calculation point
 Select the "Set a calculation point” function. The message line shows the "Lo-
cate flow segment and press left mouse button” prompt.
 Click on the first or last segment of a pipeline (1) or the branch of a new sub-
section (2). The "Properties of Calculation Point” dialogue box is displayed.
 Assign the pipe network name (3) and click OK . The calculation starting point
is symbolised by a rectangle with rounded corners (4). The function remains ac-
tive. Depending on the type of network, you may have to define the calculation
starting point of the missing media (see below).
Assigning an additional medium to the pipe network name

If the calculation point is to be assigned to an already
existing pipeline network name, open "Circuit
name” and select the desired entry.
39
It may be that only one medium or the other is present in the system.
Index
230
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
9.3 Pipe network calculation in the heating pipe

network
9.3.1 Introduction
When calculating the heating pipe network, DDS-CAD first determines the volume
flow required by the consumers. Then the system dimensions the sizes of the pipes
such that a maximum heating medium flow velocity and/or a certain pressure loss
cannot be exceeded at any point. The pipe dimensions are adjusted in the model
where required. A hydraulic balancing also takes place, in which the preferences for
radiator valves and lock shield valves are calculated. DDS-CAD thus ensures that for
the designed system there is:
• uniform heat dissipation/heating times in all rooms
• good regulation behaviour by the thermostatic valves
• optimal return temperatures
• optimised energy consumption (heating, pump's electrical consumption)
The expansion vessel used is checked and compared with the parameters of the cal-
culated system. If DDS-CAD notices a difference, an appropriate size is suggested.
Basic functions
Warning!
For a correct calculation, all fixtures necessary for operation (pumps and valves)
and safety devices must be inserted in the network. However, the heat generator
(if it is not known) can be skipped.
Building
configuration
 Select the "Building Informa-
configuration
tion” function and switch to the
"Heating/Cooling Systems”
tab. The table lists all heating
(1) lines.
 Select the network that you
want to calculate (1) and click
extensions,
extensions,
Calculate (2). The "Heating pipe
network calculation” is dis-

played with the "Options" tab
active.
(2)
 Configure the calculation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
231
Introduction

r!
9.3.2 Configuring the calculation
Use the options

to define the
(7) system parame-
(1) ters and any
boundary condi-
(2) (8) (9) tions to be ob-
served.
(3) (4) (5) (6)
The system parameters include system temperatures (1) and the medium used in the
system (5).
Basic functions
The boundary conditions stipulate the limit values of variable parameters and how
DDS-CAD is to react if values deviate from these limits. The network can be dimen-
sioned such that a maximum flow rate and/or a maximum pressure drop is not ex-
ceeded at any point in the network (1). You also select a minimum size (3), which
(regardless of these limits) must not be exceeded. If valve authority and/or pressure
loss of the radiator valves exceed the specifications, DDS-CAD can shift the excess
pressure loss to the lock shield valves (7).
The radiator outputs required when dimensioning can either be read from a calcu-
lated radiator design (see 7.4.4, page 164) or be read as a fixed specification from
the product database (8). Choose the second option for example, if you are working
with pre-specified radiators in an existing network.
You may have different pipe materials in the pipe network as a result of extensive
changes. If you want to ensure a uniform material is used, check "Same material in
entire pipe network” (9). DDS-CAD uses the first sub-section as a basis and transfers
its pipe material to all other sub-sections. In this way, the size adjustment is not af-
fected. If the materials of the sub-sections are to remain unchanged, uncheck the
box. In this case, DDS-CAD only changes the sizes.
During the calculation, you can also change the make of the radiator valves and lock
shield valves (6). To do this, check "Replace all radiator valves and lock shield
valves”. Then determine the manufacturer and the item.
Index
232
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
9.3.3 Enabling the calculation and analysing the network

Switch to the "Calculate” tab. DDS-CAD analyses the pipe network. If there are no
errors in the pipe network (case A), you are taken to the pipe network table. The dia-
logue box displays the number of radiators and/or underfloor heating distributors
within the building and reports the number of correctly and incorrectly connected ob-
jects (1).

configuration
(1)
extensions,
However, if the system determines that there are incorrectly connected radiators in
extensions,
the network, it displays an information list (case B). In this case:
Case B – There are incorrectly connected radiators in the line

A list of the incorrectly connected radiators is displayed.
Adjustments,
 Select the row and click Zoom object . The radiator is displayed magnified in the cen-
Adjustments,
tre of the image.

 Stop all functions and correct the radiator connection.
 Repeat the procedure until the "Heating pipe network calculation” dialogue box is
displayed without any error messages.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
233
Introduction

r!
9.3.4 Working with the pipe network table
The pipe network table lists all sub-sections of the active main line with its settings
and calculation results.
Use the dialogue

box's scroll bars
(1) or zoom function
(2) to view the
entire table.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Basic functions
The filter (1) is used to enable the display of the main line. Clicking on a sub-
section opens a context menu with additional functions:
"Lock” fixes the size of the sub-section, so that it cannot be changed by the calcula-
tion.
Warning!
Locking a sub-section in the feed has no effect on the parallel sub-section in the
return (and vice versa).
"Lock all” fixes the sizes of the entire network. In this way you can simulate an exist-
ing pipe network, for example. DDS-CAD only calculates the volume flows and pres-
sure losses under the current conditions and outputs them in the logs.
"Zoom" magnifies the selected sub-section in the centre of the screen. Use "Zoom
all” to make the whole drawing visible on the screen.
Meaning of other functions and displays:

Find by pointing (3) is a navigational aid to quickly get to the calculation results of a
sub-section. After opening the function, the dialogue box is invisible and you can se-
lect the sub-section in the model by clicking . This will take you back to the pipe
network table, where the corresponding row is selected.
Calculate (4) starts the pipe network calculation.

Index
234
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
9.3.4.2 Information in the pipe network table

Data in the pipe network table
Column Contents
Sub-section The full name of the sub-section is composed of the number of the
main line and the number of the sub-section.
From Number of the sub-section from which the sub-section branches off.
Room Position of the sub-section's end object, given as storey, region and
room number.
End object Type of the end object in the sub-section (e.g. "tee" or "radiator")
Qh, W Power (in watts) that is transmitted through this sub-section.
Volume flow, l/h Volume flow in the sub-section (in litres per hour)
Speed, m/s Velocity in the sub-section (in metres per second)
Invalid path blank
Freeze pipe The size of the sub-section may be changed by the calculation.
dimension
The size of the sub-section is locked against changes.
Basic functions
NW, DN Size (nominal width) of the sub-section. You can define a size by click-
ing on .
Pipe length, m Length of the sub-section in metres
Pipes, Pa/m Pipe friction pressure drop (in pascals per metre)
Pipes, Pa Pipes pressure loss (in pascals)
Fittings zeta Resistance coefficient of the fittings
Fittings, Pa Pressure loss due to individual resistances (in pascals)
Fixtures, Pa Pressure loss due to fixtures (in pascals)
configuration
X Position of the sub-section's end object in the compiled building model
configuration
(see 4.5, page 85), given as an absolute co-ordinate.
Y
Z
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
235
Introduction

r!
9.3.4.3 Starting and executing the calculation

If you have configured the calculation, you can dimension the pipe network:
Basic functions
(1)
Application
 Click Calculate (1). The "Select pump” dialogue box is displayed.
 Set the pump pressure and click OK . The "Safety valve response pressure”
dialogue box is displayed.
 Enter the response pressure and click OK . An information list provides vari-
ous notes. If the expansion vessel used is too large, a smaller one is suggested.
If it is too small, it is automatically replaced by a larger one.
 Confirm the information list with OK . The "Heating pipe network calculation" is
displayed with the calculated results.
Index
236
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
9.3.5 Calculated results

9.3.5.1 Pipe network table and printout of the results
The pipe net-

work table (1)
shows the calcu-
lated results of
each individual
sub-section, as
well as pressure
loss, pump
pressure and
volume flow of
the entire net-
work (2).
Clicking OK
(3) takes you
(1) (2) (3) back to the
Basic functions
Building Infor-
mation dia-
logue.
configuration
configuration
(4)
Print
(4)
extensions,
extensions,
(5) (6) starts

the
printout of the calcu-
lated results for the selected line. Select the desired report.
Report Contents
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
HPS_Rohrnetzberechnung einzelner List of the sub-sections of the selected line

Strang.rpt according to the pipe network calculation.
HPS_Ventilauslegung einzelner Strang.rpt Valve default settings for all radiators in
the line, separated by room.
Pressing System (5) gives you a view of the most important system parameters. OK
(6) transfers the calculated result into the drawn pipe network. DDS-CAD opens all
storeys and change the sizes.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
237
Introduction

r!
9.4 Potable water system calculation
9.4.1 Introduction
By calculating the potable water pipe network in accordance with DIN 1988, the sizes
of the supply and circulation pipes are defined and transferred to the drawn network.
DDS-CAD uses a different approach for this process. All consumption points and in-
dividual resistances are included. Cold water and hot water networks can be consid-
ered both separately and together. For example, the calculation of the hot water net-
work does not require that a cold water network exists. The same goes for the oppo-
site case.
Warning!
The hot water and circulation pipes must be insulated in order to ensure a correct
calculation (see 8.7, page 218).
Building
Basic functions
(1)  Select the "Building Infor-

mation” function and switch
to the "Potable water” tab.
The table lists all potable
water lines.
 Select the network that you

want to calculate (1) and
click
Calculate (2). The "Potable wa-
(2)
ter pipe network calculation”
is displayed with the "Op-
tions” tab active.
Configure the calculation.
Index
238
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
9.4.2 Tab „Options“ - Configuring the calculation

At the tab ”Op-
(1) (2) tions” you define
the type of calcula-
tion (1), the calcu-
lation parameters
(2) and the logic as
to which tapping
points are taken
into account (3).
(3)
Basic functions
9.4.2.1 Configure calculation type
(A Depending on the location of the

known data and the aim of the
calculation you can select be-
(B tween three methods. Determine
the method of calculation by se-
lecting the option and input pa-
rameters of the calculation.
configuration
(C
configuration
A – Supply pressure is unknown
This is the standard method. We are looking for the smallest possible dimension to
comply with the maximum flow rate. Each segment of the pipe system is dimen-
sioned such that the maximum flow rate remains below the set value. In this calcula-
extensions,
extensions,
tion, no excess pressure is determined.
B – Supply pressure is known, max. flow rate must be maintained

In the algorithm, each segment of the pipe system is dimensioned such that the
maximum flow rate remains below the set value. This results in a pressure drop for
the complete system to which then the supply pressure (Pvmin) is compared. If the
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
pressure loss of the system is greater than the supply pressure, it will be automati-
cally gradually reduced. If necessary, a larger dimension will be applied to pipe seg-
ments. With the new dimensions the pressure loss is recalculated and compared
again with the supply pressure. The algorithm is terminated when the pressure drop
(as determined from the available pipe friction pressure drop of worst paths) is less
than the supply pressure (Pvmin).
C – Supply pressure is known, max. pressure loss must be maintained

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
239
Introduction

r!
This option is a supplement to the first two types of calculation in the case that the
maximum pressure difference is very high after the calculation of individual sege-
ments. This option dimensions sections in such a way that the set max. pressure loss
is no longer exceeded. In the sequence the total pressure loss of the system is ap-
propriately reduced. The maximum flow rate is not a criteria. In case a segment ex-
ceeds a set value, it will be highlighted in red in the pipe network table.
Note:
Circular pipe systems are not changed by this algorithm. It may occur in a seg-
ment of a circular pipe system that it exceeds the maximum pressure loss. These
values are highlighted in red in the pipe network table.
9.4.2.2 Consideration logic for tapping points
The consideration logic for tapping points has been changed because DIN 1988-300
introduces the new concept of usage unit and simultaneously limits it to residential
40
buildings and buildings with a similar purpose .
Attention!
Define the building use in the Building Information dialog (see 4.4.1.1, page 76).
Basic functions
For this several options are available:
To be used only for residential build-

ings and buildings with similar pur-
poses!
In DDS-CAD the concept of usage unit is expanded. The following rules apply (de-
pending on the option selected):
All (non-residential buildings)

No usage units are considered.
The calculation flow rates of all
tapping points are added together
and the peak flow rate is deter-
mined in accordance with equation
9.
40
Im Falle einer Nutzungseinheit gelten Ausnahmen für die Berechnung des Summendurchflusses VR und des
Spitzendurchflusses VS.
Index
240
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Only each greatest of all similar tap points (residential building or similar)

A B Usage units are load objects (A),
loops (B) and rooms (C, D, E)..
Within a usage unit the calculated
flow rates of similar tapping points
are compared and only the greater
ones are considered. The peak
flow is the sum of the calculated
flow rates of the two largest tap-
ping points.
C D E
Outside a usage unit the calcu-
lated flow rates are added together and the peak flow rate is determined in accor-
dance with equation 9..
All (residential buildings or similar)

Usage units are: load objects(A),
A B
loops (B), potable water zones with
multiple rooms (C), rooms outside
the potable water zones (D)
Basic functions
Within usage units the peak flow
is the sum of calculated flow rates
of the two largest tapping points.
Outside a usage unit the calcu-

C D
lated flow rates are added together
and the peak flow determined.
configuration
configuration
Note:
You can influence the consideration for each individual tapping point (see 9.4.3.1,
page 242).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
241
Introduction

r!
9.4.3 Working with the pipe network table
The pipe network table

is divided into sections.
The upper part (A) lists
(1) all sub-sections of the
active main line. Use
the scroll bars or the
zoom function (2) to
A view the settings and
calculated results. The
(2) lower part (B) adds the
volume flows and pres-
sure losses of the active
main line. Activate the
B
desired main line in the
filter (1). Clicking on a
(3) (4) sub-section opens a
context menu.
Basic functions
"Lock” fixes the size of the sub-section for the calculation.

"Lock all” fixes the sizes of the entire network. In this way you can simulate an exist-
ing pipe network. DDS-CAD only calculates the volume flows and pressure losses.
"Zoom" magnifies the selected sub-section in the centre of the screen. Use "Zoom
all” to make the whole drawing visible on the screen.
"Edit Properties” is only active for sub-sections,
whose end object is a consumption point. A dialogue

shows the parameters of the selected consumption
point and its behaviour in the pipe network (5). If
necessary, you can remove a single consumption
point from the globally affected configuration (see
9.3.2, page 232) for the pipe network calculation and
consider it separately:
Yes: The consumption point is included in the calcu-
lation.
(5) No: The consumption point is not included in the
calculation.
As per setting...: see 9.3.2, page 232.
Continuous run units: The consumption point is con-
sidered a continuous run unit.
Find by pointing (3) is a navigational aid to quickly get to the calculation results of a
sub-section. After opening the function, the dialogue box is invisible and you can se-
lect the sub-section in the model by clicking . This will take you back to the pipe
network table, where the corresponding row is selected.
Calculate (4) starts the pipe network calculation.
Index
242
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
9.4.3.2 Information in the pipe network table

Data in the pipe network table (upper part)
Column Contents
Sub-circuit The full name of the sub-section is composed of the number of the main
line and the number of the sub-section.
From Number of the sub-section from which the sub-section branches off.
Room Position of the sub-section's end object, given as storey, region and
room number.
End object Type of the end object in the sub-section (e.g. "tee" or "washbasin")
Def. Yes The object is always included in the calcula-
consideration tion.
No The object is not included in the calculation.
Global settings see 9.4.2, page 239.
Continuous run unit The object is identified as a continuous run unit
and included in the calculation.
Considered Specifies whether the consumption point is included or not. This depends
on the general default according to 9.4.2 and individual object properties
according to 9.4.3.1.
Basic functions
VR, l/s Total flow rate
VS, l/s Peak flow rate
Invalid path blank
Freeze The size of the sub-section may be changed by the calculation.

The size of the sub-section is locked against changes.
NW, DN Size (nominal width) of the sub-section. You can define a size by clicking
configuration
on .
configuration
Pipes, mbar Pressure loss of the pipes
Fittings, mbar Pressure loss through fittings
Valves, mbar Pressure loss through valves
Filters, mbar Pressure loss through filters
Meters, mbar Pressure loss through meters
extensions,
Water tanks, Pressure loss through water tanks

extensions,
mbar
Geodetic, mbar Pressure loss through geodetic head
Sanitary Pressure loss through sanitary objects
objects, mbar
Adjustments,
Total, mbar Total pressure loss

Adjustments,
X Position of the sub-section's end object in the compiled building model

(see 4.5, page 85), given as an absolute co-ordinate.
Y
Z
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
243
Introduction

r!
9.4.3.3 Executing the calculation
If you have configured the calculation, you can dimension the pipe network:
(1)
Basic functions
Application
 Click Calculate (1). The calculation routine starts. For large networks, an information
window is displayed, showing the processing status. In the case of an existing
circulation line, the "Auswahl der Pumpe" (Select pump) dialogue box is dis-
played. If there is no current circulation line, the calculation is performed without
any prompt.
 Set the pump pressure and click OK . The main dialogue of the pipe network
calculation is displayed with the calculated results.
Index
244
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
9.4.4 Calculation results

The pipe network table shows the calculated results of each individual sub-section,
as well the supply pressure and the pressure surplus of the entire network. The prop-
erties of the consumption points have been added to the calculated values. Clicking
OK (1) takes you back to the Building Information dialogue.
Basic functions
(1)
extensions,
configuration
(2)
Print (2) starts the printout of
the calculated results for the
selected line. Select the desired
report.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Report Contents
HTS_Drinking water.rpt List of the sub-sections after the pipe network calculation
with the pressure losses and the parameters of the sanitary
objects.
HTS_Circulation.rpt You get a list of all sub-sections of the circulation and hot wa-
ter pipe with the pressure losses, heat losses and the pa-
rameters of the sanitary objects (calculated by differentiated
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
245
Introduction

r!
procedures).
9.5 Pressure loss calculation in the ventilation

system
9.5.1 Introduction
Supply air, extract air, outgoing air and intake air are each individual lines. They must
be dimensioned separately. The duct network calculation performs the following func-
tions:
• Dimensioning of the ducts and pipes
• Pressure loss calculation
• Dimensioning of the fan
• hydraulic balancing of the dampers and air outlets
Basic functions
Building
 Select the "Building Infor-

mation” function. The
"Building Information” dia-
logue box appears.
 Switch to the "Pressure
(1) Loss Calculation” tab. The
(2) table lists the names of all

ventilation lines.
 Select the line that you
want to calculate (1) and
click Calculate (2). The
"Pressure Loss Calculation”
9.5.2 The "Pressure loss calculation" dialogue box

The pressure loss calculation dialogue lists the current duct and pipe network with
the associated parameters. You can calculate the duct and pipe network and specify
settings for the pressure loss calculation.
Index
246
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

The table on the left (1) contains sub-sections along with their dimensions, velocities
and pressure losses. The components of a selected sub-section are displayed in the
table on the right (2) along with their data (dimension, velocity, zeta coefficients and
pressure loss).
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
 Select a sub-section and click on a row in the table (1). The components of
the selected sub-section are displayed along with their data (dimension, velocity,
zeta coefficient and pressure loss) in the table on the right (2).
 Click on a component in the right-hand table (2).
This opens a context menu with the following contents:
configuration
configuration
Message in the context menu Function
"Zoom all" The drawing is displayed in full on the screen.
"Zoom selected object to the right" The selected component is magnified and dis-
played in the top right of the screen.
"Zoom selected object in full" The selected component is magnified and dis-
extensions,
played in the centre of the screen.

extensions,
"Edit selected object" The object dialogue of the component is displayed.

You can change the component's settings.
"Apply changes" Changes made manually are not altered by the
calculation.
"Select object in drawing" A navigational aid to quickly get to the calculation
Adjustments,
results of an object you are interested in. After

Adjustments,
opening the function, the dialogue box is invisible

and you can select the object in the model by click-
ing . This will take you back to the calculation
dialogue, where the corresponding row is high-
lighted.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
247
Introduction

r!
The different colours and font thickness mean:
Colour / font Meaning

thickness
"Bright blue" The value is too low compared to the specifications with
impermissibly low set value.
"Pale blue" The value is too low compared to the specifications with
basic set value.
"Bright red" The value is too big compared to the specifications with
impermissibly high set value.
"Pale red" The value is too high compared to the specifications with
basic set value.
"Green" The value has been changed by the calculation.
"Black bold" The value is part of the determining line in the system and
affects the fan's parameters.
"Black" The value is within the tolerance.
9.5.2.1 "Config” tab
The "Config” tab (1) shows the actual state of the duct network, as it is represented in
Basic functions
the model. You can print out the current values in reports.
(2)
 Click Print (2). A selection of different reports is displayed.

 Select the desired report by double clicking . The report is created. The taskbar
at the bottom of the screen shows the button with the symbol:
 Click this button. The print preview is displayed and you can start printing.
Index
248
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Report Contents

VP_Data dampers.rpt You receive a list of air outlets with the associated
calculated results.
VP_Ventilation pressure loss de- You receive a list of the pressure loss calculation
tails.rpt with all moulded parts of the selected line.
VP_Ventilation pressure loss You receive a list of the pressure loss calculation of
branch.rpt the selected line.
9.5.2.2 "Calculate” tab
In the "Calculate” tab you can size the pipes and ducts and balance the system.
Pressing UPDATE transfers the calculated results to the "Config” tab.
(1)
Basic functions
(1)
configuration
configuration
"Calculate adding transitions“ mode:
When sizing the ducts and pipes, further reducers are automatically inserted by the
program. The sizing and thus further reducers are affected by the values specified in
the settings. Only the width of rectangular ducts is changed during sizing, not their
height. Tubular ducts are re-sized along their central axis.
extensions,
extensions,
"Calculate without adding additional transitions” mode:

When sizing the ducts and pipes, the program does not insert any additional reduc-
ers. Only those tees and reducers present in the drawing are adapted in size.
"Only adjust Air Terminals and Dampers” mode:

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
The dimensions of the ducts and pipes are not changed. The air outlets and dampers
are adjusted according to their set values. After sizing the duct and pipe network, you
can apply the changes to the DDS drawing.
9.5.2.3 "Tree view" tab
This tab provides you with a better overview of the network structure.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
249
Introduction

r!
(1)
(2)
9.5.2.4 "Config" tab
The "Config" tab defines the boundary conditions and parameters for the pressure
loss calculation and duct network calculation.
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
 Select the design velocities (1).

 Select the "Min dimensions" that can be used in the network (2).
 Specify the "Flow limits" as a percentage (3).
 Select the "Max dimensions" that can be used in the network (4).
 Set the maximum number of iterations for the calculation steps (5).
 Select the round-off values for dimensioning the rectangular ducts (6).
Index
250
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Distribution boards and switchboards Erro
r!
10 Distribution boards and switchboards

10.1 Purpose and functions of the distribution
board
The distribution board is a key feature with the character of an object, a database
and a management interface. The function is used both for power distribution as well
as for low voltage systems (telephone switchboards, switchboards for alarm sys-
tems). To simplify the description, the term "distribution board" is used for all types of
systems.
The object is where you describe

the external properties of a distribu-
tion board, such as name, item and
install height in the floor plan. Here
you can
• create a new distribution board

• edit distribution board data
Basic functions
• activate existing distribution
boards
• call the building's symbol in the
installation plan or distribution
schematic diagram
The database
is where you manage the content
of the distribution board, its circuits
and equipment. You can:
configuration
configuration
• build the distribution structure
• establish the energy balance
• size the lines
• connect and label components
in the installation plan
• compile documentation on the
extensions,
distribution boards
extensions,
The management function is

used to compile the distribution
board documentation (see 0, pa-
Adjustments,
ge 359). The database is analysed

Adjustments,
graphically and can be output as a

circuit diagram, in lists and reports.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
251
Introduction
Erro Distribution boards and switchboards

r!
Distribution Product database

b d
Object
Housing
Equipment
Database
Feed
Final circuit 1
Final circuit 2
Feed Final circuit 1 Final circuit 2

Basic functions
Circuit Circuit Circuit
Σ Capacity Capacity Capacity
Equipment Equipment Equipment

Part list UV01

F1 F2 Item no. Item name Quantity
020605 MCB 1p 2 pc.

020603 Latching relay 1 pc.
K1
020606 Main breaker 3/ 63A 1 pc.
Q1
FDX606 Terminal 1.5mm² 8 pc.
FDX612 Terminal 10mm² 5 pc.
Feed Final circuit 1 Final circuit 2
Circuit diagram UV01
Sheet management
Index
252
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
10.2 The distribution board as an object

You manage the object properties of the distribution board under the "Define board”
tab. Here you can create new distribution boards, define the names, description and
properties of the housing. The object accesses the product database and takes the
information about the symbol and its physical dimensions.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Basic functions
Creating a distribution board
 Click New (2). In "Define board” a new distribution board number is
displayed.
 In Input "Reference" (3) enter the short description for the distribution. This ap-
pears in the circuit label of the connected components and as a distribution
board label in the installation plan.
 In Input "Description” (4) enter the function of the distribution. This appears in
the title fields of the distribution board documentation and can be enabled as
configuration
symbol text in the installation plan.
configuration
Enabling a distribution board
Enable a distribution board (1) if the project already contains several distribution
boards and you want to edit, draw or label a specific one.
Positioning the distribution board housing

extensions,
extensions,
You can position the distribution board housing in the installation plan and for the
representation of the cabinet structure.
 Select an item (7).
 Enter the install height in Input
"Bottom" (5) or Input
"Top" (6). The other value
Adjustments,
is recalculated.
Adjustments,
 Click Place symbol (8). The symbol is displayed at the cursor as a dynamic sym-
bol.
 Fix the symbol in the model. The function is ended.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
253
Introduction

r!
10.3 The distribution board as a database – the cir-

cuit table
10.3.1 Content and functions
The "Circuit List” tab is used to manage the contents of the distribution board. The
function managed all circuits of the active distribution system and calculates the
power requirements of the operating currents of the final circuits and checks the di-
mensions of the equipment. Equipment that is too small is highlighted (in red).
A calculation compares the equipment to the current load conditions.
The picture shows a high-voltage current sub-distribution system with one feed (1),
one series fuse and/or RCD for each of several circuits (2) and some final circuits (3):
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
(1)
Basic functions
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
New (4) starts the function to create a new circuit (see 10.3.3, page 259).
Draw circuit (5) is only enabled when the installation drawing is open and calls the line
of the selected circuit for drawing. In this way you can label and electrically connect
the components in the drawing (see 12.5, page 345).
Circuit tools (6) can make extensive changes throughout the entire distribution board
database. This may include the reorganisation of the numbers and names of circuits,
components, cables and terminals. Any subsequent changes to the structure of the
distribution board always shifts, deletes and re-inserts these elements. In this case, if
the numbering ends up out of order it can be reorganised by pressing Circuit tools .
(see 10.5; page 278).
Index
254
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Each cell in the circuit table is used for a specific purpose to configure a circuit and/or

its equipment. Double clicking in that cell calls the function:
Cell "1" (a)
In this cell, define the assignment of
the circuit to a busbar for the first or
second level. The final circuits 2.1 to
2.3 are part of level 2. They are con-
trolled by a shared resource. The final
circuits 3 and 4 pick up from the main
busbar.
In order to also allocate the circuits 3

and 4 to level 2, double click on cell
1 of circuit 3. This results in the follow-
ing final circuits also being assigned to
level 2. Double clicking on cell 1 again
assigns this circuit and all subsequent
Basic functions
ones to the main busbar.
The final circuits at level 2 must di-

rectly follow each other. So for example, it is not possible to supply circuit 4 via
level 2 while leaving circuit 3 on the main busbar. Level 2 must be defined as a circuit
when configuring the distribution board.
Cell "2/3" (b)
Cell "2/3" affects the allocation, if the

current row has its own power supply
configuration
via the main busbar (final circuit 3, 5, 6
configuration
and 7) or if the voltage is drawn from
the preceding circuit (final circuit 4 and
8). The two settings are exchanged by
double clicking on cell "2/3" for one
row.
extensions,
extensions,
In addition, the colour of the horizontal bar shows whether a line has already been
drawn for this circuit in the working model of the installation plan. In the example this
applies to the final circuits 3 and 4. There is not yet a line for the final circuits 5 to 8.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
255
Introduction

r!
Cell "circuit" (c)
This function manages the technical parameters of the circuit. DDS-CAD distin-
guishes between two basic types. Feeds, supply lines to sub-distribution boards and
distribution board circuits are one basic type. Final circuits belong to the second type.
Both types differ in how they handle the operating currents.
Feeds calculate their own operating current by adding the associated final circuits,
taking into account the coincidence factor. You define the operating current of the
final circuits when creating the circuit.
The dialogues of both types are the same in areas (1) and (2). The functions in area
(3) only apply to feeds.
Area (1) contains basic definitions,

such as name, system and the as-
(1) signment of the phase conductor.
Area (2) contains the circuit's

technical parameters. It shows the
power balance and allows you to
Basic functions
(2) adjust the equipment to changing

loads.
Area (3) retrieves the power bal-

(3) ance of the supplied sub-
distribution board and transfers it
to (2).
Cell "Device" (d)

The function manages the properties

of a device (e.g. fuse, switch, etc.)
Change opens the product database.
Text generates a text symbol for
use in the distribution board docu-
mentation.
Button [Aux Contacts] opens the product database and allows the selection of auxil-
iary contacts which are allocated to the equipment. The example shows a three-pole
contactor, to which an additional auxiliary contact block has been assigned.
Index
256
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Cell "cable" (e)

The function manages all parameters of the line and/or cable. The dialogue box is
divided into several levels.
The "Cable and Conduit” tab contains

the technical properties of the line. This
is where you can adjust the settings for
the number of wires, the cross section
and the cable type.
The conduit can be activated for corre-

sponding cable installation methods.
The part list reports the same length of
conduit for the cable that has been
drawn.
For each cable, you can define the

name of the terminal block and the
terminal number of the first phase con-
ductor.
Basic functions
"Load Data and Calculation” con-
tains the connection values of the sup-
plied system. If you change a parame-
ter (e.g. efficiency), DDS-CAD instantly
adjusts all of the dependent parame-
ters (in this case the delivered power
Pab). The operating current is trans-
ferred to the circuit parameters for cal-
culating the power balance and is also
used to calculate the permissible cable
configuration
length. Press Calculate to start the cable
configuration
calculation according to the installation
conditions.
Cell "description" (6)

extensions,
extensions,
The "Description” cell can hold three lines of text that de-
scribes the function of the circuit. It is displayed in the
pages of the distribution board documentation. Try to write
unique descriptions.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
257
Introduction

r!
10.3.2 Customising circuit table layout
The display of the circuit table is variable and can be customised. For example, you
can make the display layout easier to read and hide unnecessary columns. You can
also specify which data should be displayed in the cells.
Example:
To monitor the power
balance, the settings of
the coincidence factor
and the value of the op-
erating current are
needed in the "circuit"
cell.
In addition, the columns

"Comp. 3" and "Comp. 4"
are not needed. They
should therefore be
hidden.
Basic functions
 Click in a cell in the circuit table. A context menu is displayed.

 Select the "Options” function. The "Options” dialogue box is displayed:
(1)
(2)
(3)
 Select "Circuits” (1). The parameters of the selected cell (2) can be enabled for
display or disabled.
 Set the display for the selected cell.
 Disable the display of unneeded columns (3)
 Click OK . The circuit table only displays the desired content:
Index
258
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
10.3.3 Working with the circuit table

10.3.3.1 Creating a new circuit
By creating a new circuit, you insert a new row in the circuit table. The order in the
database also determines the order in the distribution diagram.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) (2)
Basic functions
(7) (8)
 Click New (1). The "New Circuit” dialogue box is displayed. All circuit layouts
are arranged in different tables. By checking "Show user defined Circuits” (2)
41
you switch between the standard tables and your own circuit layouts .
 Select a table (3). The content of the bottom list (4) changes.
 Select a circuit layout (4).
 Correct operating current (7), the coincidence factor (6) and the other parame-
configuration
42
ters (5) .
configuration
 Click Add or Insert (8):
Einfügen inserts the new
circuit above the selected

row.
extensions,
Hinzufügen places the new

extensions,
circuit at the end of the

circuit list.
This starts an automatic query
mechanism to select the required equip-
Adjustments,
ment and the circuit description. Which compo-

Adjustments,
nents are queried depends on the selected circuit

layout. The request for the circuit description ends
the routine. Once confirmed with OK , the new
circuit is part of the distribution board.
41
For more information on editing and creating new circuit layouts, please refer to chapter 1 on page 603.
42
Notes on selecting the circuit layout and the effect of the parameters of operating current (Ib1), operating current (Ib2), use
category and coincidence can be found in the online help or in 11.4, page 262.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
259
Introduction

r!
10.3.3.2 Functions in the context menu
There are additional tools

available to you when con-
structing the distribution sys-
tem. You can access all of the
functions via a context menu.
Some functions can
alternatively be used via
keyboard shortcuts.
 Select the rows that you
are interested in.
 Click . The context menu
is displayed.
Function/shortcut Meaning
Cut out The component is copied to the clipboard and removed from the
Basic functions
component table. You can paste it at another position.

Paste The component is copied from the clipboard into the selected cell.
component
Delete component The component is removed from the table.
Edit component The cell's properties dialogue is opened. When you call an empty
Double click cell, the product database is displayed so you can select the equip-
ment.
Cut out row The selected circuits are copied to the clipboard and removed from
[Ctrl]+[X] the table. You can paste them at another position.
Copy row The selected circuits are copied to the clipboard. You can paste
[Ctrl]+[C] them at another position.

Paste row The circuit is copied from the clipboard into the table. It is inserted
[Ctrl]+[V] above the selected row.
Delete row The circuit is completely removed from the table, along with all cur-
[Del] rent paths.
Calculate A dialogue box is displayed to calculate the cable cross section,

while taking into account the set load and the installation condi-
tions according to DIN VDE 0100 5th Supplement.
Update devices The equipment of the selected circuit is re-sized and adjusted to
the current load conditions.
Options Function for configuring the circuit table (see 10.3.2, page 258).
Zoom to the cable Navigational aid in the installation plan for locating the cable.
New Creates a new circuit (see 10.3.3.1, page 259).
Draw Starts the cable installation in the installation plan (see 12.5.5,
page 352)
Go to single- Navigational aid in the distribution board documentation. DDS-
pole/multi-pole circuit CAD opens the page where the selected circuit was drawn.
diagram page
Index
260
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
10.3.4 Reorganising a distribution board

While editing the project, you will constantly be working with the distribution boards.
You're inserting new circuits, deleting unnecessary ones and moving existing ones.
During these processes, the names and IDs become mixed up. Therefore you should
carry out a reorganisation every so often.
By using the"Ändern" (Edit) function (1) you can adjust the names of the circuits and
equipment to a selected pattern or naming schema in stages. You can also modify
the technical parameters and re-size the equipment.
(a) (b) (c)
Example:
The example shows a distribu-
tion board whose circuit IDs
(a), component names (b) and
cable IDs (c) are disordered.
They should follow a uniform
schema. To do this, use
Circuit tools (1).
Basic functions
(1)
Change calls a dialogue box, which provides different options for modifying each object
class (circuit, comp. group, cables or terminal list). By selecting the object class (2)
configuration
DDS-CAD shows the options available for modifying it (3). Area (4) is where you de-
configuration
fine the scope of the operation.
To implement the example outlined

above, you need the following three
steps:
• Change the circuit IDs
extensions,
(2)
• Change the component names
extensions,
• Change the cable IDs

The example is described in the following
(3) pages. At the end, you will receive de-
tailed information about the various set-
Adjustments,
tings and options for modifying them.

Adjustments,
(4)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
261
Introduction

r!
10.3.4.1 Example of reorganisation
Step 1 – Change the circuit IDs

 Configure the settings:
Object:
"Circuits”
Type of change:
Circuit numbers with sub-number on
level two
Scope:
Full table
 Click OK . The "Edit” dialogue box

is closed, the circuit IDs are changed
(1).
Basic functions
(1)
The new circuit IDs can now be used as a template and numbering schema for the
other object classes.
Index
262
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Step 2 – Change the component names

In the second step, the names of the main switch and the fuses are adjusted to the
circuit IDs. To do this, you need to define the component groups and select a method
for labelling them.
 Click Change . The "Edit” dia-
(1)
 Select the "Comp. group”
setting (1).
(2)
(3)  Define the desired object
(4) groups (2) that are to be af-
fected by the change. You can
manually enter the equipment
IDs separated by comma or
select from a list.
 For "What kind of edit-
ing/settings”, select "New Cir-
cuit Numbers” (3)
Basic functions
Click Method (4). The "Numbering method" dia-
 Select "Same as circuit number" (5) and
click OK . The dialogue box is closed, the
(5) numbering schema is selected. You return to
the "Edit” dialogue box.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The
name of the selected component groups has
been adapted to the respective circuit ID (6).
configuration
configuration
extensions,
(6)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
263
Introduction

r!
Step 3 – Change the cable IDs
In the third step, the cable IDs are also adapted to the circuit IDs.
 Click Change . The "Edit” dialogue box

is displayed.
 Select the "Cables” setting (1).
 For "What kind of editing/settings”,
select "New Cable Numbers" (2).
 Click OK . The dialogue box is
closed. The name of the cable has
been adapted to the respective cir-
cuit ID (3).
Basic functions
(3)
Note:
In this case it is not necessary to re-configure the setting for the method. The
setting selected in the previous step remains active.
Index
264
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
10.3.4.2 Defining the scope

The example described in 10.3.4.1 has
been run through for the complete table
in all steps. However, you can also de-
fine a scope for the operation and thus
restrict the operation to certain areas (1).
(1)
Full table
The function searches the entire table for the objects to be modified. Manually de-
fined objects are not changed.
Basic functions
From ... to ... in the table
The function searches a defined range of the table for the objects to be modified.
Manually defined objects are not changed.
Specify the range to be searched by enter-

ing a start and an end in Input "From" and
Input "To". To do this, select the name of
a device
(cable ID or component name), which be-
longs to the respective circuit.
configuration
configuration
Full table and manual components
The change is applied to all object groups. This setting is only useful if the "Comp.
group” option has been selected.
Full table and manual components from ... to ...

The change is applied to all objects that are located in the defined range ( Input
extensions,
"From" ... "To"). This setting is only useful if the "Comp. group” option has been
extensions,
selected.
All manual components

The change is applied to all manually defined object groups. This setting is only use-
ful if the "Comp. group” option has been selected.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
265
Introduction

r!
10.3.4.3 Options for editing object classes
Circuits
Changes to the "Circuits" object class affect the
text and parameters of the circuits.
(1) (2) (3)
New circuit IDs (1)

The circuits in the scope of ap-
plication are re-numbered.
Specify the naming schema (4) (5)
( Method ) and Input "Start num-
Basic functions
ber". Input
1
Circuit numbers with sub-number on level two (1)
Circuits at level two are numbered by a decimal point.
1.1 1.2 1. 1.4 1.5
Phase distribution: L1>L2>L3 (2)

The circuits of the scope of application are assigned to the phase conductors in the
order L1, L2, L3. The load on the phase conductor is not taken into consideration.
Phase distribution: Uniformly distributed load (2)
The division of the circuits in the scope is arranged so that a nearly symmetrical dis-
tribution of the load is present in the distribution system.

Circuit is pluggable/circuit is non-pluggable (4)
The setting indicates the circuits in the scope as a sta-
tionary or non-stationary connection. The effect is visible
in the circuit diagram.
Expand circuit names
The IDs/names of the circuits within the scope can be expanded to include additional
characters. The extra characters appear BEFORE the old circuit IDs.
Re-calculate (5)
All circuits are re-calculated according to their load. The dimensions of the equipment
are adjusted.
Reset page references (DC)
Select this function when a component has been deleted, but still cannot be redrawn.
This may be necessary in certain cases.
Change coincidence factor (3)
The circuits in the scope receive a new coincidence factor.
Index
266
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Object group

Changes to the "object group" object class
will affect the labels and/or parameters of
the components.
(1) (3)
(2) (4)
(5)
New component names (1)

The components in the scope are re-numbered. Specify the naming schema ( Method )
and Input "Start number".
Basic functions
Add block separator/Remove block separator (3)
Displaying the block separators is switched on or off for the components within the
scope.
Transfer to materials list/Don't transfer to materials list (5)

The components within the scope are included in the materials list / are not included
in the materials list.
First letter in component name (4)

Displaying the first letter in the component name (1) is switched on or off for the
components within the scope.
configuration
configuration
Edit name (1)
The names of the components (F-fuses, S-switches...) are changed. You can filter
the objects to be changed according to their naming schema. Enter the schema in
Input "Old value”. If Input "Old value" remains blank, all components are changed.
Edit additional name (2)

extensions,
An additional name of max. 8 characters can be defined for the components within
extensions,
the scope and be displayed in the circuit diagrams. You can filter the objects to be
changed according to their naming schema. Enter the schema in Input "Old value”. If
Input "Old value” remains blank, all components are changed.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
267
Introduction

r!
Cable
Changes to the "cable" object class will affect

the labels and/or parameters of the cables and
wires.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Basic functions
New cable ID (1)

The cables within the scope are re-numbered. Specify the naming schema ( Method )
and Input "Start number”.
Edit cable type (3)

The cables within the scope are assigned a different type. You can filter the cable
types to be changed. Enter the cable type to be changed in Input "Old value”.
If Input "Old value” remains blank, all cable types are changed.
Change cable dimension (2)

The cables in the scope are given a new cable dimension. You can filter the cable
dimensions to be changed. Enter the cable dimension to be changed in Input "Old
value”. If Input "Old value” remains blank, all cable dimensions are changed.
Edit additional name

An additional name of max. 8 characters can be defined for the cables within the
scope and be displayed in the circuit diagrams. You can filter the cables to be
changed according to their naming schema. Enter the schema in Input "Old value”.
If Input "Old value” remains blank, all cables are changed.
Expand cable names (1)

The IDs/names of the cables within the scope can be expanded to include additional
characters. The extra characters appear BEFORE the old cable ID. You can filter the
cables to be changed according to their naming schema. Enter the schema in Input
"Old value”. If Input "Old value” remains blank, all cables are changed.
Index
268
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Terminal block

Changes to the terminals are visible in the line
dialogue boxes.
(3) (1)
(2)
Basic functions
New terminal ID (2)
The terminals of the terminal block (3) are re-numbered. Specify the naming schema
( Method ) and Input "Start number”.
New terminal block name (1)

The terminal block (3) is given a new name.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
269
Introduction

r!
10.4 Notes on the high-voltage distribution board

10.4.1 Introduction
By building the distribution board structure, you create the basis for the energy bal-
ance, the distribution system diagrams and the circuit labelling for the switching and
terminal equipment in the installation plan.
Sub distributor 1
Power supply (51A)
Circuit 1 (16A)
Circuit 2 (25A) Main distributor
Circuit 3 (10A) Power supply (64A)

Supply to UV1 (51A)
Sub distributor 2 Supply to UV2 (64A)
Basic functions
Power supply (64A)

Circuit 1 (16A)
Circuit 2 (16A)
Circuit 3 (32A)
The relationship is established by the corresponding circuit ”supply...” (defined in the

sub distributor) and ”Supply to sub distributor...” (defined in the main distributor).
10.4.2 Configure sub distributor

10.4.2.1 Notes on the power supply
Start each distirbutor with a power sup-

ply! The supply adds the power require-
ments of the system, taking into account
the diversity factors and provides the cal-
culated values for the main distributor.
When creating a feed, DDS-CAD auto-

matically assumes an operating current
(Ib1) of 63 A. The equipment is sized ac-
cordingly (nominal current of the fuse –
63 A; dimension of the supply line –
10 mm²). If the feed is defined in the dis-
tribution board, the nominal current (Ib1)
(1) is set to "0" (1).
The actual load is only created with the

addition of final circuits. Here, the operat-
ing currents of the final circuits are multi-
Index
270 (2)
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
plied by the diversity factor and added to the supply. Any change to the load condi-
tions within the distribution board is immediately recorded and displayed. The "circuit"

cell always displays the value of the phase conductor under the highest load. In the
following example, single pole final circuits have been added. DDS-CAD assigns the
circuits to a phase conductor in consecutive order (L1, L2, L3). Therefore, the higher
nominal current is only displayed in the feed when a fourth circuit is added.
10.4.2.2 Configuring final circuits
Operating current Ib1 (1) and the

diversity factor (2) are crucial for
the energy balance of the final cir-
cuit. You enter these data when
creating the new circuit. The utili-
sation category (3) is also signifi-
cant to correctly selecting the
equipment. It is controlled by se-
lecting the circuit layout and can
be changed manually if needed.
The operating current Ib2 (4) is
only important for using tapped
(1) (2)
Basic functions
winding.
The operating current Ib1 (1) flows

(4) (3)
in the rating of the connected
equipment via the line. It is passed
to the line and used to define the
cable dimension. DDS-CAD automatically searches for equipment that matches the
operating current (Ib1) and utilisation category (3).
To calculate the power balance of the whole distribution board, the operating current
Ib1 (1) is reduced by the coincidence factor and added to the feed of the distribution
configuration
board. Starting currents that are expected in motor circuits are included in this calcu-
configuration
lation.
Example 1 – Lighting circuit (resistive load)
Entered values and settings

extensions,
Circuit layout "ZMF3A – Light with protective device"

extensions,
Operating current (Ib1) 24 A

Coincidence 50%
Calculated values and automatic settings

Adjustments,
Usage category AC1 – Resistive

Adjustments,
Fuse MCB (B), rated current 25 A

Load of the superordinate supply line 12 A
Cross-section of the cable 2.5 mm²
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
271
Introduction

r!
Example 2 – Motor circuit (inductive load)

Entered values and settings

Circuit layout "YYFKQ – Motor Start Delta with pro-
tective device"
Operating current (Ib1) 24 A
Coincidence 50%
Calculated values and automatic settings

Usage category AC3 – 2 cables
Fuse MCB (B), rated current 32A
Contactor rated current 24 A
Load of the superordinate supply line 13.86 A
Cross-section of the cable 2.5 mm²
Warning!
Basic functions
The dimensions of the components and cables are filtered according to the operat-
ing current in the product database. Should the product database provided incor-
rectly sized components, you have neglected to make corrections in Input "Main
load (lb1)”. You can cancel the function and re-start or continue and change the
necessary parameters later on.
10.4.2.3 Balancing load distribution and equipment in the sub distributor
Several changes may be required while configuring the sub-board. New circuits may
be added gradually, existing ones moved and surplus ones deleted. In addition, load
parameters of the final circuits are changed. During this process, the following effects
are expected:
• unsymmetrical load distribution
• exceeding the rated currents of one or more devices
Exceeding the rated currents can therefore be a direct consequence of an unsym-
metrical load distribution. Cases of the rated current being exceeded are indicated
visually. The name of the equipment is displayed in bold red font. However, adjust-
ment is not automatic but must be triggered by starting a calculation function. To do
this, you have the following options:
• Produce a symmetrical load in the distribution board
• Balance the dimensions of individual circuits
• Balance the dimensions of the entire distribution board
Index
272
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Procedure for producing a symmetrical load in the distribution board

Symmetrische Belastung herstellen
 Select all cells.
 Click in the column „Cir-
cuit“. The context menu
appears.
 Select „Phase Distribu-
tion“. The cricuits retrieve
their power in correspond-
ing order from the external
conductor. Changes are
indicated in green, the load
on the power supply has
been corrected.
Procedure for balancing the dimensions of individual circuits
Basic functions
 Open the distributor and
click on the circuit to be
balanced. The context
menu appears.
 Select „Update Compo-
nents Dimensions“. The
devices on the circuit have
been adjusted to the load
conditions. The names of
the changed equipment
are displayed in bold green
configuration
text.
configuration
Procedure for balancing the dimensions of the entire distribution board
extensions,
 Select all cells.

extensions,
 Click in the column „Cir-

cuit“. The context menu
appears.
 Select „Recalculate“. All
Adjustments,
components are adjusted

Adjustments,
to the current load condi-

tions. The changes are in-
dicated in green.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
273
Introduction

r!
10.4.3 Configure main distributor

10.4.3.1 Power supply and circuits
First, create a power supply in the main distributor and subsequently any other re-
quired circuits. The power supply of the main distributor coalsce all power of the con-
nected sub distributors (adjusted for diversity factors) and retrieves the total demand
for the main power supply.
10.4.3.2 Supply to sub distributor
To connect the sub distributor to the

main distributor and retrieve the re-
quired values a circuit has to be de-
fined for each sub distributor by add-
ing a ”Sub-Switchboard“ circuit to the
main distributor.
Basic functions
(1)
10.4.4 Connect sub distributor to the main distributor

To make the connection between the distributors you can select two options:
• Visually –draw cables from the main to the sub distributor
• Mathematically – define connection in the sub distributor
Attention!
Both options create the conditions for the transfer of data to the main distributor.
The data flow is not automatic. It must be started manually.
10.4.4.1 Visually – draw cables from the main to the sub distributor
 Open the main distributor.
 Select the „Sub-
(1) Switchboard“ circuit and
press Draw . You can
draw the supply cable
 Connect the supply cable
(2) to the sub distributor.
Index
274
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
10.4.4.2 Mathematically– define connection in the subdistributor

In the sub distributor dialog you
(1) can define the connection to
the main distributor without
having to draw a cable.
 Open the sub distributor
and go to the tab „Con-
nected“ (1).
(2)  Select the supplying distir-
(3) butor at „Reference“ (2).
 Select the correct cir-
cuit (3).

Attention!
Basic functions
In the pulldown list for the circuit selection only ”Sub-Switchboard” circuits will be
visible.
10.4.5 Retrieving the energy balance from sub distributors
Attention!
The flow of data from the sub distirbutor to the main distributor is not automatic. It
must be started manually. Repeat the following steps when any changes are
made to the loads in the sub distributors..
configuration
configuration
 Open the main distribu-
(1) tor.
 Open the circuit parame-
ters of the supply by
double clicking on the
extensions,
cell „Circuit“ (1). The dia-

extensions,
log „Supply“ appears.

 Click Update Devices (2).
DDS-CAD transfers the
(3) load of the sub distribu-
Adjustments,
tor to the main distirbutor

Adjustments,
(3).
(2)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
275
Introduction

r!
10.4.6 The relationship of energy balance (graphically)
Main distributor
Supply from transformer L1 L2 L3

Display
Synchronism: 80% 70.88 A 58.08 A 51.36 A 70.88 A
74.2 A 61.74 A 56.7 A
Supply to upper floor sub-board L1 L2

L3 Display
Supply to ground floor sub-board L1 L2

L3 Display
Basic functions
Sub-board: ground floor

Supply from main distributor L1 L2
L3 Display
Final circuit 1 47.4 A 36.2 A 25.0 A
External conductor:
L1 11.2 A
Operating current:
16 A
Final circuit 2
External conductor:
L1 11.2 A
Operating current:
16 A
Final circuit 3
External conductor:
L1 11.2 A
Operating current:
16 A
Final circuit 4
External conductor:
L1 25.0 A
Operating current:
25 A
Sub-board: upper floor
Supply from main distributor L1 L2

L3 Display
58.6 A 52.0 A 56.0 A

Index
276
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
10.4.7 Sizing the cable dimension (final circuits)

By configuring the distribution system, DDS-CAD first sizes the cable dimensions ac-
cording to the load. The reduction in load rating due to unfavourable installation con-
ditions as per DIN VDE 0100 Supp. 5 is not included in this calculation.
You can also perform this correction via the circuit table. Alternatively you can call the
line to be calculated by double clicking from the installation drawing. We describe
using the function via the circuit table:
Warning!
The function described only considers the loop impedance of the current line to
the current distribution board when calculating the short-circuit ampere. The up-
stream network via the supply line from the main distribution board and to the
transformer is not included. This calculation is therefore only suitable for sizing
final circuits .
 Open the distribution

board and click on
the circuit to be bal-
Basic functions
anced. The context
menu appears.
 Select "CDC Calcula-
tion”. The "IEC 60364
based calculation”
dialogue box is dis-
played.
configuration
configuration
The dialogue box is divided
into two levels. Under the
"Calculation" tab you can de-
fine the technical parameters
of the circuits that are to be
extensions,
considered during the sizing

extensions,
process. You can also start the

calculation from this tab (1).
(1)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
277
Introduction

r!
Under the "Cable installation
input” tab you can define the

cable length to be calculated,
the accumulation and the pre-
vailing environmental condi-
tions. This is where you define
the worst case in the line.
To execute the calculation,

click Calculate dimension . To apply
the amended cable dimension
in the circuit table and in the
drawing, click OK . To abort
and close the calculated
results, click Cancel .
10.5 Notes on data

distribution boards
To create a data distribution board, follow the procedures described in chapter 10.2,
Basic functions
page 253. Make sure to select the correct distribution board housing. The product
database contains various types of data and network cabinets:
Configuring a data distribution board with patch panels is realised by using the "New
Circuit” function (see 10.3.3.1, page 259). The main selection (1) contains the differ-
ent categories. In the selection (2) choose the required patch panel. The circuit
parameters (3) are irrelevant and have no function.
Index
278
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

(1)
(2)
(3)
After starting with

Add or Insert
DDS-CAD first asks
Basic functions
for the desired item
for the patch panel.
configuration
configuration
 Select an item. The dialogue for the circuit description
is displayed and asks for the name for the patch panel.
 Enter the name for the patch panel and click OK
The dialogue for the circuit description is displayed and
asks for the name of the port for the data outlet.
extensions,
extensions,
 Enter the name for the patch panel and click OK

The dialogue for the circuit description is displayed and
asks for the name of the port for the data outlet.
 Continue naming the data outlets until all ports are la-
belled. The process is then ended. You can add addi-
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
tional components.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
279
Introduction

r!
10.6 Notes on other low-voltage current distribu-

tion boards
To create a low-voltage current distribution board (e.g. a telephone switchboard), fol-
low the procedures described in chapter 10.2, page 253. The product database con-
Basic functions
tains various types of low-voltage distribution boards and switchboards:

Index
280
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Configuring a low-voltage distribution board is realised by using the "New Circuit”

function (see 10.3.3.1, page 259). Select the "Devices" entry in the main selection (1)
and the desired cable type in the selection list (2). The circuit parameters (3) are
irrelevant and have no function.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Basic functions
After starting with Add or Insert DDS-CAD asks for the cable name.
configuration
configuration
By confirming the name, the cable becomes part of the distribution board. You can
make any necessary adjustments to the cable type afterwards.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
281
Introduction
Erro Lightning protection and earthing systems

r!
11 Installation systems

11.1.1 Introduction and terms
Cable ladders, canals
and conduits are re-
lated functions in DDS-
WM: Verlegesysteme CAD that are very simi-
lar in character, behav-
iour, and hence their
application. The func-
tions for constructing
cable ladders, canals
and conduits can be
Kabelbahn found in the "Use Ca-
34 Kabelkanal ble Tray, Trunking and
Rohr Conduit" working
29
mode.
Basic functions
32
31 33 35
30
A route is a construction of continuously generated objects installed in a row. Each

route has a start and an end point. In between are segments, which are connected
by suitable components (e.g. ladder bends). These structures are created automati-
cally when you are drawing and can be used in the command list. The example
shows a ladder drawn from left to right. The numbers illustrate the relationship be-
tween the visible object in the model and the corresponding entry in the command
list.
The starting point (29) defines the starting height of the pipeline and the direction and
43
representation of the first segment . The pipeline route (30 to 34) in the example
only consists of cable ladder sections and bends. In addition, tees, junctions and
transitions are used. You can also define special pipeline segments where, for exam-
ple, a different material or an amended representation should be used. The com-
mand list uses specific entries to describe all fixtures and section breaks. In the end-
point (35) the type of ending with which the pipeline has been terminated is de-
scribed.
43
Material, size, insulation and presentation may be changed further along the pipeline route.
Index
282
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Lightning protection and earthing systems Erro
r!
11.1.2 Settings in the starting point

The starting point is where you define the
(5) (6) (7)
starting height, the nature and the repre-
sentation of the first segment – the initial
(1) properties of the route. The respective start
dialogue is used to manage these proper-
ties. Depending on the situation, it is dis-
played at the start of a new pipeline or
44
(2) when editing an existing one .
(3)
11.1.2.1 General settings (for all routing
systems)
(4)
Start (1)
A pipeline can be started by various operations. A manual setting in this area is only
required when starting at a free point (see 8.3.1.1, page 181).
Basic functions
Start mounting Height (2)
The starting height describes the distance between the centre axis of the
pipe/ventilation duct and the top edge of the finished floor. Their definition is only im-
portant when starting in a free point. If the pipeline begins at an object, DDS-CAD
automatically detects the starting height and applies it.
Product (3)
As with all DDS objects you can select the routing system from the product database.
The dimensions are stored in the article.
Hatch (4)
configuration
Cable trunks and conduits are represented with hatching, for which the settings can
configuration
be changed.
Direction and Position (5)
Ausrichtung (6)
Dotted or Hidden Trunking (7)
extensions,
Routing systems can be controlled indi-

extensions,
vidually in their representation. Under this

tab you specify the type of line to represent
the model. The setting is valid from the
start to the end of the segment of the rout
or the section break.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Type of representation (1)
44
For example, if you start a pipe at a free point, DDS-CAD does not receive any instructions and you have to define all the
parameters yourself. However, if you begin at the connection point of an object (such as the cold water connection of a wash
basin), it will draw information about the medium and the starting height of the line from said object.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
283
Introduction

r!
Normal The routing system is represented by solid lines. Colour and shading are
determined by the chosen medium and displayed according to the se-
lected view (see 8.1.3, page 173).

Stippled The routing sytem is represented by dashed lines and no shading. You
can define the shape of the dashed line by setting the length for at most
three different line segments as well as the gaps between the segments.
For unneeded segments, enter the value "0".
Hidden The routing system is not visible, but is included in the part list and the
network calculations.
11.1.2.2 Specific settings for cable canals

Basic functions
Input Width / Height / Step Distance
Apply from connection (3)

Using this area's settings, you define the behaviour of a pipeline

(A), which branches off via a tee (B) from a main pipeline (C).
(A (B (C
"Material and colour"

Default setting: The material and colour of the branching pipeline (A) is determined
The material can be determined by selecting an item. The colour is independent of
the medium and can be selected in the "Attributes” tab.
"Material" (6), "Dimension" (7), item (8)

The settings (6) and (7) together form a search filter for the item (8):
 Select the "Material" (6) group. The available sizes are made available in
"Dimension" (7).
 In "Dimension" (7) select the required size. DDS-CAD automatically acti-
vates the appropriate item (8). You can also select the items manually. To do
this, click … .
11.1.2.3 Specific settings for cable canals

Index
284
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Input
Dimension / Thickness
Horizontal
11.1.2.4 Specific settings for conduits

configuration
11.1.3 Display options
extensions,
extensions,
The representation of pipes and ventilation

ducts is controlled via the View menu and
should be adapted to the situation. The graphic
shows the different options for pipes (left) and
ventilation ducts (right). In all cases, there are
Adjustments,
flags that can be either active or inactive.

Adjustments,
Show drawing direction (arrows)

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
285
Introduction

r!
On: The flow direction of the pipes and/or ventilation ducts is
visualised by arrows.
Off: The flow direction is not shown.
Show connections from the storey above/below

Pipes and ventilation ducts are passed from one storey to an-
other through drawing operations (see 8.3.3.1, page 193). This
results in transfer points, which are set as visible in the storey
being shown and are used to continue the pipeline (see 8.3.1.7,
page 188). The example shows the transition points of various ventilation ducts. You
can see the cross-section and dimension.
Basic functions
Index
286
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
11.2 Drawing a pipeline manually

Manually drawing pipes and ventilation ducts is indispensable when designing the
network. You can develop a complete network manually without using auxiliary func-
45
tions , but you cannot use any auxiliary function without having done manual prepa-
ration beforehand. The procedure (using the example of a pipe) always corresponds
to the order shown. The ventilation ducts behave in a similar way:
Options for inter-floor

installation At free point
Show connec- At the end of the pipe

tions from the Start "Pipeline"
lower/
upper floor
On the object
Define starting point and (e.g. washbasin, boiler)
draw direction
As branch from a pipeline
(T-piece)
Pipeline Draw subsequent path At a bend (convert bend
Basic functions
to T-piece)
At interconnection point
Define endpoint
(End pipe) from adjacent floor
Draw horizontal Open at the last point

Chapter 9.3.1
Page 180
With object at the last
Draw vertical point
configuration
configuration
Avoid clashes As interconnection point
(over/under bending) to adjacent floor Chapter 9.3.3
Page 193
Insert mouldings and As connection to the
insulation during the object (washbasin)
process
As connection to
extensions,
pipeline
extensions,
Chapter 9.3.2
Page 189
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
45
e.g. copy sub-networks (9.4.2, page 187) or automatically use connection functions (9.4.4, page 192)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
287
Introduction

r!
11.2.1 Starting point and direction of the first segment
Description Options Referenc

e
Starting at a free point page 181

h
h
Starting at the pipe page 183

end (continue pipe)
Branch from a hori- page 184

zontal pipe
Basic functions
Starting at a bend page 186

(convert bend to tee)
Starting at the transi- page 188

tion point from adja- h
cent storey
h
Index
288
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
11.2.1.1 Starting at a free point

You can define the pipeline's starting point by clicking at any X/Y position. The
start dialogue is displayed and you are given full access to all parameters.
Note
Use this option, for example, to prepare individual pipeline sections and sub-
networks. You can incorporate these later on in your work and complete the net-
work in stages.
General use
(5) (6)
(4)
Pipeline
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
(3)
configuration
configuration
 Click on the starting position. The start dialogue is displayed.
 Select a starting option (1; see below), the medium (2) and the material (3). In
the case of a wastewater pipe, you can make specifications for the slope (4) (see
below). For notes on the other settings, please refer to chapter 8.1.2, page 168.

extensions,
Click OK . The pipeline starts at the specified position. The selected starting
extensions,
option (1) and any specifications relating to the drawing direction (4) determine
how the function behaves.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
289
Introduction

r!
Notes on the starting options
The starting option defines the height of the starting point (A). In the course of the
first segment (B) DDS-CAD assumes default settings, which in turn are specific for
each starting option:
Free
You enter the height of the starting point (A) in figures in
(B the pipeline's starting dialogue. With the default settings
for the drawing direction, the first segment (B) runs hori-
zontally without incline or slope. You can determine the
course of the first segment (B) by moving the cursor.
(A
On the ceiling
The starting point (A) is set at the room height. With the
(A (B default settings for the drawing direction, the first seg-
ment (B) runs vertically downwards. DDS-CAD queries
the storey above. There you can resume the pipe and
Basic functions
continue it (see 8.3.1.7, page 188).
In the floor
The starting point (A) is at the bottom edge of the floor.
With the default settings for the drawing direction, the first
segment (B) runs vertically upwards. DDS-CAD queries
the storey below. There you can resume the pipeline and
(B continue it (see 8.3.1.7, page 188).
(A
Notes on the slope (wastewater pipe only)
When working with wastewater pipes, you
can set a slope. This is maintained over
the course of the pipe, as long as no
changes are made. Enable the slope in
the "Direction & Pos” tab and define the
desired value. A negative value lets the
pipe fall, while a positive value lets it rise.
Index
290
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
11.2.1.2 Starting at the pipeline end (continue pipeline)

The open ends of a routing system can be resumed and
continued. In this way, you can complete the network and
(A) integrate prepared routing sections. Properties and draw-
ing direction are taken from the existing routing system.
(B)
Application
Horizontal routing system
Basic functions
Start Ladde
Vertical routing system
configuration
configuration
 Start the ladder function.
 Point to the end of the ladder that you want to continue. The ladder is high-
lighted. A menu is displayed, listing several connection points.
extensions,
 Select "Starting point..." or "End point...".

extensions,
In the case of a horizontal ladder the cursor moves the movable ladder in the
specified direction. You can draw the further course using the mouse.
In the case of a vertical ladder DDS-CAD queries the desired continuation in a
dialogue as a relative jump in height (in relation to the height of the connection
point) or as an absolute target height (in relation to the floor) (see also 8.3.2.4,
Adjustments,
page 191).
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
291
Introduction

r!
11.2.1.3 Branch from horizontal pipeline
When branching from a horizontal pipeline DDS-CAD automatically inserts a tee. You
determine installation location, dimension of the branch and drawing direction:
Application
Define position:
On a segment
At start point
Start Ladde
At end point
Basic functions
 Start the ladder function (1).

 Point to the position of the branch. If the position of the cursor is clear, the pa-
rameters of the pipe are displayed in an information box (2). if the position is not
clear, a menu lists the possible connections (3).
 Select the desired connection option by clicking . The "General Tee with re-
ducer” dialogue box is displayed (pipes: see 8.5.2.3, page 213).
 If necessary, adjust the size of the branch and check the item (4).
Index
292
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
11.2.1.4 Starting at a bend (convert bend to tee)

You can start the pipeline at a bend (1). DDS-CAD con-
(1) verts it into a tee.
Application
(1)
Basic functions
Rohrleitung
 Start the ladder function.

configuration
configuration
 Point to the bend. It is highlighted.
extensions,
 Click . The "General Tee with reducer” dialogue box is displayed.

extensions,
 Set the draw direction (1) and click OK . The cursor moves the pipeline in the
specified direction.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
293
Introduction

r!
11.2.1.5 Conduit – starting at a box
You can start a pipeline at the connection point to an ob-

ject (e.g. a boiler). DDS-CAD detects the position of the
connection point, the media and suggests a size. You se-
lect the material of the pipeline from the product database.
You can then specify the draw direction freely.
Application
(1)(2)
Basic functions
Pipeline
(3)
(4)

 Point to the object. The object is highlighted. If the position of the cursor at a
specific connection point is definite, the name of the object and medium, size
and height of the connection point are displayed in an information box (1). if the
position is not clear, a menu lists the possible connections (2).
 Select the desired connection option by clicking . The product database is dis-
played. The display is limited to the proposed size of the connection point (3)
and only the corresponding materials are shown.
 Choose the material. You can draw the pipeline (4).
Index
294
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

11.2.1.6 Starting at the transition point from an adjacent storey
A pipeline whose start or end point has been defined as

"on the ceiling" or "in the floor" generates a transition point
(1) in the adjacent storey. From there you can start the
pipeline and transfer to the next storey as a riser (2) or
(1)
use it for the installation in the current storey (3).
h
(3)
The transition point sets all the technical properties and
(2) the drawing direction. You only define the transfer (2) or
the jump in height (h).
h
(1)
Application
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)
Show connections
from the lower floor/
upper floor
configuration
configuration
Pipeline
extensions,
 Enable the"Show connections from below” and/or "Show connections from

extensions,
above” option. The transition points (1) are visible.

 Start the pipeline function and point to the transition point. The symbol is high-
lighted. An information box shows the starting option (floor or ceiling), starting
height Z and the medium.
Adjustments,
 Click . The "New Z-height” dialogue box queries the height.

Adjustments,
 For the direct transfer to the following storey (2) click UKD/FFB . The riser pipe has
been passed to the following storey, the function remains active.
 For the application in the current storey (3) enter the jump in height (h) as a rela-
tive jump (in relation to the current height of the starting point) or as an absolute
amount (in relation to the floor) and click OK . You can continue drawing the
pipeline at the new height.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
295
Introduction

r!
11.2.2 Drawing the ladder route
11.2.2.1 Horizontal route (no change in height)
Installation systems behave in a similar way to general

polylines. In the simplest case – the horizontal installa-
tion without change in height – you define the route
using the cursor. Each click defines a fixed point (1),
which is initially interpreted by DDS-CAD as a bend.
(1)
As long as no other fixed point has been set, the bend
behaves dynamically. The cursor position determines
the direction and angle. An automatic Ortho mode en-
sures that commercially standard bends are used as
the cursor moves.
The direction and length of the bend (1) and the seg-
ment following it (3) are fixed with the following fixed
(2) point (2). You can continue the work.
Basic functions
(3)
11.2.2.2 Horizontal – positioning the fixed point by entering a measurement
Example: Segment (3) is to lead to the new fixed point (2) in a certain direction by a
certain length via a 90° bend (1):
(2)
(3)
[]
 Press []/[]/[]/[]. The key determines the direction. The "Collect Points”
 Enter the value in metres (m). A helper line indicates the position of the new
fixed point with the current setting.
11.2.2.3 Horizontal – positioning the fixed point at a distance from a reference
(a) Example: The position of the fixed point (2) is to be de-

(2) fined at a certain distance (a) to an obstacle (e.g. a
wall). The length of the segment (3) results from the
(3) operation.
Index
296
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

[Shift] + []
 Press [Shift] and move the cursor to the border of the obstacle. DDS-CAD de-
tects the intersection. This is the reference for defining the fixed point (2).
 Press the arrow keys to specify the direction for the location of the new fixed
point (here [Shift]. The "Relative from snap point" dialogue box appears.
 Enter the distance from the reference point to fixed point in metres (m).
11.2.2.4 Height change in the pipeline route or transition to another storey
The operation achieves two objec-

Z
tives:
Basic functions
DZ Height change in the pipeline route
Z Y with a gradient angle α. You define
a
the new working height as a target
height Z (absolute value, relative to
the floor) or as the difference ΔZ (rela-
X tive to the current working height). The
pipeline is continued in the current sto-
rey.
Transition to an adjacent storey in the

gradient angle α. The pipeline runs to
configuration
the ceiling or to the floor and stops.
configuration
The result is a transition point in the
Transition to an adjacent storey adjacent storey, where you can re-
sume the pipeline and continue it. The
gradient angle remains active.
 Press [PgUp] (move upwards) or [PgDn] (move downwards). The height

extensions,
query dialogue box appears.

extensions,
 Enter the gradient angle α.
Transition to an adjacent storey

Adjustments,
 Click UKD/FFB . The pipeline has been transferred. The pipeline function remains
Adjustments,
active and you can define a new starting point.
Height change in the pipeline route

 To define a new installation height Z: Input"Absolute height"
To define a height difference ΔZ: Input "Up" or "Down".
 Click OK . The pipeline is located at the new height. You can continue the
work.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
297
Introduction

r!
11.2.2.5 Undo last drawing step
If you have made a mistake in the route, DO NOT end the

pipeline function with [ESC]! You can revert the pipeline
route drawn up to now to an earlier position:
[Step back] [Step back]
 Press [backspace] or select the function with the same name in the context
menu. The last fixed point is undone. The function remains active.
11.2.2.6 Collision detection and collision avoidance
While working with installation systems, DDS-CAD checks whether the pipeline col-
46
lides with other pipelines. The check is performed over all DDS pipeline functions .
The check is performed dynamically while you are drawing.
Basic functions
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(5)
If the cursor approaches an obstacle at the same height, DDS-CAD detects a colli-
sion.
A menu (1) is displayed at the cursor, offering three options. Select one of the three
options by clicking :
(2) Manual configuration for collision avoidance

After calling the function, the "Avoid clashes” dialogue box is displayed. You define
the obstacle as over- or under-crossing, the angle of the bend (5) and the distance to
the obstacle. Clicking OK negotiates the obstacle. The next click fixes the work-
ing height and you can continue with your work.
(3) automatic over-crossing / (4) automatic under-crossing

The methods automatically apply the current settings from the "Avoid clashes” dia-
logue box.
46
For example, if you are editing the ventilation system with DDS-CAD in addition to the electrical system, you can show the
cable ladders in the ventilation ducts and develop the pipeline route without any collisions.
Index
298
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
11.2.3 Concluding an installation system

11.2.3.1 By function in the context menu or keyboard shortcut
Function in the context Note

menu / keyboard short-
cut
End function The installation system is ended at the current fixed point.
[ESC] The function is ended.
Close and start new The installation system is ended at the current fixed point.
[Enter] The function remains active and you can define the next
starting point.
End in the storey below A bend is placed at the

[Ctrl]+[End] position of the fixed point.
The installation system
End in the storey above moves this bend up or
[Ctrl]+[Home] down. It ends in the floor
or in the ceiling and can
be continued in the adja-
Basic functions
cent storey.
11.2.3.2 By connecting to existing installation systems
47
You can end the current installation system by connecting it to an existing system
of the same type.
At the open start or end point

The example shows a ladder ring being closed. When approaching the starting point,
the segment is highlighted and a menu is displayed. Select "Starting point” or "End
configuration
point". If both systems are at the same height, the connection is made straight away.
configuration
If there is a difference in height, a dialogue box asks for the method of height balanc-
ing to be used (see below).
extensions,
extensions,
At a segment
Adjustments,
Cable ladders and conduits can be connected by being joined to a continuous seg-
Adjustments,
48
ment . For cable ladders, a tee is inserted at the connection point. For conduits, a
corresponding outlet is inserted. When approaching the existing installation system,
this will be highlighted. A menu is displayed with the pipeline information and func-
tions for collision avoidance. Select the pipeline information to establish the
connection.
47
You can only connect a ladder to a ladder, but not to a canal.
48
Cable canals do not have this option.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
299
Introduction

r!
Compensating for a difference in height

Basic functions
Height differences are detected by DDS-CAD and reported in a message. To create

the connection, click . A dialogue box is displayed that configures the height com-
pensation.
Index
300
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
11.3 Auxiliary functions for constructing a network

11.3.1 The copy function for sub-sections
By using the "Repeat branches” (pipes) or "Repeat
branches”" (Copy tees) (ventilation ducts) func-
tions, you can duplicate an existing sub-section and
insert it into the model several times. Sub-sections
that start in a free point or as a branch from a main
duct are ideal templates. The copy can also be
placed at a free point or integrated into an existing
Copy branches
duct via a tee.
Copy tees
Basic functions
(2)
configuration
configuration
(1)
 Select the starting point of the sub-section (1). In the example, the tee of the
branch has been chosen.
extensions,

extensions,
 Select "Extend selection and copy paste tree”. The entire subsequent sub-
section is automatically selected and the dialogue is displayed.
 Select the desired option (2).
Adjustments,
Use on of the four options to configure how the copied sub-section is pasted. In doing
Adjustments,
so, the required settings are enabled. To do this, please read the following sections.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
301
Introduction

r!
Paste into existing section

pipeline (target pipeline) with the desired number (2). The
set distance (4) applies from the insertion of the first copy
(3) onwards. The flow direction of the target pipeline (5)
indicates the arrangement of the copies (6). The direction
(2)
of the branching tees (right/left) is taken from the original.
(4)
(1)
Basic functions
(3)
(6)
(5)
box appears.
 Select "Insert in existing net same twist”.
inserted at the selected position, the others follow at the set distances. If there
are multiple copies the function is ended. If you have only set one copy, the func-
tion remains active. You can define further insertion points.
Index
302
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Rotate 180° and paste

pipeline (target pipeline) with the desired number (2). The
set distance (4) applies from the insertion of the first copy
(3) onwards. The flow direction of the target pipeline (5)
indicates the arrangement of the copies (6). The direction
(2) of the branching tees (right/left) is rotated by 180° com-
pared to the original.
(
(3)
(1)
Basic functions
(5)
(6)
box appears.
configuration
 Select "Insert in existing net opposite twist +180".
configuration
extensions,
inserted at the selected position, the others follow at the set distances. They are
extensions,
rotated 180° relative to the original. If there are multiple copies the function is
ended. If you have only set one copy, the function remains active. You can
define further insertion points.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
303
Introduction

r!
Paste into new Z-height (at a free point)
The copied sub-section (1) is inserted into the model at a

free point by clicking . The starting point (2) of the new
sub-section is located at the set height (3). The entire
sub-section is rotated by the set angle (4) relative to the
original.
After the operation, you can incorporate the new sub-

(3) section into the network (see 8.4.3, page 200).
(4)
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
box appears.
 Select "Insert one copy at given height".
 Enter the installation height (3) for the starting point of the new sub-section.
 Enter the rotation (4) of the sub-section relative to the original.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. DDS-CAD expect the insertion point.
 Click on the insertion point (2). The new sub-section has been inserted at the
selected position with the settings for height and rotation. The function remains
active. You can define another insertion point.
Index
304
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
11.3.2 Incorporating free sub-sections into the overall network

You can incorporate the open end of a sub-section into the overall network in two
ways:
Option A
 Start the pipeline function at the open end of the sub-section (as per 8.3.1.2,
page 183).
 Draw the continuation of the pipeline to the main line and make the connection in
accordance with 8.3.3.3, page 194.
Option B
 Select the open segment of the pipeline
by clicking . The segment is temporarily
converted into a polyline.
 Click on the node at the open end of
the segment. You can move the open end
of the segment with the cursor.
Basic functions
 Point to the pipeline where the connection
is to be made. If the pipeline contains the
same medium, it is displayed as a se-
lected object.
 Click . The previously open end has
been connected via a tee.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
305
Introduction

r!
11.4 Components in the installation system

Fixtures and fittings are also pipeline objects. They are listed as part of the pipeline
route in the list of commands between the starting point and endpoint. You can see
the correlation in the image, represented using the example of two bends, a tee, a
valve and a pump.
In addition to their specific features and forms of application, all pipeline objects also
share common features. These are described at the beginning for all object types.
Afterwards we will explain the specific features of each separate type.
11.4.1 Notes on the various pipeline objects

11.4.1.1 Bend
Bends are always installed in the pipe when drawing and configured automatically in
most cases. Each fixed point that is followed by a new segment after a direction
change is converted into a bend (see 8.3.2.1, page 189). The technical parameters
(material and size) are taken from the pipe used. The geometric parameters (angle
Basic functions
and direction) are determined by the drawing operation.
A manual configuration
may be required in special
cases, for example if no
see 9.5.1.1
suitable drawing operation
is available for the desired
change of direction. In this
case, call the object dia-
logue of the bend via the
context menu (click ) or
press [B] (ch. 8.3.2.1,

page 189).
Index
306
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
11.4.1.2 Tee

Tees are installed in the pipe network through the following options:
• Automatically when branching from an existing pipeline (see
8.3.1.3, page 184 and 8.3.1.4, page 8.3.1.4)
• Automatically when converting a bend to a tee (see 8.3.1.5,
page 186)
Tee
Basic functions
see 9.5.1.1
11.4.1.3 Reducer extensions, configuration

configuration
Reducers are installed in the pipe network through the following

extensions,
options:
• Automatically, through the pipe network calculation
• Manually, by subsequent insertion (see 8.5.3, page 214)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Reducer
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
307
Introduction

r!
11.4.2 Manual installation of pipeline objects
All pipeline objects that do not alter the direction of the pipe can be inserted later.
The procedure is shown using a valve as an example. All other functions behave in a
similar way.
Insert valve (2)
(1)
Basic functions
Procedure:
 Select the required function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line
shows the "Locate flow segment and press left mouse button” prompt.
 Click at the position where the component is to be inserted. The object
dialogue of the component is displayed.
 Select the item (1), set the required parameters and click OK . The component
is part of the pipe.
Index
308
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
11.5 Segments in the pipeline route

The nature of the pipeline functions was described in 8.1.1 (page 168). It was said
that the initial properties of the pipeline are defined in the starting point and that these
can change over the pipeline route – with the exception of the medium. This change
in dimension is effected by corresponding components (e.g. reducers). To change
the material, various aspects of the representation and the insulation, you can divide
the pipeline into sections. If two consecutive segments have identical properties, they
can be merged back together.
11.5.1 Changing the material or colour in the pipeline route

The following operation is used to disconnect a continuous pipeline into two seg-
ments, whose colours or materials can then be changed separately from each other.
To start with, we have a continuously drawn pipe (1).
(1)
Basic functions
(2)
(3)
(4)
Split pipe
configuration
configuration
 Select the "Split a pipe” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message
line shows the following prompt: "Locate flow segment and press left mouse but-
ton”.
 Click on the position where the division is to be made (2). The "Start drawing
extensions,
pipes” dialogue box is displayed.

extensions,
 Uncheck "Associate material / color” (3).

 Select the properties (4) for the new pipeline segment.
 Click OK . The two pipeline segments have different properties. The operation
Adjustments,
is ended.
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
309
Introduction

r!
If two consecutive line pipeline segments have identical properties, they should be
merged together. Unnecessary divisions complicate subsequent processing.
 Select the ends of the adjacent segments.

 Select "Merge with connected chain”. If properties are the same, the merge is
carried out and the operation is ended. If the segments have different settings, a
corresponding message is displayed. In this case it is not possible to merge the
segments.
11.5.2 Changing the linetype

To change the insulation status or the line type in the pipeline, no prior split is neces-
sary. You can carry out the change through two corresponding functions, when draw-
ing the pipeline or through subsequent processing.
Basic functions
Both functions operate according to the same principle. You create an entry in the
command list, which defines the status of this position until the next change. The
graphic shows an example:
Insulation
The pipe was been
drawn from left to right.
Command (35) enables
the insulation. Com-
mand (41) disables it.
Linetype:
A ventilation duct is to
be marked as partially
obscured. Command
(45) starts the labelling.
Command (47) ends it.
Index
310
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
The use of both functions is described using the example of insulation:

Changing the state while drawing
 Fix the point for the beginning of the insulation by clicking .

 Select the "Insulation" function. The "Insulation” dialogue box is displayed.
 Check "Use insulation” and click OK . The pipe uses the insulation as it con-
tinues. You can end its use in the same way.
Inserting a status change retroactively

You can insulate an existing pipe retroactively in sections and/or undo the use of in-
sulation.
Basic functions
Insulation
configuration
configuration
extensions,
 Select "Insert insulation” function in the toolbox. The cursor turns into a cross-
extensions,
hair. The message line shows the following prompt: "Locate flow segment and
press left mouse button”.
 Click on the position in the pipe, from which the insulation is to be enabled or
disabled. The "Insulation” dialogue box is displayed.
Adjustments,
 Configure the insulation and click OK . The selected setting applies from the
Adjustments,
selected position in the drawing direction of the pipe. The function remains active
and can be used further along the pipe.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
311
Introduction

r!
The procedure for
changing the linetype is
the same. In the context

menu (while drawing)
select the "Insert stippled
/ dotten Start of Pipe”
function. To insert the
label retroactively, call
the "Stippled pipe" or
Insert stippled / "Stippled duct" function
from the toolbox. For
notes on the settings,
please refer to chapter
8.1.2.4, page 171.
11.6 Editing installation systems

11.6.1 Selection functions for lines and sub-sections
Basic functions
An object must be selected before it can be

edited. In addition to the general selection
functions (see 19.1.2, page 519) there are
two other methods used for editing pipe-
lines. These mainly ensure the complete
deletion of a section with or without the
branching sub-sections.
 To call the function, select the pipeline segment where editing is to start.

 Select the desired selection function.
Extend Selection of this Circuit

lected segment to its end point. Branching
pipelines are ignored and not included in the
editing.
Extend Selection of all Sub Circuits

lected segment and all branching sub-
sections up to their end points.
Index
312
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
11.6.2 Changing the pipeline route

11.6.2.1 Moving moulded parts
The pipeline route is fixed by the position

of bends and tees. You can move both
components along the pipeline route. The
Move tee/junction... Move bend... connected segments are updated
automatically.
Move bend...
 Select the component by clicking . Handles are displayed on the component.

 Click on a handle. The object is movable. Tees can be moved over each
other. Bends move along the axis of the previous segment.
 Click on the new position. The component is fixed and the pipeline route cor-
rected. The operation is ended.
Basic functions
11.6.2.2 Move start/end point
You can change the route of an installation system by moving the start or end point:
 Select the first or last segment by clicking . The
start and/or end point is represented by a solid
square .
 Click on the symbol . A context menu is dis-
played.
configuration
Node
configuration
Editing with The node (in this case the starting point of the
polyline: move line) can only be moved in the flow direction of
the segment. The segment is thus extended or
shortened. If necessary, the direction of the
next bend also changes; its position remains
unchanged. The function starts when you click
extensions,
the symbol .
extensions,
Move cable ladder The node (in this case the starting point of the
start line) can be moved in any direction. This may
change the direction and position of the follow-
ing bend.
When approaching another pipeline with the same medium, the connection can be made via
Adjustments,
a tee.
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
313
Introduction

r!
11.6.2.3 Moving/inserting a segment
You can change the route of an installa-

tion system by moving segments in paral-
lel or inserting new segments into the
route.
 Select the segment by clicking . An open square is displayed in the centre

point .
 Click on the symbol . A context menu with two functions is displayed.
Segment
Editing with polyline: par- The segment is shifted in
allel shift parallel. The function
starts when you click
the symbol
Move pipe insert The segment is split and
you can change the route.
Basic functions
The function "Displace parallel polyline-like” is best described using an example. It is

assumed that the pipeline route is necessary because of a change in the floor plan.
An obstacle is to be circumvented:
Before After
Start of the editing
 Select the segment by clicking . The centre point is marked by an open square.
 Click on the symbol . The context menu is displayed.
 Select "Displace parallel polyline-like”. The cursor moves the two movable ends
of the new sub-segments.
The colour of the movable sub-segments can be black or red. This symbolises the
status of the bends, if a fixed point is defined at the current cursor position.
Index
314
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Colour Meaning

Black The angle of the first bend is equivalent to a commercially available standard
size (15°, 30°, 45° or 60°).
Red The angle of at least one bend differs from the commercially standard sizes.

Define the new pipeline route. Set the positions of each of the new bends by clicking
:
Basic functions
End of the editing
The function remains active until it is terminated. After you have fixed the last bend,
press [ESC]. The pipeline will be displayed with the new route.
[ESC]
configuration
configuration
11.6.2.4 Editing the route of a pipeline segment
The operation is useful for example, to straighten the pipeline route. You can remove
bends without having to break up the pipeline and subsequently repair it.
extensions,
extensions,
Before After
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
However, it is critical that you first define the pipeline segment to be edited and con-
vert it into a polyline. You can then edit it. At the end of the operation, you need to
resolve the polyline back into individual segments. This procedure is also best de-
scribed using an example.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
315
Introduction

r!
Defining a pipeline segment converting it to a polyline
(1)
Before: Individual
objects of the selected
(2)
After: Selected segment

as polyline object
(3)
Basic functions

 Select "Start polyline-like edit”. The separate objects (2) are compiled into a
polyline object and labelled separately in the model (3).

Nodes and segments of the newly formed object can be edited using the polyline
options. Click on the respective symbol to open the context menu with the editing
functions:
(4)
To edit the example described above, use the "Knoten löschen" (Delete node) func-
tion (4). In this way, you get a visually continuous route (5). However, the remaining
segment is still a polyline. This polyline has to be converted back into a pipeline.
Index
316
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

(5)
Converting a polyline into a pipeline

By re-converting into a pipeline, you incorporate the previously edited segment back
into the network and enable its calculation:
 Select the pipeline segment.

 Select "Stop polyline-like edit”. The operation is ended.
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD
317
Introduction

r!
11.6.3 Editing moulded parts
11.6.3.1 Converting 90° bend into two 45° bends
You can convert a single 90°

bend into two 45° bends and
vary the distance between the
two bends.
 Select the bend.

Basic functions

 Select "Replace with two bends". The "Update bend" dialogue is displayed.
 Adjust the distance between the bends and click OK . The single bend has
been replaced by two 45° bends. The operation is ended.
11.6.3.2 Converting two 45° bends into one 90° bend
You can merge two 45° bends into one 90° bend.
 Select both bends. You cannot select any other objects.

 Select "Replace with one bend". The bends have been replaced. The operation
is ended.
Index
318
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12 General electrical installation

12.1 Introduction
When working on the electrical installation,
you can choose between two methods of
working.
WM: Basic
Use Application Default Tools
In the "Use Application De-

Call function fault Tools” working mode
you access the product da-
tabase by calling the func-
Find and select tion. This gives you an ex-
an item tensive range of items.
Sockets Search functions help you to
49
Set object choose the right one . After
parameters Help searching
selecting the item you are
for items taken to the object dialogue,
Basic functions
where further settings can be
Place symbol adjusted. After confirming
the cursor moves the sym-
symbol.
Adjustments,
configuration
extensions,
49
See 22.2.2, page 549
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
319
Introduction

r!
In the "Use Customer Speci-
Call function fied Product and Symbols”"

working mode a symbol se-
lection box is displayed in a
narrow strip when the func-
Select symbol
tion is called. After the object
Sockets has been selected, the cursor
will immediately move its
Place symbol symbol. No other settings are
expected. You can make
necessary changes later.
This method of working is
quicker, but the part list is
less differentiated.
12.2 Lighting systems

Basic functions
There are three component groups available in DDS-CAD for constructing lighting
systems. These can be used as objects. You can also exchange data between DDS-
CAD and the lighting calculation programs DIALux and Relux. For a simple and
rough calculation use the lighting calculation according to the efficiency method:
Surface-mounted, recessed, pendant and compact lights

Fluorescent lamps (see 13.2.1, page 321)
Llight tracks
Incandescent
Elements for the construction of light rail systems: Power
rails, connectors, power feeds, no light source
(see 13.2.2, page 322)
Light outlets, spotlights, emergency lamps, information lights, safety

lights, exterior lighting incl. lighting masts, accessories (e.g.
Relux Conversion
transformer)
(see13.2.1, page 321)
DIALux Conversion
Light calculation Interfaces between DDS-CAD and DIALux and/or Relux
(see 13.2.5, page 329)
Internal lighting calculation by the lumen method

(see 13.2.4, page 324)
Index
320
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.2.1 Fluorescent and incandescent lamps

Fluorescent and incandescent lamps are divided in the product database in terms of
the installation type (1). This is a property of the item, which controls the position of
the mounting point on the symbol and the location of the symbol in the room.
Overview: Types of mounting for fluorescent and incandescent lamps

Mounting type Example Note
1 Surface- Automatically activates snap

mounted areas (for work on sloping
ceiling roofs).
luminaire
2 Flush mounted
Basic functions
3 Pendant
luminaire
9 Wall mounted
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
321
Introduction

r!
12.2.2 Support systems and light rails
Use the function to build

Feed T-connection Corner joint
support systems for light-
ing systems. The product
database contains the
necessary elements,
such as power rails, con-
Conductor nectors and feeds, which
are combined into one
system. Bulbs are not
Endplate included and must be in-
serted separately.
All objects of this function

are handled as dynamic symbols and include their number in the part list – including
the light rails.
Basic functions
You can choose light rails with a defined length as items (1) or define them freely in
the object dialogue (2). In this case, DDS-CAD automatically inserts an item whose
description does not contain any indication of length (3). Please note this with regard
to the part list. If you are using light rails of different lengths, you should create spe-
cific items for this purpose.
Note on the construction of light rails

When constructing light rail systems you should note that an electrical connection
is only possible at a feed. Power rails and connectors have no electrical
connection points.
Index
322
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.2.3 Installation in a suspended ceiling (single object)

(1)
Basic functions
You can control the mounting height of the lights by adjusting the height of the sus-
pended ceiling. To do this, select the "Suspended ceiling" mounting type for the light
(1).
configuration
configuration
The incorporation of the symbol is supported by snap points in the centre-points of a
grid plate and at their outer sides. :
Warning!
The suspended ceiling is not taken into account by the subsequent object group
functions or included in the lighting calculations.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
323
Introduction

r!
12.2.4 Lighting calculation using the efficiency method
The lighting calculation according to the efficiency method determines the required
number of lamps in a room or an area to achieve a certain level of illuminance. As a
result of this operation, lamps of the selected type are placed in the model as an ob-
ject group.
Warning!
The efficiency method is a rough estimate process that assumes the following
boundary conditions to obtain a realistic result:
 cube-shaped room (rectangular floor plan)
 ratio of room length to room width between 1.6:1 and maximum 4:1
 completely empty room
 constant and completely diffuse reflection from the room's boundary surfaces
 uniform light flux distribution over each sub-area
 uniform arrangement of the lamps in the room
 Fluorescent lamps are mounted in the longitudinal direction of the room
Basic functions
Often rooms have a floor plan whose rectangular shape is not ideal and is interrupted
in some places. Therefore, in principle the light calculation in DDS-CAD works in po-
lygonal rooms. You must decide on an individual basis whether a light calculation
makes sense for the given room geometry or not. The following diagrams illustrate
this point:
Perfect rectangle: Slight deviation Strong deviation

from rectangle: from rectangle:
Lighting calculation is fully lighting calculation seems lighting calculation does

applicable reasonable. not seem reasonable.
When calculating a polygonal room, DDS-CAD determines

its area. The number of lamps is calculated so that the de-
sired illuminance for a rectangular room of this size is
achieved.
A warning message (1) is displayed in the results view.
(1)
Index
324
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.2.4.2 Calling the lighting calculation

The lighting calculation can be started in two ways:
Lighting calculation with active light
Start from
toolbox
(1)
Basic functions
Lighting
(2)
Lighting calculation with active lamp: You can call a single lamp, configure all of its
properties (item, rotation and attributes) and use it to execute a lighting calculation. If
the cursor moves the lamp as a dynamic symbol, start the lighting calculation via the
context menu (click ).
configuration
configuration
Starting from the toolbox: You can start the lighting calculation as an independent
function. You define the lamp's properties during the course of the application (see
below).
A wizard is displayed in both cases. It provides three methods (1) with which the
room area to be calculated can be defined.
extensions,
extensions,
 Select the desired method (1) and click Continue (2). The algorithm of the chosen
method starts and prompts you to input the room data.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
325
Introduction

r!
12.2.4.3 Determining the area to be calculated and inputting the room data
Depending on the chosen method, DDS-CAD automatically detects the room data or
waits for them to be input:
Pick a room by clicking

This method assumes a room definition
according to 4.3.3, page 58. The lamps
are automatically arranged in the model.
After starting the method:
 Click in the desired room. The
"Room Information” dialogue box ap-
pears. All data (1) are automatically
transferred from the building model.
Basic functions
Define a free contour

The area is drawn as a rectangle or
polygon, the lamps are automatically
arranged in the model. After starting:
 Click on the first corner of the
room area. The cursor moves a dy-
namic line.
 Draw the room (see 18.1.4,
page 452). The "Room Information”
dialogue box is displayed, the size
has been entered graphically.

 Enter the missing data.
Input data manually and place dy-

namically
Immediately after starting the method, the
"Room Information” dialogue is displayed.
Enter all data manually in this dialogue
box. The room size is thus not entered
graphically in this method, but numerically
as a rectangle. Once the algorithm has
finished, the calculated lamps are dis-
played as dynamic symbols at the cursor.
You can move them freely in the model
and fix them as often as desired.
Index
326
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.2.4.4 The room's technical lighting parameters

Call the "Room Information” dialogue box in addition to information about the techni-
cal lighting conditions of the room and the required quality of illumination:
 Determine the required illumi-

nance (1) that is to be achieved
at the working height (2).
 Select the reflectance values for
Ceiling, Walls and Floor (3).
 Determine the maintenance fac-
(2) tor related to the degree of pol-
(1) lution (4).
(3)  Click Next . The "Input product
(4)
data" dialogue box is displayed.
Basic functions
12.2.4.5 The lamp's parameters
In the "Input product data" dialogue box, specify the lamps used. If you started the
light calculation from the context menu of the active lamp (see 12.2.4.2, page 325),
DDS-CAD automatically transfers all properties. Check and correct the settings:
Determine the type of illumi-

nant (1) and select the desired
item (2).
(1)
(2) The light flux (3) refers to the
configuration
(3) entire illuminant with all bulbs.
configuration
(4) For safety, check the manufac-
turer's specifications, since the
(5) product database does not
contain product-specific infor-
mation, but rather only general
lighting. The lamp type (4) de-
extensions,
scribes the radiation character-

extensions,
istics.
(6)
Define the type of mounting (5)
and check (in the case of fluorescent lamps) that the lamp is arranged in a longitudi-
nal direction in the room. Adjust the orientation (6) accordingly.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Click Next . DDS-CAD calculates the necessary number of lamps and distrib-
utes them. The "Product placement" dialogue box is displayed and shows the
calculated results.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
327
Introduction

r!
12.2.4.6 Product placement (lights)
The dialogue box shows the calculation

results and the calculated number of
lamps (1). The arrangement of the lamps
(1 (2) is determined automatically. However,
you can manually select a different ar-
rangement. Calculation results are up-
dated automatically.
(2
Pressing Finish displays the light box in
the defined region or as a dynamic symbol
at the cursor.
12.2.4.7 Correcting the calculation and printing results

Basic functions
The calculated lamps are parts of an object group (box). You can perform the calcu-
lation again later on and print the calculation results:
 Select a lamp. The object is shown dark, all are displayed light blue.
 Choose "Select group". All objects are displayed in dark blue.
 Click again. The context menu is displayed.
 Select “Edit Properties”. The "Room Information” dialogue box is displayed.
Next (1) starts the calculation routine

again, Print (2) generates a report.
(2)
(1)
Report Contents
EL_Lightcalculation.rpt Log with information about the room, desired design values,
data about the lamp and calculation results.
EL_Lightcalculation_as_list.rpt List of all lighting calculations in the project with the data for
the lighting calculation in abbreviated form.
Index
328
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.2.5 Lighting calculation with DIALux or Relux

DDS-CAD has bi-directional interfaces to the lighting calculation

programs DIALux and Relux. Both functions assume a room
definition according to 4.3.3, page 58. The following descriptions
assume that this prerequisite is satisfied.
DIALux Conversion
DDS-CAD generates a transfer file that contains the room ge-
ometry. Open this file in DIALux or Relux. You specify the tech-
nical lighting properties of the areas in the room and the interior
furnishing of the room and design all the lighting for the room.
Relux Conversion
After the project has been completed and saved in DIALux or Relux, switch back to
DDS-CAD. Open the transfer files again, connect the lamps from the transfer file to a
lamp in the DDS product database and have the lamps incorporated into the model.
Basic functions
From the perspective of DDS-CAD, DIALux and Relux differ in that DIALux can han-
dle several rooms whereas Relux can only handle a single room. In both cases, the
interfaces are operated along the same principle, but DIALux offers more options.
Therefore we shall describe the rest of the procedure using the DIALux interface as
an example.
12.2.5.2 Transferring rooms and starting the calculation
configuration
configuration
(1)
(2)
(3)
extensions,
DIALux Conversion
extensions,
 Start the "DIALux Conversion Utility” function. The "Export and Import STF for
Adjustments,
DIALux" dialogue box is displayed. You can transfer all rooms to DIALux or just
Adjustments,
individual ones (1)/(2).

 Select the desired function (you have to specify a single room by clicking ).
The transfer file has been written to the project folder. The dialogue remains
open. You can start the lighting calculation.
 Click Open STF in DIALux . The calculation program starts and opens the exported
data.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
329
Introduction

r!
 Carry out the lighting design in the calculation program and save your work. The
calculation program enters information about the lamps used and their positions
in the transfer file. This file can be read and analysed by DDS-CAD.
Note:
If you need information about DIALux or Relux, please refer to the documentation
for the respective system or contact customer support.
12.2.5.3 Transferring lamps to DDS-CAD
The calculation program has added to the transfer file. Information about the lamps
used (lamp type) and their positions in the model have been entered into the file.
Each lamp type from the transfer file must now be connected to a lamp from the DDS
product database. We recommend that you create your own items in order to capture
the actual lamps used in the parts list (for information on creating your own articles,
see 21.2.3, page 551).
 Switch back to DDS-CAD and start the "DIALux Conversion Utility" function. The
"Export and Import STF for DIALux" dialogue box is displayed.
 Click Open STF file (1). The table lists all the lamps that have been used in the
Basic functions
calculation program for this project.
(2)
(1)
(3)
 Select a lamp from the transfer file (in this case DIAL 1 SiNOVA).
 Select the component type (2) and click … (3). The product database is dis-
played.
Index
330
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Select the desired item and click OK . The lamp from the transfer file has been
assigned to a DDS item (5):

(4)
(5)
(6)
 Repeat this step for all lamps. You can transfer all rooms to DIALux or just indi-
vidual ones (5)/(6).
 Select the desired function (you have to specify a single room by clicking ).
The lamps are at the specified positions in the model.
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD
331
Introduction

r!
12.3 Building management systems

12.3.1 Data exchange between DDS-CAD and ETS (KNX)
DDS-CAD ETS
Develop Place KNX

building model Create project
objects
Export KNX objects for ETS Macro:

ImportDeviceListXML X
DDS-CAD Design topology

Import KNX objects from ETS
Check and configure

Macro:
symbol text
ExportDeviceListXML X
Basic functions
Notes on the building model

The building structure is re-
DDS-CAD ETS quired to transfer the project to
ETS. The names of the storeys
are taken from the drawings list.
The room names come from the
building model. Only the room
contours are needed to ex-
change data. Doors, windows,
roofs and other building ele-
ments are irrelevant to this ap-
plication purpose (cf. chap-

ter 4.2.1, page 53).
Notes on KNX objects

You call KNX components for installation in the
building via the "KNX systems" function in the
toolbox. On the other hand, modular devices are
used when constructing the distribution board.
KNX systems
Index
332
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Export KNX objects for ETS

If you have used all KNX components for the planned system, export the objects for
ETS. DDS-CAD generates an XML file, whose name can be chosen freely. The first
processing stage in DDS-CAD is now complete:
 Select "File  "Export" (Export)  and then the
"Export KNX objects for ETS" function.
Creating a project in ETS

Start ETS, create a new project and enter the
project name. After confirming with OK you
are taken to the workspace in the new ETS
project with the windows
• Topology
• Building
• Group addresses
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD
333
Introduction

r!
Import data from DDS-CAD into ETS
Warning!
To exchange data you need additional ETS macros (tools that are not automati-
cally included with ETS).
 Start the ETS macro (1).

 In the menu, select the function
ImportDeviceListXML_X (2). The
"Öffnen" (Open) dialogue box is
(1) displayed.
(2)  Select the file that you previously
created with DDS-CAD. ETS
analyses the project and re-
quests each KNX object from
DDS-CAD (3) is allocated to a
product from the ETS catalogue.
 Set the allocation between the
DDS object and the KNX prod-
Basic functions
uct. Confirm the allocation

with OK . The query for the
(3) next KNX object is displayed.
 Repeat the allocation until the
query no longer appears. The
project has been transferred to
ETS. The KNX components are
displayed in the "Topologie" (To-
pology) and "Building Informa-
tion” windows with no physical
address:
Designing the topology in ETS

Editing in ETS creates
Before After
the topology of the sys-
tem and the compo-
nents receive their
physical addresses.
Exporting data from

ETS to DDS-CAD
If you have finished designing the system in ETS, you can save the result in a trans-
fer file for DDS-CAD.
 Start the ETS macro. The macro's menu is opened.
 Select "ExportDeviceListXML_X". The "Save as" dialogue box is displayed.
 Enter a filename. Save the file in the DDS project folder.
 Click Save . You can transfer the data into the DDS project.
Index
334
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Importing KNX objects from ETS to DDS-CAD

 Select the "Insert” menu  "File"  and then the "Import KNX devices" function.
The "Open" dialogue box is displayed.
 Select the file that you
created previously with
ETS. This opens the
"Administrator" dialogue
box and shows the topol-
ogy of the system and
the position of the com-
ponents in the building.
 Click Close . The data
have been transferred to
the KNX objects in the
entire project.

Checking and configuring symbol text
Basic functions
Importing the ETS data causes all individ-
(1) ual details of the KNX components to be
transferred to the corresponding objects in
the DDS model. You can check these un-
der the "PLogical Device Info. (ETS)" (1)
tab for each object.
The physical address is displayed as text

on the object if the symbol text is set as
"Free text + bus address" (2).
configuration
configuration
(2)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
335
Introduction

r!
12.3.2 Data exchange between DDS-CAD and ELVIS
DDS-CAD Elvis
Develop building model,

Create project
Place objects
Render model Import 3D model
Open interface to Elvis,

Open file for editing
save perspectives
Export perspectives
Developing the building model and placing objects

Basic functions
For a high-quality visu-

alisation, you should
prepare the model in
DDS-CAD, so that the
visual impact is satis-
factory.
• correct positions of the components (correct height, objects for wall mounting
must be placed on the wall line).
• the complete building model with windows and doors. Furnishings (e.g. furniture)
are not transferred, but they can be simulated by geometric shapes.
• possibly design of other DDS application types. If you have also modelled the
heating, plumbing, and ventilation systems with DDS-CAD, you can display these
models.
Index
336
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Rendering the model

Switch to the "Use 3D
Navigate and Render tools”
working mode. The render
WM: Render method is not important for
the actual transfer and dis-
play in Elvis.
The function for preparing
the data transfer uses
screenshots, which you can
use to check the stored
perspectives. Therefore,
select a rendering method,
which also remains clearly
visible in reduced represen-
tations.
Basic functions
Opening the interface to Elvis and saving perspectives
 Select "Tools" menu  "Admin Elvis views" function.
 Set the desired perspec-
(1) (2) (3) tive for the visualisation.
The dialogue remains
open.
 Enter a title for the view
(1). You can add com-
configuration
ments (2) as additional
configuration
information, but this is not
essential.
 Click on the link (3). The
dialogue box disappears
from the screen.
extensions,
 Press Enter . The current

extensions,
perspective has been

saved and is used for
checking by a screenshot
(4).
 Repeat the process for all
Adjustments,
(4)
perspectives in the cur-
Adjustments,
rent storey.
 Complete the same steps
in all the other storeys.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
337
Introduction

r!
Exporting perspectives
The export is done for all storeys together in one step. It does not matter what storey
is opened.
 Click Export to Elvis .
 Make sure that the
file storage is correct
(we recommend that
you save the file in
the DDS project
folder).
 Enter the names
without numbers or
special characters!
 Click Save . DDS-
CAD creates the
transfer file.
Basic functions
Starting Elvis and creating the project

Create a new project in Elvis. A wizard guides you
through the process.
Importing a 3D model
To import the transfer file
from DDS-CAD:
 Go to the Project
Folder Explorer and
click on the "Pages"
folder (1). The context
(1) menu is displayed.
(2)  Select "Add" "Import
3D model". The
"Open" dialogue box is
displayed.
 Select the transfer file
in the DDS project
folder. Elvis imports
the data from the pro-
ject. The data of the
DDS project are listed
by storey in the Pro-
ject Folder Explorer
(2).
Index
338
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Opening the file for editing
The import process unpacks the transfer file and lists the relevant files in the Project

Folder Explorer. For further editing, use the files which bear the name of the imported
file and just one extra digit. The digit (here 0; 1; 2) is the label for the storey and is
taken from the DDS drawings list. Open this file by double clicking .
Basic functions
An opened file in Elvis displays the model from the first saved perspective (Cam-
era1). All saved perspectives are arranged as Camera 1 to Camera n at the bottom
50
of the screen. You can use the Elvis server to switch between the perspectives . All
lamps are listed on the left-hand side. The label contains the name of the room in
configuration
configuration
which the object is located and the name of the DDS symbol file. The top edge
contains all other possible data points.
Adjustments,
extensions,
50
Press [Ctrl]+[F5]. The server starts (which can take several seconds). You can then view the visualisation from the saved
perspectives.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
339
Introduction

r!
12.4 Telecommunications and information techno-

logy systems
There are six component
Telephone and Data
groups available in DDS-
CAD for constructing
Audio/Intercom and Signal telecommunications and
information technology
Aerial/Antenna systems.
Timing devices
Fire and Security
FDS area
Basic functions
All objects are treated as dynamic symbols. This chapter describes specific features
of data equipment and fire alarm systems.
Index
340
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.4.1 Special features of data equipment

In DDS-CAD a component cannot be connected by two different cables, therefore
multiple data outlets (RJ45) must be combined from the main object and one or more
auxiliary objects. In principle the following situations are possible:
• Data outlets for wall mounting or in the wall duct
• Data outlets in the floor duct
12.4.1.1 Data sockets for wall mounting
A "Data socket 3xRJ45" shall serve as an example. It is displayed as a default sym-

bol for a data socket. The positions of the auxiliary objects are marked by rectangular
placeholders.
The associated auxiliary object visually consists of a rectangle the size of the place-
holder. In order to not distort the part list as a result of the combination, you should
also disable the quantification of the auxiliary objects (1).
Main object Auxiliary object
Basic functions
(1)
RJ45
configuration
configuration
RJ45
extensions,
Make sure the

extensions,
mount heights are equal

and combine the objects
so that they are displayed
visually as a
symbol.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
You can now assign a line to each auxiliary symbol. Use the combination as a tem-
plate to place additional data outlets.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
341
Introduction

r!
12.4.1.2 Data sockets in the floor duct
A flush-mount unit in the floor duct shall serve as an example. The installation spot
(1) is to be used for a "Terminal box Cat.6 4x RJ45 FBK":
(1)
Main object Auxiliary object

Basic functions
(1)
The symbols for the main

and auxiliary object
look the same
visually.
Pay attention to the correct mount height, enable snap points and fix the objects in
the centre of the installation spot. You can then assign a line to each object. Use the
combination as a template to place additional data outlets.
Index
342
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.4.2 Special features of fire alarm systems

The objects of fire alarm systems and the identification of monitoring areas is per-
formed by two different component groups.
To call the fire alarm, select the "Fire and Security" function. You
get access to the technical components of the hazard detection
equipment:
To identify the monitoring areas, select the "FDS Area":
Basic functions
max. distance
point ceiling-detector
configuration
configuration
max. monitoring area
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
343
Introduction

r!
12.4.3 Numbering fire alarms
To identify the fire alarm, use the "Position-

Marker” function. Pre-configured label types
are available for the different types of label-
ling. The graphic (left) will serve as an exam-
ple. The following description illustrates a
1 1 1
simple example. For a detailed description of
1 2 3
the function, please refer to chapter 18.4.2,
page 507.
PositionMarker
(1)
Basic functions
(2) 1
3
(3)
 Select the "PositionMarker” function. The dialogue box (see above) is displayed.
 Select the type (1), prefix (2) and the number (3) for the first component and click
OK . The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Use your mouse to point to the first component to be identified. The component
is displayed as a selected object. The number of this component is displayed at
the cursor.
 Move the cursor to the desired position and fix the label by clicking .
 Move the cursor to the next component and repeat the operation for the other
components. The number is incremented automatically.
Index
344
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.5 Cables, wires, circuit labels

12.5.1 Introduction
All objects in the electrical installation include the tabs "Connected” and “Text” in their
object dialogue. The information contained in "Connected” is presented taking into
account the symbol text settings for the symbol.
(2)
(1)
UV01.1
Basic functions
The example shows the symbol of a fluorescent lamp with its label. All relevant fields
under "Connected” (1) have been filled out. However, according to “Text” (2) distribu-
tion board ID and circuit ID are retrieved.
This section deals with the allocation of circuit information to the individual objects, in
other words filling out the "Connected” tab. Essentially this can be done by two differ-
ent methods. You can enter the label manually or apply it as a result of connecting an
electrical line from the distribution board to the object.
configuration
configuration
The act of connecting an electrical line to an object transfers the information auto-
matically from the distribution board to the object. Subsequent changes in the distri-
bution board (e.g. correcting circuit IDs) are automatically transferred to the con-
nected components, so that you can always control the circuit labels via a central
extensions,
function. You can adjust the effort for installing cables to the intended use.
extensions,
For pure labelling, DDS-CAD does not require a meticulously drawn line, and no
drawing-related connection between distribution board and connected objects is nec-
essary. You can draw a minor line (e.g. small cross-sections) temporarily from com-
ponent to component. However, if the lines are significant for the part list, they must
Adjustments,
be laid correctly.
Adjustments,
Select the method that is most suitable for your purpose!

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
345
Introduction

r!
12.5.2 Methods of
12.5.2.1 Labelling by manual captions
The manual input is the

ideal choice if you do
not want to design and
document any distribu-
tion boards in DDS-
CAD. In this case, you
can quickly apply the
labelling to the objects.
UV01.1 UV01.1
UV01.1 UV01.1
Basic functions
UV01.1
 Select several (or all) com-

ponents that belong to the same circuit.

 Select “Edit Properties”. The "ElpSymSymbol" dialogue box is displayed.
 Switch to the "Connected” tab.
 Enter the data and confirm with OK .
 You reach the dialogue box for setting object properties. The components are
labelled in the model.
However, this method is not suitable if you are designing the distribution boards in
DDS-CAD. In this case, we recommend the second method.
Index
346
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.5.2.2 Labelling by connecting lines (temporary installation)

The aim of this method is to join several objects
(belonging to a common circuit) by a line for the
UV01.3 UV01.3
purposes of identifying the circuit. Cable routes
and installation methods are ignored. Select this
UV01
method if you are designing and documenting
UV01.3 UV01.3
the distribution boards in DDS-CAD. The line
length is irrelevant for the part list. We assume
that the distribution board has been constructed
UV01.3
in accordance with chapter.
12.5.2.3 Labelling by connecting lines (correct installation)
This method aims to identify connected objects AND correctly detect cable lengths
for the part list. Measured against the two other methods, it involves greater effort
and requires some practice. Having said this, the "Start Trunk” function is a tool
available that can make this work much easier. Therefore you should weigh effort
and benefits against each other and find a good balance.
Basic functions
12.5.2.4 Cable harness
The cable harness is an auxiliary function

SV01 DV01 used for mapping installation zones in the
building and for installing several cables
in parallel in the same route. From a
technical point of view, it may be regarded
as a bus system. By constructing a cable
harness system you create a network of
UV01
configuration
cable pathways that connects the individ-
configuration
ual distribution boards to each other,
branches out into different regions and
that can also end in stub lines. During the
M UV01.3 subsequent cable installation, you do not
have to draw every line from the distribu-
RJ45 tion board to the consumer. Instead, it
extensions,
DV01.1.1-1 calls on the exit point of the cable har-

extensions,
DV01.1.1-2 ness, and it starts in the active distribution

DV01.1.1-3 board.
SV01.2
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
347
Introduction

r!
12.5.2.5 Opening the distribution board and starting the cable
First you have to open the distribution board. You can do this either by double-
clicking the distribution board symbol in the model or by calling the "Circuit List” func-
tion in the tool box:
Double click
(1)
Circuit List
(2)
Basic functions
 Select the "Circuit List” tab.

 Check the description of the circuit, and correct if necessary: Double click on
the cell of the description. The dialogue box is displayed.
 Correct the circuit description and click OK . The dialogue box is closed.
 Click Draw . The parameters settings dialogue box is displayed.
 Check and correct the settings and click OK . The cursor turns into a cross-
hair. You can draw the cable.
Index
348
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.5.2.6 Drawing the cable

After the start of the cable, point to the first
(1)
component to be connected. When the cur-
sor gets close, it is enabled and is displayed
(3) as a selected object (1). Clicking estab-
(2) lishes the connection, the cursor moves the
line as a polyline (2) and the circuit label is
displayed on the object (3).
UV01.3 UV01.3
Guide the cable from object to object in this
way. Once all objects are connected, end
UV01 the function with [ESC].
UV01.3 UV01.3
The cable installation functions are very

UV01.3 comprehensive; however, they are hardly
needed by this method.
12.5.3 Labelling by connecting lines (correct)
Basic functions
This method aims to identify connected objects AND correctly detect cable lengths
for the part list. Measured against the two other methods, it involves greater effort
and requires some practice. Having said this, the "Start Trunk” function is a tool
available that can make this work much easier. Therefore you should weigh effort
and benefits against each other and find a good balance.
12.5.3.1 Cable harness
The cable harness is an auxiliary function

SV01 DV01 used for mapping installation zones in the
building and for installing several cables
configuration
in parallel in the same route. From a
configuration
technical point of view, it may be regarded
as a bus system. By constructing a cable
harness system you create a network of
UV01 cable pathways that connects the individ-
ual distribution boards to each other,
branches out into different regions and
extensions,
that can also end in stub lines. During the

extensions,
M UV01.3 subsequent cable installation, you do not

have to draw every line from the distribu-
RJ45 tion board to the consumer. Instead, it
DV01.1.1-1 calls on the exit point of the cable har-
DV01.1.1-2 ness, and it starts in the active distribution
Adjustments,
DV01.1.1-3 board.
Adjustments,
SV01.2
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
349
Introduction

r!
12.5.4 Drawing the cable harnesses
The cable harness is an auxiliary function that acts like a bus system. It makes sense
to use a harness in buildings where many cables run in parallel over long dis-
51
tances .
SV01 DV01 Before beginning the actual cable installa-

tion, prepare the installation zones in the
building graphically. In this way you cre-
Cable harness ate a network of cable pathways that con-
connects the individual distribution boards
to each other, branches out into different
regions and that can also end in stub
Cable harness UV01
lines.
The graphic shoes a safety distribution

board (SV01), a data distribution board
M
Cable
(DV01) and a high-voltage current distri-

bution board (UV01). All three distribution
boards are joined by a cable harness sys-
RJ45 tem.
Basic functions
During the subsequent cable installation,

you do not have to draw every line from
SV01 DV01 the distribution board to the terminal de-
vice. Instead, you can enable the distribu-
tion board and the cable and call on the
cable harness at any point. However,
mathematically the cable begins in its dis-

tribution board and automatically takes
UV01 the prescribed installation route.
M UV01.3
RJ45
DV01.1.1-1
DV01.1.1-2
DV01.1.1-3
SV01.2
51
In small units with star-shaped cable installations, the cable harness does not add much value.
Index
350
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.5.4.1 Calling the cable harness

 Select the "Start Trunk” function. The "Installation Specifica-
tions” dialogue box is displayed.
 Set the required installation method and click OK . The cur-
sor turns into a crosshair. You can start the cable harness at a
distribution system or an existing cable harness.
12.5.4.2 Starting a cable harness at a distribution board
If you want to start the cable harness at a distribution board:

 Point to the distribution system. The component is displayed as a selected ob-
ject:
Basic functions
 Click . The cursor moves a movable line that you can guide in any direction.
Start drawing. Each mouse click defines a break point.
12.5.4.3 Starting a cable harness at an existing harness
You want to build a system of cable harnesses. To do this, existing cable harnesses
must be branched.

configuration
Point (without clicking) to the cable harness:
configuration
 Press [F2]. The cursor moves a movable line that you can guide in any direc-
extensions,
tion. Start drawing. Each mouse click defines a break point.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
351
Introduction

r!
12.5.4.4 Drawing the path of the cable harness
Horizontal installation
Each click fixes the line at the position of the cursor.
Vertical installation (change in height):

Entering a difference: reference is the current working height
[PgUp] Vertically upwards by a difference in metres (m).
[PgDn] Vertically downwards by a difference in metres (m).
Entering a target height: reference is the height 0

[Home] Vertically to a target height in metres (m).
[End]
12.5.4.5 Connecting the cable harness to the distribution system
If the cursor gets close to a distribution system, the program snaps the cursor with
the cable harness and holds it tight.
Basic functions
 To establish the connection, click .
12.5.5 Drawing a cable

12.5.5.1 Calling the cable
 Select the "Circuit List” function. The distribution board's dia-
 Select the "Circuit List” tab. You go to the circuits table in this
distribution system.
 Check the description of the circuit, and correct if necessary:

Double click on the cell of the description. The dialogue box
is displayed.
 Correct the circuit description and click OK . The dialogue
box is closed. The circuit description in the cell has been
changed and the row of the circuit is selected.
 Click Draw . The cable parameters settings dialogue box is displayed.
 Check and correct the cable's settings and click OK . The cursor turns into a
crosshair. You can start the cable at a distribution system or an existing cable
harness.
Index
352
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.5.5.2 Starting the cable at a component

You want to start the cable at a component (e.g. switches, sockets, lamp or distribu-
tion boards, etc.).
 Point to the component. The component appears as a selected object:
 Click . A circuit label is displayed on the component immediately. The cursor

moves a movable line that you can guide in any direction. Start drawing. Each
mouse click defines a break point.
12.5.5.3 Starting the cable at the cable harness
You have prepared a system of cable harnesses. The cable is to start at the harness
in terms of the drawing and in the distribution mathematically.
 Point (without clicking) to the cable harness:
Basic functions
 Press [F2]. The cursor moves a movable line that you can guide in any direc-
tion. Start drawing. Each click defines a break point.
12.5.5.4 Drawing the path of the cable
Horizontal installation
Each click fixes the line at the position of the cursor.
configuration
configuration
Vertical installation (change in height):
Entering a difference: reference is the current working height
[PgUp] Vertically upwards by a difference in metres (m).
[PgDn] Vertically downwards by a difference in metres (m).
extensions,
extensions,
Entering a target height: reference is the height 0

[Home] Vertically to a target height in metres (m).
[End]
Adjustments,
12.5.5.5 Connecting the cable to a component

Adjustments,
If the cursor gets close to a symbol, the program snaps the cursor with the cable and
holds it tight.
 To establish the connection, click . The component receives a circuit label.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
353
Introduction

r!
12.5.6 Installation spanning several storeys
This section describes guiding cables across several storeys. Essentially it has to be
said that for cable harnesses or cables and wires, there is no "on the ceiling" or "in
the floor" transfer function. Nevertheless, in order to determine the correct line
length for the part list, we recommend distinguishing between two fundamental
cases:
• A distribution system supplies several consumers on the storeys (left picture)
• A main distribution system supplies sub-distribution systems on the storeys
(right picture)
Basic functions
For both situations the same fact applies that the drawing operation only refers to one
storey. In the first case, the target of the cable guidance exists, but the starting point
is missing. For the second case, the reverse situation applies. The starting point is
available, but the target of the cable guidance is located in another storey.
In terms of the lines drawn, there are no connections between the storeys. However,
we recommend making each relevant storey visible in order to visualise the positions
of the desired starting or target points as well as the differences in height.
In the following sections, we describe how to show a storey and how to process
these two cases.
Index
354
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
12.5.6.1 Showing a storey

 Select the "Import- and Model Admin" function:
The "Inserted file administrator" dialogue box appears. This lists all storeys (2)
belonging to the active project and the selected application type (1) under the
tab “Complete List of All Model in the Project". Storeys with the symbol are
invisible. Storeys with the symbol are visible.
(1
)
(2
)
Basic functions
 Click once on the symbol of the relevant storey. The symbol changes to
and further settings (3) are enabled:
configuration
Note:
configuration
It is useful to use different colours
to distinguish between the different storeys:
Uncheck "Default” at ”Pen”
and choose a different colour for each storey.
extensions,
extensions,
 Click OK . The storey with the distribution board is visible. By switching to the
front or side view, you can determine the mounting height of the distribution
board from the perspective of the current storey.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
355
Introduction

r!
12.5.6.2 Situation 1 – a distribution system supplies several consumers
Sample starting situation

You have placed the installation equip-
ment (1) and the distribution system (2) at
(1) the designated positions and constructed
the distribution system according to 10.4.
Note that the distribution board must have
a feed.
The drawing operation takes place in the

storey, in which the consumers to be con-
nected are located. In order to allow the
cabling installation, a terminal must be
created that symbolises the supplying dis-
(2) tribution board.
To do this, a feedthrough (3) is placed,

whose mounting height is adjusted such
that the difference in height between the
storeys is recorded, and possibly a section
Basic functions
to be drawn horizontally for the part list.

By showing the storey (where the distribu-
tion board is located) you can determine
the required mounting height.
The feedthrough is the starting point for

(3) constructing the cable network in the sto-
rey under consideration. We recommend
that you implement the cabling installation
with the assistance of the cable harness
(4). Please refer to 12.5.4, page 350 for
(3) more information.
 Show the storey where the distribution board is located. You can see the position
of the distribution board and determine the difference in height via the front and
side views.
Index
356
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Procedure for inserting the feedthrough

 In the "Insert” menu select the "Storey Pointer” function. The product database is
displayed. The "Storey Pointer" filter is active.
 Select the desired item. The "Connection Devices” dialogue box is displayed:
(1)
Basic functions
 Adjust the mounting height (1) so that the height difference to the position of the
distribution system can be overcome by the cabling guidance and click OK .
configuration
The symbol is displayed dynamically at the cursor.
configuration
 Fix the symbol at the desired position.
Procedure for the cabling installation

 Start the cable harness function (see , page ).
extensions,
 Start the installation at the feedthrough. The “Make Connection to:” dialogue box
extensions,
is displayed:
Adjustments,
 Select the distribution board, which is represented by this feedthrough and then
Adjustments,
click OK . The starting point of the cabling installation is defined. The cursor
moves the cable harness as a dynamic line.
 Start by constructing the cable harness and note the installation height when do-
ing so. All heights refer to the current storey. The upper edge of the finished floor
corresponds to the height 0.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
357
Introduction

r!
12.5.6.3 Situation 2 – One main distribution system supplies sub-distributions
on the storeys
Sample starting situation:

A main distribution system (1) is
located in the basement, the de-
pendent consumers and/or sub-
distribution (2) are located in the
storeys above. The drawing op-
eration takes place in the storey,
in which the main distribution sys-
tem is located. The description
assumes that a "Supply line to
sub-distribution..." circuit exists in
this system:
Procedure:
 Show the storey where the sub-board to be supplied is located. You can see the
Basic functions
position of the distribution board and determine the difference in height via the
front and side views.
 Select the main distribution
 Call the "Supply line to sub-distribution..." circuit for drawing.
 Start the line at the main distribution system, lead this to the riser point and
change the installation height to reach the sub-distribution.
 Connect the cable to the sub-distribution and end the function with [ESC].
 Hide the storey of the sub-distribution.
Index
358
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Building and system schematics Erro
r!
13 Distribution board documentation

13.1 Creating a drawing and enabling a distribution
board
All functions and operations described in this chapter are only possible in the "Elek-
trotechnik" (Electrical engineering) application type, from drawing 500 (see 2.2.1).
Each distribution board

requires a separate
drawing. Within this
drawing, you can
manage all sheets,
lists and protocols that
belong to this distribu-
tion board.
You first get to a blank
workspace with grids
and a coordinate
Basic functions
plane. Now the
required distribution
board has to be
activated:
(3)
configuration
configuration
(2)
(1)
Distribution boards and

Adjustments,
extensions,
 Select the "Circuit List” function. The "Define board” dialogue box is displayed.
 Select the desired distribution board (1) or create a new one (2). The distribution
board is active.
 Activate the sheet list (3).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
359
Introduction
Erro Building and system schematics

r!
13.2 Managing sheetsand navigating between them
13.2.1 The sheet list

The sheet list is divided into
two sections. On the left you
will see the available page
52
templates . the right-hand
side lists the existing sheets
for this distribution board.
To create a new sheet, select

the desired template by click-
ing . In the context menu,
select "Add" to append a
sheet to the end of the list.
Using "Insert” creates the
sheet above the selected
row.
Basic functions
You can edit the list of available sheets by changing the information, entering revi-
sions or deleting pages.
 Select a single sheet (click ) or several sheets ([Ctrl]+ ).
 Click on the selected sheet. A context menu is displayed.
Function Key Meaning

Open Double click The selected sheet opens.
Edit This displays a dialogue where you can to input the

sheet information. The modified information is dis-

played in the list of available sheets and in the text
fields of each individual sheet.
Delete The selected sheets are deleted
Local revision You can generate an a revision entry that only appears
of the selected in the text fields of the selected sheets.
sheets
Global revision This displays a dialogue where you can change vari-
of all sheets ous sheet properties.
52
The contents of this list depend on the license. It may be the case that not all templates shown are available.
Index
360
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
13.2.2 Navigating between sheets

You can switch from one sheet to the next with the "Previous sheet” and "Next sheet"
functions. The status bar shows you the number of the current sheet and the number
of available sheets. The example shows sheet 1 of 5 (1). In addition, the name of the
current sheet (2) is displayed.
Previous sheet
Basic functions
Next sheet
(1) (2)
13.2.3 Adding a sheet
configuration
The "Insert sheet" function creates a subsequent sheet using the
configuration
current sheet as a template. In this way, you can build up the distri-
bution documentation continuously, without having to call the sheet
administration dialogue.
Add sheet
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
361
Introduction

r!
13.3 Drawing circuits automatically

13.3.1 Organising sheet divisions

The following situation serves
as an example:
Circuits on sheet 1 The distribution board UV11

contains several circuits. The
feed and the circuits F2 to
Circuits on sheet 2 F2.4 are to be displayed on
the first sheet. The circuits F3
and F4 are drawn on the
subsequent sheet. Sheet 1 is
created and opened.
The "Draw circuits" function
analyses the contents of the
distribution board and shows
the addressed circuits. You can determine the sheet division by specifying intervals
Basic functions
(draw circuit from ... to). Sheet limits are not exceeded.
On sheet 1
(1)
Draw circuits
 Select "Draw circuits” (1). The "Draw circuits” dialogue box is displayed.
 Enter the interval for sheet 1. For the address, simply select the name of a re-
source (cable ID or component ID) in that circuit.
 Click OK . The circuits appear on the sheet.
Index
362
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
On sheet 2

(1)
Draw circuits
 Add the next sheet with the "Blank sheet and DC" function. DDS-CAD creates
the new sheet and the "Draw circuits” dialogue box is automatically displayed.
Basic functions
The functions suggests the next circuit to be drawn.
 Click OK . The remaining circuits appear on sheet 2.
13.3.2 Specifying the start position before drawing

By default, DDS-CAD starts at a defined position on the left-hand edge of the page. It
may be that the first circuit is meant to be displayed at a different position to leave
room for additions.
extensions,
configuration
Insert point
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Select the "Insert point” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Click on the position where the first circuit is to be displayed.
 Draw the circuits.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
363
Introduction

r!
13.4 Drawing manually
13.4.1 Draw components

Not all circuits can be realised by applying automatic functions. You can call individ-
ual devices as a symbol and place them manually.
(2)
(1) (3)
Figure diagram
(4)
(5)
Basic functions
Each of these components has the character of objects. If a device consists of sev-
eral components that can be separately as symbols (e.g. a contactor) the available
types of symbols is displayed in the selection dialogue.
"Name" (1) lists all previously defined objects in the active component group.
New (2) creates a new object for the active component group. You are taken to the
selection in the product database.
Copy (3) duplicates the current object with all settings, parameters, and additional
auxiliary functions.
Rename (4) opens a dialogue to configure the contact IDs.
Aux. contacts (5) creates an additional auxiliary function for the current object. So for ex-
ample, you can equip a contactor with additional auxiliary contacts.
You can only place each component of a device (e.g. the contactor coil) once in the
drawing. It shall only be released again after having been deleted from the drawing.
The coherence of the components (e.g. between coil

and contacts) is indicated by cross-references. The ref-
erence in the contact image points to the position of the
main contact, the reference on the main contact points
to the position of the coil. In the example, coil and con-
tact image are on the same sheet. The main contact is
another sheet.
Index
364
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
13.4.2 Drawing terminals

You can use the "Insert Terminal” function to configure the terminal. Specify the
name of the terminal block and the number of terminals.
Insert Terminal
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD
365
Introduction

r!
13.5 Navigating between the circuit and the sheet

13.5.1 From the drawn circuit to the circuit table

You are looking at a drawn circuit and want to go to the entry in the distribution board
database:
Distribution boards and

Basic functions
 Select the circuit by clicking . The selected circuit is displayed as a selected

object and is highlighted in bold. All other circuits are also selected, but appear
pale.
 Select the "Circuit List” function. The distribution board database is displayed.
The entry for the selected circuit is also highlighted in the table.
How can you recognise the circuits of the open sheet in the distribution board data-
base?
The circuits of the

open sheet are
highlighted in the
table by italic text.
Index
366
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
13.5.2 From the circuit table to the drawn circuit

You are looking at an entry in the distribution board database and want to go to the
sheet where the item is located. The circuit of interest is not on the current sheet (text
is not in italics). The drawn circuit is to be viewed in its own sheet:
 Select the row by clicking . The row is selected. The context menu is dis-
played.
 Select the
"Goto single Multiline
sheet for circuit or
"Goto Singleline sheet
for circuit" function.
DDS-CAD opens the
sheet where this circuit
was drawn.
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD
367
Introduction
Erro Emergency and evacuation routes

r!
14 Emergency and evacuation routes
Enable the"Emergency planning” working mode.
Sheets, title fields and legends

Use as dynamic symbols.
Fire protection signs, emergency signs, warning signs

Use as dynamic symbols.
Emergency routes
The " Escape routes" and "Broken line for Escpae routes"
functions are used as a dynamic line. After opening the
Basic functions
function, define the starting point, the vertices and the end
of the route by clicking . Afterwards, close the function by
pressing [ESC].
The "Direction" function is effected as a symbol.
Immediately after opening the function, the cursor controls
the symbol of an arrowhead.
Labelling specific areas

All functions are effected as cross-hatching. After opening
the function, define the contours of the area by clicking .
Afterwards, close the function by pressing [ESC].
Highlighting fire walls and fire compartments

All functions are used as a dynamic line. After opening the
function, define the starting point, the vertices and the end
of the highlighting by clicking . Afterwards, close the
function by pressing [ESC].
Object grid
The object grid is effected as cross-hatching. After opening
the function, define the contours of the area by clicking .
Afterwards, close the function by pressing [ESC].
Index
368
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Rendering – Image synthesis from the model Erro
r!
15 Analysing – Printing – Exporting

When working with DDS-CAD you develop the virtual model of the system. From this
you can derive graphical representations in various forms, which you can print out on
paper or output to a data exchange format (PDF, DWG/DXF). For quantitative analy-
sis, create a parts list that you can use in different ways.
DDS-CAD building model
Scal e !:100
Edited
Chec ked
Status
New office building
Ground floor
Modific ati on
Basic functions
Item no. Item name Quantity
Heating – Technical equipment

GF978A Gas boiler burner 15kW 1 pc.
Heating – Piping
Heating – Piping formed parts

BE1808 CU Elbow fitting 90° 18x1 10 pc.
BE1809 CU Elbow fitting 90° 22x1 18 pc
configuration
Radiators and accessories
configuration
HKV D10 Radiator valve DN10 4 pc.
HKV D10 Lock shield valve DN10 4 pc.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
369
Introduction
Erro Rendering – Image synthesis from the model

r!
15.1 Working with part drawings (details)

You can create any part drawing for every model. These can be either rectangular or
polygonal cutouts. First, you can specify the sheet division using subframes and then
base your definition on these. For each part drawing, you can:
• add information
• print
• export
• create as presentation
• incorporate into a plot layout
15.1.1 Dividing sheet with subframes

If you have to split a large drawing into several sections, you can use subframes to
help you achieve this. Using this method, you first specify the desired sheet division
and then create the part drawings using the sub-frame:
Basic functions
1 3
2
 In the "Tools” menu  "Part Models / Sections  select the "Help for Defini-
tions" function. The product database is displayed and opens a filter containing
various tools for designing part drawings for a variety of applications.
 Call the subframe for the required size. The subframe is displayed at the cursor
as a dynamic symbol.
Fix the subframe in the drawing to symbolise the position and size of the required
part drawings.
Index
370
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
15.1.2 Defining part drawings

Part
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
Basic functions
 Select the "Part drawings” function. The administration dialogue lists all part
drawings in the model (1). The selected part drawing is displayed in the preview.
 Click New (2). The "List of part drawings" dialogue box is displayed.
 Name and describe the part drawing (3).
 Select the type of the part drawing: "Rectangle" or "Polygon" (4).
 Click OK . You can define the geometry of the part drawing.
configuration
Rectangular section (diagonal)
configuration
section. The cursor draws a
rectangle.
 Click on the second corner of
the section. The operation is
extensions,
ended.
extensions,
Polygonal section (outline)

Adjustments,
section. The cursor moves a

Adjustments,
polyline.
 Draw the outline to the last ver-
[En-
tex.
 Press [Enter]. The operation
is ended.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
371
Introduction

r!
15.1.3 Copying a part drawing definition
You can directly reproduce existing part drawings. To do this, copy the geometry of a
section and insert it again. A new entry appears in the administration dialogue with
the same name. Therefore you have to rename the new section after the operation:
15.1.4 Managing part drawings

To manage the part drawings, use the functions in the con-
Basic functions
text menu. To do this, click on the entry in the list.
Menu item Function

Zoom Displays the contents of the part drawing magnified on the screen.
Properties Opens the "Auschnitt" (Part drawing) dialogue. You can edit the name
and description.
Delete Removes the part drawing from the list and the model
Export Exports the contents of the part drawing as DWG, DXF, 3DS, or CFI.
Create Creates a new presentation (see 2.3.2.3, page 30), which only dis-
presentation plays the contents of the part drawing and which can be used as a
work area.
Print Starts the print function for the part drawing
New Starts the algorithm to generate a new part drawing.
Index
372
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
15.2 Working with sections (wall views)

You can create as many sections as
needed in each model. The intersection
line can be placed straight (A) or offset
and defined in sections (B). In this way
you can exclude unwanted objects from
the sectional representation. For each
A A part section, you can:
B
• add information
• Print
• export
B • create as presentation
• incorporate into a print layout
15.2.1 Defining and editing a section

Start function
Basic functions
Sections
(1)
configuration
(3)
configuration
(4)
(5)
(2)
extensions,
extensions,
 Select the "Sections” function. The dialogue box lists all sections present in the
model (1). The part drawing selected in the list is displayed in the preview.

Adjustments,
Click New . The "List of sections" dialogue box is displayed.

Adjustments,
 Define the label for the intersection line (4) and use "Description” to enter addi-
tional text information.
 Click OK . The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the fol-
lowing prompt: "Specify section position".
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
373
Introduction

r!
Defining an intersection line and ending the definition
After starting the function, you can de-
fine the start point, route and end point

of the intersection line by clicking .
The position of the starting point de-
End Start termines the draw direction and viewing
direction, which is always directed to
the left (from the intersection line). In
A A the picture you can see the route of the
B
intersection line A-A runs from right to
left, the section looks down. In contrast,
End
the intersection line B-B has been
B started and led to the right. The section
looks up.
Start
Offset intersection lines are divided into sections, where you can adjust the section
depth individually once the operation has been completed. The procedure for section
B-B is:
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5) (6)
[Enter]
 Start the section definition. The following prompt is displayed: "Specify section
position”.
 Click on the starting point of the intersection line (1). The cursor moves the
movable end of the intersection line. Section symbols and a predefined section
depth are visible.
 Click on the first vertex in the path of the intersection line (2). One flow seg-
ment is finished. You can continue the intersection line.
 Define the remaining segment up to the end point by clicking (3/4).
 Press [Enter] (5). The definition is complete. The "Sections” dialogue box is
displayed.
 Define additional sections or close the dialogue. The last defined section (6) is
displayed as the selected object. You can correct the section depth.
Editing the intersection line and section depth

Index
374
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
You can alter the width of the intersection
line and the section depth dynamically. To

do this, select the intersection line by click-
ing . The symbols on the segments and
at the end are used for processing. With
the "Adjust width” function you can stretch
or compress the intersection line. The "Adjust length” function determines the section
depth for the current segment.
Reversing the view direction

To rotate the viewing direction of
a section:
 Select the intersection line
by clicking .
 Click . The context menu
is displayed.
 Select "Mirror section". The
section symbol has been re-
versed and shows the new
viewing direction.
Basic functions
Properties of the section symbols
You can edit the

properties of the sec-
tion symbols. To do
this, call an intersec-
tion line by double
clicking . In the
configuration
section object dia-
configuration
logue you can modify
the size by a scaling
factor (1). You
choose the symbols
(1) (2) in "Line" (2). Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
375
Introduction

r!
15.2.2 Managing sections
To manage the part drawings, use the functions in the

context menu. To do this, click on the entry in the list.
Menu item Function

Zoom Displays the contents of the section magnified on the screen.
Properties Opens the "Schnitt" (Section) dialogue. You can edit the name and
description.
Delete Removes the section from the list and the model
Export Exports the contents of the section as DWG, DXF, 3DS, or CFI.
Print Starts the print function for the section
To Creates a new presentation (see 2.3.2.3, page 30), which only dis-
presentation plays the contents of the section and which can be used as a work
list area.
New Starts the algorithm to generate a new section.
Basic functions
15.3 Working with print layouts

15.3.1 Creating a new print layout
The print layout is the work area where you can com-
bine the desired views (complete model views, part
drawings and sections) with layout elements (frame,
title field, legends, etc.). You create a print layout from
a presentation of the working model (1). You can either

work manually or use a wizard.
Scal e !:100
Edited
Chec ked
Status New office
b ildi floor
Ground
Modific ati on
Add new layout
Wizard: Plot Assembly
(3)
(1)
(2)
Index
376
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Manual: Creating a new print layout
Use this option if you want to compile the print layout yourself. DDS-CAD only asks

for the intended name (3), which you can enter freely. After confirming with OK the
work area is created and you are taken to the user interface. Then you develop the
layout.
Wizard: Creating a new print layout

In this case DDS-CAD first asks for the name of the print layout (3). After confirming
with OK an automatic routine is started, which queries these layout elements in
turn
1. Sheet
2. Title field/stamp
3. Desired view (full model, part drawing or section)
4. Drawing information (to fill out the title field)
After the routine has run through completely, it eds and you can continue to build
manually. DDS-CAD arranges the layouts (2) parallel to the working model.
Basic functions
15.3.2 The user interface in the print layout
The user interface in the print layout is the same for all application types. The toolbar
is reduced: The functions for changing perspective and the building model are hid-
den, the "Assembly Model” working mode (2) is active. You can use the toolbox to
access the functions in the print layout. You can also activate the geometric functions
(3). Pressing (1) leaves the print layout and returns you directly to the working model.
configuration
configuration
(2)
(1) (3)
Chapter 19.2
Page 475
Insert model/part drawing/section

extensions,
see 16.3.3, page 378

extensions,
Insert layout elements

see 16.3.4, page 378
Complete title field

see 16.3.5, page 379
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
377
Introduction

r!
15.3.3 Inserting a model/part drawing/section
The most important

elements in the layout
are the views of the
model (full storeys, part
drawings or sections).
The "Insert model/part
drawing/section" func-
tion automatically de-
tects all of these views,
and allows their instal-
lation with a desired
scale. You gain access
(when constructing the
plot layout) directly via
(1) the toolbox or via the
(2) (3) "Insert" menu.
Basic functions
 Select "Model/part drawing/section". The dialogue box is displayed.

 Select the desired element (1). It is displayed in the preview.
 Define the size as a scale ratio or factor (2). The other value is automatically re-
calculated.
 Click Insert (3). The element can be used as a dynamic symbol.
15.3.4 Inserting sheets, title fields and legends

When using the wizard, the
querying and arrangement of
sheet and title field takes place
automatically. If you are build-
ing the layout manually, you
should stick to this order, be-
cause the title field is auto-
matically based on the sheet.
In any case, legends must be
placed manually. You gain ac-
(4) (5)
cess to the functions via the toolbox or via the "In-
sert" menu. (3)
(2) (1)
Index
378
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Sheets
You determine the size of the sheet by selecting the item (1). Its settings are trans-

ferred to Input "Length" and Input “Width” (2). You can edit these values manually
and adjust the sheet size.
Title field/stamp
The product database (3) contains several differently designed title fields for different
purposes (for information on creating your own title fields, please refer to 22.7
page 597).
If you have previously used a sheet from the DDS product database, the title field is
automatically assigned to the right or left lower corner (4). With these settings, the
title field corrects its position automatically when you change the sheets afterwards.
With "dynamic" you place the title field manually.
The text in the title field are automatically transferred from the project, drawing and
revision data (see 15.3.5, page 379). By default, the information of the current model
is displayed. If necessary, you can retrieve the information of another model (5). To
do this, enter the ID of the desired drawing. You can find this number in the drawings
list.
Basic functions
Legends
Legends are generally viewed as an item and
placed as a dynamic symbol. In chapter 22.6
(page 594) you can how to create your own leg-
ends.
15.3.5 Filling out the title field

The textual information in the title fields are retrieved from the dialogues for the pro-
ject, drawing and revision data. Whether or not a text block is transferred and where
configuration
53
it appears and in what form, depends on the design of the title field .
Adjustments,
extensions,
The construction of a title field is explained in Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található., page Hiba! A könyvjelző nem
53
létezik. . This chapter only describes how to input information.

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
379
Introduction

r!
Access is gained via the tool-
box or via the "Project and
Model Information" menu.
Project data
This is where you can enter
global data – in other words,
information relating to all the
drawings in the project. These
include the project description,
project number and address,
for example. You can browse
through the dialogue using the
Back and Next (1) functions.
This takes you to the previous
and next text fields.
Drawing data
Basic functions
(1) Drawing data are specific in-

formation that only affects the
current print layout. The de-
scription of the drawing con-
tent, scale ratio, editors and
data are typical examples. This
is also where you will find the
functions Back and Next (2)
to scroll through the dialogue.
Revision data
Use the revision data to docu-

ment changes. DDS-CAD re-
cords a continuous list for each
model. To create a new
(2)
revision entry:
(1) (2)  Enter a name for the new revi-

sion entry (1) and description
(2).
(3)
 Click New (3). The "Revision"
 Check all details and click
OK (4). The "Revision..." dia-
logue box is closed. The new
entry is listed in the table. You
can subsequently Delete and
Change any revision entry.
(4)
Index
380
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
15.4 Printing a drawing and producing a pdf file

15.4.1 Calling the functions
The output functions for printing or exporting to a PDF file can be found in the
"File/print" menu on the toolbar. You can
• print the complete drawing (1) directly
• create the complete drawing as a PDF file (2)
• print a sub-region of the drawing (3)
The first PDF export (2) first shows a dialogue that shows all installed PDF printers.
Your choice is then the default setting for the following export operations. If you want
to change your selection later, press [Ctrl] and then call the "Print to PDF" function
from the toolbar again. The "Print" (1) and "Print selected region" (3) function open
the print preview. You can select the output device, determine the orientation of the
drawing to the page and specify the format and other settings. The region to be
printed is determined by two clicks :
Basic functions
(1) (2)
(3)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
381
Introduction

r!
15.5 Part list
15.5.1 Creating the part list

The part list includes all the visible parts of
the system, while "Calculate to BOQ" (1)
is active in the object dialogue. If you want
to create a part list of all storeys in the
building, first compile the building model
(1) (see 4.5, page 85). Materials are not cov-
ered if the layer is hidden or the object has
been excluded from the analysis in the
part list.
When you call the "Export Bill of Quantity"

function, DDS-CAD creates an ASCII file
with the name of the model and the exten-
sion *.BOQ. It is written to the project
folder and updated constantly.
Basic functions
Building model with system

Beis6001.BOQ.zip
The "Parts list" dialogue

box shows the contents of
the BOQ file and allows
for different analyses:
(2) (3) (4) (5)
• Output with editor (2)
• Output as report (3)
• Export to AVA and
costing systems (4)
• Parts list comparison
(5)
Index
382
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
15.5.2 Output as configured report

The part list can be used to output automatically and differently configured evalua-
tions. In this context, the term "report" is used. A report can be printed via the default
printer or exported to various file formats (e.g. Excel, HTML, XML or CSV).
Basic functions
 Click Button [Print]. A selection of reports is displayed.
Note
The following pages describe the contents of the respective reports.
configuration
configuration
 Select the desired report by double clicking . The report is created. The taskbar
at the bottom of the screen shows the button with the symbol:
 Click this button. The print preview is displayed. You can choose to printout on
the active default printer (1) or choose a format for data export (2): extensions,
extensions,
(1)(2)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
383
Introduction

r!
15.5.2.2 Parts list sorted by product groups
You will receive an evaluation in which the materials used are broken down by prod-
uct groups.
BQ_Partslist.rpt
Basic functions
15.5.2.3 Part list by inclusion in rooms
You will receive an evaluation in which the materials used are broken according to
which room they are located in. To use this report it is necessary that you have con-
structed the building model (see chapter 4). Objects with the "piece" unit of quantity
are counted according to the position of their insertion point in a room. For objects
with the metre (m) unit of quantity, the following rules apply:
Pipeline
Cable ladders, cable canals, conduits, pipes and ventilation ducts are counted toward
the room in which the start of the pipeline is located.
Cables and wires

are counted toward the room in which the last electrical connection is located.
Index
384
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
For this part list by inclusion in rooms, you can choose between two different layouts.

BQ_Partslist by rooms.rpt
Basic functions
BQ_Partslist by rooms 6x.rpt
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
385
Introduction

r!
15.5.2.4 Material allowances by rooms
There are two reports available to measure material allowances. In these reports,
materials used in the model are listed as target quantities, next to which there is a
blank space for the actual quantity. Workers at the construction site can enter the ac-
tual amount used by hand. The materials allowance can also be created by product
groups or by inclusion in rooms:
BQ_Partslist for quantity survey.rpt

Basic functions
BQ_Partslist by rooms for quantity survey.rpt

15.5.2.5 Cable list as checklist

Index
386
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
The cable list (in the form of a checklist) is designed to assist workers on the con-
struction site during execution of the installation work:

BQ_ELP_INS_Kabelliste.rpt
The report consists of a cover sheet with the project details as well as the lists of
configuration
lines to be installed.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
387
Introduction

r!
15.5.2.6 Output as a text file (to a text editor)
You can transfer the part list to

a text editor or a word proces-
sor. This gives you the opportu-
nity to make changes to the
output. Notepad is set up as the
default text editor. Pressing
Options (3) takes you to this set-
ting and you can enter the path

for another application (such as
WINWORD.EXE).
(1) (2) (3)
By ad-
justing a structural setting (2) you
Basic functions
can filter the part list in various ways.

Assessments of individual material
groups and layers are possible (4).
You can also sort the part list in
three levels according to various cri-
teria.
 Click Editor (2). The selected
program starts and opens the
part list as an editable docu-
ment.
Index
388
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
15.5.3 Absolute quantity vs. comparing two part lists

DDS-CAD can either display the quantities in a part list or compare two part lists to
each other. The decisive factor here is the status of "Compare with revision” (1).
If the check box is not checked,

the dialogue displays the abso-
lute quantity of the materials
used in the model. To enable a
comparison of two part lists, first
an appropriate comparison tem-
plate must be prepared. Use
Revision (2) for this purpose. You
can create as many comparison

(1) (2) templates as needed.
The comparison templates are managed in a separate dialogue box. Click Revision (2).
The "Compare Two Revisions” dialogue box is displayed:

configuration
New creates a new comparison template. The dialogue box for entering a name is
displayed. DDS-CAD saves the current part list along with the date and time. All
available comparison templates are listed in "Comparison the part list with this
revision). The comparison is always against the active revision.
extensions,
extensions,
You activate the comparison of

the selected template with the
current state by checking
"Compare with revision” (3). The
"Part list" now shows the differ-
Adjustments,
ences between the two process-

Adjustments,
ing states. The sign "+" or "-" (4)

(3) (4) shows you whether the amount
has increased or decreased.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
389
Part III – Reference to the DDS basic func-
Reference to the DDS basic functions
DDS-CAD
tions
390
Introduction Strategies for handling projects Basic functions Adjustments, extensions, configuration Index
Introduction
General principles and tools Erro
r!
16 General principles and tools

16.1 Coordinate system
Coordinate systems make up the
Y (1) mathematical basis of CAD sys-
tems. In the case of DDS-CAD this
Y‘
(2) is a three-dimensional system,
X‘
Y where each object, each point and
each node is described by an X, Y
X X and Z coordinate.
At the same it is necessary to dis-

tinguish between the fixed, global
(1) and several local systems (2).
Z The global coordinate system is set
Z‘ in stone. Its zero point is the refer-
ence which the entire model is
Y‘ based on. On the other hand, a lo-
X‘
Z cal coordinate system is created
Basic functions
Y with each new fixed object at its in-
sertion point.
X
All angles and directions are related
to the mathematically positive direc-
90° Y tion (counter-clockwise). A variety of
functions (e.g. for defining areas
and regions) is dependent on ob-
180° 0° serving this drawing direction.
X
configuration
configuration
270°
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
391
Introduction
Erro General principles and tools

r!
16.2 Grid
A grid is a network of horizontal and vertical lines, whose points of intersection form
the grid points. When the grid is active, the grid points are visible on the screen and
can be used to arrange objects.
Basic functions
The location of the grid, its rotation and the distances between grid points are vari-
able. You can:
• enable/disable the grid (see 16.3.1, page 397)

• snap the grid to a point (see 16.2.1, page 393)
• define the distances between the grid points (see 16.2.2, page 394)
• rotate the grid/coordinate plane (see 16.2.3, page 395)
Index
392
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
16.2.1 Snapping the grid at a point

Example situation
You need a grid that is oriented to a corner of the room. The origin of the grid is situ-
ated so that there is no grid point at the desired position. You need to align the grid to
a new reference point.
Basic functions
Application
 In the "Format" menu select "Grid settings” and the "Grid origo 1 point" function.
The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following prompt:
"Specify origin".
 Move the cursor to the point at which the grid is to be aligned. The point captures
the cursor and holds it tight. The coordinates are displayed.
configuration
 Click . The origin of the grid is located at the selected position. The function is
configuration
ended.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
393
Introduction

r!
16.2.2 Defining distances between the grid points
Example situation
You need a grid with defined distances between points. The current distances do not
work and must be corrected.
(2)
Basic functions
(1)
Application
 In the "Format" menu select "Grid settings” and select a predefined setting (1) or
the "Grid ?x?x?" function (2).
(1) The grid points immediately change their setting.
(2) The "Grid Settings" dialogue box is displayed. You can define the distances
in the X- and Y-directions.
Index
394
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
16.2.3 Rotating the grid and coordinate plane

The rotation of the grid may be necessary before or during the application of a func-
tion.
Example I – Rotate before starting a function (e.g. room definition)

You have to develop the building model for a floor plan, consisting of several wings.
One or more wings are oblique. The tools for constructing the floor plan and for clos-
ing contours are always based on the position of the coordinate system.
(1) The illustration shows a

room whose contour has
been closed as a rectan-
(1 (2 gle.
In the example on the

Right Wrong
left, the coordinate sys-
tem was rotated parallel to the oblique part of the building before starting the room
definition. The automatic contour (1) behaves identically. In the example on the right
this step was omitted. The right angle was created and the automatically drawn walls
(2) do not behave the same way as the building. The room geometry is wrong.
Basic functions
Example II – During the application of a symbol
You are moving a symbol at the cursor. It is to be fixed to a di-
agonal wall at a certain distance to a reference point (e.g. a room
corner). To be able to enter the distance from the reference point
(see page 420) exactly, the coordinate system be aligned with
the diagonal wall.
Example III – During the application of a pipeline function
configuration
A pipeline (piping, ventilation duct, cable ladder,
configuration
etc.) is to be drawn parallel to a wall. This wall in-
cludes a diagonal piece. At the break point it is clear
that the pipeline – due to the orthogonal mode
(see 18.1.4.2, page 453) – cannot be constructed in
the desired manner. The coordinate system must
therefore be adjusted for the distance along the di-
extensions,
agonal wall.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
395
Introduction

r!
Application – rotating the coordinate system
You can rotate the coordinate system with the grid at any time or reset it to its initial
state. The application will be explained using the example III described above (Appli-
cation during a pipeline function). All other examples are performed in a similar man-
ner. The following description assumes that the pipeline has been led to the position
of the direction change (1) and fixed there by clicking :
Grid X-axis – 2 points
Reset grid
(1)
(2)
 Select "Grid X-axis – 2 points". If a function is (3)

active, the object disappears and the cursor
is displayed as a crosshair.
Basic functions
 Click the first end of the reference line (2).

The cursor moves a dynamic line (3). (4)
 Click the second end of the reference line
(4). The active function is continued with a ro-
tated coordinate system. You can execute the
desired drawing operation (5). (5)
 The "Reset grid" function activates the start-
ing position. You can continue working at right
angles (6).
(6)
Index
396
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
16.3 Snap options in the toolbox

Snap options help you when using dynamic functions (symbols,
pipeline functions and polylines). You can enable or disable snap
options at any time – for example when working with a symbol – by
simply clicking in the toolbox.
We describe the importance of the snap options and the effect turn-
ing them on or off has.
16.3.1 Snap grid

A grid is a network of horizontal and vertical lines, whose points of
intersection form the grid points. If the grid is enabled, the grid
points are visible on the screen and can be used to arrange objects
(see 16.2, page 392).
"Snap to Grid” is OFF

The grid points are ignored and you can move the object freely. This method is useful
Basic functions
in all situations in which full movability on the workspace is necessary.
"Snap to Grid” is ON
If the cursor gets close to a grid point, it is caught and held. The
current position is displayed. This method is useful for example,
when editing circuit diagrams and schematics where the objects
have to be arranged uniformly.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
397
Introduction

r!
16.3.2 Surface mode
This option decides which reference plane to use. This

may be the general two-dimensional plane of the co-
ordinate system (1) or a drawn area in the model (2).
In most cases, the option is enabled and disabled

automatically, decided by the object used. Thus, a PV
(1) module automatically enables snap areas when called
(2) and selects roof areas as the reference plane. A light
54
also uses the option, but is based on room areas .
None of the other objects use snap areas. However,

you can enable the option manually if, for example, an
antenna system is to be mounted on the roof.
"Surface Mode” is OFF

The two-dimensional plane between the X and Y axis (1) is used as the reference
plane. Areas belonging to the drawn objects (2) are ignored.
Basic functions
"Surface Mode” is ON
The two-dimensional plane between the X and Y axis (1) is ignored and the refer-
ence plane is redefined by the current cursor position. The example shows a pitched
roof in plan view, on which there is a group of PV modules.
(3)
(4)
X
In the picture on the left the upper area has been activated. In the right-hand picture
it is the lower area. The active area is surrounded by a wide green line (3). The local
coordinate system of this surface is visualised by a black dot for its origin (4), a nar-
row red line for the X-axis (5) and a narrow green line (6) for the Y-axis. Its rotation
depends on the active area. In the left-hand picture it is consistent with the general
two-dimensional plane. In the right-hand picture it is rotated 180° relative to the two-
dimensional plane.
54
More information on using the lighting calculation (see 13.2.4, page 319) or on working with object groups (see 18.3.2,
page 430.
Index
398
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
If you select an object which is on an inclined area, it shows the ori-
Y

entation of the axes of its reference area.
The result of snap areas being enabled is a coordi-

nate system that matches the area and is inclined
like the area. This means that an object for the roof
installation automatically calculates the correct in-
stallation height.
Basic functions
In the case of overlapping roof areas
(1) there is initially a problem. As long as
the cursor (in this example) is only
located on the flat roof, this area is
active and the mounting height is ad-
justed to the surface of the flat roof
(left). However, as soon as the cursor
is pointing to the pitched roof, the cor-
responding roof area is activated.
If an object should be placed on the
configuration
flat roof under the overhang of the
configuration
pitched roof, you can either disable or
enable the automatic change of the
installation level by an option in the
context menu.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
399
Introduction

r!
16.3.3 Automatic rotation while holding the Ctrl key
This option is only relevant for work with objects that are inserted
into the model as individual symbols and fixed on a line (e.g. a
wall).
In the starting situation, the symbol is located at the cursor with a

current orientation. In order to fix it to the line, press [Ctrl] and
move the symbol to the line. The symbol snaps to the line. The set-
ting defines its behaviour.
"Use Automatic Rotation” is OFF

The symbol captures the lines and maintains its current rotation.
Basic functions
"Use Automatic Rotation” is OFF

The symbol captures the lines and rotates so that it is at right an-
gles.
16.3.4 Snap points

The option monitor the geometry of objects. For the purposes of

this function, the ends and midpoints of lines and intersection points
between two lines are classed as a point. For example, the corners
of rooms and objects in this context should be regarded as end-
points and intersection points.
"Use Snap Points” is OFF

The points are ignored and you can move the object freely.
"Use Snap Points” is ON

If the cursor gets close to a point, it is caught and held. The current
position is displayed.
In the case of a polyline, consider also that when the active line
meets an existing line, the perpendicular is taken. The position of
the intersection point is calculated so that the two lines meet at
right angles to each other.
Index
400
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
16.3.5 Snap object

The option monitors the logic within objects that have connection
possibilities for pipeline functions (e.g. electrical cables, pipes, ven-
tilation ducts). In this sense for example, electrical components,
sanitary facilities, ventilation units, and also the pipeline functions
themselves are all classed as objects.
"Use Smart Snap” is OFF

All connecting lines and start functions for pipeline are turned off.
"Use Smart Snap” is ON

The significance of the option can only be explained
by a specific example: In the "Sanitär/Heizung"
(Plumbing/heating ) application type a pipeline has
been started and led to a washbasin.
If the cursor gets close to the object, this snaps the cursor in. DDS-CAD checks the
existing connection points in the object and – if the object has multiple connection
Basic functions
points – shows its properties in a list. You can select the desired connection from the
list and start the pipeline at this location.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
401
Introduction

r!
16.4 Views and perspectives

16.4.1 Enabling/disabling views

You can view a three dimensional
model from different perspectives. With
55
the exception of the "Render" view,
you activate everything through func-
tions in the toolbar or the "View" menu.
This amounts to a switch that you en-
able or disable. You can edit the model
56
in all views (except for "Render") .
Plan view Isometry

Basic functions
Camera
Reverse Front view

Side view (from) left Side view (from) right
Render
Note
In order to better be able to illustrate the contents of a view, the examples of the
front and side views, the back and the renderings are shown without hidden lines.
In fact, however, all views appear as a transparent model (cf. isometric).
55
You enable to "Render" view by calling the corresponding working mode (see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található.,
page Hiba! A könyvjelző nem létezik.).
56
Objects, select, delete, move, edit etc.
Index
402
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
By switching between the views, the representation of all symbols changes between
a 2D and a 3D version. The 2D version is active in the plan view and use graphical

symbols to represent the objects. On the other hand, the various views of the 3D
views show all objects as solid bodies. With regard to navigation in a view, we have
to distinguish between three groups:
• Plan view, front and side view, isometric (see 16.4.2, page 403)
• Camera (see 16.4.3, page 404)
• Render
16.4.2 Navigation in plan view, front/side view, isometric

16.4.2.1 Enlarge/reduce image (zoom)
The image can be zoomed in or out through different keyboard

(1 shortcuts or by using the scroll wheel on your mouse (1).
Zooming with the mouse (always works – even when a function is active)
Basic functions
Function/shortcut Description
 (Scroll up) Enlarge image (Zoom into the picture). Cursor
determines the focus
 (Scroll down) Reduce image (Zoom out from the picture)
Cursor determines the direction of movement of the
image.
Click, hold and move mouse: Zoom in – select section. The cursor turns into a
magnifying glass. You can drag a window to deter-
mine the screen content.
configuration
Click and release Shrink image by 50%.
configuration
Double click Zoom all. The representation is optimised so that the
entire model is displayed on the screen.
Zooming with keyboard shortcuts (does not work with active functions)
extensions,
extensions,
[Ctrl]+ [PgUp] Reduce image (Zoom out from the picture)

[Ctrl]+ [PgDn] Enlarge image (Zoom into the picture)
[Ctrl]+ [Home] Zoom all
Adjustments,
[Ctrl]+ [End] Limit zoom

Adjustments,
[Shift]+[W] Zoom window. The cursor turns into a magnifying

glass. You can click, hold and drag a window over
the desired screen content.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
403
Introduction

r!
16.4.2.2 Slide image (Pan)
Use the mouse scroll wheel (1) to slide the image. By using
(1 keyboard shortcuts you can move the window over the image
(movement from point of view of the observer).
Panning with the mouse (always works – even when a function is active)
Click, hold and move mouse: Slide image. The cursor turns into a hand. You can
move the image over the screen like a sheet of paper.
Panning with keyboard shortcuts (does not work with active functions)
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[]/[]/[]/[] The observer moves over the image in small incre-
Basic functions
ments in the specified direction

[Ctrl]+[]/[]/[]/[] The observer moves over the image in large incre-
ments in the specified direction
16.4.3 Navigation in the "camera" view

57
When you call the view, DDS-CAD switches to a central perspective . The focus (2)
is automatically directed to the currently selected objects. They are visible at the cen-
tre of the screen (image on the right):
(1)
(3)
(2)
For navigation, you can correct the viewpoint (1), change the distance to the focus (3)
and choose a different focus (2).
57
Another name is "vanishing point perspective". You perceive the model in a realistically distorted form, in which parallel
planes intersect behind the model in a common vanishing line.
Index
404
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Correcting the viewpoint

 Click the scroll wheel and hold it down (without scrolling). The mouse pointer
symbol changes. The crossed ellipses symbolise an orbit.
 Move the mouse. The model on the screen moves with the mouse. The distance
to the focus remains unchanged.
Changing the distance to the focus

 Rotate the scroll wheel. Depending on the direction you move the wheel, the
view axis is extended or shortened (3).
Selecting a different focus

 Select the object (1) you are inter-
(1) ested in by clicking . The context
menu is displayed.
 Select "Zoom Object(s)”. The se-
lected object is displayed in the
centre of the screen and forms the
focus of the 3D view.
Basic functions
16.5 Working with layers
16.5.1.1 Switch layer by clicking
extensions,
configuration
 Select the "Find layers of lines in drawing and turn them off” function. The cursor
turns into a crosshair.
 Point to an element in the drawing whose layer you would like to hide. Number
and name of the layer are displayed as information.
Adjustments,
 Click . The layer is hidden.

Adjustments,
 Click . The context menu appears and lists all hidden layers. In this way you
can re-activate each layer.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
405
Introduction

r!
16.5.1.2 Switch layer in a list
Work with layer structures allows the production of different views and content. DDS-
CAD uses its own layer structure that is generated automatically. All modules and
objects are managed on separate layers.
Layer Display
To call, select the "Layer

(1) Display” function in the tool-
bar. The "Layer" dialogue
box is displayed. You can
change the setting for the
switchable properties (1) and
save different configurations
in each case as a set.
Basic functions
(2)
Switching the property of a single layer:

 Click on the symbol of the property for that layer. The property is switched to
the respective different state.
Switching the property of multiple layers simultaneously:

 Select the relevant layers. To do this, hold [Ctrl] or [Shift] and select the lay-
ers by clicking .
 Click on the property of the selected layer. A context menu is displayed. You
can set or invert the setting for all selected layers.
Saving the configuration as a set

In the event that you need to frequently switch between multiple configurations of
layers switched on and off, you can save time by storing each configuration as a set
(2).
 Create the desired layer configuration.
 Click in "Layer setup” and enter a name.
 Click Save . The layer configuration has been saved. You can call it again at any
time.
Switchable properties
Index
406
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Switchable setting Contents

On Turns the layer visible or invisible. Hidden layers are
exported (as opposed to frozen layers) with the for-
... Layer is visible
mats DWG, DXF and CFI. They can be made visible
... Layer is invisible again by the recipient of the file. However, the con-
tent of hidden layers is not included in the part list.
Freeze Frozen layers are invisible. They are not transferred
to DXF, DWG, CFI or to the part list.
... Layer is not frozen
... Layer is frozen
Lock Lock a layer to protect against accidental changes.
Objects on locked layers are displayed, but they can
... Layer is open
not be selected or moved. New objects can still be
... Layer is locked placed on this layer.
Print Specify whether a layer is allowed to be printed or
not.
... Layer is printed
... Layer is not printed
Layer pen Each component group has a default setting for the
pen and thus for the line width in the printout.
... Layer uses default pen
You can choose: If the objects of this layer are
... Layer uses its own pen
Basic functions
printed with their defaults or if the entire layer uses a
single pen (same colour and line width for all ob-
jects)?
The use of a pen for the layer requires that you de-
fine its own pin beforehand ("Pen def.') column).
Pen def. You can assign a pen to the layer for the printout.
Click to get to the table for selecting the pen.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
407
Introduction
Erro Objects – Building blocks of the model

r!
17 Objects – Building blocks of the model
17.1 General properties

17.1.1 Origin of symbolic representation of objects (ELP)
Symbolic representations of the objects are created in DDS-CAD from the relation
between several components. They are explained in the following graphic, using a
lamp as an example:
Object Display
Graphic icon
Icon text:
Free beaming fluorescent lamp
2x36 W
UV1.1
Basic functions
Distribution
board
UV01
Item
Dimensions
The object uses an item that it takes from the product database. The item's data re-
cord stipulates the symbol to be used, the technical parameters and – in the case of
lamps – the dimensions. The symbol is therefore a property of the item and the item
used is a property of the object.
After assigning the lamp to a circuit (by connecting a line) the information also flows
through the supplying distribution board and the circuit to the symbol.
Index
408
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Objects – Building blocks of the model Erro
r!
The text displayed at the symbol provide information that can come from several
sources:

• the position of the object
• the properties of the item
• connection to the supplying distribution board

configuration
If for example, you edit the name of the distribution board, this will automatically re-
sult in the correction of the symbol label for the objects connected to that board. The
symbol text can be configured as needed and supplemented by additional informa-
tion (see 18.4.1, page 501): extensions,
extensions,
Note
For more information on the role and functioning of the product databases and the
Adjustments,
relationship between symbol and item, please refer to chapter 0, from page 545.
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
409
Introduction

r!
17.1.2 Origin of symbolic representation of objects (plumbing
and heating)
Representation of an object can be made up of the graphical symbol and the symbol
text. Its content in turn is composed of the interaction of several components. The
principle is explained in the following graphic, using a radiator as an example:
Object Display
Graphic icon
Icon text:
Hygiene plan type 10 505/805
Calculated power: 236 W
kv lock shield valve: 1.5
kv radiator valve: 0.2
Building model
Basic functions
Pipe network calculation
Radiator calculation
Item
The object uses an item that it takes from the product database. The items' data re-
cord stipulates the symbol to use, its dimensions and the technical parameters of the
radiator. The graphical symbol is therefore a property of the item and the item used is
a property of the object.
The symbol text reflects information that can come from several sources. The exam-
ple shows a combination of item information and calculation results, which were
made on the basis of the building model. The contents of the symbol text are updated
immediately any time there is a change. The symbol text is configurable. You can
decide what information should be displayed or suppressed (see 18.4.1, page 501).
Index
410
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
17.1.3 The position of the object in the DDS model

Objects are inserted into the DDS model through a variety of drawing operations.
Each individual object is assigned X, Y and Z position and is visualised by a symbol.
At this point it is necessary to explain this concept in detail. To do this, consider the
DDS model initially as a fixed room in which a movable object is to be placed at a
defined position.
Each room can be mapped in a three-dimensional coordinate system. Its origin is

called the zero point, or the Origo. Each point of the room can be written as an X, Y
and Z coordinate, thereby essentially expressing the distance of the point in the room
to the zero point of the coordinate system.
Y
Y‘
X‘
Y
X X
Basic functions
Z
Z‘
Y‘
X‘
Z Y
configuration
X
The object in the DDS model is visualised by a two-or three-dimensional symbol. As

such, it always has a defined extension, either in length and width (2D) or in length,
configuration
width and height (3D). At the same time, it is clear that the position data X/Y/Z (for
extensions,
inserting the object in the room) can only relate to a single point on the object. This is
extensions,
referred to a the object's insertion point.
The insertion point of the object can only be explained if we considers the object as a
multidimensional structure. This in turn is based on its own object-bound coordinate
system, which also has a zero point and creates the insertion of the object. Thus the
Adjustments,
position data X/Y/Z designates the distance between the zero points of the fixed
Adjustments,
room -bound coordinate system and that of the movable object-bound coordinate
system.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
411
Introduction

r!
17.1.4 Colour, layer and pen assignment of an object
The visual appearance of a symbol and its

behaviour are determined by the additional
attributes of layer, pen and material. De-
fault configurations ensure that the attrib-
utes of all objects are already defined in a
manner that makes sense. However, you
can deviate from these settings by chang-
ing the object.
Layer
A layer is a structure level in DDS-CAD, whose behaviour is configured by the layer
Basic functions
management (see 16.5, page 405). Each object is assigned to exactly one layer and
a group of other objects with common properties. The objects of a layer:
• are visible or invisible on the screen.
• are enabled or locked for editing.
• are shown or disabled in the printout.
• use their own pen or that of the layer.
Pen
The pen determines the colour, line type and line width of the object on the screen
and in the printout. The assignment of the pin to each object can be defined by
• the default configuration (lowest priority)

• selection in the individual object (disables default configuration)
• the layer's pen configuration layer (disables all other settings)
Material
The material determines the behaviour of the object in the rendered model.
Index
412
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
17.1.5 Links to external information

All object dialogues contain the "Hyper-
link" tab, in which the individual object can
be linked to any number of external docu-
ments.
Basic functions
 Call the object by double-clicking. The object
(1)  Switch to the "Hyperlink" (1) tab.
 Click once on the entry
<new line>. You are taken to editing mode
for the address (2).
(2)
 Enter the address (3) as a URL, as a path to
a file or to a folder.
 Press [Enter]. You are taken to editing
configuration
(3) mode for the description (4).
configuration
 Enter text that described the significance of
the hyperlink (5).
(4)  Press [Enter]. The hyperlink is completed

(6) and can be called by double clicking. In
the case of a URL, the page is opened in
extensions,
your default browser. If you have you set the

extensions,
(5) path to a single file, then the associated pro-

gram is launched and opens the document. If
you have you set the path to a folder, then
Windows Explorer shows its content.
(6)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
413
Introduction

r!
17.2 Working with objects (dynamic symbol)
17.2.1 Preliminary remarks

After calling a component, a geometric figure or some text, the
cursor moves a symbol of this object at its installation point. A
crosshair covers the entire screen.
As long as the cursor is moving the symbol, it is dynamic. If it has been fixed, it re-
ceives its position data as X, Y and Z coordinates, which refer to the global coordi-
nate system (see 16.1, page 391). In addition, each symbol is given a rotational an-
gle to the Z axis when you insert it (1):
Y Z
Y Y
Z
X X
Basic functions
(1)
You have many options to rotate and place the symbol in the model. You can access
the necessary functions via a context menu (click ) or a keyboard shortcut.
Index
414
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
The image shows the structure of the context menu with an active dynamic symbol.

Working with object-groups is excluded from the descriptions in this chapter, instead
please refer to chapter 17.3 (Page 430).
Working with object groups

see 18.3, page 430
Symbol at the cursor

see 18.2.2, page 416
Calibrate from cursor position

see 0, page 419
Basic functions
Calibrate from last point
see 18.2.4, page 424
Adjust installation height
configuration
see 18.3, page 430
configuration
Calibrating a symbol means inserting it into the model using dimensional data. This
procedure requires the presence of a starting point. DDS-CAD can use both the cur-
rent cursor position or the result of the last drawing operation for this purpose. The
extensions,
two basic types of calibration are summarised in separate submenus.

extensions,
The following sections provide an overview of each of the possible functions and then
describe the procedure. The subsequent editing of objects is described in chapter 1,
from page 518.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
415
Introduction

r!
17.2.2 Symbol at the cursor
17.2.2.1 Overview
This section describes the options and situations in which the symbol can be inserted
into the model by directly using the mouse and keyboard shortcuts.
Overview: Symbol at the cursor

Function/shortcut Example/comment Reference
Fix freely page 417
Fix at line page 417

[Ctrl]+ (1)
(2)
Basic functions
Fix at distance to the line page 418

[D]
[Ctrl]+[D]
Fix symbol at the point page 418

Scale symbol You can change the Help

[S] symbol size by scal-
ing.
Set rotate and scale to default Sets all scaling to a

values factor of "1" and all
[N] rotations to 0°.
Rotate symbol The symbol rotates

[Ctrl]+[Shift]+ (to the left) about the active step
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+ (to the right) angle.
Rotate about ZXY axis Help

[R]
Index
416
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

17.2.2.2 Functions and examples
Fix symbol freely with

Example
You use a symbol (e.g. a room stamp) whose position does not have
to be determined precisely. It is only to be fixed at an appropriate
place.
Procedure
 Click on the desired position. The symbol has been fixed at the cursor position.
Fix symbol at line with [Ctrl]+

Example
Basic functions
You are using a symbol for wall mounting (e.g. an outlet or
(1) washbasin). The symbol is to be fixed precisely on the wall line.
(2)
Procedure
 If the symbol is to be oriented at right angles to the line during the

operation, select the option "Automatisches Drehen bei gedrück-
ter Strg-Taste" (Automatic rotation while holding the Ctrl key)
(see 16.3.3, page 400).
configuration
 Press [Ctrl] and move the cursor closer to the line. The line is
configuration
shown in orange and snaps the symbol. You can let it slide along
the line in order to fix it at the desired position.
 Click . The symbol is fixed.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
417
Introduction

r!
Fix symbol at a distance to the line

Example
You are using a symbol for wall mounting (e.g. an outlet or

washbasin). The symbol is to be fixed with a defined distance to a
wall line.
Procedure
Adjusting the distance to the line

 Press [D]. A dialogue box is displayed where you can enter the distance.
 Enter the value in metres (m) and click OK .
Fixing the symbol at the set distance:

 Press [Ctrl] and move the cursor closer to the line. The line is shown in orange and
snaps the symbol. You can let it slide along the line in order to fix it at the desired posi-
tion.
Basic functions
 Press [Ctrl]+[D]. The symbol is fixed at the set distance.
Fixing the symbol to an existing fixed-point

Example
You are using a symbol that is to be mounted in the corner of a

room.
Procedure
 Enable snap points (see 16.3.4, page 400) or press [Shift].

 Move the cursor to the reference point. If the cursor gets close to an existing point, this
point snaps in the cursor and holds it.
 Click . The symbol has been fixed at the reference point.
Index
418
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
17.2.3 Calibrating from cursor position

17.2.3.1 Overview
The current position of the cursor is the starting point of the operation. Therefore
first point the first cursor to a reference point. Then call the function:
Overview: Calibrating symbol from cursor position

Function/shortcut Example Reference
Horizontal/vertical page 420

[Shift]+ []/[]/[]/[]
Construct circle by cursor with radius prompt page 420

[Shift]+[G]
Basic functions
According to relative coordinates page 421
[Shift]+[8] -DX
-Dy
According to polar coordinates page 421

[Shift]+[9] a
configuration
Perpendicular to the vanishing line page 422
configuration
[Shift]+[L]
Move at right angles to the centre point page 422

[Shift]+[C]
extensions,
extensions,
Move relatively – distance with next 2 points page 423
(1
Adjustments,
)
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
419
Introduction

r!
Overview: Calibrating symbol from cursor position

Centred and rotated to the next point page 423

[Shift]+[S]
Align at right-angles to two points page 424

[Shift]+[A]
Centred to the next point page 424

[Shift]+[X]
17.2.3.2 Examples
Basic functions
Calibrate symbol from cursor at right angles with [Shift]+[]/[]/[]/[]

Example
The symbol is to be mounted vertically or horizontally at a defined dis-

tance from a room corner.
Procedure
 Point to the reference point. The point snaps in the cursor.

 Press [Shift]+[]/[]/[]/[]. The "Move Relative from Cur-
sor Position” dialogue box appears. It is used to input the dis-
tance between the rGeference point and symbol.
 Enter the value in metres (m) without a preceding sign. A line shows the position that is
defined by the current input.
 Click OK . The symbol has been fixed at the position indicated.
"Move a Given Distance along Line” with [Shift]+[G]

Example
The symbol is to be mounted on a diagonal wall with a defined distance

to a room corner.
Procedure

Index
420
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Press [Shift]+[G]. A dialogue box is dis-
played where you can enter the radius.

 Enter the value in metres (m). The position of
the cursor is the centre point of the circle with
the set radius.
 Move the cursor to the intersection point between circle and wall line. The intersection
point captures the cursor and holds it tight.
 Click . The symbol has been fixed at the position of the intersection point.
Symbol from cursor according to relative coordinates with [Shift]+[8]

Example
The symbol is to be mounted at a defined distance to a room corner.

-DX The distances from the reference point are known as ΔX and ΔY. In this
-Dy way an indirect construction is possible using relative coordinates.
Procedure
 Point to the reference point.
Basic functions
 Press [Shift]+[8]. The "nach relativen oder po-
laren Koordinaten" (by relative or polar coordi-
nates) dialogue is displayed. This is used to input
the distances in the X, Y and Z directions.
 Enter the values. Note the effect on the preceding
+ or - sign. A line shows the position that is de-
fined by the current input.
 Click OK . The symbol has been fixed at the position indicated.
extensions,
configuration
Symbol from cursor according to polar coordinates with [Shift]+[9]

Example
Adjustments,
The symbol is to be mounted at a defined distance to a room corner.

Adjustments,
a The distances from the reference point are know as distance (A) and
A angle a (orientation).
Procedure

 Press [Shift]+[9]. The "nach relativen oder polaren Koordinaten" (by relative or polar
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
421
Introduction

r!
coordinates) dialogue is displayed. It is used to
input the distance and the angle.
 Enter the values. Observe the effect on the pre-

ceding + or - sign. A line shows the position that
is defined by the current input.
 Click OK . The symbol has been fixed at the
position indicated.
Symbol perpendicular to the vanishing line with [Shift]+[L]

Example
The position of the symbol is to be determined by the calculated inter-

(2) section point between the vanishing line (1) and the perpendicular from
the current cursor position to the vanishing line.
Procedure
 Move the cursor to the position from where the perpendicular is to fall on the vanishing
line.
Basic functions
 Press [Shift]+[L]. The symbol is temporarily fixed at the old cursor position and a mov-
able line leads from the symbol to the cursor. The message line shows the "Wählen Sie
die Fluchtlinie" (Select the vanishing line) prompt.
 Point to the desired vanishing line. The line is highlighted orange. From the symbol the
perpendicular will fall on the vanishing line. The intersection point indicates the position of
the symbol:
 Click . The symbol has been fixed at the position indicated.
Move symbol at right angles to the centre point with [Shift]+[C]

Example
The position of the symbol is to be defined perpendicular to a line at a

defined distance from its centre point.
Procedure
 Enable snap points (see 16.3.4, page 400).

 Move the cursor to the centre point of the reference line. The point snaps in the cursor.
 Press [Shift]+[C]. The "Lotrechte" (Perpendicular distance) dialogue box is displayed.
 Enter the desired distance in metres (m) and click Choose side . From the centre point of the
reference line, a helper line goes along the length entered.
Index
422
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Click on the desired side. The symbol has been fixed at the position indicated.

Move symbol relatively – distance with next 2 points
Example
The symbol is to be positioned starting from the current cursor position

so that the direction and distance are defined by a comparison section
(1 (1).
)
Procedure

 From the context menu, select the "Move Relative – Distance by Two Next Points” func-
tion. The symbol is temporarily fixed at the old cursor position. The message line shows
the "Select first point” prompt.
 Click on the first point of the comparison section. From the selected point a movable
line leads to the cursor.
Basic functions
 Click on the second point of the comparison section. The symbol has been shifted so
that distance and direction correspond to the comparison section.
Rotate and Place Centered between This and Next Point [Shift]+[S]
Example
configuration
configuration
The symbol is to be inserted centred between two points and rotated at
right angles to the section between the two points.
Procedure
extensions,

extensions,
Point to the reference point. The point snaps in the cursor.

 Press [Shift]+[S]. From the selected point a movable line leads to the cursor.
 Click on the second reference point. The symbol has been rotated perpendicular to the
reference section and inserted centred.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Rotate in Proportion to This and Next Point [Shift]+[A]

Example
The symbol is to be rotated at right angles to a section between two

points, but not inserted into the drawing.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
423
Introduction

r!
Procedure

 Press [Shift]+[A]. From the selected point a movable line leads to the cursor.
 Click on the second reference point. The symbol has been rotated perpendicular to the
reference section.
Place Centered between This and Next Point [Shift]+[X]

Example
The symbol is to be inserted between two points but not rotated.
Procedure

 Press [Shift]+[X]. From the selected point a movable line leads to the cursor.
Basic functions
 Click on the second reference point. The symbol has been inserted centred between
two points. It has retained its original rotation.
17.2.4 Calibrate from last point

When using the "Move Relative from Last Position” method, the current position of
the cursor is irrelevant. The coordinate input refers either to the zero point of the
global coordinate system or to a local coordinate system (see 16.1, page 391). In the
latter case, two different scenarios are possible:
1
2 5
4
3
Scenario 1 (left) – the most recent fixed object

You have selected an object and are moving it with the cursor as a dynamic symbol.
The symbol is to be inserted into the model repeatedly and successively, wherein the
distances from one object to the next are known. The last fixed object forms the ref-
erence in each case (local coordinate system) and is the starting point for the follow-
ing operation.
Scenario 2 (right) – position of the copy template of an object

You have fixed several objects in the model. One of these objects is to be copied and
pasted at a certain distance from its copy template. The position of the copy template
forms the reference (local coordinate system) and is the starting point for the follow-
ing operation.
Index
424
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
17.2.4.2 Overview

Overview: Calibrate symbol from the last point
Vertical, horizontal Y‘ page 426

[]/[]/[]/[] X‘
Construct circle by cursor Y‘ page 426

with radius prompt
[G] X‘
According to relative Y‘ page 427

coordinates -DX
[8] -DY X‘
According to polar Y‘ page 427
Basic functions
coordinates a
[9] A X‘
According to absolute Y The function refers to the global co-

coordinates ordinate system. After calling the
[0] X function, the values for X, Y and Z
position are queried by a dialogue
and the symbol is fixed at this posi-
tion.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
425
Introduction

r!
17.2.4.3 Examples
Calibrate symbol from last point at right angles with []/[]/[]/[]

Example
Y‘ The is to be inserted at a specified distance either to the right, left, above

X‘
or below the zero point of the reference symbol.
Procedure
 Press []/[]/[]/[]. The "Relativ zur aktuellen Position"

(Relative from position) dialogue box is displayed. It is used to
input the distance.
 Enter the value in metres (m) without a preceding + or - sign.
 Click OK or press [Enter]. The new symbol is fixed at the entered distance to the
reference symbol.
Basic functions
Note
You can form chains of individual objects through a consecutive execution of this operation.
The last distance input is saved and is applied as a suggestion for the next operation
Move a Given Distance along Line [G]

Example
Y‘ The reference symbol is located on a diagonal wall. The new symbol is

to be inserted at a defined distance and placed on the same wall.
X‘
Procedure
 Press [G]. A dialogue box is displayed

where you can enter the radius.
 Enter the value in metres (m).
 Move the cursor to the intersection point between circle and wall line. The intersection
point captures the cursor and holds it tight.
 Click . The symbol has been fixed at the position of the intersection point.
Index
426
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Symbol from last point according to relative coordinates with [8]
Example
Y‘ The symbol is to be mounted at a defined distance to the zero point of

-DX the local coordinate system. The distances are known as DX and DY.
-DY X‘
Procedure
 Press [8]. The "Relative Co-ordinates" dialogue

is displayed. This is used to separately input the
distances in the X, Y and Z directions.
 Enter the values. Note the effect on the preceding
+ or - sign. A line points to the position.
position indicated.
Polar Co-ordinates (Angle + Length) [9]
Basic functions
Example
Y‘ The symbol is to be mounted at a defined distance to the zero point of

a the local coordinate system. The distances are know as distance (A) and
A X‘ angle a (orientation).
Procedure
 Press [9]. The "Polar Co-ordinates (Angle +
configuration
Length” dialogue is displayed. It is used to input
configuration
the distance and the angle.
 Enter the values. Observe the effect on the pre-
ceding + or - sign. A line shows the position that is
defined by the current input.
position indicated.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
427
Introduction

r!
17.2.5 Adjust installation height
(1) (2) (3) While working with dynamic symbols is

may be necessary to change the work-
ing height.
The mounting height of an object is ini-

tially set in the object dialogue. You first
select an installation type (1). You can
then decide whether the mounting
height should be determined by com-
ponents of the building model (2) or by
a free input (3).
(4)
After confirming with OK the symbol
is displayed dynamically at the cursor.
The working height is displayed in the
status bar at the bottom of the screen
Z (4). The reference level for this display
is always the plane "0" in the global co-
Basic functions
ordinate system (see 16.1, page 391).

Y
Z DZ
You can set the mounting height either as the difference (DZ) to the current working
height or as an absolute value (Z). If you input a difference the new mounting height
is calculated. The result can be positive or negative. If you input an absolute value
you specify the new mounting height directly as a positive or negative value.
Index
428
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Change mounting height by a difference with [PgUp] / [PgDn]
Example
You are working with a symbol at the current working height of 2m. You want to change the
mounting height up or down by a difference to the current working height. The example shows
a change of 0.5m downwards.
Procedure
 Press [PgDn] for downwards movement. The "Relative from Last Position) dialogue
box is displayed.
 Enter the value for the height change without preceding + or - sign in metres (m) and
click OK . The working height has been recalculated by the program. The status bar at
the bottom of the screen shows the result of the operation and you can continue working.
Basic functions
Adjusting mounting height as an absolute value with [Home]
Example
You are working with a symbol at the current working height of 2.23m. You want to adjust the
mounting height to 1.5m.
Procedure
 Press [Home] for the new mounting height. The "Mounting height“ dialogue box is dis-
configuration
played.
configuration
 Enter the desired mounting height. The value can be positive or negative.
extensions,
 Click OK . The working height has been changed to the specified value. The status
extensions,
bar at the bottom of the screen shows the result of the operation and you can continue
working.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
429
Introduction

r!
17.3 Working with object groups


The object group simplifies design work whenever a larger quantity of an object is to
be arranged with equal distances between them in an area or along a line. We distin-
guish between two functions: The object group (field) and the object group (line).
Typical applications include:
• Light boxes, skylights, etc.
• PV panels on roofs or free-standing installation
• Light poles along the roadside
• Bracket for lightning conductor
We have to differentiate between the group (1) and the individual object (2). The ob-
ject group defines the arrangement of each object, i.e. the number and spacing.
The single object can be deleted inde-

pendently of the other objects of the
Basic functions
same group and/or all of its properties

(1) (such as item, mounting height, colour,
etc.) can be edited separately too.
(2)
The starting point is the current object that is located at the cursor as a dynamic
symbol. To call the object group, proceed as follows:

You want to use an object (e.g. a lamp) in an object-group.
Procedure
 Start the desired function (e.g. fluorescent lamps). The product database is dis-
played and allows you to select an item.
 Select the desired item and click OK . You are taken to the component's object
dialogue (for example: fluorescent lamps)
 Set the properties of the object (e.g. mounting height and attributes) and click
OK . The symbol of the object is located at the cursor.
 Click . The context menu is displayed and offers two options for forming an ob-
ject group:
Index
430
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
17.3.2 Inserting objects on a surface

17.3.2.1 Basic principles of the "Object group" function
Inserting on a surface means the multi-line symmetrical arrangement of objects on a

surface. Their behaviour – whether their expansion is fixed or variable – is defined by
the usage option applied (see 17.3.2.3, page 433).
The area (from the point of view

Area of the function) is in most cases
larger than is actually consumed
by the objects (left). It can also
be the same size (right), but
never smaller.
The function is based on a local

coordinate system, whose origin point forms the insertion point of the group in the
model. The objects are oriented towards this point.
The object group (area) is controlled
Basic functions
Quantity in the X by the interaction of three parameter
i pairs:
Quantity in the Y
i • Quantity X/Y,
dY • Starting point X/Y
• Distance dX/dY
Y
X dX
The starting point X/Y determines the

distance between the origin of the coordinate system and the first object of the group.
The distances between the objectsdX/dY are each the same size.
configuration
configuration
The group's co-
Quantity in the X
i
ordinate system
Quantity in the X Quantity in the Y does not have
i i to match the
Quantity in the Y global coordi-
i
nate system of
extensions,
the whole
extensions,
model. It can be
rotated or tilted
dX compared to the
model.
dY X
dX
Adjustments,
Y X dY YIn this situation,

Adjustments,
the respective
X- and Y-parameters appear to be exchanged with each other and must handled as
such in the "Objekt-Gruppe (Feld)" (Object group (box)) dialogue.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
431
Introduction

r!
17.3.2.2 The "Object group" dialogue box
The "Object group" dialogue is where you specify the ratio between the parameter
pairs. Depending on the usage option (see 17.3.2.5 to 17.3.2.9) it appears at the start
or completion of the drawing operation. The dialogue comes in two variants, which
differ in the "Start point” (1) and "Distance” (2) parameters. The variant is automati-
cally determined by the object used and the significance of the parameters is shown
by an image (3) in the dialogue.
(3)
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
For most object types, the "Start point” (1) and "Distance” (2) parameters relate to the
mounting points of the objects (left picture). The dimensions (e.g. of strip lights) must
therefore be taken into account when entering the distances. When using PV mod-
ules the "Start point” (1) and "Distance” (2) parameters relate to the physical bounda-
ries of the object and thus allow the dimensions to be arranged in sequence.
The other controls are the same for both types of dialogue box. Different combina-
tions of options for orientation and placement adjust the object group to the respec-
tive usage context. They are predefined by the usage variant and can be corrected
later.
Index
432
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
17.3.2.3 Usage variants

There are three usage variants for using the object group (box). The selected variant
determines whether the size of the area is fixed or variable.
Select surface
The "Select surface” usage variant is connected to defined rooms or roof areas of the
building model as per chapter 4. It distributes the objects to the room or the roof area.
The cut of this are can be polygonal. It is invariable in size and contour and specified
by the room. The room boundary defines the limits of the object group. Position and
distances of the objects are variable.
Typical applications occur in the lighting

design (left) and in the arrangement of
PV modules (right). Both cases are
covered in 17.3.2.5 and 17.3.2.6 with an
Basic functions
example.
Define surface
The "Define surface” usage variant is not bound by any conditions. It distributes the
objects symmetrically over a defined area. Position and distances of the objects are
variable. The difference to "Select surface” is that the contour is only formed in the
course of the operation. You can choose a polygonal area (left) by precisely specify-
ing the sub-sections or a rectangle (right) by defining the diagonal:
Typical applications arise when designing
configuration
the lighting, if only one part of a room is to
configuration
be lit or there is no building model in ac-
cordance with chapter 4. Designing then
takes place for example, on the basis of a
DWG file (see 17.3.2.7).
Dynamic insert
extensions,
The "Dynamic insert” usage variant is not bound by any conditions. It defines an ob-
extensions,
ject group as a dynamic symbol. You enter the number of objects, and all distances.
The area expansion is a result of the operation.
Typical applications arise when designing the lighting, if a group

of lamps is to be placed at predetermined intervals (see 17.3.2.9).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
433
Introduction

r!
17.3.2.4 Notes on the settings
As was mentioned in the previous section, the behaviour of the area (a) – whether
fixed or variable – is specified by the usage variants.
The behaviour of the objects on the

area however, is determined by the
active options for the orientation (1)
(1) and arrangement (2). The combina-
tion of the two settings decides which
(b) parameter acts as the input or the
result of a calculation.
(a)
(d)
(c)
(2)
Basic functions
Orientation Meaning and application

Number The typical application is the "Dynamic insert” usage variant.
and All parameters are free to enter. The area (a) is the result of a calculation.
distance It is determined by the number of objects, their distances from each other
and to the starting point. There is no difference between free and centred
arrangement.
Number The number of objects is free to enter. The distances between the objects
are calculated. The objects are distributed evenly across the available area
in the desired quantity.
Typical applications include the "Select surface” and "Define surface” us-
age variants.
Free arrangement Centred arrangement

The starting point is free to en- The position of the starting point is
ter. Thus, the object group can calculated so that the object group is
be positioned within the area as centred on the area. In this way, the
desired. distances between the objects are
twice as large as from the external
object to the edge of the area.
Distance The distances between the objects is free to enter. The potential number of
(dX and dY) objects is calculated as a function of the available area.
age variants.
be positioned within the area as centred on the area.
desired.
Index
434
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
17.3.2.5 Example for the "Select surface” usage variant (Lighting)

You want to arrange a group of lamps symmetrically in a
room like so. The room is not rectangular, but this has no
effect on the application of the function.
Application
 Select the desired object (e.g. lamp), set its properties and start the usage vari-
ant. The cursor moves an object group as a dynamic symbol. The settings and
distances correspond to the last application.
Basic functions
 Move the cursor to the desired area. The area snaps the object group and the
group is adjusted to the contours of the area. Unnecessary objects are removed
from the group.
configuration
configuration
 Click . The group is fixed and the "Comp. group” dialogue box is displayed.
 Adjust the settings of the object group.

extensions,
Click OK . The cursor again moves an object group as a dynamic symbol. You
extensions,
can continue to work or end the function with [ESC].

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
435
Introduction

r!
17.3.2.6 Example for the "Select surface” usage variant (PV modules on the
roof)

You want to fill a roof area with the maximum possible
number of PV modules. The roof area has been defined
as the working level.
The example assumes an unfavourable configuration, in
which previously a symmetrical arrangement of selected
objects was chosen.
Application
 Select the desired PV module, set its properties and start the usage variant. The
cursor moves an object group as a dynamic symbol. The settings and distances
correspond to the last application.
Basic functions
 Move the cursor to the desired roof area. The area is highlighted by a wide green
line. The object group adjusts to the contours of the area.
 Click . The group is fixed. The "Object group (area)" dialogue box is displayed.
(1)
 Check "Place max” (1). The roof area is filled with the maximum possible
number of PV modules of the selected size.
 Click OK . The cursor again moves an object group as a dynamic symbol. You
can continue to work or end the function with [ESC].
Index
436
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
17.3.2.7 Example for the "Define surface” usage variant (Rectangle)

You want to arrange an object group in an area without being
bound to a room.
Application
ant. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following
prompt: "Select first point in contour....
 Define the diagonal of the desired rectangle by clicking :
Basic functions
2
1
 Press [Enter]. The area is covered with a number of objects and the "Object-
Group (Area)” dialogue box is displayed. The settings and distances correspond
to the last application.
 Click OK . The object group in the model is displayed according to the new
settings and the dialogue closes. The function remains active and the message
line returns to the prompt: "Select first point in contour.... You can define another
configuration
contour or end the function with [ESC].
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index configuration
extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
437
Introduction

r!
17.3.2.8 Example for the "Define surface” usage variant (Polygon)

You want to arrange an object group in a free, polygonal
area without being bound to a room.
Application
ant. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following
prompt: "Select first point in contour....
 Define the first corner of the desired area by clicking . The cursor moves a dy-
namic line.
 Draw the area counter-clockwise (to make the use of auxiliary functions possi-
ble).
Basic functions
 Close the contour. To do this, use the auxiliary functions from the context menu
(see 18.1.7, page 470).
The area is covered with a number of objects
and the "Object-Group (Area)” dialogue box
is displayed. The settings and distances cor-
respond to the last application.

 Click OK . The object group in the model is displayed according to the new
settings and the dialogue closes. The function remains active and the message
line returns to the prompt: "Select first point in contour.... You can define another
contour or end the function with [ESC].
Index
438
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
17.3.2.9 Example of the "Dynamic insert” usage variant

You want to define an object group (e.g. a light box) and insert
it into the drawing as a dynamic symbol as often as required.
Application
ant. The "Object group (box)" dialogue box is displayed.
 Adjust the settings of the object group and click OK . The object group is dis-
played at the cursor as a dynamic symbol. You can fix it in the drawing as often
as required. [ESC] ends the function.
17.3.3 Multiple objects on one line
Basic functions
17.3.3.1 Basic principles of the "Object-Group (Line)” function
"Place Symmetrical on a Line” is the single-line, uniform arrangement of objects

along a certain length. Whether the length of the line is fixed or variable, is defined by
the usage variant applied.
The object group is based on a local coordinate

Numbe system, of which only the X axis is used. The ori-
gin forms the insertion point of the group in the
model. The individual objects are oriented to-
configuration
X dX wards this point.
configuration
The three parameters number, starting point X and distance dX control the group.
The starting point determines the distance between the origin of the coordinate sys-
tem and the first object of the group. The distances between the objects are each the
same size.
extensions,
In the "Object-Group (Line)” dialogue specify

extensions,
how the parameters relate to each other. De-

pending on the usage option it appears at the
start or completion of the drawing operation.
The significance of the various settings is de-
scribed in connection with the usage variant
Adjustments,
applied (in the following sections). There are

Adjustments,
two usage variants:

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
439
Introduction

r!
17.3.3.2 "Define Line” usage variant
Use the "Define Line” usage variant to evenly distribute a

Fixed length
number of objects along a section of unknown length. You
1 define the length of the direction of the line by two clicks .
This cannot be changed by the settings in the "Object-
X dX
Group (Line)” dialogue box. The distances between the ob-
jects can be fixed or calculated.
Application
 Select the desired object, set its properties in the object dialogue and confirm
with OK . The object is displayed at the cursor as a dynamic symbol.
 If necessary, adjust the desired rotation for the symbol (see 17.2.2, page 416).
Note
This step is necessary if the current position of the symbol at the cursor does
not match the planned location in the model:
Basic functions
 Select 'Set line "Define Line” usage variant from the context menu. The cursor
turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following prompt: "Select first
point of line”.
 Click on the position where the line is to begin. The cursor moves the movable
end of a line. The message line shows the "Select second point of line” prompt.
 Click on the position where the line is to end. The objects are arranged along
the defined section and the "Object-Group (Line)” dialogue box is displayed. The
settings (starting point and distance) correspond to the last application.
 Correct the settings as required and click OK . The function remains active.
You can define another line or end the function with [ESC].
17.3.3.3 "Dynamic insert” usage variant
Use the "Dynamic insert” usage variant to use a number of

Calculated length
objects with defined spacing like a dynamic symbol. The
1 length of the line is variable. This is calculated by the set-
tings in the "Object-Group (Line)” dialogue box.
X dX
Application
 Select the desired object, set its properties in the object dialogue and confirm
with OK . The object is displayed at the cursor as a dynamic symbol.
Index
440
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Select the "Dynamic insert” usage variant from the context menu. The "Object-
Group (Line)” dialogue box is displayed.

 Adjust the settings of the object group and click OK . The object group is dis-
played at the cursor as a dynamic symbol. You can fix it in the drawing as often
as required. [ESC] ends the function.
17.3.3.4 Notes on the settings
As was mentioned in the previous section, the behaviour of the line length (a) –
whether fixed or variable – is specified by the usage variants.
The behaviour of the objects on the

line however, is determined by the
active options for the orientation (1)
(1) and arrangement (2). The combina-
tion of the two settings decides which
(b) parameter acts as the input or the re-
sult of a calculation.
(a)
(d)
(c)
Basic functions
(2)
"Define Line” usage variant

Number The typical application is the "Dynamic insert” usage variant.
and All parameters are free to enter. The length (a) is the result of a calcula-
configuration
distance tion. It is determined by the number of objects, their distances from each
configuration
other and to the starting point. There is no difference between free and
centred arrangement.
are calculated. The objects are distributed evenly across the available line
extensions,
(dX and dY) objects is calculated as a function of the available line.

extensions,
"Dynamic insert” usage variant

The "Dynamic insert” usage variant is not bound by any conditions. Enter the number
of objects, and all distances, the length of the line is thus a result of the inputs. Once
confirmed, the group is displayed as a dynamic symbol at the cursor, whose position
Adjustments,
and orientation (rotation) are defined with the functions of the symbol application
Adjustments,
(see 17.2, page 414).

Number All parameters are free to enter. There is no difference between free and
and centred arrangement. The typical application is the "Dynamic insert” usage
distance variant.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
441
Introduction

r!
are calculated. The objects are distributed evenly across the available line

be positioned on the line as de- centred on the area. In this way, the
sired. distances between the objects are
twice as large as from the external
object to the edge of the area.
(dX and dY) objects is calculated as a function of the available area.
age variants.
be positioned within the area as centred on the area.
desired.
Basic functions
Index
442
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
17.3.4 Editing an object group

When editing an object group, you have to distinguish between the objects within the
group and the group as an independent object.
17.3.4.1 Editing objects within the object group
All operations for deleting, moving or editing properties can be applied to the objects
within the group (see 1, page 518).
Warning!
With the exception of the Undo function, a deleted object cannot be re-inserted
into the group. As such, you should only delete individual objects if all other ad-
justments have already been completed.
For editing individual objects carry out the selection with the options described in
19.1, page 518. If on the other hand, you want to edit ALL objects in a group there is
a simplified procedure for selecting them:
 Select an object from the group. The selected object is shown
Basic functions
dark, all are displayed light blue.
 Select the "Select all objects” function. All objects are dis-
played in dark blue.
 Perform the desired editing operation (see 1, page 518)
configuration
configuration
17.3.4.2 Editing the group as an independent object
If you want to edit the group as an independent object, you first need to select it in
the following way:
 Select an object from the group.
The selected object is shown dark, all others are displayed
extensions,
extensions,
light blue.
 Select the "Select Group” function. All objects are displayed in
dark blue.
Adjustments,
 Perform the editing operation (see 1, page 518).

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
443
Introduction
Erro Drawing and labelling

r!
18 Drawing and labelling
This chapter describes working with neutral geometric figures and auxiliary geome-
tries.
WM: Geometric functions
Neutral geometric features are found in the "Use Line Drawing

Tools” working mode. You can choose between free lines and
asymmetric polygons on the one hand and symmetrical shapes
(e.g. circles, rectangles, pyramids) on the other.
A common feature of all functions is the primary dynamic applica-

tion. That is, the shape is primarily created by means of mouse
clicks . In this way, you first define points that determine the posi-
tion of the shape and its size. For example, after calling the function
a circle requires two clicks : The first determines the centre of the
circle, the second determines the radius. In case of a three-
Basic functions
dimensional shape, DDS-CAD asks for the height.
You can then

handle the object
like a symbol. You
(1 can copy it, move
(2 it or edit its prop-
erties. Depending
on the type of the
object or the pa-
rameters, you edit
a value numeri-
cally in the object
dialogue or dy-
Move circle Adjust radius
namically with the
mouse.
Auxiliary geometries are used to support a drawing operation. With them you can, for
example, form helper line and intersection points, which will assist you in the ar-
rangement of other objects. Auxiliary geometries are only displayed on the screen
and never in the printout (see 18.3, page 492).
Index
444
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Drawing and labelling Erro
r!
18.1 Polylines and asymmetric polygons

18.1.1 Common features of the functions
DDS-CAD contains several functions for creating polylines and two-
and three-dimensional irregular polygons. All functions are thus
characterised by the fact that during the operation, a user-defined
contour is created. All functions are very similar in their application.
The specific properties are explained in the following sections.
The result is always an object that consists of

nodes and segments.
Nodes
Basic functions
Nodes determine the position of the vertices, i.e. the
geometric shape of the polyline. Its position is defined by
X, Y and Z coordinates. Nodes can subsequently
be moved or deleted. Additional nodes are
inserted by editing the segment. When an
object is selected, is displayed as a black solid square .
Segment
A segment is defined as the connections between the nodes. The centre point of a
segment is used as the reference for subsequent editing. When a polyline is se-
lected, it is displayed as an open square . Using the segment, new nodes can be
configuration
inserted in the polyline. A segment can be shifted in parallel, and deleted in the
configuration
case of a polyline. The polyline is disconnected.
The application of all functions follows a general procedure:
After calling the function, DDS-CAD

extensions,
Start function expects the definition of a starting

Chapter 19.1.3
extensions,
Page 448 point. There are a variety of ways to

achieve this. The cursor then moves
Define starting point a dynamic line that you use to draw
or construct the polyline.
Chapter 19.1.4 to
19.1.6 from page 452
Adjustments,
Draw or construct Depending on the function and

Adjustments,
polyline situation, you can end the polyline

freely, or close the drawn contour
Chapter 19.1.7 automatically.
End polyline Page 470
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
445
Introduction

r!
18.1.2 Overview of the functions
18.1.2.1 Polyline (as a solid line and dashed line)
In the polyline the nodes are

directly connected by
straight lines. Regardless of
Polyline
its specific geometric shape,
it is always an open polyline.
That is, it cannot be consid-
ered either as an area nor a
Dashed polyline solid body. A crosshatch is there-
fore not possible and the polyline is hidden in the rendered model.
The polyline is the technological basis for pipeline functions, such

as pipes, gutters, ventilation ducts and lightning conductors.
18.1.2.2 Spline (polygonal line)
The visible line of the spline

passes through the nodes
Basic functions
which are support points for

Spline an interpolation. The nodes
are thus connected with
each other by curves.
A spline – like the polyline – is an open polyline (without the possi-

bility of hatching and rendering).
18.1.2.3 Rounded polyline
The rounded polyline runs

between the nodes. The
node connection forms an
invisible helper line.
Rounded polyline
A circle with computed radius is tangentially applied between the

segments, which are connected by a single node. A rounded poly-
line – like the polyline itself – is an open polyline (without the possi-
bility of hatching and rendering).
Index
446
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.1.2.4 Polypolyline

The polypolyline is an open
polyline, whose route may
include all three previously
described types. To switch
to another type, open the
context menu (click ):
Polypolyline
18.1.2.5 Polygon/crosshatch
The polygon is a closed line, which al-

ways forms an area. It can be detected
Basic functions
by the "Surface Mode” option, can be
filled by a crosshatch and is also visible
in the rendered model.
Irregular polygon
The polygon is the basis for area defini-

tions, such as roofs and heating circuits. A change in height is not
possible while drawing.
Crosshatc
configuration
configuration
18.1.2.6 3D polygon
The 3D polygon is a closed polyline, which is converted into a solid

body after it is completed. Upon completion of the function, DDS-
CAD asks for the desired height and the solid body is displayed in
extensions,
the rendered model:

extensions,
3D polygon
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
447
Introduction

r!
18.1.2.7 Revision cloud
The revision cloud is a polyline of semi-circles strung together,

which is used as a label. The radius of the semi-circle can be set by
the object dialogue.
Revision cloud
18.1.3 Defining the starting point of the polyline

18.1.3.1 Preliminary remarks and overview
Basic functions
After calling the function, DDS-CAD expects the starting point

(1) . It is the first node at the start of the polyline, only after
subsequent operations (1) is a visible result created in the
model.
Overview: Define starting point

Description Variant Example Reference
In the cursor position Define freely Segment 18.1.3.2,

You can determine the page 449
start point of the poly-
line by clicking . The
position of the start
point and cursor
match Define on existing
point
Continue polyline Segment 18.1.3.3,

You can continue an page 450
existing polyline.
Construct starting point Shifted verti- Segment 18.1.3.4,

A construction of the cally/horizontally page 450
starting point is nec- from the cursor
essary if its position
cannot be displayed
Index
448
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
exactly by the cursor .
In this case, select a Shifted in the X-

reference point (e.g. a and Y-direction -DX
room corner) as the from the cursor -Dy

starting point for the
operation.
Shifted with
length and direc- a
tion from the cur- L
sor
18.1.3.2 Define starting point in cursor position
Define freely
Example
You want to start a polyline or a polygon at a suitable location. The

position of the starting point does not therefore have to determined
exactly.
Basic functions
Procedure
 Move the cursor to the desired position and click . The cursor moves a dynamic line.
You can execute the next operation.
Define on existing point

Example
You want to start the polyline at an existing point (e.g. at a room
configuration
corner).
Procedure
configuration
 Enable snap points (see 16.3.4, page 400) or press [Shift].
extensions,

extensions,
 Click . The cursor moves a dynamic line. You can execute the next operation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
449
Introduction

r!
18.1.3.3 Continuing existing polylines
Continue existing polyline

Example
You can continue an existing polyline.
Procedure
 Enable snap objects (see 16.3.5, page 401).

 Move the cursor to the end of the existing polyline. The entire polyline is displayed as
a selected object. The cursor is snapped in by the end and identified by a blue circle.
The coordinates are displayed on the screen.
 Click . The cursor takes up the line and you can continue drawing. The result of the
operation is merged with the existing polyline and is regarded as one object.
Basic functions
18.1.3.4 Constructing the starting point
Construct starting point: Shifted vertically/horizontally from the cursor

Example
The starting point is to be constructed to the right, left, above or

below the cursor position . The distance is known.
Procedure
 Point to the reference point. The point snaps in the

cursor.
 Press [Shift]+[]/[]/[]/[]. The "Collect Points”
 Enter the length of the point shift in metres (m) without preceding + or - sign and click
OK . The position of the starting point has been defined at the specified position.
The cursor moves a dynamic line. You can execute the next operation.
Index
450
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Construct starting point: Shifted in the X- and Y-direction from the cursor
Example
The distances from the reference point to the starting point are known
-DX as DX and DY. In this way an indirect construction is possible using rela-
-Dy tive coordinates.
Procedure
 Point to the reference point. The point snaps in

the cursor.
 Press [Shift]+[8]. The "by relative or polar coor-
dinates" dialogue is displayed. This is used to
separately input the point shift in the X, Y and Z
directions.
 Enter the values for each direction in metres (m). Note the effect of the preceding + or -
Basic functions
sign. A line shows the reference point at the position of the starting point while main-
taining the current settings. Each additional change is immediately visible on the screen,
so that you can correct the input.
 Click OK . The position of the starting point has been defined at the specified posi-
tion. The cursor moves a dynamic line. You can execute the next operation.
Construct starting point: Shifted with length and direction from the cursor
Example
configuration
The distances from the reference point to the starting point are known
configuration
a as length (L) and angle a (orientation). In this way an indirect construc-
L tion is possible using polar coordinates.
Procedure

extensions,
Point to the reference point. The point snaps in
extensions,
the cursor.
dinates" dialogue is displayed. It is used to enter
the distance (length of the point shift) and the an-
gle (direction of the point shift).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Enter the values. Observe the effect of the preceding + or - sign. A line shows the refer-
ence point at the position of the starting point while maintaining the current settings.
Each additional change is immediately visible on the screen.
 Click OK . The position of the starting point has been defined at the specified posi-
tion. The cursor moves a dynamic line. You can execute the next operation.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
451
Introduction

r!
18.1.4 Draw polyline freely

After determining the starting point, the cursor move a dy-

namic line. During the free drawing operation, the position of
a node is defined by clicking . Each click fixes the line at
the cursor position . It is important to set the desired posi-
tion in the model quickly and accurately. There are various
auxiliary functions available for this purpose.
Overview: Draw polyline horizontally

Orthogonal mode Ortho mode ON/OFF segment 18.1.4.2,

page 453
Adjust ortho angle
Basic functions
Double/halve ortho angle
Snap functions Snap line at any angle Segment 18.1.4.3,

with [Ctrl] (1) page 454
(2)
Snap line at right an-

gles with "Use Snap (1)
Points” option enabled
(2)
Snap point with

[Shift] (1)
Delete the last Delete last point with Segment 18.1.4.4,

point or line [Backspace] page 455
Index
452
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.1.4.2 Orthogonal mode (Ortho)

The orthogonal mode (Ortho) supports drawing at a defined
(1) angle. When Ortho is switched on, the end of the dynamic
line (1) does not move exactly with the cursor , but rather
always jumps by a defined Ortho angle (2). In this way, you
(2) can very easily create an angled polyline using the mouse.
However, the Ortho mode interferes with working with snap

features, because not every position can be reached. It must therefore be turned on
or off according to needs. In addition, the Ortho angle may be too large or too small
and must therefore be adjusted.
Orthogonal mode (Ortho)

Target Action
Ortho ON/OFF  Press [F9]. Each key press switches Ortho ON or

with [F9] OFF.
Basic functions
Enter Ortho angle  Press [Ctrl]+F9]. A dialogue box is displayed where
[Ctrl]+[F9] you can enter the Ortho angle.
 Enter the desired Ortho angle and click OK . The
dynamic line jumps with a mouse movement by the in-
put angle.
Double Ortho angle  Press [*] on the numeric keypad. The Ortho angle
[*] (numeric keypad) has been doubled.
Halve Ortho angle  Press [/] on the numeric keypad. The Ortho angle
[/] (numeric keypad) has been halved.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
453
Introduction

r!
18.1.4.3 Snap functions
Snap line at any angle with [Ctrl]

Example
You are drawing a polyline (1) and want to fix a new node directly on
(1) an existing line (2). The angle at which both lines meet each other can
be entered freely and ≠90°.
(2)
Procedure
 Press [Ctrl] and move the cursor to the existing line (2). [Ctrl]
(1) enables snap lines. The existing line (2) is highlighted in orange and
snaps in the cursor with the dynamic line. You can slide the cursor
(2)
along the marked line.
 Click . The node has been fixed at the position indicated. It is located precisely on the
existing line.
Snap line at right angles with "Use Snap Points” option enabled
Basic functions
Example
You are drawing a polyline (1) and want to fix a new node on an exist-
(1) ing line (2) so that both are at right angles to each other.
(2)
Procedure
 Enable the "Use Snap Points” option and move the cursor to the
existing line (2). DDS-CAD automatically calculates the correct
position of the intersection point. The calculated intersection point

captures the cursor and holds it tight. The position is shown.
 Click . The node has been fixed at the position indicated.
Index
454
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Snap point with [Shift]
Example
You are drawing a polyline (1). The "Use Snap Points” option (see
(1) 16.3.4, page 400) is not active and for technical reasons should not be
switched on permanently. Nevertheless, you want to fix a new node
directly to an existing point (e.g. a room corner). Snap points should be
activated temporarily
Procedure
 Press [Shift] and move the cursor to the reference point. [Shift]
(1) enables snap points. The intended point is marked by an orange
circle (2). It captures the cursor with the dynamic line and snaps it
(2)
in.
 Click . The node has been fixed at the position of the reference point.
18.1.4.4 Deleting the last point or line
Basic functions
Delete last point or line with [Backspace]
Example
1 2 You have snapped or constructed the wrong point

while drawing. The polyline must be drawn differ-
ently from a particular node.
Do NOT end the function!
3 4 You can revert the polyline drawn up to now to an
earlier position:.
configuration
configuration
Procedure
 Press [Backspace].
Each key press releases the current node . Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
455
Introduction

r!
18.1.5 Construct polyline horizontally
The horizontal construction occurs in parallel to the drawing

plane, without changing the working height (Z). Based on the
current node a segment is to lead to the new node . This
section describes the procedures for different scenarios.
Here, the relationship between current and new nodes /
and the cursor position are explained.
Overview: Draw polyline horizontally

Direct construction Vertical/horizontal with Segment 18.1.5,

Direct construction is []/[]/[]/[] page 456
possible if the section
from the current node
to the new node is
determined numerically.
Basic functions
The starting point is the Diagonally in the X and

Y directions with [8] DX 8
current node , the
-Dy
position of the cursor
plays no role.
Diagonally with length a

and direction with [9] 9
-a
L
Indirect construction Shifted verti- Segment

Indirect construction is cally/horizontally from 18.1.5.3,

necessary if the section the cursor with ? page 459
from the current node [Shift]+[]
to the new node is
not determined numeri-
cally. The position of Shifted in the X- and Y-
the new node is de- direction from the cur- -DX
fined indirectly by sor with ? -Dy
means of a reference [Shift]+[8]
point. The current posi-
tion of the cursor is Shifted with length and
the starting point of the direction from the cur- a
operation. sor with ? L
[Shift}+[9]
Index
456
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.1.5.2 Direct construction

Vertical/horizontal with []/[]/[]/[]
Example
The draw direction to the new node runs vertically

or horizontally. The length of the section is known.
Procedure
 Press []/[]/[]/[]. The "Collect Points” dialogue

box appears. It is used to input the length of the seg-
ment.
 Enter the value without a preceding + or - sign.
 Click OK . The segment has been drawn in the specified direction. You can execute
the next operation.
Basic functions
Diagonally in the X and Y directions with [8]
Example
The distances from the operation's starting point to the new node
DX 8 are known as DX and DY. In this way, a direct construction is possible
-Dy using relative coordinates, where the preceding + or - signs define the
direction.
Procedure
 Press [8]. The "by relative or polar coordinates`
configuration
dialogue is displayed. This is used to separately
configuration
input the point shift in the X, Y and Z directions.
 Enter the values for each direction in metres (m).
Note the effect of the preceding + or - sign. The
segment is displayed in the drawing and shows
the effect of the current settings.

extensions,
Click OK . The segment has been drawn in the specified direction. You can execute
extensions,
the next operation.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
457
Introduction

r!
Diagonal with length and direction with [9]

Example
a The distances from the operation's starting point to the new node
9 are known as length (L) and angle a (orientation). In this way an direct
-a
L construction is possible using polar coordinates.
Procedure
 Press [9]. The "by relative or polar coordinates`

dialogue is displayed. It is used to enter the dis-
tance (length of the segment) and the angle (di-
rection of the segment).
 Enter the values. Depending on the direction of
rotation, a negative value is also possible for the
angle. The segment is displayed in the drawing
and shows the effect of the current settings. Each
additional change is immediately visible on the
screen.
Basic functions
 Click OK . The segment has been drawn in the specified direction. You can execute
the next operation.
Index
458
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.1.5.3 Indirect construction

Vertical/horizontal with [Shift}+[]/[]/[]/[]
Example
The cursor points to an existing point that is to be considered as the

starting point of the operation. The new node is to be constructed to
? the right, left, above or below the cursor position . The distance is
known.
Procedure
 Point to the reference point. The point snaps in the cur-

sor.
 Press [Shift]+[]/[]/[]/[]. The "Collect Points”
dialogue box appears. It is used to input the point shift.
 Enter the value in metres (m) without preceding + or - sign and click OK . The position
of the new node has been defined at the specified position. You can execute the next
operation.
Basic functions
Diagonally in the X and Y direction with [Shift}+[8]
Example
The cursor points to an existing point that is to be used as the starting

-DX point of the operation. The distances from the reference point to the
? -Dy new node are known as DX and DY.
Procedure
configuration
 Point to the reference point. The point snaps in
configuration
the cursor.
dinates` dialogue is displayed. This is used to
separately input the point shift in the X, Y and Z
directions. extensions,
 Enter the values. Note the effect of the preceding + or - sign. A line points from the refer-
extensions,
ence point to the position of the new node . Each change is immediately visible, so
that you can correct the input.
 Click OK . The new node has been fixed. A new segment connects it to the previ-
ously current node . You can execute the next operation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
459
Introduction

r!
Diagonally with length and direction with [Shift}+[9]

Example
The cursor points to an existing point that is to be used as the starting

a point of the operation. The distances from the reference point to the
? L new node are known as length (L) and angle a (orientation).
Procedure
 Point to the reference point. The cursor snaps to

the point.
dinates` dialogue is displayed. It is used to enter
the distance (length of the point shift) and the an-
gle (direction of the point shift).
 Enter the values. Note the effect of the preceding + or - sign. A line points from the refer-
ence point to the position of the new node . Each change is immediately visible, so
Basic functions
that you can correct the input.

 Click OK . The new node has been fixed. A new segment connects it to the previ-
ously current node . You can execute the next operation.
Index
460
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.1.6 Changes in height in the polyline

For the following descriptions, the three-dimensional coordinate system is used for
the visualisation. We therefore switch from the plan view (left) to the 3D view (right):
Y Z
(1)
(1) Y
X
(2) (2) X
The two-dimensional plane between X- and Y-axis (1) is used as the reference plane.
It corresponds to the height 0m. The viewpoint of the observer (2) is located in the
3rd quadrant slightly above the reference plane in all examples. Its view is directed
Basic functions
towards the 2nd quadrant between the now vertical Z axis and the horizontal Y-axis.
A change in direction (DZ) of the polyline in the positive or negative Z direction is

classed as a change in height for the purposes of this description. A positive DZ
leads to an upward movement (left), a negative DZ leads to a downward movement
(right image). If you look at the screen as the two-dimensional plane, an upward
movement comes out of the screen and a downwards movement goes into the
screen.
Z Z
configuration
Z
configuration
(+DZ (-DZ)
Y Y
Z
X X
extensions,
extensions,
As a result of the operation the polyline runs on a different working height (Z), which
is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen:
Z
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
The resulting working height (Z) is an absolute value, which may be either positive or
negative. The example shows a vertical downward movement (negative DZ), whose
target is below the reference plane. This leads to a corresponding message in the
status bar.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
461
Introduction

r!
Z Y
X
Z
The change in working height is often necessary, for example when applying pipeline
functions. Typical examples are pipes, ventilation ducts, cable installation systems,
lightning conductors, etc. The same principles apply in all cases.
18.1.6.2 Notes on height and gradient – The "Point" function
One important way is working with height or height difference and the gradient angle.
Examples for the application can be found in the following sections: 18.1.6.4 and
18.1.6.5. At this point, basic instructions are given.
The function is called for the direct construction by [PgUp]/ [PgDn]. For indirect
construction use [Shift]+[PgUp]/ [PgDn]. In both cases, the "Collect Points” dia-
Basic functions
logue box is displayed. When entering the different values DDS-CAD automatically
considers the inevitable geometric dependencies of these values to each other.
Changing a value automatically calls a recalculation of all other values.
Indirect construction will be used as an example. In this case, X- and Y-coordinates

are already fixed, as they are defined by the cursor position. Therefore, a single value
is sufficient to determine the new Z-coordinate. This can either be the desired height
difference (DZ), the absolute Z-position or the required gradient angle.
For the gradient angle please note:
If the original drawing direction (1) runs

Z
horizontally, i.e. parallel to the refer-
D ence plane, Input ”Angle (draw dir.)”
(1 (Angle (drawing direction))
Z Y and Input "Angle (coordinate plane)"
a
always have the same value.
X
Index
462
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
If the original drawing direction runs
Z vertically or diagonally, this results in

different values:
D Input ”Angle (draw dir.)” (a) is the de-
a Z
viation from the original drawing direc-
Z Y
b tion.
Input "Angle (coordinate plane)" (b) is
the angle between the new segment

X and the reference plane.
(1
18.1.6.3 Overview of the functions
Overview: Constructing a change in height

Description Variant Example (upwards Reference
movement)
Free drawing
An automatic change in height occurs if snap areas is enabled.
Basic functions
Direct construction Height and gra- Z Seg-
Direct construction is dient angle: ment 18.1.6.4,
possible if the section [PgUp] a Z page 464
DZ Y
from the current node [PgDn]
to the new node is
X
determined numerically.
The starting point is the
current node , the Relative Z
position of the cursor coordinates
plays no role. [8] DZ DY Y
configuration
configuration
X
Polar Z
coordinates a
[9] Y extensions,
X
extensions,
Indirect construction Height and gra- Z Seg-

Indirect construction is dient angle: ment 18.1.6.5,
necessary if the section [Shift]+[PgUp] a DZ page 467
Z Y
from the current node [Shift]+[PgDn]
to the new node is
Adjustments,
X
not determined numeri-
Adjustments,
cally. The position of

the new node is de- Relative Z
fined indirectly by coordinates
means of a reference [Shift]+[8] DZ Y
point. The current posi-
tion of the cursor is
DY X
the starting point of the
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
463
Introduction

r!
operation.
Polar
coordinates
DZ
[Shift]+[9] Z Y
a X
18.1.6.4 Direct construction
Direct construction with height and gradient angle

Example
Z In this operation the current draw direction

is continued. The X- and Y-position of the
new node are calculated by the pro-
gram. For the jump from the current to
D the new node the target height (Z) or
Z Y
a the height difference (DZ) and the angle
for the rise (a) are known.
Basic functions
Procedure
 Press [PgUp] for an upwards movement and/or [PgDn] for a downwards movement.
The "Collect Points” dialogue box appears. This is used to separately input the point shift
in the X, Y and Z directions.
(1)
(2)
(3)
 Enter the values for the height jump. If the difference to the current working height is
known, select Input "Up" / "Down" (1) for the input. If you know the desired target height,
select "Absolute Z position" (2) in Input . The other value is automatically recalculated.
 Enter the angle for the rise in Input ”Angle (draw dir.)” (Angle (draw direction)) (3).
Input "Angle (coordinate plane)" automatically receives the same value.
 Click OK . The segment has been continued horizontally in the current draw direction.
The rise starts from the previously current node to the new working height in the de-
fined angle. The position of the new node has been calculated. The status bar (at the bot-
tom of the screen) shows the current working height. Carry out the next operation.
When working with height and gradient angle, the draw direction of the last segment to the
current node is crucial. For more information on the "Collect Points” dialogue box, please refer
to 18.1.6.2, page 462.
Index
464
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Direct construction of a change in height with relative coordinates

Example
The distances from the current node to

Z
the new node are known as DX, DY
and DZ. In this way a direct construction is
possible using relative coordinates. The
Y angle for the rise is calculated automati-
D cally.
DY
The example shows a segment that has
been changed by a certain value in the Y
X direction and thus also the height Z.
Procedure
 Press [8]. The "by relative or polar coordinates` dialogue is displayed. This is used to
separately input the point shift in the X, Y and Z directions.
Basic functions
 Enter the values for each direction in metres (m). Note the effect of the preceding + or -
sign. The segment is displayed in the drawing and shows the effect of the current set-
tings. Each additional change is immediately visible on the screen, so that you can cor-
rect the input.
 Click OK . The segment has been drawn in the specified direction.
The status bar (at the bottom of the screen) shows the current working height. Carry out
the next operation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
465
Introduction

r!
Direct construction of a change in height with polar coordinates

Example
For the X- and Y-position of new nodes

Z
the two-dimensional length (L) and the
Z D draw direction to the two-dimensional
plane must be known as the angle (a).
Y The height (Z) can either be defined as an
L absolute value or as the difference (DZ) to
the current working height.
The example shows a segment that
a X (viewed in the plan view) runs directly in
the positive Y direction. The angle a is
therefore =90°. The segment changes the
working height Z to a certain value.
Procedure
 Press [9]. The "by relative or polar coordinates` dialogue is displayed. It is used to in-
put the distance (length of the segment), the angle (orientation of the segment) and the
height.
Basic functions
 Enter the values and observe the effect of the preceding + or - sign. You can define the
height as the difference to the current height ( Input "Relative Z-height") or you can de-
fine a target height ( Input "Absolute mounting height"). The other value is recalculated.
The segment is displayed in the drawing and shows the effect of the current settings.
Each additional change is immediately visible on the screen, so that you can correct the
input.
The status bar (at the bottom of the screen) shows the current working height. Execute
the next operation.
Index
466
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.1.6.5 Indirect construction

Indirect construction of a height change with height and gradient angle
Example
Z In this operation, X- and Y-position of the

new node are defined by the current
D cursor position. For the jump from the cur-
rent to the new node only the follow-
Y ing parameter is relevant:
Z a
• Target height (Z)
• Height difference (DZ)
• Angle for the rise (a)
X
The other values are calculated automati-
cally.
Procedure
 Move the cursor to the reference point. The point snaps in the cursor.
 Press [Shift]+[PgUp] for an upwards movement or [Shift]+[PgDn] for a downwards
Basic functions
movement. The "Collect Points” dialogue box appears. This is used to separately input
the point shift in the X, Y and Z directions.
(1)
(2)
(3)
 Enter the values. All other values depend on these and are calculated automatically.
configuration
 Click OK . The segment has been continued horizontally in the current draw direction.
configuration
The rise starts from the previously current node to the new working height in the de-
fined angle. The position of the new node has been calculated. The status bar (at the bot-
tom of the screen) shows the current working height. Carry out the next operation.
extensions,
When working with height and gradient angle, the draw direction of the last segment to the
extensions,
current node is crucial. For more information on the "Collect Points” dialogue box, please re-
fer to 18.1.6.2, page 462.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
467
Introduction

r!
Indirect construction of a change in height with relative coordinates
Example
Z The distances from the reference point

to the new node are known as DX, DY
and DZ. In this way an indirect construc-
D tion is possible using relative coordinates.
Y The example shows the cursor at an
existing point. The new node is to be
constructed on this assumption in the dis-
tances DY and DZ. This results in the
X length and orientation of the segment.
DY
Procedure
 Press [Shift]+[8]. The "by relative or polar coordinates` dialogue is displayed. This is
used to separately input the point shift in the X, Y and Z directions.
Basic functions
 Enter the values for each direction in metres (m). Observe the effect of the preceding + or
- sign. A line points from the reference point to the position of the new node while
maintaining the current settings. Each additional change is immediately visible on the
screen, so that you can correct the input.
 Click OK .
The position of the new node has been fixed and a new segment connects it to the
previously current node. The status bar (at the bottom of the screen) shows the current
working height. Execute the next operation.
Index
468
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Indirect construction of a change in height with polar coordinates
Example
Starting point for the construction of the new

Z
D node is the current cursor position .
Z
For the X and Y position of the new node
the distance (A) and the drawing direction on
Y the two-dimensional plane must be known
A
as an angle (a).
The height (Z) can either be defined as an
absolute value or as the difference (DZ) to
A X
the cursor position .
Procedure
 Press [Shift]+[9]. The "by relative or polar coordinates` dialogue is displayed. It is used to
input the distance (length of the segment), the angle (orientation of the segment) and the
height.
Basic functions
 Enter the values and observe the effect of the preceding + or - sign. You can define the
height as the difference to the current height ( Input "Relative Z-height") or you can define
a target height ( Input "Absolute mounting height"). The other value is recalculated. A line
configuration
points from the reference point to the position of the new node while maintaining the
configuration
current settings. Each additional change is immediately visible on the screen, so that you
can correct the input.
The status bar (at the bottom of the screen) shows the current working height. Execute the
next operation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
469
Introduction

r!
18.1.7 End polyline, close contour
There are several ways to end a polyline. To do

this, you can open the context menu by clicking
or select a shortcut.
Basic functions
Overview: End function, close contour

Function/shortcut Polyline result Polygon result
Ready The polyline ends at the current node . The function remains
active and you can start the next polyline.
[Enter]
Start Start
End at cursor position The polyline ends at the position of the cursor . The function
remains active and you can start the next polyline.
[Shift]+[Enter]
Start Start
Close region The polyline is closed. The current node is connected to

starting node . The function remains active and you can start
[H] the next polyline.
Start Start
Index
470
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Overview: End function, close contour

Function/shortcut Polyline result Polygon result
Close region with 90° an- The polyline is closed. A new node is constructed so that
gle there is a right angle between the last two segments. The func-
tion remains active and you can start the next polyline.
[E]
Start Start
Close region with two 90° The polyline is closed. A new node is constructed, so that
angles the segments between the current node and the start node
form two right angles. The function remains active and you can
start the next polyline.
Start Start
Basic functions
Close region at right angle The polyline is closed and a new node is constructed. Here,
to first line. the last segment is extended so that the new node is located
perpendicular above the starting point. The function remains
[V] active and you can start the next polyline.
Start Start
Abort/end/Beenden The polyline ends at the current node . The function is
configuration
ended.
configuration
[ESC]
Start Start Adjustments,

Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
471
Introduction

r!
18.1.8 Edit polyline
You can change the contours of polylines and polygons in a variety of ways. If an ob-
ject is selected, then the node is shown as a black solid square . An open square is
displayed on the centre points of the segments .
Move the cursor onto it, then the symbol turns green.
You receive a message about dynamic editing function
that you call by clicking .
On the other hand, if

you click the right
mouse button a
context menu is dis-
played that offers
more editing options.
We shall introduce the functions and contrast the starting position and the result of
the operation.
Basic functions
18.1.8.1 Dynamic editing functions
Edit node
Function Example Procedure
Shift  Click on the node and release the

node mouse button. The cursor moves the ends of
the segments that are connected to each
other via the selected nodes.
 Click on the desired position. The contour
has been changed. The operation is
concluded.
Insert  Click on the centre point of the segment

node and release the mouse button. The segment
has been divided at its centre point. The cur-
sor moves the new node.
 Click on the desired position. The node
has been fixed at the new position. You can
fix additional nodes or end the function with
[ESC].
Index
472
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.1.8.2 Editing functions in the context menu

Edit node
Function Example Explanation, procedure
Move node After calling the function, the cursor moves

the ends of the segments that are connected
to each other via the selected nodes.
 Click on the desired position. The
contour has been changed. The opera-
tion is concluded.
Position node After calling the func-

tion, a dialogue is dis-
played with the coor-
dinates of the node.
You can change the
values numerically.
Delete node After calling the function, the selected node

is removed and the remaining two adjacent
Basic functions
nodes are directly connected by a segment.
Move polyline After calling the function, the cursor moves

the entire object as a dynamic symbol. The
selected node is the reference point for re-
fixing.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
473
Introduction

r!
Edit segment
Function Example Explanation
Insert After calling the function, the selected segment

node is divided at its centre point. The cursor moves
the new node.
 Click on the desired position. The node
has been fixed.
Delete line (1) After calling the function, the selected segment
segment is removed. There are two independent objects
(1) and (2).
(2)
Shift line After calling the function, the cursor moves the
segment in selected segment and enables a parallel shift.
parallel
Basic functions
Shift polyline After calling the function, the cursor moves the
in parallel entire polyline and enables a parallel shift.
Index
474
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.2 Symmetrical shapes

This chapter describes working with regular geometric shapes such
as circles, rectangles, squares, etc. After calling a function, you can
draw the position and size of the selected shape dynamically or by
numerical input of the parameters. To do this, open the context
menu (click ).
In the dynamic method you generate the shape by a series of mouse clicks . For
example, after calling the function a circle requires two clicks : The first determines
the centre of the circle, the second determines the radius. In case of a three-
Basic functions
dimensional shape, DDS-CAD asks for the height.
(1
(2
You can then handle the object like a symbol. You can copy it, move it or edit its
properties. Depending on the type of the object or the parameters, you edit a value
numerically in the object dialogue or dynamically with the mouse:
configuration
configuration
extensions,
Move circle Adjust radius

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
475
Introduction

r!
18.2.1 Circle
The function creates a circle by defining the centre point and radius
by clicking . You can then edit the shape.
Circle
Basic functions
Application
Adjust radius
(1
(2 Move circle
 Select the "Circle" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Click on the position of the centre point (1). The cursor moves a line, which
symbolises the radius and the circle is visible. Its size is determined by the cur-
sor.
 Fix the shape by clicking (2). The shape is prepared. The function remains
active.
If you have selected a circle, you can dynamically change the position and the radius
of the shape. To do this, click on the handle on the object.
Index
476
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.2.2 Arc

The function creates an arc by defining the points (by clicking )
• (1) Beginning of the arc.
• (2) Transition point.
Arc
• (3) End of the arc.
DDS-CAD calculates the radius of the circle, the angle of the dis-
played sector (arc angle) and the opening direction of the bend as a
rotation of the shape about the Z axis.
(3)
(1
Basic functions
(2)
Application
configuration
configuration
(3
(1
(2
Stretch angle
extensions,
extensions,
Stretch radius
Move arc
 Select the "Arc" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Click on the position of the starting point (1). The cursor moves the end of a
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
dynamic line.
 Click on the position of the transition point (2). The cursor moves the end of
the arc. The cursor determines the rotation direction and the radius.
 Click on the position of the end point (3). The shape is prepared. The function
remains active.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
477
Introduction

r!
If you have selected an arc, you can dynamically change the position and the radius
of the shape as well as the positions of the transition and end point. To do this, click
on the handle on the object.
18.2.3 Cylinder
The function creates a cylinder. The geometry of the shape results
from the radius of the circle and the height. You define the centre
point of the circle and its radius by clicking . The height is queried
during the operation.
Cylinder
Basic functions
Application
Adjust radius
(1
(2 Move cylinder
 Select "Cylinder". The cursor turns into a crosshair.

symbolises the radius and the circle is visible. Its size is determined by the cur-
sor.
 Fix the radius by clicking (2). DDS-CAD queries the height.
 Enter the height and click OK . The shape is prepared. The function remains
active.
If you have selected a cylinder, you can dynamically change the position and the ra-
dius of the shape. To do this, click on the handle on the object.
Index
478
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.2.4 Cone (cone/truncated cone)

The function generates a cone or a truncated cone. Base and top
surface form concentric circles. The geometry of the shape results
from the radii of the circles and the height.
Cone You define the centre point of the two circles and their radii by click-
ing . The height is queried during the operation.

Application
configuration
(1
(2 (3 extensions,
Adjust radius
extensions,
Move cone
 Select the "Cone" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Specify the position of the centre point by clicking (1). The cursor moves a
line, which symbolises the radius. The circle of the base is visible, its size is de-
termined by the cursor.
 Fix the radius by clicking (2). DDS-CAD queries the height.
 Enter the height and click OK . The cursor determines the size of the top (3).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
479
Introduction

r!
active.
If you have selected a cone, you can dynamically change the position of the shape
as well as the radii of the base and top surface. To do this, click on the handle on the
object.
18.2.5 Rectangle
The function creates a rectangle by defining the starting point (1)
and end point (2) of the diagonals (in each case by clicking ).
DDS-CAD transfers the length and width dimensions to the shape's
object dialogue.
Rectangle
Basic functions
(1
(2)
Application
(1
(2
Shift seg-
ment
Move corner
Move rectangle
 Select the "Rectangle" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

dynamic line.
Index
480
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Click on the position of the end point (2). The shape is prepared. The function
remains active.

If you have selected a rectangle, you can dynamically change the position of the en-
tire shape. You change the size by moving the vertices and line segments. To do
this, click on the handle on the object.
18.2.6 Cuboid
The function creates a cuboid. You define the diagonal of a rectan-
gle (as base), the height is requested during the operation.
Cuboid
Basic functions
(1
configuration
configuration
(2)
extensions,
extensions,
Application
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
(1
(2
Shift seg-
ment
Move corner
Move rectangle
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
481
Introduction

r!
 Select the "Cuboid" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
dynamic line.
 Click on the position of the end point (2). DDS-CAD queries the height.
active.
If you have selected a cuboid, you can dynamically change the position of the entire
shape. You change the size by moving the vertices and line segments. To do this,
click on the handle on the object.
18.2.7 Regular polygon

The function creates an equilateral polygon. The vertices are at
equal distances on a circle. The geometry of the shape results from
the radius of the circle and the number of sides.
Basic functions
You define the centre point of the circle and its radius by clicking .
You correct the number of sides by subsequent editing of the ob-
Regular ject.
polygon
Index
482
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Application

(1 (2
Adjust radius
Move polygon
 Select "Regular polygon". The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Specify the position of the centre point by clicking (1). An equilateral triangle is
displayed. Size and rotation are determined by the cursor (2).
active.
If you have selected a regular polygon, you can dynamically change the position and
the radius of the shape. To do this, click on the handle on the object.
Basic functions
18.2.8 Pyramid
The function creates an equilateral pyramid with polygonal base.
The vertices are at equal distances on a circle. The geometry of the
shape results from the radius of the circle, the number of sides and
configuration
the height.
configuration
Pyramid The height is queried during the operation. You can correct the
number of sides by subsequently editing the object. Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
483
Introduction

r!
Application
(1 (2
Adjust radius
Basic functions
Move pyramid
 Select the "Pyramid” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Specify the position of the centre point by clicking (1). A three-sided pyramid is
 Fix the shape by clicking (2). DDS-CAD queries the height.
active.
If you have selected a pyramid, you can dynamically change the position and the ra-
18.2.9 Prism
The function creates an equilateral prism with polygonal base. The
vertices are at equal distances on a circle. The geometry of the
shape results from the radius of the circle, the number of sides and
the height.
Prism The height is queried during the operation. You can correct the
number of sides by subsequently editing the object.
Index
484
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Application
Basic functions
(1 (2
Adjust radius
Move prism
 Select "Pyramid". The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Specify the position of the centre point by clicking (1). An equilateral triangle is
configuration
configuration
active.
If you have selected a prism, you can dynamically change the position and the radius
extensions,
of the shape. To do this, click on the handle on the object.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
485
Introduction

r!
18.2.10 Truncated pyramid (polyhedron)
The function creates a polyhedron in the form of a regular truncated

pyramid. The vertices of base and top surface are evenly spaced
on concentric circles. The geometry of the shape results from the
radii of the circles, the number of sides and the height.
You define the centre point of the two circles and their radii by click-
Polyhedron ing . The height is queried during the operation. You can correct
the number of sides by subsequently editing the object.
Basic functions
Index
486
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Application

(1 (2 (3
Adjust radius
Move polyhedron
 Select the "Polyhedron" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Specify the position of the centre point by clicking (1). A three-sided pyramid is
displayed. The cursor determines the size and rotation of the base (2).
 Enter the height and click OK . The cursor determines the size of the top (3).
 Fix the shape by clicking (3). The shape is finished. The function remains ac-
Basic functions
tive.
If you have selected a truncated pyramid, you can dynamically change the position of
the shape as well as the radii of the base and top surface. To do this, click on the
handle on the object.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
487
Introduction

r!
18.2.11 Ball
The function creates a sphere by defining the centre point and ra-
dius by clicking . You can then edit the shape.
Ball
Basic functions
Application
(1
(2
Adjust radius
Move sphere
 Select the "Sphere" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

symbolises the radius. The sphere is visible, its size is determined by the cursor.
 Fix the radius by clicking (2). The shape is prepared. The function remains
active.
If you have selected a sphere, you can dynamically change the position and the ra-
Index
488
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.2.12 Ellipse

The function creates an ellipse from two concentric circles, whose
diameters define the minor and major axes. You determine the cen-
tre point and the radii of the concentric circles by clicking . You
can then edit the shape.
Ellipse
Basic functions
Application
configuration
configuration
(1 (2
(3
Stretch ellipse
extensions,
Move ellipse
extensions,
 Select the "Ellipse" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

symbolises the radius of the first circle.
Adjustments,

Adjustments,
Fix the radius 1 by clicking (2). The first circle is visible. The movement of the
cursor dynamically determines the radius of the second (hidden) circle. The el-
lipse resulting from the cursor position is visible.
 Fix the radius by clicking (3). The shape is prepared. The function remains
active.
If you have selected an ellipse, you can dynamically change the position of the shape
as well as the radii. To do this, click on the handle on the object.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
489
Introduction

r!
18.2.13 Elliptic arc

The function creates an elliptical arc. First, the ellipse is formed
from two concentric circles, whose diameters define the minor and
major axes (see 18.2.12, page 489). Then you define the start and
end points of the arc, also by clicking . DDS-CAD transfers it as
start angle and delta angle to the shape's object dialogue.
Elliptic arc
Basic functions
Application
(1 (2
(3
Stretch ellipse
(4
Move ellipse
(5
 Select the "Elliptical arc" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
symbolises the diameter of the first circle.
 Fix the radius 1 by clicking (2). The first circle is visible. The movement of the
cursor dynamically determines the radius of the second (hidden) circle. The el-
lipse resulting from the cursor position is visible.
 Fix the radius by clicking (3). The cursor moves a dynamic line (4). This speci-
fies the starting point (starting angle) of the arc.
Index
490
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Fix the starting point of the arc by clicking (4) and move the cursor. The cursor
moves the endpoint of the arc along the previously defined elliptical orbit.

 Fix the endpoint of the arc by clicking (5). The shape is prepared. The function
remains active.
If you have selected an elliptical arc, you can dynamically change the position of the
shape as well as the radii. To do this, click on the handle on the object.
18.2.14 Network
The function creates a network of horizontal and vertical lines. You
can enter the dimensions of the object (1) and the distances be-
tween the lines (2) as parameters. The network is used as a dy-
namic symbol. Use this function for labelling and assistance when
designing.
Net-
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
configuration
configuration
(1)
(2)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
491
Introduction

r!
18.3 Working with auxiliary geometries
You can construct helper lines, points and circles, for example to determine an inter-
section or to form a reference point. Auxiliary geometries are visible on the screen,
but they will not be printed. Enable auxiliary geometries by
• Call from the toolbox or by the activated point
• Keyboard shortcuts
• Active circle/arc
• Active line
18.3.1 Auxiliary geometry on an active point

18.3.1.1 Call from the toolbox
 Select the "View" menu  Menu item "Help Geometry". The
function is active. The cursor appears as crosshairs. The mes-
sage line shows notes on calling the individual auxiliary ge-
ometries.
 Click . A menu is displayed with the individual tools.
Basic functions
 Select the function required from the menu. To finish working with help geome-
try, press [Esc].
Index
492
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.3.1.2 Application by activated point

 Select the point (vertex, intersection, endpoint). Press and hold [Shift] and move
the cursor to the point. If the cursor gets close to the point, the cursor is snapped
in. The point is indicated by an orange circle:
 Click . A menu is displayed with all the help geometry functions that are useful
for an active point (see 18.3.1.1, page 492) as above, when accessing from tool-
box).
 Select the function required from the menu. The function is executed and then
ended.
Basic functions
18.3.1.3 Help geometry – points
Function/menu item Key Meaning

Point(s)=? between [Shift]+[6] The function divides the section between the
cursor pos. + next cursor position and another point into sub-
point sections of equal length.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
493
Introduction

r!
18.3.1.4 Help geometry – lines

Vertical help line [Shift]+[V] The function places a vertical auxiliary line through
the cursor position.
Horizontal help line [Shift]+[H] The function places a horizontal auxiliary line
through the cursor position.
Line through the cur- [Shift]+[1] The function places a helper line through the cur-
sor position at the an- sor position and asks for the inclination angle.
gle?
Basic functions
Line through the cur- [Shift]+[3] The function places a helper line from the cursor to
sor position to the cir- the selected circle. Select the circle by clicking .
cle
Line between cursor [Shift]+[2] The function places a helper line through the cur-
position + next point sor position and another point. Select the point by
clicking .
Index
494
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.3.1.5 Help geometries - circles

Circle through cursor [Shift]+[7] The function draws a circle through the cursor po-
position + next 2 sition and two other points. Select the points by
points clicking
Circle through cursor [Shift]+[5] The function draws a circle through the cursor po-
position + next point sition and one other point. Determine the point by
with r=? clicking . The radius of the circle is then queried.
Circle through cursor [Shift]+[4] The function draws a circle around the cursor posi-
position with radius tion. You can enter the radius or define by clicking
Basic functions
query/ dyn. radius .
Circle with r=? At limit- [Shift]+[3] The function place a circle tangent to the selected
ing geometry geometric shapes, e.g. between intersecting lines.
The radius is queried. Thereafter, the lines have to
be determined by clicking . Finally, you also de-
fine the position by clicking (In this example
there are four possible positions.)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
495
Introduction

r!
18.3.2 Help geometry on active circle/arc

18.3.2.1 Call
 Select the circle/arc. To do this press [Ctrl] and move the cursor to the line or
the circle/arc. If the cursor gets close to the circle/arc, these are highlighted or-
ange:
 Click . A menu is displayed with the available functions

Basic functions
ended.
18.3.2.2 Overview

Completed selected [Ctrl]+[2] The function completes the active arc to a full circle
arc as circle without prompting.
Line through circle [Ctrl]+[1] After calling the function the cursor moves a dy-
centre point namic line. It begins in the centre point of the active
circle. Clicking fixes the line.
Index
496
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Parallel circle with dy- [Ctrl]+[3] The function creates a circle that is concentric to the
namic radius active circle. You can define the radius by clicking
or enter it numerically.
Tangent to the next [Ctrl]+[6] The function places a line tangent from the active
selected circle circle to the next selected circle. Select the second
circle by clicking .
Circle with r=? at limit- page 18.3.1.5

ing geometry
18.3.3 Help geometry on active line
Basic functions
18.3.3.1 Call
 Select the line. To do this press [Ctrl] and move the cursor to the line. If the
cursor gets close to the line, this is highlighted orange:
configuration
configuration
extensions,
extensions,
Adjustments,
ended.
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
497
Introduction

r!
18.3.3.2 Overview

Extend selected line [Ctrl]+[2] The active line is used as a reference for a
helper line. The helper line is then identical to
the active line.
Dynamic [Ctrl]+[1] The function is the perpendicular to the active

perpendicular line line. The position needs to be determined by
clicking .
Repeat last geometry [Ctrl]+[7] The last operation is applied to the active line
again.
Basic functions
Dynamic parallel line [Ctrl]+[3] The function places a parallel to the active
line. The position needs to be determined by
clicking .
Parallel help lines The function creates parallel helper lines with
equal distances between the active line and
the next point.
After calling the function the cursor moves a

dynamic line. Define the next point by clicking
. The distance between the lines is queried.
Parallel line at [Ctrl]+[4] The function places a parallel at a defined dis-

distance =? tance to the active line. The distance must be
entered and the side determined by clicking
.
Index
498
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Divide selected line [Ctrl]+[5] The function splits the active line into an pre-
into segments determined number of sub-sections of equal
length.
Circle with r=? at limit- page 18.3.1.5

ing geometry
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD
499
Introduction

r!
18.3.4 Delete help geometry

18.3.4.1 Delete all auxiliary geometries

 Select "Delete help geometry" function in the toolbox. All help
geometries are removed from the drawing.
18.3.4.2 Delete individual help geometry

 Select the line, circle or arc. To do this press [Ctrl] and move the cursor to the
Basic functions
help geometry. If the cursor gets close to the geometry, this is highlighted or-
ange:
 Select "Delete selected help geometry".

Index
500
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.4 Working with text and labels

18.4.1 Symbol text on objects, pipelines and in rooms
Objects, pipelines and rooms contain information that can be applied as a configur-
able text symbol (see 17.1.1, page 408). Each of these categories is considered and
configured separately. DDS-CAD includes prepared standards, but you can change
and expand these as desired. The following example shows the settings of the sym-
bol text to a washbasin with the associated visual result in the model:
For a washbasin, the symbol text configuration "Washbasin (item name+mounting

height)" (1) has been selected. Looking at the details in the configuration (2) shows
the current settings.
(1)
(2) (4)
Basic functions
(5)
(3)
configuration
All variables are displayed with the label "x" (3) in the symbol text. Their final appear-
Adjustments,
ance can be complemented by pre-text and attachment, and be adjusted further (for
more information please refer to 18.4.1.3, page 504). The entire text can be framed
(4) and given a reference line (5) to the object. The information and values displayed
originate from the object or the item used.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
501
Introduction

r!
18.4.1.2 Propose symbol texts
A symbol text is proposed in different ways depending on the task and category:
• Activate symbol text in the object (see below)
• Propose symbol text dynamically an object or pipeline (see below)
• Insert room text (see 4.3.6, page 65)
Activate symbol text in the object

Each object contains the “Marker” tab in the object dialogue, where you can make all
settings described above. The status of "Activate position marker” (1) decides the
general visibility of the symbol text. The chosen configuration (2) determines the
information displayed:
 Double click on the object. The ob-
ject dialogue is displayed.
(1)
 Open “Marker” tab.
(2)
 Enable "Activate position marker”
(1) and correct all the other settings.
 Click OK . The symbol text is visible
Basic functions
in the model. You may need to adjust

the position (see 18.4.4, page 511).
Propose symbol text dynamically an object or pipeline

By using the “Part Text” function you can label objects and pipelines with a dynamic
text symbol and thereby determine the position of the text directly. The description
uses the example of a washbasin. It is assumed that all washbasins in the model
should be labelled with a symbol text:
 Select an object of the component group (in this case any washbasin).
Index
502
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

Symbol text
 Select the “Part Text” function. The

"Part text” dialogue box is displayed.
All available text configurations for
washbasins are listed.
 Correct all settings and click OK .
The cursor moves a movable text
symbol without information.
 Move the text symbol to a

washbasin. The symbol changes its
contents. It detects the object and
Basic functions
displays the name and parameters
of the washbasin.
 Move the text symbol to the desired position.

 Fix it by clicking . The function remains active. You can label other
configuration
washbasins.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index configuration
extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
503
Introduction

r!
18.4.1.3 Setting the text properties (font, font size, colour)
You can change the text properties of the symbol text, either for a single object or all
objects of the same component group. The decisive factor here is the status of "Al-
low properties per text” (1)
(3)
Basic functions
(2) (1)
By default, the function is not active. Therefore a configuration (2) of the text proper-
ties (3) applies to all objects of the same component group. For example, all
washbasins are affected by the change, but toilets or showers are not.
If "Allow properties per text” (1) is active, you can change the text properties for
each individual object in the respective component group.
Index
504
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.4.1.4 Creating your own text configuration

At the beginning of this chapter, we mentioned that you can create, adjust and save
additional text configurations for every type of object, pipeline or room. This operation
consists of three steps:
1. Create text configuration
2. Select and arrange blocks for display
3. Configure block
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
Basic functions
(5)
(6)
(7)
1. Create text configuration configuration

configuration
 Open the “Part Text” dialogue box and select an existing configuration as a tem-
extensions,
plate.
extensions,
 Click Copy (1). This opens the "New name" (2) dialogue.
 Give the new configuration an appropriate name and click OK . The dialogue
box is closed. The new configuration is listed.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
505
Introduction

r!
2. Select and arrange blocks for display
Every object, every pipeline and every room has several variables, the values of
which can be read by DDS-CAD and reproduced in the symbol text. Variables with
the sign "x" as in the example (5) are imported as a text block. To enable or disable a
variable as a text block:
 Double click on the variable. The status is changed.
The order of the variables in the table determines the arrangement of the text blocks
in the symbol text. To correct the position of the text block in the symbol text:
 Select the variable.
 Click Up or Down (6). The variable changes its position in the table by one
step with every click. You can check the result in the preview.
3. Configure block
The display of a variable in the text block must often be supplemented by additional
characters in the pre-text or in the post-text in order to be able to appear as under-
standable information. Additional adjustments are necessary in order to limit the text
length. Displaying the height of the object shall be used as an example:
(8) (9)
Basic functions
(13 (14
(10) (11)
• The status of "New line” (8) determines whether the block starts a new line
(checked) or attaches to the end of the previous line (unchecked).
• With "left" or "right" (9) you define the arrangement of the text in the row
(left/right justified).
• You can use any character or string of characters as pre-text (10) or post-text
(11).
• Input "Width" (13) and "Decimal" (14) are only displayed in the case of a nu-
meric variable. With Input "Width" you define the minimum width as number of
characters that will take the displayed value. Input "Decimal" determines the
number of decimal places displayed.
• In the case of an alphanumeric variable (e.g. item) the fields (13) and (14) are
named as "Min Width" and " Max Width". Adjust the number of characters.
Index
506
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.4.2 Position marker (on objects)

18.4.2.1 Settings and components of the position marker
The "PositionMarker” function allows the identification of objects by a consecutive

number (position number). This function is often used in electrical engineering in par-
ticular. You can design your own "free numbering" (1) or choose from different pre-
configured types (2) (see 18.4.2.3, page 509).
Symbol numbering
(4)
(1)
(2)
(5)
Basic functions
(3)
configuration
configuration
The position marker is designed for continuous application. At the same time, for
some systems it is necessary to limit the number of components in a line or a group.
For example, a maximum of 64 EIB/KNX components are permitted in one line. For
monitoring, you can enter the maximum number in Input "Open dialogue after num-
ber” (3). If you have placed the specified number of labels in the model, DDS-CAD
opens the dialogue automatically. By adapting the pre-text, you can define a new
extensions,
line.
extensions,
The settings for the frame (4) and reference line (5) have the same meaning as the
symbol text (see 18.4.1.1, page 501).
Pre-text and post-text

Adjustments,
You can use any character or string of characters as pre-text or post-text.

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
507
Introduction

r!
Separator
Pre-text and number or number and post-text can be separated or not separated.
Make your selection in "Separators":
Selection Effect in the model

None No separation between number and pre-text/post-text
New line Line break between number and pre-text/post-text
Period, comma, Selected character between number and pre-text/post-
etc. text
Number
The number can be either a digit, a letter or a series of letters. Through continued
use, the subsequent numbers are assigned automatically:
Number entry Subsequent numbers

1 … 2; 3; 4 etc.
a … b; c; d etc.
A … B; C; D etc.
Basic functions
AA … AB; AC; AD etc.
18.4.2.2 Propose position marker
As with the symbol text, the position marker in the object can be applied enabled or
dynamically to the objects (cf. 18.4.1.2, page 502). The dynamic proposal is dis-
played as the more appropriate option:
 Select the "PositionMarker” function. The dialogue box (see above) appears.
 Correct all settings and click OK . The cursor moves the label as a movable
symbol. It shows the set number.
 Move the label to an object. The object is selected. This indicates that this num-
ber belongs to the selected object.
 Move the label to the desired position and fix it by clicking . The function re-
mains active and already displays the next number. You can assign them to the
next object.
Index
508
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.4.2.3 Standardized types of position marker

In the "PositionMarker” dialogue box there are preconfigured types for labelling elec-
trical engineering system parts. Some settings are fixed, they should not be changed.
EIB/KNX (region/line/member)
When you call the type, you are given suggestions for pre-text, num-
ber, and the number of labels. However, these can be changed. The
first two digits (region and line) are defined as pre-text. They remain
unchanged during application.
The last digit (member) corresponds to the number and is incre-
mented. Frame and reference line can also be activated. The number
of labels until the dialogue box is reopened is suggested with 64 and
can be changed.
Emergency lighting
The frame is defined as a circle with centre line. The top figure is
suggested in the pre-text and can be adjusted. It remains unchanged
during application.
The bottom figure corresponds to the number and is incremented.
Basic functions
The dialogue box is displayed again after the tenth label. Pre-text and
number contain the "New line" separator. The number of labels until
the dialogue box is reopened is suggested with 10 and can be
changed.
Type 1 fire alarm / Type 2 fire alarm

The frame is defined as a circle with centre line. The top figure is
suggested in the pre-text and can be adjusted. It remains unchanged
during application.
The bottom figure corresponds to the number and is incremented.
configuration
The dialogue box is displayed again after the tenth label. Pre-text and
configuration
number contain the "NNew line” separator. Types 1 and 2 differ in the
suggested number of labels until the dialogue is re-opened (type 1 =
12 / Type 2 = 20).
Lightning protection: Numbering section points/terminals

The frame is defined as a fixed circle. You can set the
extensions,
number which is incremented continuously without

extensions,
limit.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
509
Introduction

r!
18.4.3 Free text
To enter free text select the "Text" function in the tool-

bar.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
Enter the text in the input field (1). Text blocks (2) are stored in the UserText.txt file
as a template. You can edit the file and write new text blocks.
To set a font, choose "Style” (3). This selection accesses an attribute mapping,
in which the various styles are defined. DDS-CAD uses this as a template.
Index
510
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.4.4 Move text and labels

It is often necessary to correct the position of a text or a label. The example of a
symbol with frame and reference line shall be used to show all the various possibili-
ties.
(3) (2) (1)  Select the symbol text by clicking . The text
appears as a selected object with the three
handles (1), (2) and (3). You can click a han-
dle and make the desired change in position.
Handle (1) only moves the text box. The tip of the
reference line remains directed to the old posi-
tion.
Basic functions
Handle (2) move the text box and reference line
together
Handle (3) only moves the tip of the reference

line. The text box remains at the old position.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
511
Introduction

r!
18.5 Working with the dimension type

This chapter describes the options for the dimension function DDS-CAD. Here the
necessary concepts are introduced and several examples are shown. Then the gen-
eral application of the function is described. The last section describes the editing
options and settings of a dimension type.
18.5.1 Terms and general connections

The dimension type (1) is based on a polyline, which connects all dimension-relevant
points in a chain. Is in this context, we often refer to the dimensional chain (2) and the
dimension points (3).
The dimensional chain

(2) is normally hidden.
(1)
However, it is visible
when you select the
associated dimension
type by clicking .
(2) You can move or de-
Basic functions
lete existing dimension

points or insert new
ones.
(3)
A single dimension
Main dimension
type can be executed
in a maximum of two
planes. The main di-
mension line shows
the sum of all sections

of a dimensional
chain, the sub-
dimension line shows
Sub-dimension Measure Selection Dimension the length of a section.
Measures can be adjusted in the layout, the application of units of measurement and
rounding. A manual correction of content is not possible. The length of the dimension
helper lines results from the combination of different parameters and the selection
(between the sections of a dimensional chain) can be altered in terms of size and
symbol.
Index
512
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
You can specify different dimension types. In this way, you determine what type of

dimension line (main/sub) should appear on which side of a dimensional chain – top,
bottom, left or right. The graphic shows an example for each configuration.
Top (X distance)
Right (Y distance)
Left (Y distance)
Basic functions
Y
X
Bottom (X distance)
For the upper dimension type, main and sub dimension lines were selected. The di-
mension types at the bottom and right side show only the main dimension line, the
left dimension type only shows the sub-dimension line. You can also see that with the
upper and lower dimension types, the X distances between the dimension points are
evaluated. The left and right dimension types consequently consider the Y distances.
The dimension type in the top
configuration
example behaves at right angles
configuration
to the dimensioned object. The
example (left) shows a situation
in which a diagonal body edge
should be dimensioned. To do
this, it was necessary to rotate
the dimension type (see 18.5.3,
extensions,
page 515).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
513
Introduction

r!
18.5.2 General application
The following example describes

the structure of a right-angled
dimension above the body edge.
It is assumed that the dimension
chain is to be defined along visi-
ble reference points (e.g. cor-
ners of the building).
Application
Basic functions
Points captu-
Dimensionin
 Activate snap points.

 Select the "Points to be Dimensioned” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
The message line shows the following prompt: "Localize the first point of dimen-
sions...”..
 Move the cursor to the first reference point. The point captures the cursor and
holds it tight. The properties of the point are displayed.
 Click . The cursor moves a dynamic line. The message line shows the follow-
ing message: "Localize the next point - confirm with [Enter], Cancel with [Esc].
 Click through all the reference points that should be included in the dimensional
chain.
 Press [Enter]. The dimension type dialogue box is displayed (see 18.5.4,
page 517).
Index
514
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Set the properties of the dimen-
sional chain – in particular the

dimension type (1).
 Click OK . The dimension
chain is displayed in the model.
It can be supplemented and
modified.
(1)
18.5.3 Oblique dimension type
Basic functions
The dimension type can be adjusted to any angle. The dimension figures are cor-
rected automatically.
Example situation
An oblique body edge has been
dimensioned and the dimension
lines are horizontal in the model.
However, they are to be rotated
parallel to the edge of the body.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD
515
Introduction

r!
Application
 Double click on the dimensions type. The object dialogue is displayed.

 Enable "Adjust angle with line A-B" and click OK . The dimension appears in
purple. The reference line A-B defines the inclination of the dimension:
Basic functions
 Select the reference line. You

can move the start and end
nodes.
 Correct the position. The dimen-

sion fits its position.
 Call the object dialogue again
and disable "Set angle with
line A-B". The reference line is
hidden and the dimension is
again displayed in its default
colour.
Index
516
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
18.5.4 The properties of the dimension type

The properties of a dimension type are managed from an object dialogue. In the "Di-
mensioning Points” tab, define the outer shape of a dimension, in the "Parameters"
tab, define the unit of measurement and rounding.
18.5.4.1 "Dimensioning Points” tab
The "Dimensioning Points” tab is where you can alter the dimension type (1) and the
layout (2).
The text size is entered in decimeters (dm). For the selection, you can select a type
and alter its size by a factor. The value "1" is the default size. A factor < 1 reduces
the selection, a factor > 1 results in an enlargement.
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD
517
Introduction
Erro General editing functions

r!
19 General editing functions
19.1 Copy, delete, move and edit objects

To copy, delete or move an object, or to edit its properties, it must first be selected. In
addition, most editing functions can be applied to several objects at the same time –
if these have been selected beforehand. For this reason, there are various functions
available that allow you to select individual or multiple objects.
In this context, it may happen that you have accidentally selected one or more ob-
jects. To remove them from the following editing operation (e.g. deleting) you can de-
select individual objects.
Selected objects are shown in blue and with a dashed line. Each selected object has
one or more handles, where you take hold of the objects and place them as dynamic
symbols.
Basic functions
You can call other editing functions from the context menu (click ) or via a keyboard
shortcut.
The following pages provide overviews for the topics:

• Select object
• Remove selections
• Editing functions for selected objects
Index
518
DDS-CAD
Introduction
General editing functions Erro
r!
19.1.2 Select objects for editing

Overview: Select object
Before the opera- No object is selected ...

tion: Object is selected ...
After the operation:

Select single object Click on an object. The object is
selected, all other selections are re-
moved.
Collect individual objects Keep [Ctrl] pressed and click on

[Ctrl]+ the desired objects one after the
other. The objects are selected.
Basic functions
All objects in the model Press [Ctrl]+[A]. All objects in the
[Ctrl]+[A] model are selected.
All objects that are affected Keep pressed and move down
by a region and right. The cursor draws a rectan-
gle (red, dashed). All objects affected
by the region are selected.
configuration
All objects that fully enclosed Keep pressed and move up and
configuration
by a region right. The cursor draws a rectangle
(red, solid line). All objects within the
region are selected.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
519
Introduction

r!
19.1.3 Remove selections
Overview: Remove selection
Before the opera- ... Object is selected

tion: ... No object is selected
After the operation:
Function/shortcut Example Remark/Reference

For individual objects Keep [Ctrl] pressed and click on
[Ctrl]+ a selected object. The selection of
the object is removed.
For all objects in the model Click once in the free workspace.
All selections are removed.
For all objects that are Keep pressed and move down
Basic functions
touched by a region and left. The cursor draws a rectan-

gle (green, dashed). The selection is
removed for all objects touched by
the region.
For all objects that are fully Keep pressed and move up and
enclosed by a region left. The cursor draws a rectangle
(green, solid line). The selection is
removed for all objects that are fully
enclosed by the region.
Index
520
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
19.1.4 Editing functions for selected objects

Overview: Editing functions for selected objects
Function Description
Copy The function writes the selected objects to the Windows clip-
[Ctrl]+[C] board. Reference is the mounting height of the last placed
object. Use [Ctrl]+[V] to insert this object into the model
once more.
Copy with free reference The function expects the definition of the reference point
point (click ) and writes the selected objects to the Windows
clipboard. Use [Ctrl]+[V] to insert this object into the model
once more.
The objects stored in the Windows clipboard appear at the

Paste [Ctrl]+[V] cursor as a dynamic symbol. They can be placed using the
symbol functions.
Delete [Del] The selected objects are deleted from the model.
Basic functions
The selected objects are converted into dynamic symbols.
Move [Ctrl]+[M] They can be moved with the cursor and placed again with
the assistance of the symbol functions. Reference is the
mounting height of the last placed object.
Move with free reference The selected objects are converted into dynamic symbols.
point They can be moved with the cursor and placed again with
the assistance of the symbol functions. The function expects
the definition of the reference point (click ).
Absolute Z-axis The function asks for the new height for the selected objects.
[Home] Enter the value in metres (m) and observe the effect of the
configuration
preceding + or - sign.
configuration
From the last point: The function asks for a difference, with which the selected
right/left/up/down objects are be moved in the direction indicated. Enter the
[]/[]/[]/[] value in metres (m) without a preceding + or - sign.
From the last point: The function asks for the difference to change the height.
extensions,
Z-axis positive / negative Enter the value in metres (m) without a preceding + or - sign.
extensions,
[PgUp] / [PgDn]
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
521
Introduction

r!
Overview: Editing functions for selected objects
Function Description
From the last point: The function asks for the differences by which the selected
According to relative coor- objects are moved in the X, Y and Z direction. Enter the val-
ues in metres (m) and observe the effect of the preceding +
dinates [8] or - sign.
From the last point: The function asks for the direction (as an angle) and distance
According to polar coordi- for the shift of the selected objects.
nates [9]
Rotate object freely The object is rotated about its mounting point with the cursor.
Click to fix it.
Zoom to selected object The zoom range is changed so that all selected objects are
[Shift]+[Z] fully visible on the screen.
Basic functions
Filter selected type from The function expects the definition of an area by which all
the range objects of the selected type (e.g. all openings) should be fil-
tered. Note the movement directions:
Properties The function opens the object dialogue.

[Alt]+[Enter]
Open item documentation The function opens the document that is connected to the
item of the selected object.
Index
522
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
19.2 Undo/restore operation

DDS-CAD stores all operations in a drawing from
the moment it is opened and lists them in the
docking window under the "Rück-
Undo gängig/Wiederherstellen" (Undo/restore) tab (1).
(2) This allows you to undo both individual and multi-
ple operations in one step .
(1)
Undo individual operation
 Select the "Undo Last Function” function (2).
The most recent operation (in this case 11 =
Delete) is retracted. The deleted object will
reappear in the drawing.
Undo several operations in one step
Basic functions
 Select the first operation to be undone in the change list by clicking (in this
case, row 8). All underlying entries are also marked. A single-line context menu
is displayed.
 Select "Undo marked action(s)”.
configuration
A separator line is inserted above the selected row. The status appears on the
configuration
screen up to the last operation above the separating line (in this case, row 7).
 Check the status. Have you set the handle at the correct point?
 Yes: Continue working as normal. The rows below the separating line are re-
jected.
No, I have to return: Repeat the procedure further up in the list.
extensions,
No, I've gone too far: See "Wiederherstellen der markierten Zeilen" (Restoring
extensions,
the selected rows).
Restoring the selected rows

If you have chosen too
many operations you can
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
move the line further

down in the list.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
523
Introduction

r!
 Click on a row below the separator line. The selected row (and all rows above
the separator line) are selected. A single-line context menu is displayed.
 Select "Redo marked action(s)”. The separator line is shifted down by the num-
ber of selected rows. The status appears on the screen up to the last operation
above the separating line.
 Check the status. Have you set the handle at the correct point?
 Yes: Continue working as normal. The rows below the separating line are re-
jected.
No, I have to return: See "Several operations in one step”
No, I've gone too far: Repeat the procedure further down in the list.
19.3 The "Find and Edit Objects” function

19.3.1 Introduction and application
The function filters objects with the same properties from the model and allows them
to be editing together in one step. In this way you can filter e.g. all windows with a
certain sill height and then edit their settings or delete these objects.
Basic functions
Properties of
multiple objects
(1)
(2)
Edit settings of the filtered objects

 Filter the desired objects (see below).
 Click Change (1). The object dialogue is displayed.
 Edit the settings in the object dialogue and click OK .
 Click Close (2). The objects have been changed, the function is ended.
Index
524
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Delete filtered objects:

 Filter the desired objects (see below).
 Click Close (2). The filtered objects remain selected.
 Press [Del].
The possibilities of the function are extremely varied, the key step is filtering the ob-
jects to be edited. You can use two strategies:
• Filter by template of a selected object (see 19.3.2, page 525)
• Manually define the properties of the search filter (see 19.3.3, page 526)
19.3.2 Filter by template of a reference object

With this method, you
first select a reference
(4) object in the model.
Then start the function
(3) and let the program
search the other objects
Basic functions
in the model. The
(5) method can be exe-
(1) (6) cuted quickly, but offers
fewer options.
 Add same in model (4) filters
all objects that belong to the same component group as the reference object (e.g. all
windows, all electrical sockets or all washbasins). Special features, like item used or
the installation height are not considered.
Add equal objects

(5) filters all objects that use the same item as the reference object and
configuration
that have bee installed at the same height.
configuration
 Add same articles (6) filters all objects that use the same item as the reference object.
Other properties (e.g. height) are not considered.
Application
extensions,
 Select the reference object (e.g. a window) by clicking .

extensions,
 Select the "Find and Edit Objects” function. The dialogue box is displayed. The
table contains a single entry (3).
 Select a filter function (4), (5) or (6). All suitable objects are filtered and listed in
the table. These objects are selected in the model.
Adjustments,

Adjustments,
Edit the objects in the manner required.

Index
Index
DDS-CAD
525
Introduction

r!
19.3.3 Manually define properties of the search filter
In this method, you

(7) define a search filter
by manually specify-
ing characteristic pa-
(8) rameters. This ver-
sion offers a wider
range of search crite-
ria than is possible
when using a refer-
(11 ence object. You can
(10 basically use any
setting as a search
(9) criterion.
Application
 Select the "Find and Edit Objects” function. The dialogue box is displayed. There
Basic functions
are no entries in the table.

 Select the required object group (7).
 Click Properties (8). The object dialogue of the selected object group is displayed.
It is used as an input form for the search filter. The input fields are blank.
 Define all parameters that are to apply as search criteria. Search criteria can be
numeric values of certain dimensions (9), the item (10) and the setting of the pen
and layer inclusion (11).
 Click OK . All suitable objects are filtered and listed in the table. These objects
are selected in the model.
 Edit the objects in the manner required.
19.4 The "Move Area”

(Move region) function
The "Move Area” function considers all objects and coordinates (e.g. the end of a
line) within a determined region. These are shifted by the same distance in the same
direction. The relationships between shifted and unshifted coordinates are retained
(i.e. lines may be extended or shortened).
Index
526
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

You have drawn a floor plan. Now the vertical wall shown in black is to be moved to
the left. The doors 1 and 2 are to be included in this operation.
Procedure
 Select the "Move Area” function in the toolbox. The cursor
turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following
prompt: "Enter point no 1 for the demarcation rectangle”.
 Determine the movement area with two clicks :
Basic functions
The message line shows the
"[Shift]+[Spacebar] to add new
area or enter a reference point
for the move” prompt.
[Shift+Spacebar]=select addi-
tional region
 If another region is to be defined: Press [Shift]+[Spacebar]. You can define

another region (as pictured above).
configuration
configuration
 If the shift is to be performed: Click on the reference point. The cursor moves
a dynamic line. The message line shows the following prompt: "Enter a point for
the move distance”
For free movement (by the mouse):


extensions,
Click on the new position of the reference point. The shift is executed, the
extensions,
query "Keep changes in drawing?” is displayed.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
527
Introduction

r!
To shift in a certain direction, by a certain amount
 Press []/[]/[]/[]. A dialogue box is displayed where you can enter the
distance.
 Enter the value in metres (m) and click OK . The shift is executed, the query
"Keep changes in drawing?” is displayed.
Basic functions
Index
528
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Working with the DWG/DXF editor Erro
r!
20 Working in the DWG/DXF Editor

Editing the source file is not a task that has to be performed in one step at a time. It
may be required at various times when encountering different situations. For exam-
ple, editing a freshly imported DWG/DXF file is the classical case, but this need can
also arise later. A step-by-step adjustment is of course possible, and often recom-
mended. Therefore, you can switch between the action areas "DDS Model" and
"DWG/DXF Editor" at any time.
20.1 The "DWG/DXF Editor" action area

To be able to edit the contents of a DWG/DXF file, you must
enter the "DWG/DXF Editor" action area. Here you have
access to the individual drawing objects.
Warning!
The "Undo" function is not available in the DWG/DXF
editor. For example, a deleted object cannot be restored.
Basic functions
In most cases – in the case of editing the floor plan – you start the DWG/DXF Editor
via the DDS model (see 20.1.1, page 529). However, if you want to isolate individual
symbols from the DWG/DXF file (for further use in the DDS model), start the Editor at
the program level (see 20.1.2, page 530).
20.1.1 On editing the floor plan: Starting from the DDS model
configuration
Import and model Admin
Adjustments,extensions, configuration
extensions,

Adjustments,
Select the "Import- and Model Admin” function. The "Inserted file administrator”
dialogue box appears. This lists all imported objects in the model.
 Select the import object by clicking . The context menu is displayed.
 Select the "Open in new window” function. The DWG/DXF Editor is opened in a
new window. You have access to the contents of the DWG/DXF file.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
529
Introduction
Erro Working with the DWG/DXF editor

r!
20.1.2 To transfer a symbol: Starting from the program level
Start the DWG/DXF Editor from the program level if you only want to edit or save a
DWG/DXF file, or export it to other formats. To do this, first close the current project
and all drawings:
Open drawings list
(1)
Basic functions
 Open the Project Menu. The "Project Menu” dialogue box appears.
 Click Close (1). The program asks whether the changes in the current project
should be saved. Afterwards the project and all open drawings are closed. You
are taken to the program level.
Then start the DWG/DXF Editor in the "File" menu.

Open the DWG/DXF file and you can start editing.
Index
530
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
20.2 Strategies for editing DWG/DXF files

20.2.1 Isolate detail of interest
The amount of work in the DWG/DXF Editor depends on the quality of the data and
the aim of the operation. In many cases, the idea is to tidy up the drawing to the ex-
tent that the result can be used for further work. Two situations can be mentioned as
examples:
Isolate floor plan

You may occasionally receive drawings, in which individual
fragments are outside the floor plan. The result is that the floor
plan is displayed as a point on the screen after using the "Zoom
all" function. You can rectify this effect with the following opera-
tion.
Isolate single symbol

You can transfer symbols from a DXF/DWG file and use them in
the DDS model. This is necessary for example when editing revi-
sion designs, if the symbols present in the DWG file are to be
Basic functions
used (see 22.3, page 588).
By combining different functions, you can reduce the effort re-

quired.
Insulate floor plan
configuration
Place zoom at the Zoom Extent of Drawing
configuration
region of interest
Select objects outside of

the zoom range extensions,
Delete selected objects

extensions,
Place zoom to region of interest


Adjustments,
Select the "Zoom Extent of Drawing” function. The fragments outside of the floor
Adjustments,
plan are ignored. The floor plan fills the screen completely.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
531
Introduction

r!
Select objects outside of the zoom range
An object must be selected before it can be deleted. To do this, the general selection
functions are available (see 19.1, page 518). Additionally, the "Edit” menu contains
two other selection functions. These can be used to isolate a sub-area (e.g. a single
symbol, part of floor plan or a legend) from the drawing. Both functions monitor the
zoom area and detect objects outside of this area.
(1) Example:
The black square (1) symbolises an object or part of an area to
(2) be isolated. The light grey rectangle (2) represents the active
zoom range (screen view).
To select objects lying outside the area, select these functions from the "Edit” menu:
 "...completely outside of the zoom area". Only objects completely outside of the
zoom area are selected. Objects that are partially visible are not selected and
therefore not deleted.
Basic functions
 "...partially outside of the zoom area". All objects that are wholly or partly outside
of the zoom area are selected. Objects that are fully visible are not selected and
therefore not deleted.
Index
532
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
20.2.2 Adjust layer structures to the DDS model

The layer structure of an imported DWG/DXF file will always differ from the DDS
layer structure. It may be that the imported file contains several layers that you want
to merge with layers in DDS-CAD. The layer structure of the DWG/DXF file should
then be transferred into the layer structure of DDS-CAD.
Procedure
 Select "Format" menu  "Assign DWG layers to a DDS layer" function. The "As-
sign DWG layers to a DDS layer" dialogue box is displayed.
Basic functions
 Select the layer of the DWG/DXF file that you want to assign to a DDS layer.
 Click Map . The "Select layer" dialogue box is displayed.
(1)
(2)
 Select the DDS layer (1) to which you want to assign the DWG/DXF layer and configuration
configuration
click OK (2). The assignment is shown.
extensions,
 Click OK . The settings are saved and apply for the entire project.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD
533
Introduction

r!
20.2.3 Edit file properties
In different situations, it may be necessary to edit the basic settings in the DWG/DXF
file. The following two cases occur repeatedly:
The object to be edited is part of a block

If an object (1) is part of a block, it cannot be selected individually. The selection is
instead for the entire block (2). The blocks in the drawing must first be broken up in
order to obtain access to the object (3).
(1) (2) (3)
The scale of DWG/DXF file is be adapted to the DDS model

In some cases, the adjustment of the scale by a scaling factor in the DDS model is
not successful (see 3.3.2, page 41). Using the file properties, you can re-define the
basic settings for the unit of length and get around the problem in this way.
Basic functions
Application
Properties of the active file/drawing
You can adjust the scale of the DWG/DXF

file to the DDS model by adjusting the

drawing unit.
Enable "Explode INSERTs" to receive

access to individual elements
(components of blocks).
Index
534
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
20.2.4 Define the insertion point (Origo) – Shift zero point

With the "Insertion point (Origo) of the file" function you specify the zero point of the
DWG/DXF file to a defined position, and thus correct the insertion point of the import
object (see 17.1.3, page 411). You can use this operation, for example, to produce
the positionally correct arrangement of the storeys in the DDS model (see 3.3.3,
page 44).
Insert point (Origo) of the file...
Basic functions
Use
 Select the insertion point (Origo) of the file. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Press [Shift] and move the cursor to the desired position of the insertion point.
The point captures the cursor and holds it tight. The character of the point and its
coordinates are displayed.
configuration
 Click . The "Insertion point (Origo) of the file" dialogue box is displayed. This
configuration
shows the displacement of the insertion point (Origo) on the X, Y and Z coordi-
nates.
 The values for X and Y may not be changed. However, make sure that Z=0 and
click OK . The operation is ended. You can continue the work.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD
535
Introduction

r!
20.3 Transfer DWG/DXF objects to the DDS model


Your DWG/DXF file may already contain a design that you want to use for working in
the DDS model. If this has been created using insert objects, you can link to DDS
items and transfer these objects into the DDS model. The following example explains
the principle:
"DWG/DXF editor" action space "DDS model" action space

Basic functions
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3)
(4)
The graphic shows the part drawing of a DWG/DXF file from the perspective of the
DWG/DXF Editor (left) and the DDS model (right). The file contains an electrical en-
gineering design and the properties (2) for the two labelled double sockets (1) are
displayed:
Both sockets are symbolised by the insert object "ST03" (3), for which a link to a DDS
item (4) has been created in the "Artikel-Zuordnung" (Map symbol) tab. By saving the
link, you switch back to the DDS model. A DDS object (5) is placed at each position
of a "ST03" object.
Index
536
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Position and rotation of the DDS objects do not have to behave identically to the
original in the first step. This correction is carried out in a subsequent step. Finally,

the successfully linked insert objects are hidden in the DWG/DXF Editor. It is there-
fore necessary to switch between the two action areas several times.
Note:
The item mapping is not possible if only geometric functions were used when cre-
ating the DWG/DXF (such as circles, rectangles, lines). Admittedly, this creates a
visual symbol, but not a usable object.
The link between the insert object in the DWG/DXF file to the DDS item can be pro-
duced both at the individual object (the "Properties" dialogue) or by using an admini-
stration function in a table. Then, the changes are saved and the position of objects
corrected.
Warning!
Before starting this operation, the correct position of the storeys must be checked
and corrected if necessary. If you skip this step, the transferred objects will be in
the wrong position in the model. Please refer to chapter 3.3.3, page 44.
Basic functions
20.3.2 Create link to individual item
The link to a DDS item can be made
in the "Properties (selected object)"
dialogue. To do this, the DWG/DXF
file must be open in the Editor.
configuration
configuration
(1)
(2) extensions,
extensions,
(3)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Call a single object (e.g. a double socket, ST03) by double clicking . The
"Properties (selected object)" is displayed.
 Switch to the "Map symbol" tab and select the application type (1) and the DDS
item group (2).
 Click Select DDS item (3). The product database is displayed and allows you to se-
lect an item.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
537
Introduction

r!
 Select the item. The selected item is transferred into the "Properties (selected
object)" dialogue.
 Click OK . The product database is displayed and allows you to select an item.
The assignment applies to all double sockets (ST03) in the drawing.
 Call the next object.
This operation can be realised quickly and easily. In addition, you automatically
check the symbol for its suitability:
Symbol of a double socket as Symbol of a lamp as

an insert object Combination of circle and line
Basic functions
You can see whether it has been in-

serted as a insert object (left) and thus
suitable for linking or whether it was
created by a combination of different
functions (right). In this case you can-
not create a link.
For a large variety of objects in large-scale drawings, however, the overview may get
lost. You can forget about objects or call them many times unnecessarily. You also
have no information about the frequency of an object. Therefore, you should use the
following method as a supplement.
Index
538
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
20.3.3 Link with a central management function

Linking insert objects with matching DDS items can be done with the assistance of a
central management function. This function displays all the objects in an overview,
the frequency of their use (1) and the associated DDS item (2). A preview window (3)
shows an image of the selected object:
Assign DDS item to DWG/DXF objects
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
(4)
(3) (5)
(6)
configuration
Application (create link)
configuration
 Select the "Assign DDS item to DWG/DXF objects" function. The table is dis-
played.
 Select a row from the list. An illustration of the object is displayed in the preview
window (3).

extensions,
Select the application type (4) and the DDS item group (5).
extensions,
 Click Select DDS item (6). The product database is displayed and allows you to se-
lect an item.
 Select the item. The selected item is transferred into the row of the object.
 Create the next link.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
539
Introduction

r!
20.3.4 Save object mapping and transfer to the DDS model
Transferring the linked items to the DDS model takes place when you save the
changes in the DWG/DXF file.
Apply changes
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
Basic functions
Application
 Select the "Apply changes" function. The "Apply changes" dialogue box is dis-
played.
 Check "Apply changes made in symbol-mapping” (1).
 Select an option (2) according to your requirements. For more information,
please see 20.4, page 544.

 Click OK . The DDS model is displayed on the screen. The selected DDS ob-
jects are placed at the positions of the associated insert objects (DWG/DXF).
Position and rotation of the DDS objects do not have to be identical to the origi-
nal, the correction takes place in the next step.
Warning!
"Forget history of mapped symbols...” (4) leads to another transfer of all existing
links to the DDS model. DDS-CAD ignores the existing objects and places new
objects at the corresponding positions.
Note the impact this has on the part list. Use this function for example, for a com-
pletely new transfer or the creation of several variants.
Index
540
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
20.3.5 Correcting the position of the objects in the DDS model

The inserted DDS objects do not have to be-
have the same as the original. In the graphic
for example, you can see that the DDS ob-
jects are rotated 180° relative to the original.
This is caused by differences between CAD

systems. In DDS-CAD, the pictured double
socket faces downward, if the rotation angle
is 0°. In the CAD system used to create the
DWG/DXF file, it is pointing up. Similar ef-
fects arise when the insertion points are ar-
ranged differently in the symbols.
In these cases, you have to correct the posi-

tion of objects in the DDS model. However, you do not have to replace any individual
object. It is sufficient if (as in the example) you edit a single double socket. DDS-CAD
asks if this change should be transferred to all objects of the same type:

configuration
 Select a DDS object and move it with the cursor.
 Correct the rotation and place it at the desired position. You are asked whether
all objects of the same type should be treated the same.
 Click Yes . DDS-CAD corrects the positions of objects of the same type.
extensions,
extensions,
Warning!
If you answer with No , this mode is ended and can no longer be activated.
Therefore, first correct all objects before going on to refine the model.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
20.3.6 Hide original

If you have transferred all objects and corrected their position in the DDS model, only
DDS objects should be visible. The objects from the DWG/DXF file should be hidden.
The starting point of this operation is first the DDS model; hiding the DWG/DXF ob-
jects is carried out in the DWG/DXF Editor.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
541
Introduction

r!
Connect DWG/DXF Symbols to DDS Products
(1)
Basic functions
 Open the DWG/DXF file in the Editor (see 20.1, page 529).
 Select the "Choose the article to assosiate with” function. The table is displayed.
 Check "Hide inserted symbols from DXF model" (1) and click OK . All
DWG/DXF objects that were connected with a DDS item disappear.
 Save the changes in the DWG/DXF file (see 20.4, page 544). The DDS model is
displayed on the screen. The linked insert objects (DWG/DXF) are hidden, only
the DDS objects are visible:
Index
542
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
20.3.7 Notes on the parts list

Linking DWG/DXF objects with DDS items and their transfer into the DDS model is a
useful tool when working with DDS-CAD. As a result of this operation, you can
quickly and easily end up with a part list. This list is always dependent on the avail-
able data and must be evaluated in this context.
In 20.3.2 we talked about the symbol of a lamp, which is only created by the drawing-
related combination of geometric objects. It was shown that linking is not possible for
this example, and therefore it has no effect on the part list. Negative or incorrect ef-
fects are to be expected, however, whenever a symbol has been combined from ob-
jects that are suitable for linking.
Example
In the graphic, you can see a symbol that represents a four-way socket. However, in
creating the DWG/DXF file, the object was a single socket object with an additional
caption:

configuration
This state of affairs results in a single socket being transferred into the DDS model
and thus in the part list.
Note:
extensions,
Please note that the result of the part list is always dependent on the available
extensions,
data.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD
543
Introduction

r!
20.4 Apply changes – Save

If you have finished editing the DWG/DXF file, you must save your changes. There is
a configurable function in the DWG/DXF Editor for this purpose.
Apply changes
This function is only useful if you have created a link be-

tween DWG/DXF objects and DDS items as per 21.3 (from
page 536). You control the transfer of the links to the DDS
model (see 21.3.4, page 540).
Ignore changes (close without saving)

The DWG/DXF Editor is closed without saving the
changes made so far. You are returned to the DDS
model. Select this option if you have made mistakes in
Basic functions
editing the DWG/DXF file and do not want to transfer

these to the DDS model.
Apply changes made in the drawing, but do NOT save the DWG/DXF file
This option is only useful if you have created a link between DWG/DXF objects and
DDS items as per chapter 20.3 (from page 536). This setting only allows the mapping
of objects to the DDS model. Any changes to the drawing in the DWG/DXF file are
ignored.
Apply changes made in the drawing AND save the DWG/DXF file
All changes (object mapping and drawing-related editing) are saved. Changes to the
drawing are written directly into the current DWG/DXF file. Select this option if you
have made a repeated post edit.
Save changes in a new DWG/DXF file

All changes (object mapping and drawing-related editing) are saved. Changes to the
drawing are saved by creating a new DWG/DXF file. After confirming with OK
DDS-CAD asks for the name of the new file.
Select this option if you have received a new DWG/DXF file and save it after the first
edit. Thus you protect the original file by creating a new one. You can access it later
again if necessary.
Index
544
DDS-CAD
DDS-CAD
545
Part IV – Adjustments
Adjustments
Index Adjustments, extensions, configuration Basic functions Strategies for handling projects Introduction
Introduction
Erro Working with the product database

r!
21 Working with the product database
21.1 Basic relationships

21.1.1 The relationship between item and symbol
In DDS-CAD you work with virtual objects that behave like real objects in the model.
On this basis, you simulate real situations, such as when designing the lighting, when
constructing the distribution systems and sizing equipment. The object is represented
visually by a graphical symbol.
Drawing operation
Product database Item: Lamp
*.ARD
Number, description
Lamps
Output, size
Sockets
Distribution Symbol
board
Basic functions
DDS model
Object: Lamp
Item
Position
The object therefore has drawing-related visual AND reality-based technical proper-
ties. The object gets its properties as a result of the allocation of an item. This item is
stored in the product database. It includes both the technical parameters and the ref-
erence to the symbol to use. While working, you fix the symbol in the model by a
drawing operation. The object now has the characteristics of the item and a position.
Conclusion:
Always distinguish between the terms "object", "item" and "symbol"! The article is
a property of the object. The symbol is a property of the item.
Index
546
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Working with the product database Erro
r!
21.1.2 Data types and hierarchy of the data storage

21.1.2.1 Distinction between data
The visible symbol is a property of the item. However, it is not part of the product da-
tabase, but rather an independent data record. The symbol is only accessed via an
addressing in the item settings. It is therefore not just a case of distinguishing the
term "item" and "symbol" logically: they are actually different data types.
An item is always part of a product database (*.ARD). It can only be called, used or
manipulated via the database interface (see 21.2, page 549).
A symbol is always a drawing file, whose file name follows a fixed format. It is either
stored as an open file in one of three hierarchical levels (see below) or packaged into
a symbol library (*.LIB).
You do not have direct access to symbols within a symbol library. However, you can
copy a symbol from the library and use it as a template for a new symbol. This pro-
cedure is simpler than constructing one from scratch. You can modify the template
and save it under a new name (see 22.1, page 558).
Basic functions
21.1.2.2 Hierarchical levels of data storage
DDS-CAD manages all data hierarchically in three different levels or folders.
SYS (lowest priority)

The SYS folder contains the basic equipment for all system data that DDS-CAD can
access after installation. Its path is set during the installation routine. The contents of
this folder are overwritten by the installation of an update. Therefore, do not make
any changes here, as they could possibly be lost. Always save data with company-
specific customisations in the USER folder.

USER
The folder is designed to store all company-specific adaptations. This will include for
example, your logo for the drawing stamp, your own symbols, title boxes, legends
and even product databases. These data are available in all projects. The path for
this folder is set during the installation routine.
Project (highest priority)

The data of one project are not directly and readily available for other projects. They
are used exclusively in each project.
Warning
Copy the projects and also the "USER" folder to your backup!
Index
DDS-CAD
547
Introduction

r!
21.1.3 Application of the hierarchy, search mechanisms
The hierarchical organisation de-

Item calls symbol, search starts scribed above results in a fixed
search algorithm:
Project When you call an object, you as-

sign an item to it. With this informa-
*.LIB
tion, DDS-CAD starts the search
1 2 n 1 2 n for the corresponding symbol and
proceeds according to the hierar-
chy. The folders are first checked
in order of priority as to whether
Yes the symbol is part of a symbol li-
found? brary.
No
found?
Yes If the desired symbol is not found,
the search starts for an open file
No stored in one of the three folders.
USER The search again follows the order
*.LIB mentioned above. If DDS-CAD
Basic functions
finds the desired symbol in this

1 2 n 1 2 n chain, it is accessed and can be
displayed in the model. If none of
the search queries are successful,
DDS-CAD gives an error message.
Yes
found?
This relationship is best explained
No using the example of a logo:
Yes
found?
You have created your company's
No logo and saved it in the "USER"
SYS
folder. Now you receive a project
*.LIB with the condition that another logo
be used in the title box. In this
1 2 n 1 2 n
case, you create the logo and save
it in the directory of the project.
Because of the hierarchy in the
search, you can access your logo
Yes
found? in all standard projects. However,
this particular project accesses the
No version in the project folder.
Yes
found?
No
Message: "Symbol library Symbol is

not loaded" displayed
Index
548
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
21.2 The product database in action

21.2.1 Accessing the product database
In 21.1.2.2 (page 547) we described the three hierarchical levels "SYS", "USER" and
"Project". These levels apply during project work and they also affect access to indi-
vidual items. There is a product database for each of the three levels, with the file-
name extension *.ARD.
By default, the management interface for the product database displays the contents
of all three hierarchy levels. However, you can disable the display of the USER and
SYS product databases, by checking "Show only used products”. In this case, the
table only lists the items that have actually been used at least once in the current pro-
ject.
Basic functions
The project product database is created when you access the first object in a new
project. The requested item is automatically taken from the USER or the SYS product
database and written into the project product database. The size of the project prod-
uct database grows with the variety of objects used. If you create a new item, this is
also part of the active project product database.
You create and manage the USER product database through an administration proc-
ess. Perform this step if you have created new items and want to use them in all
other projects. The procedure is described in 21.2.3, page 551.
The SYS product database is installed and maintained by DDS. You have only read
permission.
Index
DDS-CAD
549
Introduction

r!
21.2.2 Item search
The user interface for the product database is structured in filters (1) and has a multi-
level fragmented search (2).
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
(3)
The example shows the string "Wall" in the first search box for the item description.
DDS-CAD now searches through all item descriptions in the current filter for that
string. The display in the table is narrowed down accordingly. You can limit the dis-
play further, if you use additional search boxes (see below). The table lists items con-
taining the strings "Wall" and "Partition".
You can expand the search according to the terms entered across the entire product
database. To do this, check "Flat mode". In the table you will see both openings
and wall vents:
(3)
You can save your searches. To do this, check the checkbox next to the search box
(3).
Index
550
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
21.2.3 Expand product database – Create new item

You can expand the product database for the current project (project product data-
base) or for all projects (USER product database):
First, decide
A new item to be created whether the new
item is to be avail-
able only for the cur-
rent project or for all
For the projects. This is im-
current project
portant if you want
or for all?
to keep the USER
product database
Current project All projects
"clean" and struc-
tured. Because ALL
Remain in the project Project: Chapter 22.2.3.1
Page 552 new or changed
_700-DDS- items are transferred
Artikel
open/create
from a project to
Chapter 22.2.3.2
USER, no differen-
tiation is possible.
Basic functions
Page 552
Call function, copy item
To create commonly
Chapter 22.2.3.3 available items, use
Customise copy of the item Page 553 a separate project
that only serves this
one purpose. If the
Transfer edited Chapter 22.2.3.4 items are only to be
items to USER Page 555 used in the current
working project,
however, you do not
Switch to working
need to observe any

project
special features.
Use item
You can them dupli-

cate any item and edit the copy. Correct the description of the item, its technical pa-
rameters and the link to a symbol if necessary.
If the edited items are to be transferred to USER, perform the necessary admin step.
Index
DDS-CAD
551
Introduction

r!
21.2.3.1 The project "_700-DDS-Artikel" – The item workshop
If a new item is to be created and transferred to the USER product database (so it
can be applied to all projects) you should use a special project as an item workshop.
In this way, you avoid "contaminating" your USER product database with records that
were only used in one project.
Create the project in the

normal way (as per
2.2.2.1, page 21). You
can assign the project
any name. However, we
recommend the name
"_700-DDS-Artikel. This
ensures that your item
workshop will always ap-
pear at the top of the list
of projects and you will
have no trouble finding it.
Basic functions
21.2.3.2 Create new item by copying
Creating an item is simply a copy process:

 Start the function (e.g. "Builders Work”). The product database is displayed.
 Select a suitable item (to be copied copy) and click . The context menu is dis-
played.
 Select the "Copy" function. The entry is duplicated. The item ID number is gen-
erated automatically and the item description begins with the word "copy". You
can edit the copy and customise its properties.
Index
552
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
21.2.3.3 Editing item properties

You can change any item, configure its technical properties and alter its visual repre-
sentation in the model.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Basic functions
(4)
(5)
 Select the copy of the item by clicking . The context menu is displayed.
 Select the "Edit” function. The "Change Product” dialogue box is displayed.

 Adjust the settings of the item and click OK .
Input "Productnumber” (1)

The item ID is automatically generated by DDS-CAD. You can use your own item IDs
(such as order numbers). You can enter up to 15 characters of any kind. Make sure,
however, that no number is duplicated.
Input "Description” (2)
The description (the item) is the text that appears in the item selection and also in the
part list. For the description, you can use 256 characters of any kind.
Input "Symbol" (3)

The symbol ID is a maximum of three-digit number, and accesses a DDS symbol for
this item. The search mechanism described in 21.1.3, on page 548 applies here.
Note
The entered number is irrelevant, if a path to an external symbol has been entered
in Input "External Symbol" (5) (see below)
Index
DDS-CAD
553
Introduction

r!
Input "External info" (4)
You can place any document (e.g. PDF file, Excel spreadsheet, text document, etc.)
in a DDS item and open it from the drawing. Typical applications include:
• Data sheets with the technical specifications of a device (e.g. a PDF file)
• Part lists for composite components (e.g. as an Excel spreadsheet)
• Image files
Enter the full path to the document, noting the syntax rules:
Notes on Example of syntax

Storing on the Internet ;http://www.example.com/temp/Pump.pdf
Storing on the network or ;file:///C:/temp/Pump.rtf
the local drive
Spaces in the path Spaces in the path must be replaced by %20:
;file:///C:/Program%20Files/freeCommander2007
If you have assigned a document to the item, you can open it from the model:
Basic functions
 Select the object in the model by clicking .

 Open the context menu (click ).
 Select the "Show product sheet” function.
Input "External symbol" (5)

You can copy symbols from an external source
and use them in the DDS model. To open in the
model, create an item and enter the file name in
Input "External symbol". For more information,
please refer to:

• Symbol from DWG/DXF (page 22.3,
page 588)
• Copy 3DS symbol (see 22.4, page 589)
• Legends (see 22.6, page 594)
The input has priority over the symbol ID.

Index
554
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
21.2.3.4 Transfer edited items to USER

Warning!
The function transfers ALL amended items in the current project to USER. To
avoid filling your USER product database with redundant entries, only perform this
operation if:
- you are in your item workshop (the project "_700-DDS-Artikel")
- you are sure that ALL edited items can be copied to USER
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
(3)
 Select an item by clicking . The context menu is displayed.

 Select the "Admin" function. The "Export to User Product Database” dialogue
box appears. The default settings correspond to the intended target: The source
product database is in the current project (1). From this, all changed items (2)
are copied to the user product database (3).
 Click OK . All new and modified items have been copied to the USER data-
base and are thus available in all projects.
Index
DDS-CAD
555
Introduction

r!
21.2.4 Working with the manufacturer database (electrical)
In several areas, the use of manufacturers' databases is required or recommended.

This applies for example to working with radiators (for a radiator calculation) or with
the LCN bus system in electrical engineering. Enable the required manufacturer
database from the "Tools" menu
Basic functions
 Select the "Extra product databases" function. The "Select Manufacturer Data-
base(s)" dialogue is displayed, listing all available records with a description of
the content.
 Select the desired data record and click Load . The data record is denoted as
active by the "x" character.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. You can use the items from that manu-
facturer.
Index
556
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
21.2.5 Working with manufacturer databases (heating)

In several areas, the use of manufacturers' databases is required or recommended.
This applies for example to working with radiators (for a radiator calculation) or with
the LCN bus system in electrical engineering. Enable the required manufacturer
database from the "Tools" menu
Basic functions
 Select the "Extra Product Database" function. The "Select Manufacturer Data-
base(s)" dialogue is displayed, listing all available records with a description of
the content.
 Select the desired data record and click Load . The data record is denoted as
active by the "x" character.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. You can use the items from that manu-
facturer.

Index
DDS-CAD
557
Introduction
Erro Symbol creation

r!
22 Symbol creation
22.1 Develop DDS symbols

22.1.1 Introduction
DDS symbols are drawings whose file name is structured according to a set pattern.
This is divided into three components, and must be maintained if the symbol is to
function.
Switch icon no. 901 (2D) Switch icon no. 901 (3D)
S11901.bi S13901.bi
Keyword of the Keyword of the
component group component group
"1" = 2D version "3" = 3D version
Symbol number Symbol number
The keyword defines the use of the symbol for a certain component group within the
Basic functions
product database (see table below).
The digits "1" or "3" control the display. Each symbol exists as a 2D and 3D version,
which appears as a schematic symbol in the plan view, but as a three-dimensional
object in the 3D view. Therefore each object requires two symbols!
The symbol ID is used as the address in the properties of the item (see 21.2.3.3,
page 553). For your symbols, use the numbers 900 to 999.
Comm Com Meaning, content and

Meaning
and mand application

E2 Telephone, data equipment LB Light rail (without bulbs)
Alarm systems and monitoring
E3 LF Fluorescent lamps
equipment (intrusion, fire, video)
Incandescent bulbs, light outlets,
E4 Bell, intercom and PA systems LI
spotlights
E5 Antennas and satellite dishes S1 Switching devices
Building systems technology
E6 SB Distributions
(EIB/KNX, wireless bus, LCN)
E7 Light signalling systems SK Plug-in devices, sockets
Cabinets, boxes, connection work,
E8 Low power - not used T1
feedthroughs
E9 Low power - not used T2 Thermostat for electric heating
H1 Electric heating T3 general or labelling symbols
H2 Heating cable TF Title field (see 22.7, page 597)
Index
558
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Symbol creation Erro
r!
To be able to use the new symbol in all projects, the drawing file must be stored in
the USER directory:

 Open the drawings list.
Open drawings list
 Click more >> (1).

The dialogue enables
additional functions.
 Click User dir. (2).
DDS-CAD goes to the
USER directory.
(3) (4)  Enter the file name (3).
 Click Open (4).
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
The user interface during symbol creation differs in some respects from the user in-
terface during project work:
Execute command The toolbar contains general and specific

functions, which are shown by the working

Command input field mode (see below).
Functional elements in the
symbol are called by manu-
ally entering commands.
The command list only con-

tains the "MO" command for
defining the zero point at the
start of icon editing. The toolbox only contains
auxiliary and geometric func-
tions, regardless of the active
working mode (see chapters
17.3 and 19).
Index
DDS-CAD
559
Introduction

r!
Project menu Import and drawing manager (page 85)
Save Print (page 381) Measure Export part list/VEC
Undo Views (page 402) Text
Working modes enable

additional functions
Basic functions
Index
560
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.1.2 Notes on the title field

22.1.2.1 General notes
The contents of the title fields can be divided into four categories: the wireframe (1),
the logogram (2), unchangeable text (3) and dynamic information (4), which are read
58
as a text block from the project, drawing and revision data dialogue boxes.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
The default width of a title field is 18m. While maintaining this width, you can use it
Basic functions
either in the left or right bottom corner of a sheet via the "Title field/stamp" dialogue
box, without having to move it dynamically. If the width ≠ 18m, it can only be used
right/dynamic or left/dynamic. Bear this in mind when setting up the wireframe.
59
Title fields can be scaled, like any other object . Before developing a new title field,
you should decide whether there is a need for re-sizing. The answer to this question
is crucial for the incorporation of text and text blocks, as they only adjust their sizes
using a specific combination of commands in the symbols.
If the question about scalability is answered in the affirmative,we recommend devel-

oping the new title field on the basis of a DDS template (as described in the following
section). However, if you want to draw a new field title.
58
see 16.3.5, page 375
59
Changing the size on the basis of a factor (factor <1 causes a reduction; factor >1 causes an enlargement)
Index
DDS-CAD
561
Introduction

r!
22.1.2.2 Creating a title field from a template
The project "_700-DDS-

(1) Titelfelder-Logo" (1) con-
tains a template that can
be used as a basis for de-
veloping new title fields.
Open the "Dds_1000 Kop-
(2) iervorlage Titelfeld" draw-
ing (2).
(3) (4)
The pattern (3) shows the

proportions of a DDS title
field. Use this as a guide
for building the wireframe.
Basic functions
Slide the logo and the pre-

pared text blocks (4) into
the desired positions.
The first step is to duplicate

the drawing in order to leave
the template intact for future
title fields. To do this, save
the drawing under a new
name (in this example
DDS_1001.BIM). For addi-

tional title fields you assign
the same name in the same
way: DDS_1002.BIM;
DDS_1003.BIM etc.
Index
562
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
The second step is to construct the

wireframe and set the position of the
logo. You can use all the geometric
functions. The square and the poly-
Polyline
line are particularly relevant. In addi-
tion, you can import a DWG/DXF file
60
as a template .
Rectangle
The pattern shown is used for orien-
tation for size and zero point (1),
(1) which is an important reference for
the construction of the wireframe. If
the new title is to be suitable for an
automatic link alignment, always start the wireframe directly at the zero point. How-
ever, if it is to be suitable for an automatic right alignment on the sheet, note the fol-
lowing rule:
Width of the new title field
> 18 m = 18 m < 18 m
Basic functions
Lattice frame begins Lattice frame begins Lattice frame begins
right of the zero point in the zero point left of the zero point
Standard width 18m Standard width 18m Standard width 18m
The logo is an integrated symbol and

can be moved with the standard func-
tions.

The third step is to prepare to move
(1) the text blocks into the wireframe.
61
Using the auxiliary geometries (1)
create the intersection points (2),
(2) which you can target when moving by
snap points. In this way, you ensure
a uniform alignment of text and text
blocks in the title field.
60
They must be removed once you have finished editing.
61
See 19.3, page 491.
Index
DDS-CAD
563
Introduction

r!
The fourth step is to shift the required
text blocks to their positions in the

wireframe. For a better overview, we
(1) recommend the "Display points” op-
tion in the "View” menu. Thus, the
reference points for the text blocks
are visible as "x". Then use the
"Move Area” function to slide the
blocks into the wireframe (see 19.4,
Move region
page 526).
Basic functions
Once completed, the title field must

be cleaned up and stored in the
USER directory as a symbol file:
 Delete any remaining (surplus)
Generate title field entries and text.
 Select the "Generate title field"
function. A message indicates
that the title field has been saved
under a specific name in the
USER directory.
 Click OK . The "Apply

changes?" prompt is displayed.
 Click Yes . The "Export model
(1) (2) in format" dialogue box is dis-
played.
 Select the USER directory (1)
and enter the file name (2).
TF1901.BIM (first title field)
TF1902.BIM (second title field)
TF19nn.BIM (consecutive num-
bering for additional title fields)
 Click Save . The title field can be
used in the project.
Index
564
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.1.2.3 Constructing a title field manually

Create
drawing file Chapter 23.1.1
Scalability
Page 558
of title fields
Construct
lattice frame
construct with: supported by:
Static text Rectangle Auxiliary

(TH/TV/TR/TL/TC) geometry
Polyline DWG/DXF file

Dynamic as template
text blocks (TT)
Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

Page Page Page Page
Create a drawing file
Basic functions
and declare it as part of the object. Use the following file names in accordance with
62
the naming convention for DDS symbols :
• TF1901.BIM (for your first title field)
• TF1902.BIM (for your second title field)
• TF19nn.BIM (consecutive numbering for additional title fields)
1. Should the title field be scalable (i.e. size can be changed)?

Special text commands must be used for static text: TH, TC, TV, TR are
used
The text height is not set directly but rather determined by integrated calcu-
lations
2. The title field should read the contents of the project and drawing data as
blocks
Static text in title fields
Text blocks in title fields – the wildcard command TT
The scalability of title fields
see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található., page Hiba! A könyvjelző nem létezik.
62
Index
DDS-CAD
565
Introduction

r!
22.1.2.4 Using a title field
Use the title field by creating an item and enter-

ing the ID of a symbol.
22.1.3 Functions and commands for editing symbols

A symbol is a combination of geometric and functional elements. The geometric func-

tions are accessed from the toolbox, their application is described in chapter 18, from
page 444. In addition, please note the following:
Basic functions
Warning!
Geometric objects within a symbol must
remain neutral with regards to layer and
pen assignment. Otherwise, the layer
management layer cannot affect the sym-
bol in its display. Therefore, choose the
settings shown for layers and pens.
Functional elements ensure that a symbol acts intelligently. These include, for exam-
ple, connection points for cables and cable harnesses, or accessing text blocks. The
position of these elements is based either directly on the last point or aligned be-
tween the last two points. Therefore, you first define the reference points. Then select
the element with a command:
Defining the reference point(s)

 Select the "Insert point” function. The cursor turns into a cross-
hair.
 Click on the desired position. A red "+" appears at the se-
lected position. The function is finished. You can start the next
operation.
Insert point
(1) (2)
Calling the command for a functional element

Index
566
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Enter the command in the input field (1).

 Press [Enter] or click the icon (2). The command is executed, input is
requested where necessary.
Description Options Remark/Reference
Connection point for electrical Side

cables and cable harnesses
Scalable text Side
Static text in a point Horizontal left-justified TH
Basic functions
Vertical (read from right) TV
Static text between two points Left justified TL
Right justified TR
Centred TC
Text blocks from project, draw- TT

ing, revision and sheet informa-
tion

Scalability of static text and text Side
blocks
Side Index
DDS-CAD
567
Introduction

r!
22.1.3.2 MO – define reference points

A point is described in the command list by the MO command. This is displayed in

the command list at different locations. (1) Symbol editing automatically begins from
the zero point of the coordinate system. It corresponds to the subsequent insertion
point of the symbol. The example shows the values of X, Y and Z coordinates each
with the value "0". (2) At position 5 in the command list you will see the EP command.
This is the definition of a connection and label point for an electrical line. The position
of this connection point must be defined beforehand. In the parameters of the com-
mand MO (position 4 on the command list), the values for the X and Y coordinates
have been set to the value "0.5".
(3) You should always finish editing the symbol with a point at the position of the zero
point (see position 6 in the example).
You can define a point dynamically (by clicking ) or construct it by entering com-
mands which specify the coordinates numerically.
Set point dynamically


Basic functions
Select the "Insert point” function. The cursor turns into a cross-
hair.
lected position. The function is ended.
Insert point
Construct point
 Enter the command MO and press [Enter].
 Enter the shift in metres (m). The preceding +
or - sign determines the direction on the axis.
 Click OK . The point has been moved.
Index
568
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

22.1.3.3 EP – Connection and label point
The function creates a connection point for cables
and cable harnesses in the current position. In this
UV01.1 way you ensure the possibility of electrical con-
nection and for identification with the circuit infor-
mation.
 Call the "EP" command. The "Connec-
tion/symbol text point" dialogue box is dis-
played.
Basic functions
 Enter a text type
1 = connection point for cables
2 = connection point for cable harness
 Click OK . The function is ended.
22.1.3.4 TM – Static text (single line, scalable)

This function applies a single-line static text in the current position
1/N/16A (MO) to the symbol, which is rotated and scaled together with the
symbol. The application is only relevant to electrical installation

symbols.
(1)
(2)
 Call the "TM" command. The "Text" dialogue box is displayed.

 Define the position of the text to the reference point (1) as a type (see table).
 Click OK . The "TM" dialogue box (2) is displayed.
 Enter the text and click OK . The text is displayed at the symbol. The function
is ended.
Index
DDS-CAD
569
Introduction

r!
Type Vertical/horizontal alignment Example Rotation
0 Centred Centred +
1/N/16A
1 Bottom Centred 1/N/16A
+
edge
2 Centred Left justified +1/N/16A Always with the symbol
3 Top edge Centred +
1/N/16A
4 Centred Right aligned 1/N/16A+
5 Bottom Centred 1/N/16A
+ as dimension type
edge (read from right or bottom)
22.1.3.5 Static text (multi-line, not scalable)
Multi-line, static texts
The functions described in this section are text-only functions. They are not related to
automatic annotation and labelling functions or text symbols. The text is configured
by a command (TH, TV, TL, TR or TC) in terms of size, line spacing and font. Then it
Basic functions
is written and confirmed line by line:
Horizontal text - 1 point (TH)
This function causes the entered text to be written horizontally from left to right from
the reference point. After activating this function, an input window is displayed, in
which the following settings can be made:
After confirming the input, you get to the text entry field.
Each line of text is entered in this field and confirmed with OK.
Afterwards this screen is displayed again. You can continue entering the next line
or stop the function here.
Vertical text - 1 point (TV)

This function causes the entered text to be written
vertically from the reference point. The text can be read from
the right.
Example:
To adjust the size, line spacing and font of the text,
the same parameters as for horizontal text apply.
Text right justified, left justified or centred - 2 pts
(TR, TL, TC)
With these functions, the text is aligned to the two last set
points (MO). Depending on the location of the two points
it may also appear diagonally in the drawing. After selecting the
function the same settings need to be made as for
horizontal text. The selected function determines the orientation
of the text to the two points.
Example for TC:

Index
570
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.1.3.6 TT – Dynamic text blocks

Variable information that is to be displayed as text in the model can, by using the TT
63
command, be retrieved from the project, drawing and revision data dialogue boxes.
In principle, you can use this function anywhere, but it is mainly used to design title
fields. The graphic shows the relationship using global project information as an ex-
ample:
Basic functions
The position of a text block can be based on one or between two reference points.
The font is automatically decided by the a setting in the TT command. Therefore first
specify the by first specifying a single point. You then call the TT command via the
input box. Two dialogue boxes are displayed one after the other, which are used to

address the desired text block:
Which dialogue should be evaluated?
Which module should be read from the

addressed dialogue box?
Only in dialogue 4 ("Revision"):

Which revision record should be evaluated?
How should the text block be arranged?
From which
...should the
From which drawing... information be taken?
From which sheet...
63
cf. 16.3.5, page 375
Index
DDS-CAD
571
Introduction

r!
Parameters of the first query
Which dialogue should be analysed?

Dialogue Meaning
1 Project data
2 Drawing data
3 Sheet information (electric only)
4 Revision data
Which block is to be read from the addressed dialogue?

Line Meaning
n A line of text from the selected dialogue is accessed by specifying the line
number. The line number is declared in the configuration file DDSPMN.INI.
Example – Extract from DdsPmn.ini:
Project.Group.2=Building project,3,4,5,6
Project.Cat.3=Name;30
Project.Cat.4=Street;30
Project.Cat.5=Postcode;30
Project.Cat.6=Tel/Fax (*);30
-1 "Created" date
Basic functions
-2 "Created" editor's character

-11 "Tested" date
-12 "Tested" editor's character
-21 Three-digit drawing or sheet number (not is dialogue 1 and 4)
-22 from project data Project name
from drawing data Full file name of the drawing
from sheet information Not active
From revision data Index of the revision entry
Only for dialogue 4 – Revision – Which revision entry should be analysed?

Revision Meaning
1 first registered revision
2 second registered revision
n …
-1 last registered revision
-2 penultimate registered revision
-n …
How should the text block be arranged?

Positioning Meaning According to
command
1 horizontal to the right from the last point TH
2 vertical from the last point, readable from the TV
right
3 left justified between the last two points TL
4 right justified between the last two points TR
5 centred between the last two points TC
Index
572
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Parameters for the second query

From which application type should the information be taken?
Application Meaning
type:
-1 Always from the current application type
1 From architecture
6 From electrical engineering
7 From ventilation and air conditioning
8 From heating and sanitation
From which drawing should the information be taken?

Application Meaning
type:
-1 Always from the current drawing
nnn From the drawing with the number specified
From which sheet should the information be taken?

Application Meaning
type:
Basic functions
-1 Always from the current sheet
nnn From the sheet with the number specified

Index
DDS-CAD
573
Introduction

r!
22.1.4 Notes on installation and labelling symbols
22.1.4.1 Find and load master copy in the symbol catalogue
All functions are grouped together in "Installation and labelling symbols" working
mode.
Copy -> change general/architectural 2D symbol

Copy -> change installation 3D symbol (5)
(1) (2) (4) Copy -> change installation 2D symbol Clean up symbol
Installation and labelling symbols
(3)
Basic functions
 Select the "Installation and labelling symbols" working mode (1).

 From the "Help" menu  "Symbol catalogue" (2). The symbol catalogue is dis-
played as a help window.
 Find a suitable template, and note the file name (3)
 Select the copy function (4, see below, in this case "Copy 2D symbol installation
-> edit)". The "CI" dialogue box appears.
 Enter the code of the master template (here s11001) and click OK . The "In-
sert command file" dialogue box is displayed.
 Click OK . The template is displayed on screen.
 Select "Clean up symbol". You can start designing.
Significance of the copy functions (4)

Copy 2D symbol installation->edit:
To develop the 2D version of an electric circuit symbol. In the "CI" dialogue, enter the
symbol code for the 2D version the symbol (e.g. S11001).
Index
574
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
To develop the 3D version of an electric circuit symbol. In the "CI" dialogue, enter the

symbol code for the 3D version the symbol (e.g. S13001).
Copy 2D symbol general/architecture->edit:

To develop symbols from the "Labelling/general symbols (various)" area. In the "CI"
dialogue, enter the symbol code for the 2D version the symbol (e.g. T31001).
Basic functions
Index
DDS-CAD
575
Introduction

r!
22.2 Drawing a DDS symbol (HCS)

Symbols are drawings whose file name is structured according to a set pattern. They
are packaged in a symbol library (*.LIB) or stored as an open file. The project folder
or the SYS or USER folders can be used as save locations (see 21.1.2.2, page 547).
Most symbols are summarised in libraries and stored in the SYS directory. However,
you do not have direct access to this database. However, you can copy a symbol
from the library and use it as a template for a new symbol. This process is described
using an example:
General procedure Chapter Hiba! Chapter Hiba!

Create symbol A hivatkozási A hivatkozási
drawing forrás nem forrás nem
Find and load Draw symbol

template
Geometric
functions
Basic functions
Draw symbol
Connection and
identification points
Scalable text
Chapter Hiba!
A hivatkozási
forrás nem Material mapping for
rendering
General procedure Chapter Hiba!

Create symbol A hivatkozási
drawing forrás nem
Draw symbol
Draw symbol Geometric

functions
Connection and
identification points
Chapter Hiba!
Material mapping for
A hivatkozási
rendering
forrás nem
Index
576
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.2.1 Naming convention for DDS symbols, create symbol (E)

The naming convention for DDS symbols must be respected if the symbol is to work.
The structure of the file name is explained with a switch:
Switch icon no. 401 (2D) Switch icon no. 401 (3D)
S11401.bim S13401.bim
Identifies the 2D Identifies the 3D

version version
The keyword is an internal command to call the component group. The following ta-
ble lists all keywords and their contents:
Meaning, content Meaning, content
Basic functions
Command Command
and application and application
Weak current total up to version
E1 LB Light rail (without bulbs)
6.24, not included in version 6.3x
E2 Telephone, data equipment LF Fluorescent lamps
Alarm systems and monitoring
E3 LG Legends
equipment (intrusion, fire, video)
Incandescent bulbs, light outlets,
E4 Bell, intercom and PA systems LI
spotlights
E5 Antennas and satellite dishes S1 Switching devices

Building systems technology
E6 SB Distributions
(EIB, wireless bus, LCN)
E7 Light signalling systems SK Plug-in devices, sockets
Cabinets, boxes, connection work,
E8 Low power - not used T1
feedthroughs
E9 Low power - not used T2 Thermostat for electric heating
general or
H1 Electric heating T3
labelling symbols
H2 Heating cable TF Title field (see 22.7, page 597)
Almost every symbol exists as a 2D and 3D version. Therefore each object requires
two symbol files! The only exceptions are title fields and legends. In this way it is en-
sured that a schematic symbol appears in the plan view and a three-dimensional ob-
ject in the 3D view.
The symbol ID is used throughout the product database (see 21.2.3.3, page 553).
Use the numbers 900 to 999 for your symbols.
Index
DDS-CAD
577
Introduction

r!
A new symbol is to be developed for a switching device. It is assumed that the sym-
bol catalogue contains a template that can be copied, modified and can be saved as
a new symbol.
the USER directory.
Open drawings list
(4)
(3)
Basic functions
(2) (1)
 Start the drawings list. The "Project Menu” dialogue box appears.
 Click more >> (1). The "Project Menu” dialogue enables additional functions.
 Click User dir. (2). DDS-CAD leaves the directory of the current project and goes to
the USER directory.
 Enter the file name (3) of the new symbol (in this example, "S11901"). Be sure to
comply with the naming convention.
 Click Open (4). The symbol drawing is opened.
Index
578
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.2.2 Naming convention for DDS symbols, create symbol (E)

The naming convention for DDS symbols must be respected if the symbol is to work.
The structure of the file name is explained with a boiler:
Boiler icon no. 401 (2D) Boiler icon no. 401 (3D)
GF2401.bin GF3401.bin
Identifies the 2D Identifies the 3D

version version
The keyword is an internal command to call the component group. The following ta-
ble lists all keywords and their contents:
Command
Meaning, content and Command
Meaning, content and
Basic functions
application application
BA Bathtub LG Legends
Operating equipment, irrigation
BI SI Washbasin
and drainage
Assembly equipment, mounting
BK SW Outlet fitting
accessories
FH Fire extinguisher TF Title field (see 22.7, page 597)
Heat generators, tanks, safety
GF WC Toilet, urinal
equipment

GU Floor drain WH Tank, water heater
Domestic appliances (e.g. washing
H1 Radiator WM
machine, dishwasher)
Almost every symbol exists as a 2D and 3D version. Therefore each object requires
two symbol files! The only exceptions are title fields and legends. In this way it is en-
sured that a schematic symbol appears in the plan view and a three-dimensional ob-
ject in the 3D view.
The symbol ID is used throughout the product database (see 21.2.3.3, page 553).
Use the numbers 900 to 999 for your symbols.
Index
DDS-CAD
579
Introduction

r!
A new symbol is to be developed for a boiler. It is assumed that the symbol catalogue
contains a template that can be copied, modified and can be saved as a new symbol.
the USER directory.
Open drawings list
(4)
(3)
Basic functions
(2) (1)
 Start the drawings list. The "Project Menu” dialogue box appears.
 Click more >> (1). The "Project Menu” dialogue enables additional functions.
 Click User dir. (2). DDS-CAD leaves the directory of the current project and goes to
the USER directory.
 Enter the file name (3) of the new symbol (in this example, "GF2901"). Be sure
to comply with the naming convention.
 Click Open (4). The symbol drawing is opened.
Index
580
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.2.3 Find and load master copy in the symbol catalogue (E)

In many cases, you can create a new symbol based on an already existing symbol.
You can choose a suitable template in the symbol catalogue and apply this to your
new symbol. All functions are grouped together in "Installation and labelling symbols"
working mode.
22.2.3.1 Transfer procedure (apply copy function)

Copy -> change installation 3D symbol (5)
(1) (2) (4) Copy -> change installation 2D symbol Clean up symbol
Installation and labelling symbols
(3)
 Select the "Installation and labelling symbols" working mode (1). Basic functions
 From the "Help" menu  "Symbol catalogue" (2). The symbol catalogue is dis-
played as a help window.
 Find a suitable template, and note its file name (3)
 Select the copy function (4). In the example, the 2D symbol is transferred, there-
fore "Copy 2D symbol installation->edit". The "CI" dialogue box appears.
 Enter the code of the master template (here s11001) and click OK . The "In-
sert command file" dialogue box is displayed.
 Click OK . The template is displayed on screen.
 Select "Symbol bereinigen" (Clean up symbol). You can start designing.
Index
DDS-CAD
581
Introduction

r!
22.2.3.2 Notes on the copy function and symbol codes
The toolbar contains three copy functions. This is necessary because the desired
template of a symbol may originate from different symbol libraries.
Copy -> change installation 2D symbol

Copy -> change installation 3D symbol

Use this function when developing the 2D version of an electric circuit symbol. In the
"CI" dialogue, enter the symbol code for the 2D version the symbol (e.g. S11001).
Copy 2D symbol installation->edit

Use this function when developing the 3D version of an electric circuit symbol. In the
"CI" dialogue, enter the symbol code for the 2D version the symbol (e.g. S13001).
Basic functions
Copy 2D symbol general/architecture->edit

Use this function when developing a symbol for the "Kennzeichnung/Allgemeine
Symbole (Diverse)" (Labelling/general symbols (various)) area. In the "CI" dialogue,
enter the symbol code for the 2D version the symbol (e.g. T31001).
Index
582
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.2.4 General functions of symbol editing

Symbols are usually combinations of geometric functions (1) and
application type specific commands that allow, for example, intelli-
gent connection points to be programmed into the symbol. These
commands can be activated manually. To do this, enter the com-
mand in the command box (2). Then press [Enter] or click the
(1) icon (3).
(2) (3)
The general geometric functions are described in chapter 18.2, from page 475. The
following sections include notes on the functions
• Define point (see 22.1.3.2, page 568)
• Connection and label point (electrical) (see 22.1.3.3, page 569)
•
Basic functions
Scalable text (electrical) (see 22.1.3.4, page 569)
• Connection point (plumbing and heating)
• Material mapping for rendering
Warning!
Select these settings
for layers and pens for
all objects within a
symbol.

22.2.4.1 Define point – MO
A point is generated by the MO command.

This is displayed in the command list at differ-
(1) ent locations.
(2)
(1) Symbol editing automatically begins from
(3)
the zero point of the coordinate system. It cor-
responds to the subsequent insertion point of
the symbol. The example shows the values of X, Y and Z coordinates, each with the
value "0".
(2) At position 5 in the command list you will see the EP command. This is the defini-
tion of a connection and label point for an electrical line. The position of this connec-
tion point must be defined beforehand. In the parameters of the command MO (posi-
tion 4 on the command list), the values for the X and Y coordinates have been set to
the value "0.5".
Index
DDS-CAD
583
Introduction

r!
(3) You should always finish editing the symbol with a point at the position of the zero
point (see position 6 in the example).
You can define a point dynamically (by clicking ) or construct it by entering com-
mands which specify the coordinates numerically.
Set point dynamically

 Select the "Insert point” function. The cursor turns into a cross-
hair.
lected position. The function is ended.
Insert point
Basic functions
Construct point
 Enter the command MO and press [Enter].
 Enter the shift in metres (m). The preceding +
or - sign determines the direction on the axis.
 Click OK . The point has been moved.
Index
584
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.2.4.2 Connection and label point – EP

The function defines a connection or label point in the cur-
rent position (MO). Thus, for example, an electrical line or
cable harness can be connected to the symbol and the
circuit identification is displayed.
 Enter the "EP" command and press

[Enter]. The "Connection/symbol text point"
 Enter a text type and click OK . The connec-
tion point has been defined at the current posi-
tion. The function is ended.
Text type Description

1 Connection point for cables
2 Connection point for cable harness
Basic functions
3 Display component label (circuit
identification)
4 below last point:
22.2.4.3 Scalable text – TM

This function applies a static text in the current
position (MO) to the symbol. It is rotated and
scaled together with the symbol.

 Enter the "TM" command. The
Type Alignment Example
"Text" dialogue box is displayed.
0 centred
 Define the position of the text to
the reference point as a type.
1 above last point
 Click OK . The "TM" dialogue
2 centred left-aligned box is displayed.
3 below last point:  Enter the text and click OK .

The text is displayed at the sym-
4 centred right-aligned bol. The function is ended.
5 above last point, rotated like
dimension type (readable
from right or below)
Index
DDS-CAD
585
Introduction

r!
22.2.4.4 Connection point – IP
The function defines a connection or label point in the current

position (MO). At this point a pipe can be starting or con-
nected. In the IP command, define the medium, size and the
flow direction of the pipe.
 Enter the IP command and

Text Description
press [Enter]. The "Connec-
type
tion point" dialogue box
Pipe Number of the medium (click appears.
type Button [Help] for an overview)
 Enter the parameters and click
Dimens. Nominal size, for example, OK . The connection or label
"20" = DN 20
point is defined. The function
DirHor horizontal start direction of the is ended.
pipe in degrees (°)
DirVer vertical start direction of the pipe
in degrees (°)
"90" (straight up)
Basic functions
Note:
If the starting direction of the line is to be any direction from the line, enter the
value "0" for Input "DirVer" and Input "DirHor". You can draw the pipe in any di-
rection after starting it.
Index
586
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.2.4.5 Material mapping for rendering – IM

If a solid body is to be associated with a
material for rendering, this setting must be
made BEFORE this body is drawn. In this
way, each sub-body of a symbol can be
linked with another material.
 Enter the "IM" command. The "Mate-
rial index" dialogue box is displayed.
 Enter the parameters and click OK
Parameter Description . The material allocation starts for the
Application Application type code: next body and/or area to be drawn.
1 Architecture
6 Electrics  Draw the shapes that are to receive a
7 Ventilation common material association.
8 Plumbing/heating
 Enter the IM command again. The
Component 988 "Materialindex" (Material index) dia-
Material ID any four-digit number logue box is displayed.
(Document which ID
has been used!)  Set all parameters the value "0" and
click OK . The material mapping is
Basic functions
ended.

Index
DDS-CAD
587
Introduction

r!
22.3 Transferring a symbol from a DWG/DXF file

You can transfer symbols from

Procedure in the DWG/DXF
Editor:
Chapter 21.1.2 any DXF/DWG file and use them
Open file in the Page 530 in the DDS model. This is neces-
DWG/DXF Editor sary for example when editing
revision designs, if the symbols
Chapter 21.2.1 present in the DWG file are to be
Isolate symbol Page 531 used.
Chapter 21.2.4 To do this, first isolate the symbol

Define the zero point Page på side in the DWG/DXF file and transfer
535 it to the CFI format. Save the file
in the project or USER directory.
Export file Chapter 23.3.1 To open in the model, create a
to *.CFI Page 588 new item and enter the file name
in Input "External symbol". You
can then use the item with the
former symbol.
Apply symbol
Basic functions
Creating and editing Chapter 22.2.3

new items Page 551
Input to set "External Chapter 23.3.2

symbol" Page 589
Use item
22.3.1 Export symbol to CFI

If you have finished editing the DWG/DXF file, export the results as a CFI file (de-
pending on the intended application) into the project or USER directory.
 Select "File" menu  "Export
file" function. The "Export file"
 Set the path (1), select the file
type (2) and enter a file name
(3).
(1) (2) (3)
 Click Save . The symbol is ex-
ported. You can apply it in an
item.
Index
588
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.3.2 Apply CFI file as a symbol

You use a CFI file as a symbol by entering the
file name as an external symbol for an item.
Open the item for editing (see 21.2.3.3,
page 553). Enter the full filename of the CFI file
in Input "External symbol".
For an electrical appliance, you need three entries:
Entry Meaning
symbol1.cfi Example name for the plan view
symbol1.cfi Example name for the 3D view
Name of an auxiliary symbol for the electrical connection. These entries are
Basic functions
ep1
required if the symbol is to be connected electrically.
The entries are separated by semicolons. After confirming with OK this item can
be used with all functions. It may be necessary to adjust the scaling.
22.4 Apply 3DS file as a symbol

Many providers supply elaborately designed objects, such as boilers, plumbing ob-
jects and lamps, as well as home furnishings and decorative elements in the 3DS
format (3D Studio).

 Copy the 3DS file into the project directory.
 Create a new item in the DDS project (see
21.2.3, page 551).
 Edit the new items and in Input "External
symbol" enter the full file name of the 3DS
file for the plan view and the 3D view.
When using the item, it may be necessary to correct the scaling.
Warning!
A wide range of 3DS objects is available online. Please note that some of these
may be fee-based. Copyright issues must be respected.
Index
DDS-CAD
589
Introduction

r!
22.5 Creating a logo

22.5.1 Logo in drawings

When first installing DDS-CAD a
placeholder is shown instead of
your logo. it is a drawing of a de-
fined size and a defined name,
which you replace with your own
version.
22.5.1.1 Determining the file name and size of the new logo
First you need to know what the new logo must be called and what size it has to be to
be used in the tile field:
 From the "Insert” menu select  "Prepare for print"  "Title field/stamp". The "
Title field/stamp" dialogue box is displayed.
Basic functions
 Click … . The product database is displayed:

(1) (2)
 (1) shows the logo's file name, (2) shows its size in metres (m).
The description below uses the example "VI9901 6x1.50"

Index
590
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.5.1.2 Creating the drawing file for a logo

The first step is to create a drawing file for the new logo. You also have to decide
whether it should behave as a default for all projects or whether it should be project-
specific:
Open drawings list
Basic functions
(1)
(2) (3)
 Start the drawings list. The "Project Menu” dialogue box is displayed.
 Click more >> (1). The dialogue enables additional functions.

In the next step you decide the availability of the new logo:
As default for all projects:

 Click User dir. (2). DDS-CAD leaves the current project directory and opens the
USER directory:
As a project-specific logo
 Click Directory (3). DDS-CAD remains in the current project directory:
Index
DDS-CAD
591
Introduction

r!
The description below is based on the default version for all projects.
 Enter the file name (4) of the new logo (in this example "vi9901") and click Open
(5):
(4) (5)
The drawing is opened. You can start designing the logo.

Basic functions
22.5.1.3 Designing the logo

 Select the working mode "WM: Create logo". The toolbar changes and enables
additional functions.
Create WM logo
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(1) Define border with 6m x 1.5m (standard size for almost all title fields)
(2) Import graphics files
(3) Import DWG/DXF files
(4) Enter text
(5) Use geometric functions and crosshatching
Index
592
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.5.1.4 Saving the logo

If you have finished designing the logo, you have to save the drawing (1) and then
export in the *CFI format (2):
Save file/drawing Export CFI
(1) (2)
Basic functions
22.5.2 Logo in reports, lists and logs
The logogram in calculation proto-
cols, parts lists and room lists is a

simple bitmap.
Edit the DdsCr.bmp file in the folder

C:\DdsCr with an image editing
program.
Warning!
Only edit the content, not the size of the image!
Index
DDS-CAD
593
Introduction

r!
22.6 Creating a legend

DDS-CAD includes ready-

In the "700-DDS-Legenden" project made legends, which are
Open, edit and save a Chapter 23.6.1.1 called as an object and fixed
template Page 594 in the model as a symbol.
The templates are stored in
the "_700-DDS-Legenden"
Export legend to CFI Chapter 23.6.1.2 project. Use these to create
Page 596 new legends.
Apply legend
Creating and editing new Chapter 22.2.3
items Page 551
Input to set "External

Chapter 23.6.1.3
symbol"
Page 596
Basic functions
Use item
22.6.1.1 Open, edit and save a template
(1)
(2)
(3)
Index
594
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Switch to the "_700-DDS-Legenden" project (1). Project menu (2) shows the
templates of the existing legends for the selected application type.

 Open a template and first save this template with a new file name. Select "File”
menu  "Save As” function. The "Speichern unter" (Save as) dialogue box is
displayed.
 Enter a new file name. Only change the last three digits of the original name.
Example: The legend Lege1000.BIM is used as an example in this description.
As a new file name, enter e.g. Lege1100.BIM (3).
 Click Save . The modified legend has been saved as a new template in the
"_700-DDS-Legenden" project.
 Edit the new legend to your requirements.
Now correct the drawing data of the new legend. This step provides a better overview
in the "_700-DDS-Legenden" project:
Basic functions
 Select "File”  "Project/drawing data“  "Edit drawing data". The "Information

about Lege6100" dialogue box is displayed.
 Edit the description and click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The drawing
remains open. The edited description is displayed in Project menu for the "_700-
DDS-Legenden" project.
Index
DDS-CAD
595
Introduction

r!
22.6.1.2 Export legend to CFI
The edited legend must now be exported as a CFI file to the USER directory:
 Select "File”  "Export"  "Export CFI”. The "Export file" dialogue box is dis-
Basic functions
played.
 The CFI file must be exported to the USER directory so that it can be used in all
projects. Therefore, enter the path to the USER directory (1). The file name can
remain the same, however, you can use any file name you like.
 Click Save . The CFI file of the new legend is exported to the USER directory.
You can close the drawing and use the legend in your projects.
22.6.1.3 Apply legend
You use a CFI file as a symbol by entering the

file name as an external symbol for an item.

Open the item for editing (see 21.2.3.3,
page 553). Enter the full filename of the CFI file
in Input "External symbol".
Index
596
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.7 Creating an automatic title field

22.7.1 Creating a title field from a template
DDS-CAD contains
In the "700-DDS-Titelfelder-Logo" project default title fields,
which automatically
Open, edit and Chapter 23.7.2.1
Page 598 display and maintain
save a template
the project, drawing
and revision data.
Designing a title field Chapter 23.7.2.2
Wildcard commands in
Page 599 the title field copy the
text blocks from the
dialogues and display
Tidying up and generating a title them in the drawing.
Chapter 23.7.2.3
field
Page 600
You can use a tem-
Applying a title field plate as the basis for
Chapter 23.6.1.3
your own title fields.
Creating and editing
Page 596
Basic functions
new items

Index
DDS-CAD
597
Introduction

r!
22.7.1.1 Open, edit and save a template
(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
Basic functions
 Open the "_700-DDS-Titelfelder-Logo" project (1) and the "Dds_1000 Kopiervor-

lage Titelfeld" drawing (2). The drawing shows a pattern (3), which corresponds
to the size of the "Standard 1 size" existing title field. To the right (4) there are all
the wildcards for the project, drawing and revision dates, as well as the logo-
gram.
 Duplicate the drawing in order to leave the template intact for future title fields.
Select "File” menu  "Save As” function. The "Save As” dialogue box is dis-
played.
 Create a new title field drawing with the name DDS_1001.BIM and click Save .
You have created a new template that you can now edit.
Index
598
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
22.7.1.2 Designing a title field

Once you have opened the new title field drawing, you can start designing your title field.
The individual actions are:
• Design the layout
• Correct the logo position
• Correcting the text block position
Design the layout

To design the layout, you can use all the
geometric functions of the program. We
recommend the "Dynamisches
Rechteck" (Dynamic rectangle) function.
Please consider the pattern shown sim-
Rectangle
ply as a template to maintain the size
ratio. Design the layout to suit your re-
quirements.
Basic functions
Correct the logo position
The logo is a built-in symbol, and can be
moved with the standard functions

Index
DDS-CAD
599
Introduction

r!
Correcting the text block position
Correct the text

blocks position
with the "Move
Move region Area” function
(see 19.4,
page 526)
Basic functions
22.7.1.3 Tidying up and generating a title field
If the title field is complete, it needs to be tidied up and saved in the USER directory
using a specified naming convention:
Generate title field

 Delete all remaining (surplus) entries and text, but not the "pattern for size ratio"
(this is removed automatically in the next step).
 Select the "Generate title field" function. A message indicates that the title field has
been saved under a specific name in the USER directory.
 Click OK . The "Apply changes?" prompt is displayed.
Index
600
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
 Click Yes . This opens the "Export model" dialogue box:

(1) (2)
 Select the USER directory (1) and enter the file name (2).
TF1901.BIM (for your first title field)
TF1902.BIM (for your second title field)
TF19nn.BIM (consecutive numbering for additional title fields)
Basic functions
 Click Save . The title field can be used in the project.
22.7.2 The title field in the product database

Use the title field by creating an item and enter-
ing the ID of a symbol.

Index
DDS-CAD
601
Introduction
Erro Options, settings and auxiliary functions

r!
23 Custom circuit layouts
Basically, we have to distinguish between the content design of a custom circuit lay-
out (create/edit) and its application in the current distribution:
Design circuit layout
Start editing mode

Chapter 24.2
Page 607
Chapter 24.5 Configure

Page 610 circuit
Position
Chapter 24.6 equipment
Page 611
Draw
wiring Chapter 24.7
Page 615
Basic functions
Close editing
mode
Apply circuit layout

to
Chapter 24.1
Page 603
one new
circuit
one existing circuit Chapter 24.3

Page 608
several existing
circuits Chapter 24.8
Page 616
Both complexes are discussed in the chapters 23.2 to 23.6. The descriptions use
terms that are first explained in 23.1.
Index
602
DDS-CAD
Introduction
Options, settings and auxiliary functions Erro
r!
23.1 Relationships and terms

23.1.1 Access to customised circuit layouts
When constructing the distribution board database, select a circuit layout in the "New
Circuit” dialogue box. Confirming with Add or Insert starts a sequence of
prompts where you choose the necessary equipment from the product database.
DDS-CAD follows an algorithm that will result from the chosen circuit layout. This in-
cludes the type and position of the equipment and the circuitry for the distribution
board documentation.
The basic DDS-

(4) CAD configuration
(3) includes variety of
layouts. They
should be referred
(1)
to as system lay-
outs.
(2) All layouts are di-
Basic functions
vided into groups.
By choosing a lay-
out group (1), you
can access the lay-
outs available in it
(2). Each layout has
an alphanumeric
code (3), which can
also be used to ac-
cess the layout.

From a system lay-
out, you can derive
your own, customised layouts. You can edit the circuit, save the layout with a new
name and then use it. By checking "Custom layouts" you can control access to
customised or system layouts.
The graphic shows that there is a correlation between the codes of the selected lay-
out of the basic equipment (above) and the listed custom layouts (4). This indicates
that a custom layout is always derived from a template.
The following sections explain some important terms that are used later on.
Index
DDS-CAD
603
Introduction

r!
23.1.2 System layout
System layouts are installed together with DDS-CAD on your computer. They are
available when constructing the distributions if "Custom layouts" is not checked in
the "New Circuit” dialogue. System layout cannot be changed, but they form the ba-
sis for creating custom layouts.
23.1.3 Custom layout

A custom layout is always a derivation from a different layout. When constructing the
distribution system you get access to it by checking "Custom layouts” in the "New
Circuit” dialogue.
System layouts Custom layouts The first custom lay-

out must necessarily
Variants of be created from a
ZZF1A ZZF1A- ZZF1A
AA system layout. After
ZZF1A- that, it is suitable
AB itself to be used as a
ZZF1A- template for other
Basic functions
AC layouts. It uses the

ZZF1A- code of the original
AD system layout, and
Variants of passes it on to other
ZZF3A ZZF3A- custom layouts.
ZZF3A
AA
ZZF3A-
AB In this way, several
variations are cre-
ated from one sys-
tem layout. They are given the consecutive suffix "AA"; "AB"; "AC" etc.
23.1.4 Variant
Variant is the general term for all custom layouts that have been created from the
same system layout. The graphic (see above) shows the relationships using exam-
ples.
The first variant "AA" has been derived from the system layout ZZF1A (light with
MCB, single pole). The following variants "AB" and "AC" are derived from "AA". Fi-
nally, "AD" was re-created on the basis of the system layout. All four custom layouts,
however, are variants of the system layout ZZF1A.
Index
604
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
23.1.5 Types (of a variant)

Each new variant of a circuit layout requires several types for flexible use in different
situations. This need arises from the fact that a circuit
a) can be illustrated in single-pole and multi-pole representation.
b) the electrical connection is configured using the following parameters:
- assignment to a level
- number of phase conductors used
- use of neutral and earth
The relationships are described by the following example:
Circuit F3 uses a custom layout. For this reason, the system layout ZZF1A was taken
as the starting point and expanded. The contactor contact (K1) was inserted and
bridged by switch (S1).
On the first sheet (left) you will see that circuit F3 draws its voltage directly from
level 1. By switching in the circuit table, this circuit should now tap from level 2.
Basic functions
By switching from level 1 to level 2, DDS-CAD uses a different type of the new vari-
ant. Because this type does not yet exist, first the system layout is again used as a
template. In the picture on the right, you can see that the same components are con-
tained in the circuit, but the new circuit does not yet exist for this type. The layout
must therefore be re-created.
Mathematically, this relationship results in a large number of types for each variant.
Effectively, a new type only has to be developed when needed. DDS-CAD
automatically indicates this. This is the case:
Index
DDS-CAD
605
Introduction

r!
a) when creating a new circuit in the circuit table
b) if there is a subsequent change to a configuration in the circuit table

c) when using a different representation (single pole/multi-pole)
d) if there is subsequent assignment of a layout variant to an existing circuit.
Cases a), b) and c)

The message line displays an error message after the operation is completed and the
circuits have been drawn:
In this situation, act as follows:
 Go to the reported circuit and open it for editing (see 23.2, page 607). The layout
manager is displayed.
Basic functions
 Click Edit . You are taken to editing mode.

 Correct and save the circuit. All circuits that have caused this error message use
the corrected type of this layout variant. The error message disappears after a
screen refresh for these circuits.
Case d)
This case is solved directly via the layout manager. You can only use a variant if the
required type already exists. The layout manager prompts you to create the type
through Edit .
Index
606
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
23.2 Start editing mode

Access to editing is via the circuit drawn on the sheet:
 Click on an element of the circuit. The

selected circuit (1) is displayed as a se-
lected object. It is highlighted. All other
circuits (2) are also selected. They
appear pale.
(1
(2  Select the "Edit Macro" function.
Basic functions
If the selected circuit has been created with a system layout, for which there are no
additional variants, you go straight to the editing mode. The previous changes in the
circuit table (e.g. changes to the number of poles, additional components) are trans-
ferred to the editing mode and re-used. You can start building the circuit. Please refer
to chapter 23.4, page 608.
If variants for the layout of the selected

circuit already exist, the layout manager
is displayed first. Here you can make the

decision whether to create a new variant,
edit an existing one or apply to the se-
lected circuit (see 23.3, page 608).
Index
DDS-CAD
607
Introduction

r!
23.3 The layout manager

The layout manager is automatically

(2) displayed when at least one custom
variant exists for the layout of the
selected circuit. The available vari-
ants are listed in table (1). In
(1) Display "Group" and Display "Use Ap-
plication Default Tools” (2) you will

see the name of the system layout
and the group under which the
"New Circuit” dialogue can be
found.
New
The function creates a new custom layout for the current project. The starting point is
the layout that the selected circuit uses. The previous changes in the circuit table
(e.g. changes to the number of poles, additional components) are transferred to the
Basic functions
editing mode and re-used. After the operation you can access the new variant.
Edit
The function starts the editing mode for the selected custom layout. You can edit both
the circuit and the description. This is queried again when you leave the editing mode
(see 23.7, page 615).
Warning!
The drawing-related editing of a circuit is applied to all circuits of the project that
use the modified circuit layout.
Map
The function assigns the variant selected in the list to the circuit and closes the dia-
logue. The circuit is then shown with the selected switching. As a prerequisite, the
required type (see 23.1.5, page 605) is available.
Note:
If you want to reassign an existing circuit to its original system layout, open the
"Circuits” cell in the circuit table by double clicking. Uncheck "Custom layout"
(1
23.4 The user interface in editing mode

After opening the editing for a variant, the use interface changes. Menus, the toolbar
and the functions in the toolbox are adapted to the changed work environment.
Index
608
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!

B
Basic functions
Y X

(1) (2)
The drawing surface (A) allows work on the circuit (1) that you have opened. It is dis-
played in its original colours and contains all the elements that have been confirmed
up to this point in the circuit table. The coordinate system is located at the intersec-
tion between the first branching conductor and the phase conductor L1. The place-
holder "Next layout" (2) controls the distance to the next circuit. The other circuits re-
main visible in order to visualise the space. For better distinction, they are displayed
lighter.
In DDS Explorer (B) you will see that a library is open (DC-Edit.LIB) in which you are
now working. The names (in this case DU3ZZ-ZZF1A-02AB) are automatically ad-
ministered by DDS-CAD.
At the bottom of the screen you have access to the distribution (C). The opened cir-
cuit is highlighted in the table and can be reconfigured. You can replace or delete
existing equipment and add new equipment. In this way you define the item selection
algorithm, if you call the circuit layout via the "New Circuit” dialogue. The possibilities
and limitations are described in the following chapter 23.5.
Index
DDS-CAD
609
Introduction

r!
The tool box (D) has specific functions available that are suitable for drawing-related
editing and addition to the circuitry (see 23.6, page 611).
23.5 Configuring a circuit

By starting the editing mode, the current distribution board table is visible at the bot-
tom of the screen. The row of the selected circuit is selected in the table and you can
re-configure the equipment in the "Sicherung" (Fuse), "Baut. 1" (Comp. 1), "Baut. 2"
(Comp. 2) and "Cables” cells:
Add new components
Change or delete Change cable type and number

Basic functions
All changes are immediately visible on the screen. You can then correct the positions
of the components.
Index
610
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
23.6 Drawing in editing mode

23.6.1 Symbols for the equipment
You can move the equipment of the circuit just like any other
symbol.
A symbol (e.g. switch, contact) only opens existing lines that are already included in
the system layout. If you need to add new lines to the circuit, you should first place
the components and then integrate them with the circuit through new lines.
23.6.2 Wiring lines and wiring points

The existing wiring lines from the potential to the terminal have been converted into
polylines. They can be edited directly by means of the polyline. For other circuits, it
may be that the old lines must be deleted and redrawn.
Basic functions
Warning!
(1) The circuit's access to the potential, i.e. the connection to
a busbar must not be deleted. The positions of the
connections cannot be changed.

Index
DDS-CAD
611
Introduction

r!
Editing existing wiring lines
You can edit the lines later by adding nodes. First, select the line. The following pro-
cedure is similar to editing ordinary polylines (see 18.1.8, page 472)
Basic functions
Index
612
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Start new wiring line

You can draw new wiring lines to supplement the circuit.
 Select the "dynamic line" function from the toolbox. The cursor
turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following
prompt: "Specify first point".
 Click on the desired start position. The cursor moves a dy-
namic line. You can draw the line. Each click fixes a vertex.
Start and end on the line

You can start and connect a wiring line to an existing wiring line. DDS-CAD automati-
cally inserts the necessary wiring points. The line is split at this position. You can edit
the segments on both sides of the wiring point separately.
Basic functions
Draw new wiring line (starting at corner)

Start and connection can also be performed directly at a break point. This break point
is converted into a wiring point.
Index
DDS-CAD
613
Introduction

r!
Move wiring point
You can select a wiring point and move it like a symbol. The connected wiring lines
are updated automatically.
Editing wiring points

The symbol of a connection point can be exchanged:
 Double click on the connection point. The "BldPolylineTee" dialogue box
appears.
 Click … . The product database is displayed and allows you to select an item.
Basic functions
 Select the desired branch.
23.6.3 Space requirement – start position of the next circuit

In order to determine the space required by
the new layout, move the "next circuit" place-
holder.
Index
614
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
23.7 Exiting the editing mode

If you have finished editing the circuit layout, you can exit the editing mode:
 In the toolbar, select the "Save and apply" function:
The "Apply changes" dialogue box is displayed.
Basic functions
This function controls the naming (1), storage (2) and use (3) of the circuit layout.
Apply
The editing mode for circuit layouts is ended and you are returned to the editing level
for the distribution system. Changes to an existing circuit layout are applied to all cir-
cuits that are already using this variant.
Note!
You can automatically transfer the variant to all the circuits with the same starting
position. To do this, use:

Update matching system layouts with this custom layout
Update matching custom layouts with this custom layout
Please refer to chapter 23.8, page 616.
Abort and
The editing mode for circuit layouts is ended and you are returned to the editing level
for the distribution system. The changes to the circuit layout are not saved. Use this
function for example, if you opened the wrong circuit for editing.
Cancel
The editing mode for the circuit layout is not ended. You can continue the work.
Index
DDS-CAD
615
Introduction

r!
23.8 Apply variants to several circuits

When you leave the editing mode, you can transfer a new circuit layout to circuits of
the same type. The "Apply changes" dialogue box is displayed.
(1)
If when saving with Apply neither of the two checkboxes (1) is checked, the variant
is only applied to the current circuit. However, by selecting a setting for the variant
you can:
Make all equal original system circuits in this board use this macro
The new variant is applied to all circuits that either
Basic functions
• use the same system layout as the edited circuit or

• use the same system layout that the edited custom variant is based on.
Transfer to circuits with the same custom layout

The new variant is applied to all circuits that use the same custom layout. This
setting is only available if you are editing a circuit that is already using a custom
layout.
Index
616
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
The following scenarios are conceivable for using these settings:

a) New variant for a circuit that uses a system layout.
The new variant can only be transferred to circuits with the same system
layout (see example 1).
b) New variant for a circuit that uses a custom layout.

The new variant can be transferred to circuits with the same system or
custom layout (see examples 2 and 3).
c) Edit existing variants of a custom layout.

The change is automatically applied to all circuits that use the same custom
layout. In addition, they can be applied to all circuits with the appropriate
system layout (see example 4).
Basic functions
The interaction of a scenario with the selected setting results in four possible or
meaningful combinations. They are explained in the examples:
Initial situation
The circuits F1 to F3 use the system layout ZZF1A. The circuits F4 to F6 use the
variant 1 (AA), of this layout.

Index
DDS-CAD
617
Introduction

r!
Example 1 – Scenario a)
Circuit F1 has been transferred to the editing

mode and the new variant 2 has been created.
When leaving the editing mode, the "Apply
changes" dialogue box is displayed.
You can represent all circuits that use the

same system layout at this time with the new
variant:
Basic functions
Index
618
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Example 2 – Scenario b)

Transfer to circuits with the same custom layout

changes” dialogue box is displayed.
You can represent all circuits that use the

same custom layout at this time with the new
variant:
Basic functions
Index
DDS-CAD
619
Introduction

r!
Example 3 – Scenario b)
Transfer to circuits with the appropriate system layout

changes” dialogue box is displayed.
You can represent all circuits with the new

variant 4 if they use the system layout on
which this variant is based:
Basic functions
Index
620
DDS-CAD
Introduction
r!
Example 4 – Scenario c)

Circuit F4 has been transferred to editing
mode. The existing variant 3 has been opened
and modified. When leaving the editing mode,
the "Apply changes” dialogue box is displayed.
The variant was renamed 3a and applied to
the appropriate system layouts.
Basic functions
By editing the existing variant 3 a modification of all circuits that use this variant to
date is automatically given. As a result of the additional transfer to the appropriate
system layouts, the circuitry of circuits F1 to F3 is displayed in the edited variant 3a.
Index
DDS-CAD
621

DDS CAD Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DDS CAD Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction

Strategies for handling projects

DDS-CAD is more than drawing,

simplifies troubleshooting. The individual document is always a derivation from the

Data Design System

Notes on the structure of this manual

Strategies for handling projects

Part IV describes ways to configure, expand and adjust the system.

The descriptions use symbols to denote the input controls:

Controls in dialogue boxes

Procedures are described as instructions with a description of the effect, e.g.:

 Click OK . The function is stopped.

1 THE MODEL – THE CORE OF THE DDS PHILOSOPHY 15

PART II – STRATEGIES FOR HANDLING PROJECTS 31

3 IMPORTING EXTERNAL DATA 35

3.1 Notes on file formats 36

3.3.2 Checking and correcting the scale ratio 41

Strategies for handling projects

6 HEAT LOAD CALCULATION 101

6.3.2 Notes on the ventilation heat loss ΦV 107

6.3.3 Notes on unheated rooms – the factor bu 111

6.4.1 Terms and connections 115

6.4.2 The heat transfer coefficient (U-value) 118

7 HEATING AND SANITARY FACILITIES 132

7.1 Heating and sanitation objects 132

7.1.2 Load objects for simulating sub-networks/consumers 133

8 PIPES AND VENTILATION DUCTS 168

8.3 Drawing a pipeline manually 179

8.8 Editing pipes and ventilation ducts 221

Strategies for handling projects

9 NETWORK CALCULATIONS 228

10 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHBOARDS 251

10.4.5 Retrieving the energy balance from sub distributors 275

10.4.6 The relationship of energy balance (graphically) 276

11 INSTALLATION SYSTEMS 282

11.2.2 Drawing the ladder route 296

11.3 Auxiliary functions for constructing a network 301

12 GENERAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 319

12.2.1 Fluorescent and incandescent lamps 321

12.4.2 Special features of fire alarm systems 343

13 DISTRIBUTION BOARD DOCUMENTATION 359

13.4.1 Draw components 364

Strategies for handling projects

14 EMERGENCY AND EVACUATION ROUTES 368

15 ANALYSING – PRINTING – EXPORTING 369

16.2.2 Defining distances between the grid points 394

16.3.3 Automatic rotation while holding the Ctrl key 400

16.3.4 Snap points 400

17 OBJECTS – BUILDING BLOCKS OF THE MODEL 408

17.1 General properties 408

18 DRAWING AND LABELLING 444

18.1 Polylines and asymmetric polygons 445

18.2.1 Circle 476

18.4.3 Free text 510

Strategies for handling projects

19 GENERAL EDITING FUNCTIONS 518

20 WORKING IN THE DWG/DXF EDITOR 529

20.3.6 Hide original 541

20.3.7 Notes on the parts list 543

PART IV – ADJUSTMENTS 545

21 WORKING WITH THE PRODUCT DATABASE 546

21.2.2 Item search 550

21.2.4 Working with the manufacturer database (electrical) 556

22 SYMBOL CREATION 558